Trying to understand

Arabic Language…
( By Dr. Mohammed Aijaz Mohiuddin
+91 7036107946)
 1

Contents
Preface and about the Author ............................................................................................ 15
Note to the Reader...................................................................................................................... 17
Book Features.................................................................................................................................. 19
Tanveen (Seq # 1)........................................................................................................................ 20
No word for 'a' and 'an' (Seq # 2)................................................................................ 21
Indefinite Noun and Definite Noun (Seq # 3)..................................................... 21
‫ َا ْل‬will not be preceded with person name nouns (Seq # 4)................... 23
Sun letters and Moon letters (Seq # 5)....................................................................... 23
‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and ‫( َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬Seq # 6) ........................................................................ 25
Default case of any noun is ‫( َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬Seq # 7) ......................................................... 26
Feminine gender nouns (Seq # 8) .................................................................................. 27
Parts of the body with pairs are feminine (Seq # 9) ........................................ 28
Parts of speech in Arabic language (Seq # 10) ..................................................... 29
Triptotes and Diptotes (Seq # 11) .................................................................................. 30
Ending of a Diptote noun is Fatah in case of ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and ‫( َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬Seq # 12) 32

First two categories of Diptotes (Seq # 13) ............................................................. 33

 2

6 Detached personal pronouns (Seq # 14) .............................................................. 35

Prepositions, heavily used topic in Quran (Seq # 15) .................................... 37
Behavior of Diptote with Preposition (Seq # 16) ............................................... 39
Prepositions when with Pronouns (Seq # 17)....................................................... 40
Vocative Harmony, Jaar-Majroor case of “for” preposition with attached pronoun
(Seq # 18) ........................................................................................................................................... 42
Jaar-Majroor with other prepositions (Seq # 19) ................................................ 43
‫ــﻄـﻊ‬ َ ‫ـﻞ َو ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْـ َﻘ‬
ِ ‫( ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة َاﻟﻮ َﺻ‬Seq # 20) ........................................................................... 46
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬ ٌ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 21) ............................................................................................ 47
ِٕ
The difference between "Book of a student" and "Book of the student" (Seq # 22)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 50

Examples of ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬

ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 23) ............................................................ 51
ِٕ
Muzaaf-Muzaaf ilaihi with pronouns (Seq # 24)................................................ 52
Understanding Ya-Mutakallim (Seq # 25) ............................................................... 54
Explaining Preposition + noun/pronoun = Jaar-Majroor, Noun + noun/pronoun
= ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬ ٌ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 26) ....................................................................................... 55
ِٕ
Preposition before ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 27) ............................................. 56
ِٕ
Adverbs (Seq # 28)...................................................................................................................... 57
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫( َﻇ ْــﺮ ٌف ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 29)................................................................................................ 58
ِٕ
 3

Demonstrative Pronouns (Seq # 30) ............................................................................ 60

Relative Pronouns (Seq # 31) ............................................................................................. 61
Particle of conjunction (‫( ) َﺣ ْــﺮ ُف َﻋ ْــﻄ ٍـﻒ‬Seq # 32) .............................................. 62
Effect of conjunction ‫ َو‬on subsequent words (nouns) (Seq # 33) ...... 62
Chain of ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬Seq # 34)..................................................................... 64
ِٕ
Concept of Mabni (Seq # 35)............................................................................................. 65
Learning 14 Personal Pronouns (Seq # 36) ............................................................ 66
Jaar-Majroor with 14 pronouns (Seq # 37) ............................................................. 70
Muzaaf Muzaaf ilaihi with 14 pronouns (Seq # 38) ........................................ 72
Specialty of five attached pronouns of ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫُـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫( ﻫ‬Vocative
harmony) (Seq # 39) ................................................................................................................. 73
No corresponding word for the English word ‘it’ (Seq # 40)................... 74
Introduction to Arabic plurals (Seq # 41) ................................................................ 74
Sound masculine plurals (Seq # 42).............................................................................. 75
Sound feminine plurals (Seq # 43) ................................................................................ 76
Broken Plurals (Seq # 44) ..................................................................................................... 77
All the broken plurals are treated as feminine singular (Seq # 45) ..... 79
Duals (Seq # 46) ........................................................................................................................... 80
Adjectives (Seq # 47) ................................................................................................................. 81
 4

No Arabic word for helping verbs of English like ‘am’, ‘is’, ‘are’ (Seq # 48)83
Introduction to Nominal sentence (Seq # 49) ...................................................... 83
Subject (‫ ) َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬is always ‫( َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬Seq # 50)......................................................... 85
Difference between a Sentence (‫ ) ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬and a phrase (‫( ِ)ﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ‬Seq # 51) 86

5 types of Predicate (‫( ) َﺧ َﺒ ٌـﺮ‬Seq # 52) ........................................................................... 87

One word predicate (Seq # 53) ......................................................................................... 87
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬comes in the position of subject or predicate (Seq # 54) 90
ِٕ
Prepositional phrase as a predicate (‫( )ﺧَﺒــَ ٌﺮ‬second type) (Seq # 55) .. 92
Adverbial phrase as a predicate (‫( )ﺧَﺒـ َـ ٌــﺮ‬third type) (Seq # 56) ............. 94
Predicate can come before in nominal sentence (Seq # 57) ...................... 95
Nominal sentence as Predicate (fourth type) (Seq # 58) ............................. 97
Verbal sentence as Predicate (fifth type) (Seq # 59) ........................................ 99
Difference between "This book" and "This is a book" (Seq # 60) ..... 100
Simple grammatical analysis of arabic statements (Seq # 60A)............ 101
Vocative particle ‫( ﻳـَﺎ‬Seq # 61) ......................................................................................... 104
ْ ‫ ﻫ‬and ‫( ) ٔا‬Seq # 62) ......................................................... 107
Interrogative particle (‫َـﻞ‬
Adding emphasis to the sentence by ‫( ل‬Seq # 63) .......................................... 108
‫ ا َّن‬, the particle of emphasis and nasbin (Seq # 64)...................................... 109
ِٕ
 5

‫ ا َّن‬when joins with 14 pronouns (Seq # 65) ...................................................... 110

ِٕ
Ladder slider game of ‫ ا َّن‬and ‫( ل‬Seq # 66) ....................................................... 112
ِٕ
Triple emphasis (Seq # 67)................................................................................................. 113
Sisters of ‫( ا َّن‬Seq # 68) ........................................................................................................... 114
ِٕ
Grammatical analysis (GA) of few Quranic verses (Seq # 68A).......... 115
Usage of ‫ َٔا ْم‬and ‫( َٔا ْو‬Seq # 69) ........................................................................................... 117
Few more categories of Diptotes (Seq # 70)......................................................... 118
Which (‫( ) َٔا ُّي‬Seq # 71) ............................................................................................................ 119
Comparative and superlative degrees (Seq # 72).............................................. 120
Interrogative particle ‫( َﻣـﺎ‬Seq # 73) .............................................................................. 121
Answering the question with ‫ ﺑ َ َـﲆ‬and ‫( ﻧ َـ َﻌ ْـﻢ‬Seq # 74) ................................. 122
Duals of demonstrative pronouns ‫ﻫٰـﺬا‬, ‫ﻫٰـ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬, ‫ ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬and ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫( ﺗِـﻠ‬Seq # 75)123
Duals of relative pronouns ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬and ‫( اﻟ َّ ِـﱵ‬Seq # 76) ..................................... 124
Introduction to verbal sentence (Seq # 77) ........................................................... 125
Introduction to three radicals (or letters) (Seq # 78) .................................... 126
Transitive verbs and Intransitive verbs (Seq # 79) .......................................... 127
Characteristics of the root of the verb (Seq # 80)............................................ 128
Important Baabs (Chapters) of verb (Seq # 81) ................................................ 129
 6

Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬session # 1 (Seq # 82) ............................................. 130

Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬session # 2 (Seq # 83) ............................................. 132
Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬session # 3 (Seq # 84) ............................................. 133
Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬session # 4 (Seq # 85) ............................................. 135
Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬session # 5 (Seq # 86) ............................................. 136
Putting together all the things learnt from the last 5 topics (Seq # 87) 137

Practice session for the past tense of the verb (Seq # 88) ......................... 140
Mutaharrik pronouns and Saakin pronouns for the past tense (Seq # 89) 142

Understanding Baab ‫ ﻓَﺘَ َﺢ‬present tense (‫( ) ُﻣﻀَ ـﺎ ِر ٌع‬Seq # 90)........................ 143
Practice session for the present tense of the verb (Seq # 91) ................. 147
Mutaharrik pronouns and Saakin pronouns for the present tense (Seq # 92)
.................................................................................................................................................................. 152

Revisiting the topic “Verbal sentence as predicate (fifth type) for nominal
sentence” (Seq # 93) ................................................................................................................ 153
Unique Characteristics of second letter (‫( )ع َﻛـﻠـِ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬Seq # 94)................. 154
Few sample verbs from Baab Fataha (‫( )ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬a-a group) (Seq # 95).. 158
Few sample verbs from Baab Nasara (‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
َ َ ‫( )ﻧ‬a-u group) (Seq # 96)160
Few sample verbs from Baab Zaraba (‫( )ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬a-i group) (Seq # 97)163
Few sample verbs from Baab Sami`a (‫( َ)ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬i-a group) (Seq # 98) . 165
 7

Particle of futurity, future tense (Seq # 99) .......................................................... 167

Importance of Vowel signs, Understanding ‫( ذﻫـﺒـﺖ‬Seq # 100) ......... 168
Joining pronouns to the verbs (Seq # 101) ........................................................... 169
Protection noon ‫( ن‬Seq # 102) ........................................................................................ 170
Protection alif ‫( ا‬Seq # 103) ............................................................................................... 170
Mafoulin bihi along with the doer ‫( ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬Seq # 104) .......................................... 171
Verbal sentence cannot have two doers (Seq # 105) ..................................... 172
Moods of the verb (Seq # 106) ........................................................................................ 173
Imperative tense (‫( ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬Seq # 107) ................................................................... 175
Prohibitive ‫( ﻻ‬Seq # 108) ..................................................................................................... 177
Negative particle for past, present and future (Seq # 109) ....................... 178
Negative particles ( ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻢ‬and ‫( ) ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬Seq # 110)....................................................... 180
The particle ‫ َٔا ْن‬and ‫ـﻞ( ل‬ِ ‫( )ﻻ ُم اﻟْﺘَـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬Seq # 111) ................................................ 181
Masdar ‫( َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬Seq # 112).................................................................................................. 182
Masdar muawwal (‫( ) َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬Seq # 113) .................................................... 183
Special verb ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬and ‫( ) َﻣـﺎ اﻟْــ ِﺤــ َﺠـﺎ ِزﻳَّـ ُﺔ( َﻣـﺎ‬Seq # 114) ..................................... 184
َ ‫( ﻋ‬Seq # 114A) .................................................... 186
Hope or fear by the verb ‫َـﺴــﻰ‬
Understanding relative pronouns again (Seq # 114B) ................................. 187
 8

Grammatical analysis (GA) of few Quran verses (Seq # 114C)........... 188

Introduction to Weak verbs (Seq # 115) ................................................................. 189
Tips for understanding weak verbs (Seq # 116)................................................ 190
‫ اﻟْـ ِﻤـﺜ َـﺎ ُل‬verbs (Seq # 117) ....................................................................................................... 191
‫ ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬verbs (a-u group) (Seq # 118) ..................................................................... 194
‫ ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬verbs (a-i group) (Seq # 119)......................................................................... 199
‫ ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬verbs (i-a group) (Seq # 120) ....................................................................... 202
ُ ‫ اﻟﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs (past tense) (Seq # 121) ...................................................................... 205
‫ــﺺ‬
ُ ‫ اﻟﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs (present tense) (Seq # 122) .............................................................. 209
‫ــﺺ‬
ُ ‫ اﻟﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs (Imperative tense) (Seq # 123) ....................................................... 213
‫ــﺺ‬
AlMuzaafu (‫ )اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀَ ـ َّﻌ ُـﻒ‬verbs (Seq # 124) .............................................................. 214
Classification of verbs (Seq # 125) ............................................................................... 217
Special verb ‫( َر َٔاى‬Seq # 126)............................................................................................... 219
Special verb ‫( َٔاﺗَــﻰ‬Seq # 127) .............................................................................................. 221
Laam of command (or request) for third and first person (Seq # 128)223
ِ ‫( ) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬Seq # 129)........................................................................................ 224
Doer (‫ـﻞ‬
Noun for the object (on which the action is done) (Seq # 130) .......... 226
Noun of place and time (Seq # 131) .......................................................................... 226
 9

Noun for instrument (Seq # 132) ................................................................................. 228

Revisiting the Nominal sentence structure (Seq # 133).............................. 229
Interrogative Nouns (Seq # 134) ................................................................................... 230
Mubtada can be indefinite (Seq # 135) .................................................................... 231
Order of Mubtada and Khabar (Seq # 136) ......................................................... 231
Revisiting the Verbal sentence structure (Seq # 137) ................................... 232
Adverbs In detail (Seq # 138)........................................................................................... 232
Words acting like an Adverb (Seq # 139) .............................................................. 234
Words ‫ ﻗَـ ْﺒـ ُﻞ‬and ُ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬Seq # 140) ................................................................................... 235
Usage of verb ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬in Nominal sentence (Seq # 141) .................................... 236
َ ‫( ) َﻻ ﻳَـ َـﺰا ُل( َﻛ‬Seq # 142) .................................................................................. 237
Sister of ‫ـﺎن‬
As far as, ‫( َٔا َّﻣـﺎ‬Seq # 143) ...................................................................................................... 237
Taking oath ‘by’ (‫( َ)و‬Seq # 144) .................................................................................... 238
ُ ‫( )اﻟْــ َﺤ‬Seq # 145) ........................................................................... 239
Circumstances (‫ـﺎل‬
Five Nouns (‫( ْ)اﻻ ْﺳـ َﻤـﺎ ُء اﻟْــﺨَـ ْﻤ َـﺴـ ُﺔ‬Seq # 146) ........................................................... 240
ٌ ْ‫( ِاﺑ‬Seq # 147) ...................................................................................................... 241
Plural of ‫ــﻦ‬
Duals and sound masculine plurals when become Muzaaf (Seq # 148) 242

Word for Both (‫( ) ِﻛـﻼ‬Seq # 149)................................................................................... 243

 10

Word for another (Seq # 150)........................................................................................ 244

Hope or fear (‫( )ﻟَـ َﻌـ َّﻞ‬Seq # 151) ..................................................................................... 244
Extra min (‫اﻟــﺰاﺋِـﺪَ ُة‬َّ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫( ) ِﻣ‬Seq # 152) ............................................................................ 245
Taukeed ( ُ‫( )اﻟـﺘَّ ْــﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـﺪ‬Seq # 153) ....................................................................................... 246
Manqoos Noun (‫( )اﻟْـ َﻤـﻨْـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُص‬Seq # 154) ................................................................. 247
Understanding ‫ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬for Naaqis verbs (Seq # 155) ........................................ 248
Jazam for Demand (Seq # 156)....................................................................................... 248
Introduction to conditional sentences (Seq # 157) ......................................... 249
Particle of Unfulfilled condition (‫( )ﻟَــ ْﻮ‬Seq # 158) ........................................... 250
Adverb ‫ ا َذا‬with conditional meaning (Seq # 159) ............................................ 251
ِٕ
The word ‫ ا ْن‬and its sisters (Seq # 160) .................................................................... 251
ِٕ
Circumstances when Jawab (answer to condition) takes ‫( ف‬Seq # 161) 253

When (‫( )ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬Seq # 162) ...................................................................................................... 254

A word about ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ ُٔا ْو ٰﻟـ ِﺌ‬, ‫ـﻚ‬
َ ْ‫ ِﺗـﻠ‬and ‫( ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬Seq # 163) ............................................... 255
ْ ‫( ﻟَـ ِﻜ‬Seq # 164) ...................................................................................... 255
A word about ‫ــﻦ‬
A word about ‫( اﻧ َّـ َﻤـﺎ‬Seq # 165) ........................................................................................ 255
ِٕ
Even if (‫( َ)و ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬Seq # 166) ................................................................................................... 256
Masdar muawwal (II) (Seq # 167)................................................................................ 256
 11

“But for/Because of” (‫( )ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻻ‬Seq # 168) .................................................................. 257

Negative Laam for entire genus (‫( )ﻻ‬Seq # 169)............................................... 258
ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬Seq # 170)............................................................ 259
Intensive form for ‫ـﻞ‬
Usage of preposition ‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬with the verb ‫( َدﺧَـ َﻞ‬Seq # 171) .......................... 260
Meaning of surprise by ‫( ِا َذا‬Seq # 172) ..................................................................... 261
َّ ‫( َﻇ‬Seq # 173) .................................................................................... 261
Two objects for ‫ــﻦ‬
A word about the verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬Seq # 174) ............................................................... 261
ْ ‫( ِﻣ‬Seq # 175) ....................................................................................................... 262
Partitive ‫ــﻦ‬
Revisiting the badal concept (differentiating pronoun) (Seq # 176) 262
Attached and Separate/detached pronouns (Seq # 177) ............................. 263
Usage of separate pronouns (‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case) (Seq # 178) .......................... 265
Introduction to Mazeed ( ُ‫ )اﻟْـ َﻤــ ِﺰﻳْـﺪ‬verbs (Seq # 179) ...................................... 266
Some general rules for understanding mazeed verbs (Seq # 180) ...... 267
ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬
Form-II (‫ـﻞ‬ ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 181) ................................................................................ 267
Extensive and Intensive action property of Form-II (Seq # 182) ........ 272
Form-III ( ٍ‫ـﺎب ِﻓـ َﻌـﺎل‬
ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 183) ................................................................................... 273
Form-IV ( ٍ‫ـﺎب اﻓْـ َﻌـﺎل‬
ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 184) .................................................................................. 276
ِٕ
Making intransitive verb into transitive verb (Seq # 185) ........................ 281
 12

Special verb ‫( َٔا َري‬Seq # 186)............................................................................................... 282

Some more sisters of ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫( َﻛ‬Seq # 187)........................................................................ 283
ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ َﻔـ ُّﻌ‬
Form-V (‫ـﻞ‬ ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 188).................................................................................... 284
ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ َﻔـﺎ ُﻋ‬
Form-VI (‫ـﻞ‬ ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 189) ............................................................................... 286
Form-VII (Seq # 190).............................................................................................................. 288
Form-VIII ( ٍ‫ـﺎب ِا ْﻓـ ِﺘـ َﻌـﺎل‬
ُ َ ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 191) ........................................................................... 290
Changes in Form-VIII (Seq # 192) .............................................................................. 292
Form-IX (Seq # 193)................................................................................................................ 293
Form-X (Seq # 194).................................................................................................................. 294
Four letter verbs (Seq # 195) ............................................................................................ 296
Mazeed verbs for base four letter verbs (Seq # 196) ...................................... 297
Introduction to Passive voice (Seq # 197) .............................................................. 298
Passive voice for Saalim verbs (Seq # 198) .......................................................... 298
Passive voice for Mithaal verbs (Seq # 199) ......................................................... 300
Passive voice for Ajwaf and Naaqis verbs (Seq # 200) ............................... 300
‫( اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل اﻟْـ ُﻤ ْــﻄـﻠَ ُــﻖ‬Absolute object) (Seq # 201) .............................................. 301
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 1 (Seq # 202) ...................................... 304
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 2 (Seq # 203) ...................................... 304
 13

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 3 (Seq # 204) ...................................... 306

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 4 (Optional usage) (Seq # 205)306
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 5 (Compulsory usage) (Seq # 206) 307

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 6 (Near Compulsory usage) (Seq # 207)

.................................................................................................................................................................. 307

Learning more about Diptotes (Seq # 208)........................................................... 308

State or Circumstance (‫( )اﻟْــ َﺤـﺎ ُل‬Seq # 209)........................................................... 308
‫ اﻟـﺘَّـ ْﻤـ ِﻴـ ْﻴ ُــﺰ‬noun (Seq # 210)................................................................................................. 309
‫( اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل ﻟَـ ُﻪ‬or) ‫( اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل ِ َٔﻻ ْﺟـ ِﻠـ ِﻪ‬Seq # 211) ....................................................... 310
Introduction to exceptions (Seq # 212) .................................................................... 311
Elements of exceptions (Seq # 213)............................................................................. 311
Types of exceptions (Seq # 214) .................................................................................... 312
Grammatical Rules of exceptions (Seq # 215) .................................................... 312
Introduction to numbers (Seq # 216) ........................................................................ 313
Numbers 1 and 2 (Seq # 217) .......................................................................................... 314
Numbers 3 to 10 (Seq # 218) ........................................................................................... 315
Numbers 11 to 19 (Seq # 219) ........................................................................................ 315
Numbers 20, 30, 40 …. 90 (Seq # 220)..................................................................... 316
Learning few middle numbers (Seq # 221) ........................................................... 316
 14

The ordinal numbers (Seq # 222) ................................................................................. 317

Few miscellenious grammatic rules (Seq # 223) ............................................... 317
References for future reading (Seq # 224) ............................................................. 332
Answers to the exercises....................................................................................................... 332
Appendix A ..................................................................................................................................... 334
Appendix B ..................................................................................................................................... 335
Appendix C..................................................................................................................................... 338
 15

Preface and about the

the Author
The author of this book is a student of knowledge like many others. He
belongs to Telangana state of INDIA. He did Bachelor’s degree from
Kakatiya University (India) and Master’s degree from King Fahd
University of Petroleum and Minerals (Saudi Arabia). Currently, he holds
a Phd degree in computational intelligence from University of Pretoria
(South Africa). He is currently the Vice Principal of Knowledge Park
International School (KPIS), Nizamabad (INDIA).
He worked as a Research Assistant, Software Programmer, Database
Administrator, IT Security Manager, Business Analyst, Academic Head,
Educational Material Compiler, Writer, Admission Counselor, Teacher
(Arabic and English) etc. which aggregates to 18 years of his experience.
Other than KPIS, he worked for King Fahd University of Petroleum and
Minerals (Saudi Arabia), Saudi Telecommunication Company (Saudi
Arabia) & Twin Ocean School of Knowledge (Nizamabad, INDIA).
He has very good international exposure and delivered several motivational
and counseling seminars. As a writer, he wrote another book namely
 16

"Basic English Grammar (For fluent English…)". All his achievements are
by the will of Allah.
He has attempted to put together his understanding for learning Arabic
language in this book, explaining the ocean with a drop of water. This
work happened only through the kind mercy of Allah. Let Allah accept
this work by his mercy. Aameen
Any mistake in this work is from the author himself (write to the below
email for corrections) and any good in this work is from Allah.
Author
Address
Dr. Mohammed Aijaz Mohiuddin,
S/o Mohammed Ghouse Mohiuddin,
Student of knowledge,
Computer Engineer (B.Tech, MS, PhD in Computational Intelligence),
Intelligence
House No :- 9-14-167/1,
Ahmed Pura calony,
Nizamabad-503001,
Telangana state,
 17

INDIA
Email:- [email protected], [email protected]
ph: +91 7036107946
Latest updated Date: 26th December, 2023

Note to the Reader

• Learning Arabic language is fascinating and joyful. So learn each topic
with happiness.
• This is not a tajweed book, but it is a book to understand Arabic
language itself.
• Reader should have some knowledge of Arabic terminology (Tanveen,
Dhammah, Fatah, Kasrah, etc).
• Reader of this book should know how to read Quran with or without
tajweed. But it is always recommended to learn tajweed.
• Respect your learning style. Give first preference to your learning style
unless there is no CONFUSION.
• Reader should give some time for thinking.
 18

• Reader of this book should have a good copy of Quran (hardcopy or

any software) with him, as exercises of this book refer to the Quran.
• Quran (15:18:1) represents the Para (Juzz) # 15, chapter # 18, and
verse # 1.
• All the exercises are given from the Chapter of the Cave (Surah Al-
Kahaf). Recite this chapter every Friday for further revision of what
has been learnt.
• Terminologies like Pesh for Dhammah, Zabar for Fatah, Zair for
Kasrah have been used interchangeably to cover both Western and
Eastern (Asian countries) readers.
• Reader of this book should try to write the Arabic text used in this
book for better learning/understanding, if possible. Oral practice is
must.
• Reader is recommended not to rush and not to jump the topics.
• Reader is recommended not to worry for vocabulary knowledge. It
will come by time and as we proceed.
• The answers to the exercises are present in the last section namely
“Answers to the exercises”.
 19

• Pray the following Dua

“Oh our Lord, increase our love towards each and every single letter of
Quran, each and every single vowel sign of Quran, each and every single
word of Quran, each and every single verse of Quran, all the chapters of
Quran and towards Arabic Language. Aameen”.

Book Features
• Each topic is arranged in an organized manner avoiding any
confusion.
• Average reading time of topics is 10 minutes. So a reader can even
spare 10 minutes time to complete a topic a day.
• Exercises are answerable as TRUE or FALSE.
• All the exercises are given from the Chapter of Cave (Surah AlKahaf).
Recite this chapter every Friday for further revision of what has been
learnt.
 20

Dua
“Oh our Lord, increase our love towards each and every single letter of
Quran, each and every single vowel sign of Quran, each and every single
word of Quran, each and every single verse of Quran, all the chapters of
Quran and towards Arabic Language. Aameen”.
Tanveen (Seq # 1)
Tanveen (‫ )ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬is a symbol that comes on the ending letters of Arabic
nouns. Tanveen can be double Dhammah (ٌ ‫)ــ‬, or double Fatah (ً‫ )ــ‬or
double Kasrah (ٍ‫)ــ‬. Consider a letter ‫ب‬. Tanveen on this letter can take the
form: ‫( ٌب‬bun), ‫( ﺑ ًـﺎ‬ban), ‫( ٍب‬bin). The extra alif (‫ )ا‬in the case of ban is
just a spelling rule. These forms are used depending on the situation,
which will be learnt in upcoming topics.
Examples: ‫ ِﻛـﺘَـ ٍﺎب‬,‫ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ ًـﺎ‬,‫ﺎب‬
ٌ ‫( ِﻛـﺘَـ‬A book)
‫ ﻗَـﻠَـ ٍﻢ‬,‫ ﻗَـﻠَـ ًﻤـﺎ‬,‫( ﻗَـﻠَـ ٌﻢ‬A pen)
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( ِﺟﺪَ ٌار‬a wall) ends with ‫ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( َﻛـﻨْ ٌــﺰ‬a treasure) ends with ‫ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( ِذ ْﻛ ًــﺮا‬A story or remembrance) ends
with ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬.
 21

No word for 'a' and 'an' (Seq # 2)

In Arabic language, there is no equal or corresponding word for English
words 'a' and 'an'. Then how can one say “any one book” or “a book” ? It
has to be said with ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬. This ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬has hidden 'a' and 'an'.
Examples: ‫ـﺎب‬ٌ َ‫( ِﻛـﺘ‬A book), ‫( ﻗَـﻠَـ ٌﻢ‬A pen), ‫( ﻳَـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬An orphan)
Exercises
ٌ ‫ ِﺟ‬means “a wall”.
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ـﺪار‬
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ َﻛـﻨْ ٌــﺰ‬means “a treasure”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬A word) has hidden ‘a’.
Indefinite Noun and Definite Noun (Seq # 3)
The noun in Arabic is termed as ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬. The nouns in Arabic can be
indefinite or definite. Indefinite noun ends with ‫ ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬and does not
represent a specific/particular thing. Definite noun starts with ‫ َا ْل‬and it
represents a specific/particular thing. The translation of ‫ َا ْل‬in English is
"The". When ‫ َا ْل‬is placed before the noun, the ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬will be dropped and
it will only have single vowel sign (single Dhammah, single Fatah or single
Kasrah). ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬and ‫ َا ْل‬cannot co-exist together. See the examples below.
Indefinite noun examples:
ٌ ‫( ِﻛـﺘَـ‬A book, It is any one book), ‫( ﻗَـﻠَـ ٌﻢ‬A pen, It is any one pen)
‫ﺎب‬
 22

Definite noun examples:

ُ َ‫ـﺎب = اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬+ ‫اﻟْــ‬
‫ ﻗَـﻠَـ ٌﻢ = اﻟْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬+ ‫اﻟْــ‬
ُ َ‫( اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬the book, representing to a particular book), ‫( اﻟْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬the pen,
‫ـﺎب‬
representing to a particular pen)
Note: Quran (X:Y:Z) represents the Para (Juzz) # X, chapter # Y, and verse
# Z.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:34). The
indefinite noun ‫( ﺛَـ َﻤــ ٌﺮ‬fruit) present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:35). The
indefinite noun ‫( َﻇـﺎﻟـِ ٌﻢ‬an unjust person) present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:46). The definite
ُ ‫( اﻟْـ َﻤ‬The money, The property) present in this verse.
noun ‫ـﺎل‬
4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:79). The definite
noun ‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ‬
َّ (The ship) is not present in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:82). The definite
noun ‫( اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ُار‬The wall) is present in this verse.
 23

‫ َا ْل‬will not be preceded with person name nouns (Seq # 4)

All the person name nouns are definite by default. Let us take a person
name, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬. We don’t need to put ‫ َا ْل‬in front of it. So it is wrong to say
ُ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪ‬. They are also termed as proper name nouns.
Examples:
‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬,‫ ُﻣـ َﺒـ ِ ّﺸــ ٌﺮ‬, ‫ َﺷـﺎ ِﻫـ ٌﺪ‬, ‫ ُﻋــ َﺰﻳْــ ٌﺮ‬etc.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ َﺷـﺎ ِﻫـ ٌﺪ‬is a person name. So it is wrong to say
ُ‫اﻟﺸـﺎ ِﻫـﺪ‬
َّ .
2) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫( َﻛــﻬ ٌْـﻒ‬A cave) is not a person name. So it is
correct to say ‫( َا ْﻟ َﻜــﻬْـ ُﻒ‬The cave).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫( َﻣـ ِﺪﻳ ْـﻨَـ ٌﺔ‬A town) is a person name.
Sun letters and Moon letters (Seq # 5)
In Arabic language the alphabets (or letters) are divided into two categories
namely: the Sun letters and the Moon letters.
Any noun that starts with a sun letter and if ‫ َا ْل‬is attached to it (for making
it definite) then ‫ ل‬of ‫ َا ْل‬will not be read and it is silent (assimilated). The
first letter of such word will get Tashdeed (‫)ـّـ‬.
Sun Letters
 24

‫تثدذرزسشصضطظلن‬
Example
َّ (‫ ل‬is not being read, Meaning: The sun)
‫اﻟـﺸـ ْﻤ ُـﺲ‬
Any noun that starts with a moon letter and if ‫ َا ْل‬is attached to it (for
making it definite) then ‫ ل‬of ‫ َا ْل‬will be read and it will not be silent.
Moon Letters
‫ٔا ب ج ح خ ع غ ف ق ك م و ه ي‬
Example
‫ ل( اﻟْـ َﻘـ َﻤ ُــﺮ‬is being read, Meaning: The moon)
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:6). The word
‫ـﺚ‬ ِ ْ‫ اﻟْــ َﺤـ ِﺪﻳ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:11). We
pronounce the ‫ ل‬of ‫ ال‬in the word ‫ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬because the letter ‫ ك‬is a
moon letter.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:79). The word
‫( اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ‬The ship) is present in this verse.
 25

ْ ُ‫ــرف‬
‫ــو ٌع‬ ْ ‫ َم‬, ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ــو‬
ْ ‫ص‬ ُ ‫ َمــ ْنــ‬and ‫ــجــ ُر ْو ٌر‬
ْ ‫( َم‬Seq # 6)
In Arabic language every noun declines. It means that it comes in different
forms namely ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬, ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬. ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬will have two Dhammah as
ending for the indefinite noun and single Dhammah for the definite noun.
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬will have two Fatah as ending for the indefinite noun and single
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
Fatah for the definite noun. ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬will have two Kasrah as ending for the
indefinite noun and single Kasrah for the definite noun. See below
example
Example of Indefinite noun
ٌ ‫ ) َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع( ِﻛـﺘَـ‬Meaning: A book
‫ﺎب‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ ًـﺎ‬ُ ْ‫ ) َﻣـﻨ‬Meaning: A book
‫ ) َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر( ِﻛـﺘَـ ٍﺎب‬Meaning: A book
Example of definite noun
‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫ ) َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع( اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘَـ‬Meaning: The book
‫ﺎب‬َ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘَـ‬ ُ ‫ ) َﻣـ ْﻨ‬Meaning: The book
‫ ) َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر( اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘَـ ِﺎب‬Meaning: The book
In English language the terminology is nominative case for ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬,
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and genitive case for ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬. No need to worry
accusative case for ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
 26

about English terminology. Forms in these three different cases will be

used based on the situation and this will be learnt further.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:9). The word
‫ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬which is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬, present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:54). The word
with meaning “The Quran”, which is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:63). The word
with meaning “The Shaitaan”, which is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬, present in this verse.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:63). The word
‫( َاﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬The sea) which is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬present in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:69). The case of
the word ‫( َﺻـﺎ ِﺑــﺮ‬Patient) is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬.
Default case ‫ــﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ‬
case of any noun is ‫ــﻮ ٌع‬ ‫( َﻣــ ْﺮ‬Seq # 7)
The default case of all the Arabic nouns is nominative case (‫) َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬. That is
the noun always ends with two Dhammah (indefinite) or single Dhammah
(definite). The case will change if it is affected by any grammatical rule and
it will be learnt in further topics.
Examples
Case Noun
 27

‫( َﻣ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬The Sea) ‫َاﻟْـ َﺒـ ْﺤـ ُﺮ‬

‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬ (Fish) ‫ُﺣ ْﻮ ٌت‬
‫( َﻣ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬Worshipper) ‫َﻋ ْﺒ ٌﺪ‬
‫( َﻣـ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬Severe) ‫َﺷ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﺪ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:4). The word ‫َوﻟ َـﺪً ا‬
(a son) which is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: All the Arabic nouns by default exist in the
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬case.
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:17). The word
‫( اﻟـ َّﺸـ ْﻤـ َﺲ‬the sun) is not the ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬case.
Feminine gender nouns (Seq # 8)
Arabic is very gender specific language. As a first category, noun for
feminine gender ends with ‫ة‬. This ‫ ة‬is called as ‫( اﻟـﺘَّـﺎ ُء اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﺮﺑُ ْــﻮ َﻃـ ُﺔ‬round ta).
As an example, the noun for the masculine (male) doctor is ‫ َﻃـ ِﺒـ ْﻴـ ٌﺐ‬. To
make it for the feminine (female) doctor, ‫ ة‬should be added at the end. So
the noun will be ‫ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴـ َﺒـ ٌﺔ‬. As second example, the noun for the masculine
(male) parent is ‫( َوا ِﻟـ ٌﺪ‬father). The noun for the feminine (female) parent is
‫( َوا ِﻟـﺪَ ٌة‬mother). So most of the nouns having this ‫ ة‬as ending are feminine
gender nouns. Below are few more examples.
 28

Meaning Noun
The ship ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ‬ َّ
The rock ‫اﻟﺼــ ْﺨــ َﺮ ُة‬ َّ
Paradise ‫َﺟـﻨ َّـ ٌﺔ‬
Other categories are discussed as and when appropriate.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:5). The feminine
gender noun ‫( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ًﺔ‬a word) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:7). The feminine
gender noun ‫( ِزﻳْـﻨَـ ًﺔ‬decoration) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:10). The
feminine gender noun ‫( َاﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﺘـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬Young men) is present in this verse.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:17). The
feminine gender noun ‫( ﻓَــ ْﺠــ َﻮ ٍة‬A middle area) is present in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:19). The noun
‫( اﻟْـ َﻤـ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬The town) is feminine.
Parts
Parts of the body with pairs are feminine
feminine (Seq # 9)
The parts of the body which are two in numbers (i.e. pairs) like eyes, ears,
hands and legs are feminine gender nouns though they don’t end with ‫ة‬
(‫)اﻟـﺘَّـﺎ ُء اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﺮﺑُ ْــﻮ َﻃـ ُﺔ‬.
 29

Eye, ‫َﻋـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬

Ear, ‫ُٔا ُذ ٌن‬
Hand, ‫ﻳ َـ ٌﺪ‬
Leg, ‫ِر ْﺟـ ٌﻞ‬
The above nouns are feminine in nature.
Parts of speech in Arabic language (Seq # 10)
English language has 8 parts of speech namely: noun, pronoun, adjective,
preposition, verb, adverb, conjunction and interjection.
But Arabic language has only 3 parts of speech. Those are noun, verb and
particle. These 3 parts of speech of Arabic language covers all the 8 parts of
speech of English language as per the below table.
Verb
Arabic Noun (‫) ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬ (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ‬Particle (‫) َﺣــ ْــﺮﺮ ٌف‬
Arabic Noun Arabic Particle includes
includes the below preposition and
parts of speech from conjunction.
English. Verb =
‫ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ‬ Preposition = ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﺟــ ّ ٍﺮ‬
 30

Noun = ‫ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬

Conjunction = ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف‬
Pronoun = ‫ﺿَ ـﻤـِ ْﻴــ ٌﺮ‬ ‫َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬
Adjective= ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ‬
Adverb = ‫َﻇــ ْﺮ ٌف‬
Interjection = ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ‬
‫اﻟْ ِﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻞ‬

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The Arabic noun (‫ ) ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬includes the English
nouns, pronouns, adjectives, adverbs and interjections.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In Arabic language the verb (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ‬is a
particle.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Prepositions and conjunctions are treated as
particles (‫ ) َﺣــ ْﺮ ٌف‬in Arabic language.
Triptotes and Diptotes (Seq # 11)
This is a very important topic to understand. Nouns in Arabic language are
categorized as Triptotes and Diptotes based on the complete or partial
declension of nouns.
 31

Arabic Noun

Triptote Diptote

A noun with complete declension has two Dhammah when it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬,
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and two Kasrah when it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬. Such a
two Fatah when it is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
noun is called as triptote (‫) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ُﻣـﻨْ َـﺼـ ِﺮ ٍف‬.
Triptote Examples
Case Examples of Triptotes
ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ٌ ‫َزﻳْـ ٌﺪ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ِﻛـﺘَـ‬
‫ﺎب‬
‫َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫َزﻳْـﺪً ا َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـﺪً ا ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ ًـﺎ‬
‫َزﻳْـ ٍﺪ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ ِﻛـﺘَـ ٍﺎب َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
A noun with partial declension has single Dhammah when it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬,
single Fatah when it is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and single Fatah when it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬. In
partial declension a noun does not end with ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬. Such a noun is called
as diptote (‫) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ﻏَـ ْﻴـ ِﺮ ُﻣـﻨْ َـﺼـ ِﺮ ٍف‬.
Diptote Examples
Case Examples of Diptotes
ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ ُن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ َﻣــ ْﺮﻳ َـ ُﻢ‬
ِٕ
 32

‫اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ َﻣــ ْﺮﻳ َـ َﻢ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِٕ
‫اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ َﻣــ ْﺮﻳ َـ َﻢ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِٕ
The endings of above nouns do not have ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:31). The word
‫( َٔا َﺳـﺎ ِو َر‬A bracelets) which is a diptote is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:37). The word
‫( َر ُﺟـ ًﻼ‬A man) is a triptote and is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The words
‫ ﻳَـﺎٔ ُﺟـ ْـﻮ َج‬and ‫ َﻣـﺎٔ ُﺟ ْــﻮ َج‬are diptotes and not present in this verse.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:106). The word
‫( َﺟــﻬَـﻨَّـ ُﻢ‬hell) which is a diptote is present in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( َﺳـﺎ َﻋـ ٌﺔ‬An hour) is a triptote.
Ending of a Diptote noun is Fatah in case of ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ــو‬
ْ ‫ص‬ ُ ‫ َمــ ْنــ‬and
‫( َم ْج ُر ْو ٌر‬Seq # 12)
In the last session Triptotes and Diptotes have been learnt. For its
importance, it is to note once again that the endings of Diptotes in the case
of ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣـ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬form are Fatah (i.e, Zabar). Observe the following
examples to recognize Fatah (i.e, Zabar) in the case of ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
 33

Case Examples of Diptotes

ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ ُن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ َﻣ ْــﺮﻳَـ ُﻢ‬
ِٕ
‫َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ َﻣ ْــﺮﻳ َ َـﻢ‬
ِٕ
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ َﻣ ْــﺮﻳ َ َـﻢ‬
ِٕ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ending of a diptote noun is not
Dhammah.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬endings of a diptote
noun is Fatah.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Diptote nouns do not end with ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬two
Dhammah, two Fatah, two Kasrah).
First two categories of Diptotes (Seq # 13)
There are few categories of nouns which are diptotes in Arabic language.
In this session, two categories with examples are given below.
Category # 1 (All feminine person (Women) name nouns are Diptotes)
Case Examples of Feminine Person names
‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻳَـ ُﻢ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻃـ َﻤـ ُﺔ‬ ُ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎﺋـِﺸَ ـ ُﺔ‬ ‫ﺧَـ ِﺪﻳْــ َﺠـ ُﺔ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬ ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻳ َ َـﻢ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻃـ َﻤـ َﺔ‬ َ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎﺋـِﺸَ ـ َﺔ‬ ‫ﺧَـ ِﺪﻳْــ َﺠـ َﺔ‬
 34

‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻳ َ َـﻢ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻃـ َﻤـ َﺔ‬ َ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎﺋـِﺸَ ـ َﺔ‬ ‫ﺧَـ ِﺪﻳْــ َﺠـ َﺔ‬

Category # 2 (All foreign name nouns are Diptotes)

Arabic language considers the names like Ibrahim, Ismail, London,
Washington, Yaajooj, Majooj etc as foreign names and Mohammed,
Haamid etc as local or native names. So, all foreign name nouns in Arabic
language are diptotes. Examples are given below.
Examples of Foreign name
Case
nouns
‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ ُن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ ﻟَـ ْﻨـﺪَ ُن َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
ِٕ
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ ﻟَـﻨْـﺪَ َن َﻣـﻨ‬
ِٕ
‫ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ ﻟَـﻨْـﺪَ َن َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
ِٕ
Other categories of diptotes will be discussed as and when required.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In Arabic language, the name ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬is not a
foreign name.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The two
words ‫ ﻳَـﺎْٔ ُﺟ ْــﻮ َج‬and ‫ َﻣـﺎْٔ ُﺟــ ْﻮ َج‬are diptotes because they are foreign names
and are present in this verse.
 35

3) State TRUE or FALSE: All the foreign name nouns are diptotes in
Arabic language.
6 Detached personal pronouns (Seq # 14)
In Arabic language there are total 14 personal pronouns.
pronouns All these 14
personal pronouns are definite. In this session we learn only 6 of them.
Observe the below table.
Meaning Pronoun in Arabic language
He (masculine) ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬
They (masculine) ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬
You (masculine) ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
You All (masculine) ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
I ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬
We ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
You can use some physical interactive actions to memorize them. Use the
below procedure for it and practice a lot.
Step 1: Keep your right hand on right side and point out with single
forefinger to represent “he” and say loudly ‫ُــﻮ‬َ ‫ﻫ‬.
Step 2: Keep your right hand on right side and point out with all the
fingers to represent “they” and say loudly ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬.
 36

Step 3: Keep your right hand in front of you and point out with single
َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬.
forefinger in the front direction to represent “you” and say loudly ‫ْـﺖ‬
Step 4: Keep your right hand in front of you and point out with all the
fingers in the front direction to represent “you all” and say loudly ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬.
Step 5: Keep your right hand and point towards yourself with single
forefinger to represent “I” and say loudly ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬.
Step 6: Keep your right hand and point towards yourself with all the
fingers to represent “we” and say loudly ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬.
The reader can use any comfortable method to practice these 6 personal
pronouns.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun which means “We” is
present in the verse Quran (15:18:13).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun which means “They all
(masculine)” is present in the verse Quran (15:18:17).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The two personal pronouns which means “I”
and “He” are present in the verse Quran (15:18:34).
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun which means “I” is not
present in the verse Quran (16:18:110).
 37

5) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun which means “You

َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬.
(masculine)” is ‫ْـﺖ‬
Prepositions, heavily used topic in Quran (Seq # 15)
The following table provides few prepositions for initial learning.
English Meaning Preposition
Preposition
From ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
In ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
For ‫ِل‬
With, by, in, of, on
‫ِب‬
(Its meaning depends on the context)
On ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
Towards ‫ا ٰﻟــﻰ‬
ِٕ
About / (sometimes it also mean From) ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫َﻋ‬
Nouns become ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬if they come after any preposition. Consider the
ُ َ‫( اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬the book). By default it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. Preposition ‫ــﻦ‬
noun ‫ـﺎب‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬when
comes before makes this noun ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬to ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬as shown below.
ِ َ‫ــﻦ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ َ ‫ـﺎب = ِﻣ‬ ُ َ‫ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
The combination of this “Preposition and Noun” is called as ‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
(Jaar-Majroor). This combination is heavily used in Quran.
 38

Examples
Meaning Jaar-
Jaar-Majroor Noun Preposition
from the book ‫ـﺎب‬ ِ َ‫ــﻦ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬ ُ َ‫ َاﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬+
َ ‫ـﺎب = ِﻣ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
from the house ‫ َاﻟْ َﺒـ ْﻴ ُﺖ = ِﻣــ َﻦ اﻟْـ َﺒـ ْﻴـ ِﺖ‬+ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
in the cave ‫ َاﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ = ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in the sea ‫ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ُﺮ = ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
from evil ‫ َﺷ ٌّــﺮ = ِﻣــ ْﻦ َﺷــ ّ ٍﺮ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
on/with Allah ‫ﺑِﻠﻠ ٰ ّـ ِﻪ‬ = ‫ َاﻟـﻠ ٰ ّـ ُﻪ‬+ ‫ِب‬
on Mohammed ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬+ ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
The preposition ‫ ِب‬has lots of meanings depending on the context.
Note:
Note
(1) The ‫“ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬on Mohammed” (‫ ) َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ‬is present in
Durood-e-Ibrahim and in the verse Quran (26:47:2).
(2) “From the sky towards the earth” = ‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤـﺎ ٓ ِء ا َﱃ ْ َاﻻ ْر ِض‬ َّ ‫ ِﻣ َـﻦ‬is present in
ِٕ
Quran (21:32:5).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:10). The word
‫ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because of the preposition ‫ا ٰﻟــﻰ‬.
ِٕ
 39

2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:15). The word
‫ اﻟـﻠَّـ ِﻪ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because of the preposition ‫ َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:19). The word
‫( اﻟْـ َﻤـ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬the city, the town) which is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬is present in this verse.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:37). The phrase
‫ــﻦ ﺗ َُــﺮ ٍاب‬ ْ ‫( ِﻣ‬from dust) which is a Jaar-Majroor combination is present
in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:40). The word
‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤـﺎ ِء‬َّ (The sky) is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because of the preposition ‫ ِﻣــ ْﻦ‬before it.
Behavior of Diptote with Preposition (Seq # 16)
It has been explained that Fatah is the ending for diptote noun in ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬
and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬cases. One simple example is below. Observe the ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case,
it has Fatah.
ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ‫َﺟــﻬَـﻨَّـ ُﻢ‬
‫َﺟــﻬَـﻨ َّ َـﻢ‬
‫َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
‫َﺟــﻬَـﻨ َّ َـﻢ‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
When a preposition comes before any diptote noun, the diptote noun will
also become ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬with Fatah as the ending. This understanding should
be clear with the following two examples.
Example:
 40

‫ َﺟــﻬَـﻨَّـ ُﻢ = ِﻓــﻲ َﺟــﻬَـﻨ َّ َـﻢ‬+ ‫ِﻓــﻲ‬

‫( ِﻓــﻲ َﺟــﻬَـﻨ َّ َـﻢ‬in hellfire). Here ‫ َﺟــﻬَـﻨ َّ َـﻢ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
‫ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ = َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬+ ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
‫( َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬on Ibrahim). Here ‫ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
Note: The ‫“ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬on Ibrahim” (‫ ) َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬is present in Durood-e-
ِٕ
Ibrahim and in the verses Quran (3:3:84) and Quran (23:37:109).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:31). The diptote
noun ‫( ٔا َﺳﺎ ِو َر‬bracelets) is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because of the preposition ‫ ِﻣــ ْﻦ‬before
it.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The two
diptote nouns ‫ ﻳ َـﺎْٔ ُﺟـ ْﻮ َج‬and ‫ َﻣـﺎْٔ ُﺟــ ْﻮ َج‬are not ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬as there is no
preposition before them.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:106). The diptote
noun ‫ َﺟــﻬَـﻨَّـ ُﻢ‬is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
Prepositions when with Pronouns (Seq # 17)
Like nouns, pronouns may also come after prepositions. So, when these
pronouns (pronouns come under the category of nouns in Arabic
language) join prepositions we get again the construction ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬. The
 41

‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬is a two words combination or construction. The below table is
one such example.
‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached
Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

from him (masculine) ‫ُﻫــ َﻮ = ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻪ‬ + ‫ِﻣــ ْﻦ‬

from them (masculine) ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ = ِﻣـﻨْــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ + ‫ِﻣــ ْﻦ‬
from you (masculine) ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫ْـﺖ = ِﻣـﻨ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬ + ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
from you all
‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ = ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻜـ ْﻢ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
+ ‫ــﻦ‬
(masculine)
from me ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = ِﻣـ ِﻨّ ْــﻲ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
+ ‫ــﻦ‬
from us ‫ــﻦ = ِﻣـﻨَّـﺎ‬ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
+ ‫ــﻦ‬

In the above table of ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬construction the final endings ‫ه‬,ُ ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, َ‫ك‬,
‫ ُﻛ ْـﻢ‬,‫ي‬,ِ ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬are called as attached pronouns. These attached pronouns ( ‫ه‬,ُ ‫ ُﻫ ْـﻢ‬,
َ‫ك‬, ‫ ُﻛـ ْﻢ‬,‫ي‬,ِ ‫ ) ﻧ َـﺎ‬are in ‫ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬case. No need to worry remembering these
attached pronouns, they come by time and by little practice.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:39). The attached
pronoun َ‫ ك‬in the ‫ـﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ َ ْ‫ ِﻣـﻨ‬is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
ٌ ‫ َﺟ‬construction ‫ـﻚ‬
 42

2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:81). The ‫ـﺎر‬ ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬construction ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻪ‬is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:83). The attached
pronoun ‫ ُه‬in the ‫ـﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ٌ ‫ َﺟ‬construction ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻪ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
Vocative Harmony, Jaar-
Jaar-Majroor case of “for” preposition with
attached pronoun (Seq # 18)
The Arabic word for English preposition “for” is “‫”ل‬. ِ It is “Li” with Kasrah
(Zair). When it joins with direct noun it is written as “‫”ل‬. ِ Examples are
ِ َّ ‫( ِﻟـﻠـﻨ‬For the mankind), ‫( ِﻟـ ٰﺎٔ َد َم‬for Adam) etc. But when being joined
‫ـﺎس‬
with pronoun it is getting Fatah (Zabar). There is no Arabic grammatical
rule here. It is to get “vocative harmony” (something easy to say). Saying
“Lihu” is difficult and saying “Lahu” is easy and gets vocative harmony.
That is the reason it is getting Fatah (Zabar).
ِ
See the below table for the preposition “for” (‫)ل‬.
‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached
Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

for him (masculine) ‫ﻟَـ ُﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫ِل‬
for them (masculine) ‫ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِل‬
for you (masculine) ‫ـﻚ‬ َ َ‫ﻟ‬ = ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬ + ‫ِل‬
for you all (masculine) ‫ﻟَـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِل‬
 43

for me ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = ِﻟ ْــﻲ‬+ ‫ِل‬

for us ‫ــﻦ = ﻟَـﻨَـﺎ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ِل‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:2). The “Jaar-
Majroor” ‫( ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬for them) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Jaar-Majroor” construction ‫( ﻟَـﻨَـﺎ‬for us) is
present in the verse Quran (15:18:10).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Jaar-Majroor” construction ‫( ﻟَـ ُﻪ‬for him)
is present in the verse Quran (15:18:43).
Jaar-
aar-Majroor with other prepositions (Seq # 19)
The below tables provide ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬constructions with 6 pronouns and
prepositions.
‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬
Meaning (considering in this case Detached
Preposition
‘with’) ‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

with him (masculine) ‫ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫ِب‬
with them
‫ﺑِــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِب‬
(masculine)
with you (masculine) ‫ﺑِـ َﻚ‬ = َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ + ‫ِب‬
with you all
‫ﺑِـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِب‬
(masculine)
 44

with me ‫ﺑ ِْــﻲ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ + ‫ِب‬

with us ‫ﺑِـﻨَـﺎ‬ = ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ + ‫ِب‬

‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached

Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

in him (masculine) ‫ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in them (masculine) ‫ِﻓـ ْﻴــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in you (masculine) ‫ِﻓـ ْﻴـ َﻚ‬ = ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in you all (masculine) ‫ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ُﻜـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in me ‫ــﻲ‬َّ ‫ِﻓ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
in us ‫ِﻓـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬ = ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ + ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬

‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached

Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

on him (masculine) ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
on them (masculine) ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
on you (masculine) ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴ‬ = ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
on you all (masculine) ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُﻜـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
 45

on me َّ َ‫= َﻋـﻠ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
on us ‫= َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ + ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬

‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached

Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

towards him (masculine) ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
towards them (masculine) ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ + ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
towards you (masculine) ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ َﻚ‬ = ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
+ ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
towards you all (masculine) ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
+ ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
towards me َّ َ ‫ِٕاﻟ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬
+ ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ
towards us ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬ = ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ا َﱃ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
‫َﺟـ ٌﺎر‬ Detached
Meaning Preposition
‫َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ Pronoun

about him (masculine) ‫َﻋـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬

َ ‫ ﻫ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫َﻋ‬
about them (masculine) ‫َﻋـ ْﻨــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫َﻋ‬
about you (masculine) ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫َﻋـﻨ‬ = ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫َﻋ‬
about you all (masculine) ‫َﻋـﻨْـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬ = ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ْ ‫َﻋ‬
 46

about me ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = َﻋـ ِﻨّــﻲ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫َﻋ‬

about us ‫ــﻦ = َﻋـﻨَّـﺎ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫َﻋ‬
Note A question may come to all of us. Why it is ‫ ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬and not ‫ﺑِـ ُﻪ‬, why it is
Note:
‫ ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬and not ‫ ? ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ُﻪ‬This question will be answered in a later topic.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The Jaar-Majroor combination ‫ ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬is present in
the verse Quran (15:18:5).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The Jaar-Majroor combination ‫( َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬on you
all) is not present in the verse Quran (15:18:20).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The Jaar-Majroor combination ‫( َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬on
them) is present two times in the verse Quran (15:18:21).
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The Jaar-Majroor combination ‫( َﻋـﻨْــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬About
them) is present in the verse Quran (15:18:28).
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The Jaar-Majroor combination ‫ــﻲ‬ َّ َ ‫( ِٕاﻟ‬towards
me) is present in the verse Quran (16:18:110).
‫ـع‬َ ‫ــل َو َھــ ْمــ َزةُ ا ْلــقَــ‬
ِ ‫ط‬ ِ ‫ﺻ‬ َ ‫( َھــ ْمــ َزةُ ال َو‬Seq # 20)
This is an important topic and needs attention. There are two Hamzas in
Arabic language. They are ‫ ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬and ‫ ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْـﻘَــ َﻄـﻊ‬. ‫ ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬is
read when the sentence or verse is started by it. It is represented by small
‫ ص‬on top of it. If this Hamza comes in the middle of sentence or verse
then it is silent or ignored and is not read. The Hamza of ‫( َا ْل‬the) is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة‬
 47

‫اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬. It is not read in the middle. Example: ‫ﺪار‬ ُ ‫( اﻟْــ ِﺠـ‬The wall). ‫َو اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ُار‬
(And the wall) In the second example, ‫ َو‬joined directly to ‫ ل‬and ‫ ا‬is silent
because it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬.
‫ ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْـ َﻘــ َﻄـﻊ‬is always read irrespective of its location. It is represented by
small ‫ ع‬neck on it. Example: ‫( ا َّن‬indeed).
ِٕ
This differentiation is generally given in Arabic font Quran copies.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The Hamza of the word ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫( َاﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘَـ‬the book) is
not read in the verse Quran (15:18:1) because it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The Hamza of the word ‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ‬ َّ (the ship) is
not read in the verse Quran (16:18:79) because it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The Hamza of the word ‫( ا َّن‬indeed) in the
ِٕ
verse Quran (16:18:94) is read because it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْـ َﻘــ َﻄـﻊ‬.
‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ــاف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫( ُمــ‬Seq # 21)
In Arabic language there is no equivalent word for the English word “of”.
Nouns will undergo some changes to represent the concept for the English
word “of”. This construction or concept is called as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Let us try to construct ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬for the phrase “Book of
ِٕ
Haamid”. It is given in the below table.
 48

Example: Construction steps for ‫( ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬Book of
ِٕ
Haa
Haamid)
Steps Description noun2 noun1

1 ٌ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـ‬
Take two nouns in default ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬case ‫ﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬
Remove ‫ ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬from the first noun to
2 get ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬ ُ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـ‬
‫ﺎب‬
Make the second noun ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬to get
3 ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬
4 Join steps 2 and 3 ‫ﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـ‬

Here ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫ ِﻛـﺘَـ‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and ‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. Another example of ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is below.
ِٕ
Example: Construction steps for ‫( ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَﻴ ِﻪ‬Night of
ِٕ
the decree)
Steps Description noun2 noun1
Take two nouns in default ‫َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬
1 case ‫ﻗَ ْـﺪ ٌر‬ ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬
 49

Remove ‫ ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬from the first noun to

2 get ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ُﺔ‬
Make the second noun ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬to get
3 ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ‫اﻟْـ َﻘـ ْﺪ ِر‬
4 Join steps 2 and 3 ‫ﻟ َـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻘـ ْﺪ ِر‬

Here ‫ ﻟ َـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ُﺔ‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and ‫ اﻟْـ َﻘـ ْﺪ ِر‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
Below are the conditions of ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
i) It cannot have ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬. By default it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
ii) It cannot have ‫ َا ْل‬.
Below are the conditions of ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ِٕ
i) It is always ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
ii) It can be definite or indefinite.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase “Chapter of the cave” is written as
‫ ُﺳــ ْﻮ َر ُة اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In the phrase ‫ ُﺳــ ْﻮ َر ُة اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬the word ‫ ُﺳــ ْﻮ َر ُة‬is
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬.
 50

3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the phrase ‫ ُﺳــ ْﻮ َر ُة اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬the word ‫ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬is
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬and it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: In the construction of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬,
ِٕ
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬is not ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: In the construction of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬,
ِٕ
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
The difference between "Book of a student" and "Book of the
student" (Seq # 22)
22)
Let us try to construct ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬for the two phrases “Book of a
ِٕ
student” and “Book of the student”.
1) “Book of a student”
In this phrase if we observe the word student is indefinite. Thus ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬will be ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and indefinite. So it is ‫ـﺎب َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ٍﺐ‬
ُ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬.
ِٕ
2) “Book of the student”
In this phrase, the word student is definite. Thus ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬will be
ِ َّ ِ ِٕ
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and definite. So it is ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄـﺎﻟ ِﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻛـﺘَـ‬. Student is preceded with ‫ال‬.
Hence, ‫ـﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬can be indefinite or definite.
ِٕ
One more point to note that if ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is definite then automatically
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬will be definite. ِٕ
‫ـﺎف‬
 51

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the phrase “King of the
ship” is ‫ َﻣـ ِﻠـ ُﻚ اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the phrase “wall of the
king” is not ‫ ِﺟـﺪَ ُار اﻟْـ َﻤـﻠـِ ِﻚ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the phrase “Ship of sea” is
‫ َﺳـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ ﺑ َــ ْﺤــ ٍﺮ‬.
Examples of ‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
ٌ ‫ــض‬َ ‫ــاف ُم‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫( ُمــ‬Seq # 23)
23)
Find below few more examples of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬for better
ِٕ
understanding.
Meaning ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ِٕ
People of the paradise ‫ﺎب اﻟْــ َﺠـﻨ َّـ ِﺔ‬ُ ‫َٔا ْﺻــ َﺤـ‬
People of the fire ُ ‫َٔا ْﺻــ َﺤـ‬
‫ﺎب اﻟـﻨ َّـ ِﺎر‬
People of the elephant ‫ﺎب اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـ ِﻞ‬
ُ ‫َٔا ْﺻــ َﺤـ‬
Help of Allah ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ‫ﻧ َــ ْﺼــ ُﺮ‬
Slave of Allah ِ ُ‫َﻋـ ْﺒـﺪ‬
‫ﷲ‬
Mercy of Allah ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ‫َر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ُﺔ‬
Messenger of Allah ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ‫َر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ُل‬
 52

House of Allah ِ ‫ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ُﺖ‬

‫ﷲ‬

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ـﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ َﺒ‬means plants. This word is
present as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬in the verse Quran (15:18:45).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase “‫( ”ﻧ َـ َﺒـ ُﺎت ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض‬plants of the earth)
is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬in the verse Quran (15:18:45).
ِٕ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ َو ْﻋـ ٌﺪ‬means promise. The phrase
“Promise of Allah” is translated as ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ُ‫ َو ْﻋـﺪ‬.
Muzaaf-
Muzaaf-Muzaaf ilaihi with pronouns (Seq # 24)
24)
Let us consider the phrase in English language “His book”. For
understanding purpose, it can be rewritten as “book of him”. Thus it uses
the concept of “of”. Hence it is also a ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬in Arabic
ِٕ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
language. So, when the pronoun joins a noun then we get ‫ـﺎف‬
‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. See example below.
ِٕ
Muzaaf-
Detached
Meaning Muzaaf Noun
Pronoun
ilaihi
his book (book of him) ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑُـ ُﻪ‬ = ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
+ ‫ـﺎب‬
their book (book of them) ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑُـﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ = ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
+ ‫ـﺎب‬
 53

your book (book of you) ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑُـ َﻚ‬ = َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬

‫ْـﺖ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
+ ‫ـﺎب‬
your all book (book of you all) ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎ ُﺑﻜـُ ْﻢ‬ = ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
+ ‫ـﺎب‬
my book (book of mine) ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ ِْـﻲ‬+ ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
our book (book of us) ‫ــﻦ = ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑُـﻨَـﺎ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ـﺎب‬
In the above table ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and is in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case while the endings
‫ه‬,ُ ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, َ‫ك‬, ‫ ُﻛ ْـﻢ‬, ‫ي‬,ِ ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬are the attached pronouns. These attached pronouns are
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Note: The ‫( َرﺑ ّ ِْــﻲ‬my lord) is ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. It is read in Rukoo` and
َ ِٕ
Sujood of ‫اﻟﺼـﻼ ُة‬ َّ (prayer).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( َا َذ ٌان‬ears) is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. The phrase
‫ َٔا َذاﻧ ُــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬means “their ears”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( ُﻗـﻠُــ ْﻮ ٌب‬hearts) is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. The phrase
‫ ُﻗـﻠُ ْــﻮﺑُـــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬means “their hearts”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫ َﻛــﻬْـ ُﻔــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬means “their cave”. This is
not ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬.
ِٕ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫( َرﺑُّـﻨَـﺎ‬our lord) is ‫ـﺎف‬
‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
 54

5) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫( َﺳـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺘ ْــﻲ‬my ship) is ‫ـﺎف‬
ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣـﻀ‬.
ِٕ
Understanding Ya-
Ya-Mutakallim (Seq # 25)
25)
The letter ‫ ي‬in ‫ـﺎف ُﻣـﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬of the first person singular is Ya-
ِٕ
Mutakallim (‫ ي‬of First person). It is the attached personal pronoun for the
detached personal pronoun ‫( َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬i.e I). Consider the below example.
‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = ﺑَـ ْﻴـ ِﺘـ ْـﻲ‬+ ‫ـﺖ‬ُ ‫ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬
In the phrase ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻴـ ِﺘـ ْـﻲ‬there are two words. Its translation is “my house”. The
house (‫ )ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ُﺖ‬in this phrase is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. But because of the power Ya-
Mutakallim (it forces the preceding letter to take Kasrah while joining it),
the Dhammah of ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬becomes Kasrah. Thus ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬in ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻴـ ِﺘـ ْـﻲ‬is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. This
same thing applies to all the Muzaaf-Muzaaf iliahis with Ya-Mutakallim.
Such a thing our eyes cannot see but our mind can see if we understand.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ َر ُّب‬in the phrase ‫ َرﺑ ّ ِْــﻲ‬is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ ِﺟـﺪَ ُار‬in the phrase ‫( ِﺟـﺪَ ِار ْي‬my wall)
is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫( ُﺣــ ْﻮ ُت‬fish) in the phrase ‫ُﺣــ ْﻮ ِﺗ ْــﻲ‬
(my fish) is not ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
 55

Explaining
Explaining Preposition + noun/pronoun
noun/pronoun = Jaar- aar-Majroor, Noun +
noun/ pronoun = ‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
noun/pronoun ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ــاف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫( ُمــ‬Seq # 26)
26)
This is a revision topic. In the earlier sessions ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬have been learnt. Now a simple formula can be derived as follows.
ِٕ
Preposition + noun/pronoun oun/pronoun = ‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
Examples:
‫ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ُﺮ = ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
Translation: In the sea
‫ ُﻫــ َﻮ = ِﻣـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬+ ‫ِﻣــ ْﻦ‬
Translation: From him

Noun + noun/pronoun = ‫ﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ٌ ‫ــﻀَ ـ‬

‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ــﻀَ ـ‬
َ‫ﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف‬ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
Examples:
ُ ‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ = ِﻛـﺘَـ‬+ ‫ﺎب‬
‫ﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـ‬
Translation: Book of Haamid
‫ َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ = َرﺑ ُّـ َﻚ‬+ ‫َر ُّب‬
Translation: Your lord
 56

Preposition before ‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬

ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ــاف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫( ُمــ‬Seq # 27)
27)
This topic is very important to understand. We know that, the preposition
makes the noun after it into ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case. So if preposition comes before
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬then it makes ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬into ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case. Examples are
ِٕ
below.
In the path of Allah ‫ﷲ‬ِ ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ = ِ ْﰲ َﺳـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬ ِ ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َﺳـ ِﺒـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
From the punishment of ِ
‫ــﻦ َﻋ َـﺬ ِاب ﷲ‬ ْ ‫ﷲ = ِﻣ‬ ِ ‫ َﻋ َـﺬ ُاب‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
Allah
In night of the decree ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻘ ْـﺪ ِر = ِ ْﰲ ﻟ َـ ْﻴﻠَـ ِﺔ اﻟْﻘَ ْﺪ ِر‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
In your book ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ـﻚ = ِ ْﰲ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎ ِﺑ‬ َ ُ‫ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬+ ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
On family/people of ٍ
‫ ٰا ُل ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ = َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ٰا ِل ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪ‬+ ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬
Mohammed
In the name of Allah ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ = ﺑ ِْـﺴـ ِﻢ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬+ ‫ِب‬
Note: There are two meanings of ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬. They are (a) noun and (b) name. name In
the above example ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬is considered as name. The ‫ ا‬of ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬.
As it comes in the middle, it is ignored while writing and reading ‫ﺑ ِْـﺴـ ِﻢ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫ــﻦ ٰاﻳٰـ ِﺘـﻨَـﺎ‬ ْ ‫( ِﻣ‬from our signs/verses)
in the verse Quran (15:18:9) has both ‫ـﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ٌ ‫ َﺟ‬and ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
 57

2) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫ــﻦ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑِـﻨَـﺎ‬ ْ ‫( ِﻣ‬from our book) has
both ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ َ ‫( ِﻓ ْــﻲ ﻗَـﻠْـﺒ‬in your heart) has both
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫ِـﻚ‬
‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Adverbs (Seq # 28)
28)
In Arabic language adverbs are also categorized as nouns. There are two
kinds of adverb namely adverb of time and adverb of place. Example of
adverb of time are ‫ﻗَـ ْﺒـ َﻞ‬, َ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬etc. Examples of adverb of place are ‫ َﻣـ َﻊ‬, َ‫ ِﻋـﻨْـﺪ‬,
َ ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬etc. The adverb is termed as ‫ َﻇ ْــﺮ ٌف‬. The following table gives
‫ـﺖ‬
corresponding meanings of few adverbs.
Meaning Adverb
after َ‫ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬
before ‫ﻗَـ ْﺒـ َﻞ‬
with ‫َﻣـ َﻊ‬
near/have َ‫ِﻋـﻨْـﺪ‬
under َ ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ـﺖ‬
above ‫ﻓَ ْــﻮ َق‬
between َ ‫ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
 58

near/have ‫ﻟَـﺪَ ى‬
front ‫َٔا َﻣـﺎ َم‬
behind ‫ﺧَـﻠْ َـﻒ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:32). The adverb
of location ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬between) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:86). The adverb
of place َ‫( ِﻋـﻨْـﺪ‬near) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:93). The adverb
of location ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴــ َﻦ‬between) is not present in this verse.
‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ــر‬
ْ ‫ظ‬ َ (Seq # 29)
29)
Adverb followed by a direct noun or pronoun will lead to a construction
called as ‫ َﻇــ ْﺮ ٌف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Adverb + noun/pronoun = ‫ﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ٌ ‫ــﻀَ ـ‬
‫ـﺎف‬ َ‫َﻇــ ْــﺮﺮ ٌف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
Examples are below.

Noun/
Meaning ‫َﻇــ ْﺮ ٌف ُﻣﻀَ ٌﺎف اﻟ َ ْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ‫َﻇــ ْﺮ ٌف‬
ِٕ Pronoun
 59

with Allah ‫ﷲ‬ِ ‫َﻣـ َﻊ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ُ + ‫َﻣـ َﻊ‬

after the prayer ‫اﻟﺼـ َﻼ ِة‬ َّ َ‫ﺑ َـ ْﻌـﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼـ َﻼ ُة‬َّ + َ‫ﺑ َـ ْﻌـﺪ‬
near Allah ِ َ‫ِﻋـ ْﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﷲ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ُ + َ‫ِﻋـ ْﻨـﺪ‬
before the sunset ‫ﻗَـ ْﺒـ َﻞ اﻟْـ ُﻐــ ُﺮ ْو ِب‬ ‫اﻟْـ ُﻐــ ُﺮ ْو ُب‬ + ‫ﻗَـ ْﺒـ َﻞ‬
under the table ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤـ َﺖ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻜـﺘَـ ِﺐ‬ ‫اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻜـﺘَـ ُﺐ‬ + ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤـ َﺖ‬
with him ‫َﻣـ َﻌـ ُﻪ‬ ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬ + ‫َﻣـ َﻊ‬
near them ‫ِﻋـﻨْـﺪَ ُﻫـ ْﻢ‬ ‫ُﻫـ ْﻢ‬ + َ‫ِﻋـﻨْـﺪ‬
near the door ‫ﻟَـﺪَ ى اﻟْـ َﺒـ ِﺎب‬ ‫ـﺎب‬ُ ‫اﻟْـ َﺒ‬ + ‫ﻟَـﺪَ ى‬
you have ‫ـﻚ‬َ ْ‫ﻟَـﺪَ ﻳ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ + ‫ﻟَـﺪَ ى‬

Just a note that the alif of ‫( ﻟَـﺪَ ى‬read as lada) changes to ‫ ي‬when ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is a pronoun and this ‫ ي‬takes jazam (‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫)ﻟَـﺪَ ﻳ‬.
ِٕ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In the phrase ‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬ َ ‫( ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬under the ship)
َّ ‫ـﺖ‬
َّ is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ِٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
the word ‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verse Quran (16:18:94) ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬between)
is not present.
 60

3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verse Quran (16:18:95) ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬between)
came two times and the attached pronouns ‫ ُﻛـ ْﻢ‬and ‫ ُﻫـ ْﻢ‬are ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ِٕ
and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
Demonstrative Pronouns (Seq # 30)
30)
These pronouns are used to demonstrate some object and they all are
definite. Below is the table of these pronouns. They are self-explanatory.
Meaning Demonstrative Pronouns
this (Masculine) ‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬
this (Feminine) ‫ٰﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬
that (Masculine) ‫ٰذﻟـِ َﻚ‬
that (Feminine) ‫ِﺗـﻠ ْـ َﻚ‬
these (Masc./Fem.) ‫ٰﻫٓــ ُﺆﻻٓ ِء‬
those (Masc./Fem.) ‫ُٔا ْو ٰﻟ ٓـ ِﺌـ َﻚ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:15). ‫ ٰﻫٓــ ُﺆﻻٓ ِء‬is
present in this verse and it means “these (masculine/feminine)”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:23). ‫ ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬is
present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:24). ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is not
present in this verse.
 61

4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:31). ‫ ُٔا ْو ٰﻟ ٓـ ِﺌـ َﻚ‬is
present in this verse.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:78). ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is not
present in this verse.
Relative Pronouns (Seq # 31)
31)
Relative pronouns relate or refer to other previously mentioned nouns.
They literally mean “that/those which”. The following are the relative
pronouns in Arabic language and they all are definite.
Meaning Relative
Relative Pronouns
that which (masculine) ‫اﻟَّـ ِﺬ ْي‬
that which (feminine) ‫اﻟَّـ ِﺘ ْــﻲ‬
those which (Masculine) َ ْ‫اﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬

those which (Feminine) ٓ

‫ا ٰﻟ ّـ ِﺌ ْــﻰ‬ or ‫ا ٰﻟ ّـﺘـِ ْـﻰ‬

Note: As they occur rarely and as a reference, it is to note that ‫ ا ٰﻟ ّـﺘـِ ْـﻰ‬is
ٓ
present in Quran (4:4:15) and ‫ ا ٰﻟ ّـ ِﺌ ْــﻰ‬is present in Quran (28:58:2).
Exercises
 62

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:1). ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬is
present in this verse and referring to ‫ﷲ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬is present in the verse Quran (15:18:28).
Its meaning is “those which (masculine/feminine)”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:30). ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬is
present in this verse.
ٍ ‫ف َعــ ْط‬
Particle of conjunction (‫ــف‬ ُ ‫ــر‬
ْ ‫)ح‬َ ) (Seq # 32)
32)
Particle of conjunction is used to connect words, sentences or statements
etc. In Arabic language particle of conjunction is termed as ‫ َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬.
Below is a table describing three of them with meanings. Other ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف‬
‫ َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬will be discussed in upcoming topics.
Meaning ‫َﺣـ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬
And ‫َو‬
thus/then ‫َف‬
then/(after that)/(there upon) ‫ﺛُـ َّﻢ‬
Effect of conjunction ‫ َو‬on subsequent words (nouns) (Seq # 33)
33)
Let us see the below construction.
‫اﻟـﺴـ َﻤـﺎ ِء‬
َّ ‫ِﻓــﻲ‬
 63

Its meaning is “in the sky”. Now let us write “in the sky and earth”. In this
case we have to use ‫ َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬which is ‫و‬.َ The construction looks like as
below.
‫اﻟـﺴـ َﻤـﺎ ِء َو ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض‬
َّ ‫ِﻓــﻲ‬
In the above text it is clear that “the earth” is following the same case
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬as that of “the sky”. Thus particle of conjunction ‫ َو‬changes the
cases of subsequent nouns to the case of master noun (the first noun). In
Arabic language it is described as ‫ـﲆ‬ ٰ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌــ ُﻄــ ْﻮ ٌف َﻋ‬which means “connected
to”. So in the above statement “the earth” is connected to “the sky”. It is
said in Arabic language as
َّ ‫ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض َﻣـ ْﻌــ ُﻄــ ْﻮ ٌف ﻋَ ٰﲆ‬
‫اﻟـﺴـ َﻤـﺎ ِء‬
Note: ‫ـﺎس‬ ِ ْ‫ اﻟ‬in the verse Quran (30:114:6). Its
ِ َّ ‫ اﻟـﻨ‬is connected to ‫ــﺠـﻨَّـ ِﺔ‬
translation is “from the jinns and the mankind”.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:9). The ‫َﺣــ ُﺮ ُف‬
‫ َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:14). The word
‫ ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض‬is not connected to ‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤ َــﻮ ِات‬.
َّ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:17). This verse
starts with ‫ َﺣــ ُﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬.
 64

4) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:26). The word
‫ ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because it is connected to ‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤ َــﻮ ِات‬
َّ (the skies).
5) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The word
‫ َﻣـﺎٔ ُﺟ ْــﻮ َج‬is connected to ‫ﻳ َـﺎٔ ُﺟــ ْﻮ َج‬.
Chain of ‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ــاف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫( ُمــ‬Seq # 34)
34)
It is possible to have a chain of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. Let us take an example
ِٕ
phrase ‘Praise of your Lord”. For our understanding we can rephrase it as
“Praise of lord of your”. “of” appeared twice in this phrase. So, it is chain
of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. Let us attempt to construct it in Arabic language as
ِٕ
below.
Lord of your = ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ُّ ‫َرﺑ‬
Here ‫ َر ُّب‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and َ‫ ك‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. Now the praise will join in Arabic
ِٕ
as below (praise + of + lord of your = praise of your lord).
‫ـﻚ = َﺣـ ْﻤـﺪُ َرِﺑ ّـ َﻚ‬
َ ُّ ‫ َرﺑ‬+ ُ‫َﺣـ ْﻤـﺪ‬
Because ُ‫ َﺣـ ْﻤـﺪ‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬, ‫ َر ِ ّب‬becomes ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬and takes Kasrah. Thus
ِ َ ٌ ٌ ِٕ
‫ َر ِ ّب‬is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـﺎف اﻟـ ْﻴـﻪ‬for ُ‫ َﺣـ ْﻤـﺪ‬and ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـﺎف‬for َ‫ك‬.
ِٕ
Note: “Favour of my lord” = “Favour of lord of mine” = ‫ـﻞ َرﺑّـِ ْـﻰ‬ ُ ْ‫ﻓَــﻀ‬
Exercises
 65

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:27). This verse
has a phrase which means in English as “from the book of your lord”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ ِذ ْﻛ ٌــﺮ‬means remembrance. The
َ ّ ‫ ِذ ْﻛ ُــﺮ َر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ِﺔ َرﺑ‬is translated as “Remembrance of mercy of lord
phrase ‫ِـﻚ‬
of your”, which is nothing but “Remembrance of mercy of your lord”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: There is only one ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬in the
ِ ِ ِٕ
phrase ‫ﺎب ﷲ‬ ُ ‫( ﻛـﺘَـ‬Book of Allah).
Concept of Mabni (Seq # 35)
35)
In Arabic language, nouns are declinable. It means that, they have ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬,
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬cases with different forms. Some nouns don’t change
their form (Wherever you find them, they will be same) for ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬,
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬cases. These nouns are called in Arabic language as
‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨــ ٌﻲ‬. All the demonstrative pronouns and relative pronouns are ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬.
Examples:
Case Example
‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا َﻣـ ْﻨ‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬

Case Example
 66

‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ ‫اﻟ َّـ ِﺬ ْﻳ َﻦ‬

‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬ ‫اﻟ َّـ ِﺬ ْﻳ َﻦ‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫اﻟ َّـ ِﺬ ْﻳ َﻦ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:6). The phrase
‫ ِﺑــﻬٰـ َﺬا‬is ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬, ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨــ ٌﻲ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:24). The phrase
‫ــﻦ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬is ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬, ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬and ‫ــﻲ‬ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:54). The phrase
‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is not ‫ َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
Learning 14 Personal Pronouns (Seq # 36)
36)
In an earlier session, six personal detached pronouns have been learnt.
Those are as below.
he (masculine) ‫ُﻫــ َﻮ‬
they all (masculine) ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬
you (masculine) ‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ‬
you all (masculine) ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬
I ‫َٔاﻧـَﺎ‬
We ‫َﳓـ ْـــ ُﻦ‬
 67

14 personal pronouns will be learnt in this session. We will try to map

them on right hand. Our hand has 15 cells across all the fingers. Forefinger
will be taken first and following matrix will come.
Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬

Forefinger is representing third person masculine gender. Finger 2 is

representing third person feminine gender. The finger 2 is new to us.
Finger 3 and finger 4 are for second person masculine and feminine gender
respectively, while the thumb is for the first person. Last cell of thumb is
not being used. Just to remember again, first person is the person who is
speaking, second person is the person who is listening to the first person
(or speaker) and third person is the person who is not present (absent
from the discussion between first person and the second person).
The duals are filled as below which are ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬. The translations are
“they two” (same for masculine and feminine gender) and “you two” (same
for masculine and feminine gender).
 68

Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ (‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ (‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬
The third person feminine singular is ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬and third person feminine
plural is ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﻫ‬. The second person feminine singular is ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬and second
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬. Thus the table now looks like below.
person feminine plural is ‫ــﻦ‬
Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ِﺖ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ‬ ‫ِﻫ َــﻲ‬ ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ (‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ (‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َّ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬ ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬
To understand more better the English translations of above table given
below.
Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
you
I You She He
(fem.)
 69

you two they two

We you two they two
(fem.) (fem.)
you all they all
you all they all
(fem.) (fem.)
It is to note as a tip of remembrance that, duals for third person masculine
and feminine gender (underlined) are same (‫ )ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬and duals for second
person masculine and feminine gender (in brackets) are same (‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
Practice these personal pronouns slowly on your right hand finger cells by
saying them loudly, till the perfection is achieved.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun ‫( َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬I) is present in the
verse Quran (15:18:39).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun ‫( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬she) is present in
the verse Quran (15:18:42).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun ‫( ُﻫــ َﻮ‬he) is not present
in the verse Quran (15:18:44).
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun ‫( ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬they) is not present
in the verse Quran (15:18:50).
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The personal pronoun ‫( ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬they) is present in
the verse Quran (16:18:104).
 ‫‪70‬‬

‫‪Jaar-‬‬
‫)‪Jaar-Majroor with 14 pronouns (Seq # 37‬‬
‫)‪37‬‬
‫‪Upon learning 14 pronouns in the last topic, this is the right place to learn‬‬
‫‪َ with these 14 pronouns. A simple example is given below with‬ﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
‫‪preposition “from”.‬‬
‫‪Thumb‬‬ ‫‪Finger 4‬‬ ‫‪Finger 3‬‬ ‫‪Finger 2‬‬ ‫‪Finger 1‬‬
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ) ِﻣ ِ ّﲏ(‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ِﺖ ) ِﻣﻨْ ِﻚ(‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ) ِﻣﻨْ َﻚ(‬ ‫ﱔ ) ِﻣ ْﳯَﺎ(‬ ‫َِ‬ ‫ُﻫــ َﻮ ) ِﻣﻨْ ُﻪ(‬
‫ــﻦ ) ِﻣﻨ َّﺎ(‬
‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ ُ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻣﻨْ ُﳬَﺎ(‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻣﻨْ ُﳬَﺎ(‬ ‫ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻣ ْ ُﳯ َﻤﺎ(‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻣ ْ ُﳯ َﻤﺎ(‬
‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َّﻦ ) ِﻣ ْﻨ ُﻜ َّﻦ(‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ ) ِﻣ ْﻨ ُ ْﲂ(‬ ‫ُﻫــ َّﻦ ) ِﻣ ْﳯُ َّﻦ(‬ ‫ُﻫـ ْﻢ ) ِﻣ ْﳯُ ْﻢ(‬
‫‪Likewise Jaar-Majroor constructions for other prepositions are as below.‬‬
‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ِل ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3 F2 F1 T‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬
‫ِﻓ َّـﻲ‬ ‫ِﻓ ْﻴـ ِﻚ‬ ‫ِﻟ ْـﻲ ِﻓ ْﻴـ ِﻪ ِﻓ ْﻴـﻬَـﺎ ِﻓ ْﻴـ َﻚ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ِﻚ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ َﻚ‬ ‫ﻟ َـﻬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ُﻪ‬
‫ِﻓ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ ِﻓ ْﻴـﻨ َـﺎ‬ ‫ﻟَـﻨَـﺎ ِﻓ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ ِﻓ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ ِﻓ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫ﻟ َـﻬُ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟ َـﻬُ َﻤﺎ‬
‫ِﻓ ْﻴـ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫ِﻓ ْﻴـﻬ ِْـﻢ ِﻓ ْﻴـﻬ َِّـﻦ ِﻓ ْﻴـ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫ﻟ َـ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫ﻟ َـﻬ َُّﻦ‬ ‫ﻟ َـﻬ ُْﻢ‬

‫ِب ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬

‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
‫‪T F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2 F1 T‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬
‫ﺑِـ ِﻚ ﺑ ِْـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑِـ َﻚ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻬَـﺎ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ َﻚ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ِﻚ َﻋـﻠَ َّـﻲ ﺑِـ ِﻪ ِﺑـﻬَـﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
 ‫‪71‬‬

‫ﺑِـ ُﳬَﺎ ﺑِـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑِـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ ﺑِـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ ﺑِـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ﺑِـ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫ﺑِـﻬ َِّـﻦ ﺑِـ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫ﺑِـﻬ ِْـﻢ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻬ َِّـﻦ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ ْﻢ‬

‫ِٕاﻟٰــﻰ ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬

‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫ــﻦ ‪َ with preposition‬ﺟ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ‫َﻋ ْ‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1 T F4‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬
‫اﻟ َ َّـﻲ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻚ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ َﻚ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻬَـﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ِﻚ َﻋـ ِ ّﲏ اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ َﻚ‬ ‫َﻋ ْـﳯَﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ُﻪ‬
‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬
‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ُﳬَﺎ َﻋـﻨ َّـﺎ اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ُﳬَﺎ‬ ‫َﻋ ْـﳯُ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻋ ْـﳯُ َﻤﺎ‬
‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬
‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻬ َِّـﻦ‬ ‫اﻟَـ ْﻴـﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ ‫َﻋـ ْﻨ ُ ْﲂ‬ ‫َﻋ ْـﳯُ َّﻦ‬ ‫َﻋ ْـﳯُ ْﻢ‬
‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬ ‫ِٕ‬
‫‪Exercises‬‬
‫‪ِ is “from‬ﻣـﻨْــﻬَـﺎ ‪1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the word‬‬
‫‪her”.‬‬
‫‪ِ is “from you‬ﻣـﻨْـ ِﻚ ‪2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the word‬‬
‫‪(feminine)”.‬‬
‫ُــﻦ ‪3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the word‬‬ ‫‪ is “from‬ﻣـِ ْﻨــﻬ َّ‬
‫‪them (feminine plural)”.‬‬
 72

Muzaaf-
Muzaaf-Muzaaf ilaihi with 14 pronouns (Seq # 38)
38)
Upon learning 14 pronouns, this is the right place to learn ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬with these 14 pronouns. Two simple examples are given below for all
ِٕ
the 14 pronouns.
Thumb Finger 4 Finger 3 Finger 2 Finger 1
(‫َٔاﻧ ِْﺖ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ِﻚ( َٔاانَ ) ِﻛ َﺘ ِﺎﰊ‬ (‫َٔاﻧ َْﺖ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ َﻚ‬ (‫ﱔ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ َﺎ‬ َِ (‫ﻫ َُﻮ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ُﻪ‬
(‫َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ُﳬَﺎ( َ ْﳓ ُﻦ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُﻨَﺎ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ُﳬَﺎ‬ (‫ُ َﳘﺎ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ ُ َﻤﺎ‬ (‫ُ َﳘﺎ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ ُ َﻤﺎ‬
(‫َٔاﻧ ُ َّْﱳ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ (‫َٔاﻧ ُ ْْﱲ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﺑُ ُ ْﲂ‬ (‫ﻫ َُّﻦ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ ُ َّﻦ‬ (‫ُ ْﱒ ) ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ ُ ْﻢ‬

Thumb Finger 4 Finger 3 Finger 2 Finger 1

(‫َٔاانَ ) َر ِ ّﰉ‬ (‫َٔاﻧ َْﺖ ) َرﺑ ُّ َﻚ( َٔاﻧ ِْﺖ ) َرﺑ ُّ ِﻚ‬ (‫ﱔ ) َرﲠُّ َﺎ‬ َِ (‫ﻫ َُﻮ ) َرﺑ ُّ ُﻪ‬
(‫َ ْﳓ ُﻦ ) َرﺑُّﻨَﺎ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ ) َرﺑ ُّ ُﳬَﺎ( َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ ) َرﺑ ُّ ُﳬَﺎ‬ (‫ُ َﳘﺎ ) َرﲠُّ ُ َﻤﺎ‬ (‫ُ َﳘﺎ ) َرﲠُّ ُ َﻤﺎ‬
(‫َٔاﻧ ُ ْْﱲ ) َرﺑ ُّ ُ ْﲂ( َٔاﻧ ُ َّْﱳ ) َرﺑ ُّ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ (‫ﻫ َُّﻦ ) َرﲠُّ ُ َّﻦ‬ (‫ُ ْﱒ ) َرﲠُّ ُ ْﻢ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the word ‫ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑُــﻬَـﺎ‬is “her
book” and it is a ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the word ‫ َرﺑــُّــﻬَـﺎ‬is “her lord”
and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
 73

3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ ﻗَــ ْﻮ ُﻣـﻨَـﺎ‬is present in the verse Quran
(15:18:15). Its meaning is “our people” and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Specialty of five attached pronouns of ‫ ُﻫــ َــﻮﻮ‬, ‫ ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ ُﻫـ ْـﻢﻢ‬, ‫ ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦﻦ‬
َّ ‫ُﻫــ‬
(Vocative harmony) (Seq # 39)
39)
The five attached pronouns ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬will go through a
small change for the purpose of vocative harmony (something easy to say).
There is no Arabic grammar rule for this change.
Letter ‫ ه‬of 5 attached pronouns ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬will get Kasrah
(ِ‫)ــ‬, If they are preceded by
i) the Arabic letter ‫( ي‬Example: ‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬or
ii) an Arabic letter with Kasrah (ِ‫( )ـــ‬Example: ‫) ِﻓــ ْﻲ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑِــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬
This is the reason we say ‫ ﺑِــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬instead of ‫ ﺑِــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬and we say ‫ َﻋـﻠَـﳱـ ِْﻢ‬instead of
‫ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬etc. As one more example, observe the Kasrah (ِ‫ )ــ‬on the letter ‫ ه‬of
5 attached pronouns ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬in the below table with
preposition “in”.
Thumb Finger 4 Finger 3 Finger 2 Finger 1
(‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ) ِﻓ َّــﻲ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْـ ِﺖ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـ ِﻚ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـ َﻚ‬ (‫ﱔ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـﻬَـﺎ‬ َِ (‫ُﻫــ َﻮ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـ ِﻪ‬
(‫ــﻦ ) ِﻓ ْﻴـﻨَﺎ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻓ ْﻴ ُﳬَﺎ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻓ ْﻴ ُﳬَﺎ‬ (‫ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـﻬِـ َﻤﺎ‬ (‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـﻬِـ َﻤﺎ‬
(‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َّﻦ ) ِﻓ ْﻴ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ (‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ ) ِﻓ ْﻴ ُ ْﲂ‬ (‫ُﻫــ َّﻦ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـﻬ َِّـﻦ‬ (‫ُﻫـ ْﻢ ) ِﻓﻴ ْـﻬ ِْـﻢ‬
 74

No corresponding
corresponding word for the English word ‘it’ (Seq # 40)
In Arabic language there is no corresponding word for the English word
‘it’. We should use ‫ ُﻫــ َﻮ‬or ‫ ِﻫــ َﻲ‬for the English word ‘it’ according to the
gender of the object. If the noun is masculine ‫ ﻫُــ َﻮ‬is used to refer it and if it
is feminine ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬is used to refer it.
Introduction to Arabic Plurals (Seq # 41)
Arabic plurals are categorized mainly into two categories, Regular plurals
and Broken plurals. Regular plurals are further divided into sound
masculine plurals and sound feminine plurals. Regular plurals will have
regular forms (Masculine==> ‫ ﻳــﻦ‬, ‫ )ون‬and (Feminine ==> ‫ )ات‬in the end of
the words.
 75

Reader is recommended to keep this chart in mind.

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In Arabic language plurals are divided into
two broad categories namely: Regular plurals and Broken plurals.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In Arabic language sound masculine plurals
will ends with regular forms (‫ ْون‬, ‫)ﻳْــﻦ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: In Arabic language sound masculine plurals
and sound feminine plurals are under the main category of broken
plurals.
Sound masculine plurals (Seq # 42)
The sound masculine plurals are the plurals for masculine nouns. These
plurals are sound because they have regular plural endings (regular
pattern). They end with ‫ ْون‬in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case (sign of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬is ‫ )و‬and ‫ ﻳ ْــــﻦ‬in
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case (sign of ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬is ‫)ي‬.
Observe the following table and their corresponding endings.
S.no Singular ٌ‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬
َ ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ‬
1 ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ َن ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ٌﻢ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ‬
َ ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْــﺆ ِﻣـ ِﻨـ ْﻴ‬
2 ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْــﺆ ِﻣـﻨُ ْــﻮ َن ُﻣ ْــﺆ ِﻣــ ٌﻦ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ ْــﺆ ِﻣـ ِﻨـ ْﻴ‬
3 ‫ــﻦ َﻛـﺎ ِﻓ ُــﺮ ْو َن َﻛـﺎ ِﻓ ٌــﺮ‬ َ ْ‫ــﻦ َﻛـﺎ ِﻓــ ِﺮﻳ‬ َ ْ‫َﻛـﺎ ِﻓــ ِﺮﻳ‬
 76

4 ‫َﺻـﺎﺑ ٌِــﺮ‬ ‫َﺻـﺎﺑ ُِــﺮ ْو َن‬ ‫ــﻦ‬

َ ْ‫ــﻦ َﺻـﺎﺑِــ ِﺮﻳ‬
َ ْ‫َﺻـﺎﺑِــ ِﺮﻳ‬
5 ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـﻠُ ْــﻮ َن‬ َ ‫ــﻦ َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬
6 ‫ـﺚ‬ٌ ‫َﻣـﺎ ِﻛ‬ ‫َﻣـﺎ ِﻛـﺜ ُْــﻮ َن‬ َ ‫َﻣـﺎ ِﻛـ ِﺜـﻴ ْـ َـﻦ َﻣـﺎ ِﻛـ ِﺜـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬

The meaning of ‫ـﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـﺎ ِﻛ‬is “one who resides”. Observer sound masculine
plurals in the verse Quran (11:9:112).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verse Quran (15:18:2) the word
َ ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤ ْــﺆ ِﻣـ ِﻨـ ْﻴ‬is not ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
‫ــﻦ‬
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verse Quran (15:18:29) the phrase
‫ــﻦ‬ ّ ٰ ‫ ِﻟ‬is Jaar-Majroor and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ـﻠــﻈـ ِﻠـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ‬ َ ‫ ٰﻇـ ِﻠـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verse Quran (15:18:49), there are two
sound masculine plurals ( ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣــ ْﺠــ ِﺮ ِﻣـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫) ُﻣ ْـﺸـ ِﻔـ ِﻘـ ْﻴ‬.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The verse Quran (15:18:50) has a Jaar-Majroor
with sound masculine plural (‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫) ٰﻇـ ِﻠـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ‬.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The verse Quran (15:18:53) does not have any
sound masculine plural.
Sound feminine plurals (Seq # 43)
Sound feminine plurals are the plurals for feminine gender singular nouns.
They always end with ‫ات‬. ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case has two Dhammah (two pesh), and
 77

ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬, ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬cases have two kasrah (two zair) (extreme specialty). See
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
below examples carefully.
S.no Singular ٌ‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬
1 ‫ـﺎت ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـﺎ ٍت ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـﺎ ٍت ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤ‬
2 ‫ﴩ َﻛـ ٌﺔ‬ ِ ْ ‫ـﺎت ُﻣـ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ ْـﺸــ ِﺮ َﻛـﺎ ٍت ُﻣ ْـﺸــ ِﺮ َﻛـﺎ ٍت ُﻣ ْـﺸــ ِﺮ َﻛ‬
3 ‫ٰاﻳَـ ٌﺔ‬ ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ٰ‫ٰاﻳ‬ ‫ٰاﻳٰــ ٍت‬ ‫ٰاﻳٰــ ٍت‬
Note: Observe sound masculine and feminine plurals in the verse Quran
(22:33:35).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The plurals for the word ‫( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬a word) are
ٌ ‫) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤ‬, ‫ﺎت‬
‫ـﺎت‬ ٍ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ‬
ُ ْ‫ ) َﻣـﻨ‬and ‫ـﺎت‬ ٍ ‫) َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر( َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The plural ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case of the word ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ٰ‫( ٰاﻳ‬a
sign, a verse) is present in the verse Quran (16:18:105).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The plural ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case of the word ‫ َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is
present in the verse Quran (16:18:109).
Broken Plurals (Seq # 44)
Any plural that does not fall under sound category are broken plurals. It
means that they will not have ‫ ْو َن‬, ‫ ﻳْــ َﻦ‬pattern of sound masculine plurals
and ‫ َات‬pattern of sound feminine plurals (they will have irregular or
broken pattern). And these plurals may be triptote or diptote.
 78

Below are some examples of broken plurals in the format (singular, plural,
meaning) organized as 5 words per day to have easy practice and
memorization.
Day # 1
(‫ﻳ َــ ْﻮ ٌم‬, ‫ َٔاﻳ ّ َـﺎ ٌم‬, days), (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ْ‫ﻗَـﻠ‬, ‫ ُﻗـﻠُ ْــﻮ ٌب‬, hearts), (‫ر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ٌل‬,َ ‫ ُر ُﺳـ ٌﻞ‬, messengers), (‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬,
ٌ ‫ ُﻛـ ُﺘ‬, books), (‫ﺻـﺪَ ٌر‬,َ ‫ ُﺻـﺪُ ْو ٌر‬, chests).
‫ـﺐ‬
Day # 2
(‫ر ُﺟـ ٌﻞ‬,َ ‫ ِر َﺟـﺎ ٌل‬, men), (‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ َ‫ ِﻋـﻨ‬, ‫ـﺎب‬
ٌ ‫ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﺑُـ ُﻴ ْــﻮ ٌت‬, houses), (‫و ْﺟـ ٌﻪ‬,َ ‫ ُو ُﺟ ْــﻮ ٌﻩ‬, faces), (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ َ‫ َاﻋْـﻨ‬,
grapes), (‫ــﺢ‬ ٌ ْ‫رﻳ‬,ِ ‫ـﺎح‬
ٌ َ ‫ ِرﻳ‬, winds).
Day # 3
(‫ َﺟـ َﺒـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫ ِﺟـ َﺒـﺎ ٌل‬, mountains), (‫ َﻋـ َﻤـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫ َاﻋْـ َﻤـﺎ ٌل‬, deeds), (‫ َﻋـ ْﺒ ٌﺪ‬, ‫ ِﻋـ َﺒـﺎ ٌد‬, servants),
(‫ َﻋـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬, ‫ َاﻋْـ ُﻴــ ٌﻦ‬/‫ ُﻋـ ُﻴ ْــﻮ ٌن‬, eyes), (‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔ ٌـﺲ‬, ‫ َاﻧْـ ُﻔ ٌـﺲ‬/‫ﻧ ُـ ُﻔ ْــﻮ ٌس‬, souls).
Day # 4
(‫ـﻚ‬ ٌ َ‫ َﻣـﻠ‬, ‫ َﻣـ ٰﻠ ٓـ ِﺌـ َﻜـ ٌﺔ‬,angels), (‫ ِا ْﻣ َــﺮ َء ٌة‬, ‫ ِﻧ ْـﺴ َــﻮ ٌة‬/‫ ِﻧ َـﺴـﺎ ٌء‬, women), (‫ﺷــﻬ ٌْــﺮ‬,َ ‫ َا ْﺷــﻬ ٌُــﺮ‬/‫ﺷــﻬ ُْــﻮ ٌر‬,ُ
months) .
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The broken plural word of the singular word
“heart” is present in the verse Quran (15:18:14) and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
 79

2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ٰﻛـ ِﻔــ ِﺮﻳ‬in the verse Quran
(16:18:100) is not a broken Plural.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The broken plural word of the singular word
“messenger” is present in the verse Quran (16:18:106) and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ٌﺎف‬.
All the broken plurals are treated as feminine singular (Seq # 45)
In Arabic language broken plurals are treated as feminine singular. They
are considered as feminine singular when referred by demonstrative
pronouns, personal pronouns, relative pronouns and verbs. In the below
table, demonstrative pronoun ‫( ِﺗـﻠْـ َﻚ‬that {feminine singular}) is used for
referring nouns which are broken plurals. Knowledge of broken plurals
will come by time. The reader should keep on observing them. There are
exceptions to this rule which will be explained later on.
Treatment as
Broken
feminine Phrase example Reference
plural
singular
‫ ِﺗـﻠْـ َﻚ ُّاﻟﺮ ُﺳـ ُﻞ‬those messengers ‫ُر ُﺳـ ٌﻞ‬ Quran (3:2:253)
‫ِﺗـﻠْـ َﻚ ْ َٔاﻻ ْﻣـﺜ َـ ُﺎل‬ those examples ‫َٔا ْﻣـﺜ َـﺎ ٌل‬ Quran (28:59:21)
‫ِﺗـﻠْـ َﻚ اﻟْـ َﺎﻳَّـﺎ ُم‬ those days ‫َاﻳَّـﺎ ٌم‬ Quran (4:3:140)
 80

Duals (Seq # 46)

In Arabic language, Duals also have special pattern. ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬case
has ‫( َا ِن‬aani) as ending. ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬have ‫( ﻳْــ ِﻦ‬aiyni) as ending.
See below table.
S.no Singular ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ‫َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
1 ‫ُﻣـ ْﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ِﺎن ُﻣـ ْﺴـ ِﻠـ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ُﻣـ ْﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬ ‫ُﻣـ ْﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬
2 ‫َر ُﺟـ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َر ُﺟـ َﻼ ِن‬ ‫َر ُﺟـﻠَـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬ ‫َر ُﺟـﻠَـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬
3 ‫ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ َﻤـ ِﺎن ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ َﻤـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬ ‫ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ َﻤـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬

Note:
Note (1) Observe the two easts and the two wests in the verse Quran
(27:55:17) (Translation: {He is} Lord of the two easts and the two wests).
In this verse they are ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬because they are ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
ِ ‫( ِﻓ ْــﻲ ﻳ َ ْــﻮ َﻣـ ْﻴ‬in two days) is a ‫ـﺎر َﻣ ْﺠ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬
(2) ‫ــﻦ‬ ٌ ‫ َﺟ‬construction in the
verse Quran (2:2:203).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The dual form of the word ‫( ِﺣــ ْﺰ ٌب‬a party) is
present in the verse Quran (15:18:12) and it is not ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The two dual forms are present in the verse
Quran (15:18:32) and they are of the words ‫( َر ُﺟـ ٌﻞ‬a man) and ‫( َﺟـﻨَّـ ٌﺔ‬a
garden).
 81

3) State TRUE or FALSE: The dual form of the word “an orphan” is
present in the verse Quran (16:18:82).
Adjectives (Seq # 47)
Adjective is a word that qualifies or describes a noun. As an example, in
the phrase “tall man”, the word “tall” is an adjective that is qualifying the
noun “man”. In English language the adjective comes before the noun
being qualified. But in Arabic language the adjective comes after the noun
being qualified. The adjective in Arabic is termed as ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ‬or ‫ِﺻـ َﻔـ ٌﺔ‬
(property/quality). The noun being qualified is termed as ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬or
‫ َﻣ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ٌف‬. The combination is called as ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬. ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ‬should match
‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬in the following.
1) Case
If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
If the ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬.
Example of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case: ‫اب َﻋــ ِﻈـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬ ٌ ‫( َﻋـ َﺬ‬a great torment, Quran (1:2:7))
Example of ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case: ‫( ُﻗ ْــﺮ ٰءﻧ ًـﺎ َﻋ َــﺮﺑِـﻴًّـﺎ‬an Arabic Quran, Quran
(12:12:2))
Example of ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case: ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴـ ٍﻢ‬ ِ ‫( ِﻟـﻴَ ْــﻮ ٍم َﻋ‬for a great day, Quran
(30:83:5))
2) Indefinite/Definite
 82

If the ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is indefinite then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be indefinite.
Example: ‫( َﻋـﺪُ ٌّو ُّﻣـﺒِـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬clear enemy, Quran (2:2:168))
If the ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is definite then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be definite.
Example: ‫اﻟــﺼ َــﺮ َاط اﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ِﻘـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬ ِ ّ (the straight path, Quran (1:1:5))
3) Gender
If the ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is masculine then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be masculine.
Examples: ‫ـﺖ َﻛﺒِـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬A big house), ‫( َٔا ٌخ َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ ٌـﺮ‬small brother)
If the ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is feminine then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be feminine.
Example: ‫( ُٔا ْﺧـ ٌﺖ َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴــ َﺮ ٌة‬small sister)
4) Number
If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is dual then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be dual.
Example: ‫( ُﻏـ َﻼ َﻣـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ َﻤـ ْﻴــ ِﻦ‬two orphan boys, Quran(16:18:82))
If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬is plural then ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬should also be plural.
Examples: (1) ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫( ﻗَ ْــﻮ ٍم ُّﻣــ ْﺠــ ِﺮ ِﻣـ ْﻴ‬criminal people, Quran (27:51:32))
(2) ‫( ﻗَ ْــﻮ ٌم َﻃـﺎ ُﻏ ْــﻮ َن‬transgressing people, Quran (27:51:53))
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:2). The phrases
‫( ﺑ َـ ْﺎ ًﺳـﺎ َﺷـ ِﺪﻳْـﺪً ا‬a severe punishment) and ‫( َٔا ْﺟــ ًﺮا َﺣـ َﺴـﻨًـﺎ‬a good reward) are
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:8). The phrase
‫( َﺻـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـﺪً ا ُﺟــ ُﺮ ًزا‬a barren soil) is ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ َﻣـﻨْـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬.
 83

3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:74). The phrase
‫( َﺷـ ْﻴـﺎًٔ ﻧ ُّـ ْﻜــ ًﺮا‬an evil thing) is not a ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ٌﺖ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌت‬.
No Arabic word for helping verbs of English like ‘am’, ‘is’,
‘is’, ‘are’ (Seq
# 48)
In Arabic language there is no corresponding word for helping verbs of
English like ‘am’, ‘is’, ‘are’ etc. In Arabic language there is no need of such
helping verbs.
Example: He is a student. It is translated in Arabic as ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُــﻮ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬.
This is a pen. It is translated in Arabic as ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا ﻗَـﻠَـ ٌﻢ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “He is
Mohammed” is ‫ُــﻮ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “She is
Fatimah” is ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻃـ َﻤـ ُﺔ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “This is a great
ِ ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا ﻓَ ْــﻮ ٌز َﻋ‬. The two words underlined are ‫ـﺖ‬
success” is ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬
‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬.
Introduction to Nominal sentence (Seq # 49)
Nominal sentence (‫ )اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬is a sentence that starts with a noun
or pronoun. The basic structure ِٕ of a nominal sentence is as below.
 84

Nominal sentence = Subject (‫ ) َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬+ predicate (‫)اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬
Subject is a noun or pronoun about which sentence is talking about.
Predicate is a part of the sentence that tells us about the subject. Predicate
provides some news or information about the subject. We should try to
find out subject and predicate whenever we get a nominal sentence.
Example
He is Mohammed.
‫ُــﻮ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬.
Here ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ ﻫ‬is the subject, because the sentence is starting with it and the
sentence is talking about it. ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬is the predicate, because it is giving the
information about the subject ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “He is a doctor” (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻫــ َﻮ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬is a
nominal sentence because it starts with a noun (remember pronoun is
under the category of noun in Arabic language).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬means “he did”. This word is a
verb. The sentence ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬Mohammed did it) is not a nominal
sentence because it starts with a verb ‫ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “This is a great
ِ ‫ٰـﺬا ﻓَ ْــﻮ ٌز َﻋ‬
success” is ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬. In this sentence ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is the subject.
 85

Subject (‫ ) َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬is always ‫( َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬Seq # 50)
In the nominal sentence the subject is always ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. The subject is always
noun or pronoun.
Examples
Subject translation ‫اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬
English translation
ِٕ
(‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ I am a man (human). ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ﺑَـﺸَ ٌــﺮ‬
(‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ This is a book. ‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬
(‫ َاﻟْـ َ ْﳫـ ُﺐ ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬The dog is on the wall. ‫ـﺐ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْ ِﺠﺪَ ا ِر‬ ُ ْ‫َاﻟْـ َﻜـﻠ‬
(‫ ا َّﻟﺴ ِﻔ ْﻴﻨَ ُﺔ ) َﻣـ ْـﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬The ship is in the sea. ‫ا َّﻟﺴ ِﻔ ْﻴﻨَ ُﺔ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬
(‫اﻟﺼــَ ْﺨــ َﺮ ُة ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ ّ The rock is big. ‫اﻟﺼــ ْﺨــ َﺮ ُة َﻛـ ِﺒـ ْﻴــ َﺮ ٌة‬
َّ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “I am sick” (‫ ) َٔاﻧ َـﺎ َﻣــ ِﺮﻳْــ ٌﺾ‬is a
nominal sentence. The subject is ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬and it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “This is a ship” (‫ ) ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ َﺳـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ٌﺔ‬is a
nominal sentence. The subject is ‫ ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬and it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “She is Zainab” (‫ ) ِﻫ َــﻲ َزﻳْـﻨَـ ُﺐ‬is a
nominal sentence. The subject is ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬and it is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
 86

Difference between a Sentence (‫ ) ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬and a phrase (‫)ﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ‬
‫) ِﺷ‬
(Seq # 51)
A sentence is a group of words that provides a complete meaning and
sense.
ٌ ‫ُــﻮ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
Sentence example: ‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫( ﻫ‬He is a doctor).
The above group of words provides a complete meaning.
A phrase is a group of words that does not provide a complete meaning or
sense. Phrase is incomplete in meaning.
Phrase Example: ‫( َﻋـ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ِار‬on the wall)
The above group of words does not provide a complete meaning. Like a
simple question to this phrase can be “What is there on the wall ?”. Thus it
needs an answer to make it meaningful.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫( ِﰲ اﻟْ َﺒ ْﺤ ِﺮ‬in the sea) is a complete sentence.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ﺎب ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ِار‬
ُ ‫( ِﻛـﺘَـ‬Book of Mohammed
is on the wall) is a complete sentence.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ‫( ٰذ ِﻟـ َﻚ ِﻣــ ْﻦ ٰاﻳٰـ ِﺖ‬That is from the signs of
Allah) is a complete sentence.
 87

َ ) (Seq # 52)
5 types of Predicate (‫)خبَـ ٌر‬
Predicate (‫ )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬in a nominal sentence is of 5 types as below. These types
are as follows.
• One word
• Prepositional phrase (a phrase that includes a preposition)
• Adverb from adverbial phrase (a phrase that includes an adverb)
• A complete nominal sentence (‫)اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬
ِٕ
• A complete verbal sentence (‫)اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬
These types of predicates will be discussed in the next few topics.
One word predicate (Seq # 53)
Consider the following English questions and single word associated
answers.
What is Mohammed ? Answer: doctor
What is this ? Answer: house
What is that ? Answer: wall
The answer or information or predicate in the above statements is just a
single word. Thus a nominal sentence can have single word predicate.
 88

Single word predicate is always ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬and should match the subject in
gender (masculine/feminine) and number (singular/dual/plural).
Examples
I am a human being.
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ﺑَـﺸَ ٌــﺮ‬

Sentence analysis
‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬
‫ﺑَـﺸَ ٌــﺮ = اﻟْــ َﺨـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬
Other similar examples are below in the table. The underlined words are
predicates.
English sentence Arabic sentence
He is Mohammed. ‫ُﻫــ َﻮ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬
This is a house. ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ٌﺖ‬
This is an eye. (Eye is
‫ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ َﻋـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬
feminine)
I am sick. ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ َﻣــ ِﺮﻳْــ ٌﺾ‬
I am a doctor. ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ َﻃـ ِﺒـ ْﻴ ٌﺐ‬
This is a wall. ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا ِﺟـﺪَ ٌار‬
 89

That is a cave. ‫ـﻚ َﻛــﻬ ٌْـﻒ‬ َ ‫ٰذ ِﻟ‬

That is a wall. ‫ـﻚ ِﺟـﺪَ ٌار‬ َ ‫ٰذ ِﻟ‬
That is a book. ٌ َ‫ـﻚ ِﻛـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ َ ‫ٰذ ِﻟ‬
That is a ship. ‫ـﻚ َﺳـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ٌﺔ‬ َ ْ‫ِﺗـﻠ‬
Mohammed is a
‫ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ٌﻢ‬
muslim.
Zainab is a muslim. ‫ـﺐ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬ ُ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
We are muslims. ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ َن‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
We are reformers. ‫ــﻦ ُﻣ ْــﺼـ ِﻠــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
Allah is great. ‫اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ َٔا ْﻛـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬
Reader is strongly recommended to write simple nominal sentences with
single word predicate for extra practice.
Note: Two single word predicates can come for one subject. Refer to the
last part of Quran (1:2:137) and its appropriate translation is “He is the
All-listener, the All-knower”. Just observe that in English they are
separated by a comma (,).
Exercises
 90

1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “The wall is

tall” is ‫ا ِﳉﺪَ ُار َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻞ‬. The word ‫( َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻞ‬tall) is the one word predicate
(‫ ) َﺧـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬in this sentence.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “The ship is
small” is ‫اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴــ َﺮ ٌة‬. The word ‫( َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴــ َﺮ ٌة‬small) is the one word
predicate (‫ ) َﺧـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬in this sentence.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “He is an
oppressor” is ‫ ُﻫــ َﻮ َﻇـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﻢ‬. The word ‫( َﻇـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﻢ‬oppressor) is the one word
predicate (‫ ) َﺧـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬in this sentence.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ ‫( ٰذﻟ ِـ َﻚ ِﻛـﺘَـ‬That is a book) does not have
single word predicate.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫( ِﻫ َــﻲ َزﻳْـﻨَـ ُﺐ‬She is Zainab) does not have single
word predicate.
‫ــاف إِلَــ ْيــ ِه‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ــاف ُمــ‬
ٌ ‫ض‬ َ ‫ ُمــ‬comes in the position of subject or
predicate (Seq # 54)
When ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬comes in the position of subject or predicate in
ِٕ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬will act as the subject or predicate.
the nominal sentence, then only ‫ـﺎف‬
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is just some additional information to the sentence. See the
ِٕ
example below, the word book is subject and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
Example 1: ‫ﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ِار‬
ُ ‫( ِﻛـﺘَـ‬Book of Haamid is on the wall)
 91

As another example below, the word daughter is predicate and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
Note here that ‫ َزﻳْـﻨَـ َﺐ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬and diptote.
Example 2: ‫( َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ِﺑـ ْﻨـ ُﺖ َزﻳْـﻨَـ َﺐ‬I am daughter of Zainab)
In the below example ‫ َر ُّب‬is predicate.
Example 3: ‫( اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ َرﺑُّـﻨَـﺎ‬Allah is our lord).
In the below example ‫ َر ُّب‬is subject.
Example 4: ‫( َرﺑُّـﻨَـﺎ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ‬Our lord is Allah).
In the below example ‫ َر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ُل‬is predicate.
Example 5: ‫( ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َّر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ُل اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬Mohammed is messenger of Allah, Quran
(26:48:29)).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫( ﺑ َـﺎ ُب اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﺴــ ِﺠـ ِﺪ َﻛـﺒـِ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬Door of the masjid is big)
is a nominal sentence and ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫ ﺑ َـ‬is the subject (‫)اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫اﻟﻄﺎ ِﻟ ِﺐ َﺣﺎ ِﻣ ٌﺪ‬ ّ ‫ﰟ‬ ُ ْ ‫( ِا‬Name of the student is
Haamid) is a nominal sentence and ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ‬is the subject (‫)اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ﷲ‬ ِ ‫( اﻟْـ َﻜـ ْﻌـ َﺒـ ُﺔ ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ُﺖ‬The kaabah is house of
Allah) is a nominal sentence and ‫ ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ُﺖ‬is predicate (‫) َﺧـﺒـَـ ٌـﺮ‬.
 92

َ ) (second type) (Seq # 55)

Prepositional phrase as a predicate (‫)خبــ َ ٌر‬
Consider the following English question sentence and the associated
answer.
Where is book of Haamid ? Answer: on the wall
The answer or information or predicate for the above question is a
prepositional phrase. Thus a nominal sentence can have prepositional
phrase as predicate. Examine the below sentence.
‫ـﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ َﻋـﻠ َــﻰ اﻟْ ِـﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬
ُ َ‫( ِﻛـﺘ‬Book of Haamid is on the wall)
Sentence analysis with description in Arabic language is as below.
‫ـﺎب = اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َو ُﻫــ َﻮ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ٌ َ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ = ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
‫ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْـ ِﺠﺪَ ِار = َﺟـ ٌﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ َﺧـ َﺒــ ٌﺮ‬
So, the whole prepositional phrase is the predicate in this case. This
prepositional phrase is providing us the information or ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬about the
book of Haamid. Another example is ‫( اﻟْــ َﺤـ ْﻤـﺪُ ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬The praise is for Allah)
where ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬is a prepositional phrase. Few other examples are given below.
English sentence Arabic sentence
He is in the masjid. ِ ‫ُــﻮ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْـﺴ‬
‫ــﺠـ ِﺪ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬
 93

The ship is in the sea. ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﺒــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬
َّ
I am in big house. ‫ـﺖ َﻛـﺒِـ ْﻴــ ٍﺮ‬
ٍ ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ﺑَـ ْﻴ‬
The pen is for
‫اﻟْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ُﻢ ِﻟــ َﺤـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬
Haamid.
He is from London. ‫ــﻦ ﻟَـ ْﻨـﺪَ َن‬
ْ ‫ُﻫ َــﻮ ِﻣ‬
This is from the
favour of my lord.
‫ـﻞ َرِﺑ ّ ْــﻰ‬ ْ ‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻣ‬
ِ ْ‫ــﻦ ﻓَــﻀ‬
The healing (cure) is
‫ــﻦ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬
َ ‫اﻟـﺸـ َﻔـﺎ ٓ ُء ِﻣ‬
ِّ
from Allah.

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In the sentence ‫( اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ ِﰲ اﻟْﺒـَــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ‬The ship is
in the sea), ‫ ِﰲ اﻟْﺒـَ ْﺤ ِﺮ‬is the prepositional phrase predicate ( ‫َﺟ ْـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْور‬
‫)ﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
ِ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In the sentence ‫( ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬Mohammed
is in the cave), ‫ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬is the prepositional phrase predicate ( ‫َﺟ ْـﺎر‬
‫) َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْور ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the sentence ‫( ِﻛـﺘَـﺎ ِﺑــ ْﻲ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ِار‬My book is
on the wall) has prepositional phrase predicate.
 94

َ ) (third type) (Seq # 56)

Adverbial phrase as a predicate (‫)خبــ َــ ٌر‬
The third type of predicate is adverbial phrase. Consider the below
example.
‫( ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ِﺘ ْــﻲ َﺧـﻠْ َـﻒ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْ ِـﻒ‬My house is behind the cave)
Sentence analysis with description in Arabic language is as below.
‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ُــﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬ َ ‫ﺑ َـ ْﻴـ ُﺖ = اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َو ﻫ‬
‫ـﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ي= ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
ٌ ‫َﺧـﻠْ َـﻒ = َﻇ ْــﺮ ٌف ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ َﺧـ َﺒ‬
‫ـــﺮ‬
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ = ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
Note that in the adverbial phrase we only consider the adverb as the
predicate. The last word ‫ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬is considered as ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬, but not as the
ِٕ
part of predicate. Consider another example below.
‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ‫ـﺖ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻜـﺘ‬ َ ‫( اﻟْــ َﺤـ ِﻘـ ْﻴـ َﺒـ ُﺔ ﺗ َــ ْﺤ‬The purse is under the table).
Few more examples are given below.
English sentence Arabic sentence
He is with Haamid. ‫ُــﻮ َﻣـ َﻊ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬
She is under the tree. ‫اﻟـﺸــ َﺠ َــﺮ ِة‬
َّ ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ِﻫ َــﻲ ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬
 95

I am near the door. ِ ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ﻟَـﺪَ ى اﻟْـ َﺒ‬

‫ـﺎب‬
We are with you (all). ‫ــﻦ َﻣـ َﻌـ ُﻜـ ْﻢ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
Allah is with the
patient ones. ‫ــﻦ‬ ّ ٰ ‫اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ َﻣـ َﻊ‬
َ ْ‫اﻟــﺼـﺒِــ ِﺮﻳ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “The treasure
is under the wall” is ‫اﻟْـ َﻜـ ْﻨ ُــﺰ ﺗَــ ْﺤ َﺖ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬. The word ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺤ َﺖ‬is an
adverbial phrase predicate.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “The fish is
under the ship” is ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬ َّ ‫اﻟْ ُﺤ ْـﻮ ُت ﺗَــ ْﺤـ َﺖ‬. The word ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺤ َﺖ‬is an
adverbial phrase predicate.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “The king is in the ship” ( ‫اﻟْـ َﻤـ ِﻠـ ُﻚ‬
‫ ) ِﰲ اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬has an adverbial phrase predicate.
Predicate can come before in nominal sentence (Seq # 57)
Consider the following statement.
‫ُﻣـﻠْـ ُﻚ اﻟـ َّﺴـ َﻤـ َﺎو ِات َو ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬
Its corresponding English translation is “The kingdom of heavens and
earth is for Allah”. The text ‫ ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬is ‫اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬. In a nominal sentence it is
possible that the predicate (‫ )اﻟْــ َﺨـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬can come in advance. The sentence
with ‫ )اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ( ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬in advance is as below
 96

‫ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ ُﻣـﻠْـ ُﻚ اﻟـ َّﺴـ َﻤـ َﺎو ِات َو ْ َٔاﻻ ْر ِض‬

‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ ُﻣـ َﻘ ِّـﺪ ْم = ِﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ ‫( َﺟ‬predicate in advance)
‫ُــﻮ ُﻣــﻀَ ـﺎف = ُﻣـﻠْـ ُﻚ‬ َ ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َو ﻫ‬
َّ = ‫ـﺎف ِٕاﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤـ َﺎو ِات‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ = و‬
‫“ َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر = ا ٔﻻ ْر ِض‬is connected” to ‫اﻟﺴـ َﻤـ َﺎو ِات‬
َّ
Translation: For Allah, is the kingdom of heavens and earth.
Few more examples are below.
‫ﻟَــﻬ ُْـﻢ َٔا ْﺟ ٌــﺮ َﺣ َـﺴــ ٌﻦ‬
Translation: For them, {there} is a good reward.
ٌ ‫ ﻟَــﻬ ُْـﻢ َﻋ َـﺬ‬Quran (1:2:7)
‫اب َﻋ ِـﻈـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬
Translation: For them, {there} is a great torment (punishment).
‫ِﰲ ُﻗﻠُﻮﲠِ ِ ْﻢ َﻣ َﺮ ٌض‬ Quran (1:2:10)
Translation: In their hearts, {there} is a disease.
‫اﻟـﺴـﺎ َﻋـ ِﺔ‬
َّ ‫ ِﻋـ ْﻨـﺪَ ٗﻩ ِﻋـﻠْـ ُﻢ‬Quran (25:44:85)
Translation: with {near} him, is the knowledge of the Hour.
 97

Note: Prepositional Phrase (‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ٌ ‫ ) َﺟ‬or adverbial phrase ( ‫َﻇــ ْﺮ ٌف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ ))ااﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬cannot be ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬in the nominal sentence.
ِٕ
Nominal sentence as Predicate (fourth type) (Seq # 58)
In a nominal sentence, a complete another nominal sentence can come as
predicate. To identify this predicate, the whole sentence has to be observed.
Let us take a simple example first then try to convert it such that another
nominal sentence will come as predicate.
Bilal’s son is a student. Its translation is ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫وﻟَـﺪُ ِﺑـﻼلٍ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟ‬.َ Now let us
rephrase this English statement as “Bilal, his son is a student”. This
statement can be written as below with grammatical analysis.
‫ِﺑـ َﻼ ٌل َوﻟ َـﺪُ ُﻩ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﺐ‬
Grammatical Analysis:
Arabic Words Grammatical Analysis
‫ِﺑـ َﻼ ٌل‬ ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
‫اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ َو ِﻫ َـﻲ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
ٌ ‫َوﻟ َــﺪُﺪُ ُﻩ َﻃــﺎﺎ ِﻟـ‬
‫ـﺐ‬
‫ﺐ‬
ٍ‫ِٕ ِﻟـ ِﺒـ َﻼل‬
ُ‫َوﻟ َـﺪ‬ ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ُه‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
‫َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﺐ‬ (type 1‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
 98

So the whole underlined sentence became a predicate for top level ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬
Bilal. Few more examples are given in the below table.
English sentence Arabic sentence
Bilal, he is in the
ِ ‫ُــﻮ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﺒـ ْﻴ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ِﺑـ َﻼ ٌل ﻫ‬
house.
Book of Bilal, it is
small. َ ‫ـﺎب ِﺑـ َﻼلٍ ﻫ‬
‫ُــﻮ َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
Bilal, he is a teacher. َ ‫ِﺑـ َﻼ ٌل ﻫ‬
‫ُــﻮ ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر ٌس‬
The disbelievers, they
Last part of Quran (3:2:254)
are the wrongdoers.
The disbelievers, for
them is a severe Last part of Quran (25:42:26)
punishment.
Those, for them is a
Last part of Quran (25:42:42)
painful punishment.
People of paradise,
they are the Last part of Quran (28:59:20)
successful.
Exercises
 99

1) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬ َّ ‫( َﻣـ ِﻠـ ٌﻚ َوﻟ َـﺪُ ُﻩ ِﰲ‬King’s
son is in the ship) has a nominal sentence as a predicate for ‫ َﻣـ ِﻠـ ٌﻚ‬as
the top level subject.
َّ ‫( َوﻟَـﺪُ اﻟْ َﻤـ ِﻠـ ِﻚ ِﰲ‬Son of the
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬
king is in the ship) does not have any another nominal sentence as
predicate. But its predicate is a prepositional phrase predicate ( ‫ِﰲ‬
‫)اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬.
َّ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence ‫( ِﺑـﻨْـ ُﺖ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻃـ َﻤـ َﺔ َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬Daughter of
Fatimah is tall) has another nominal sentence as predicate.
Verbal sentence as Predicate (fifth type) (Seq # 59)
A verbal sentence is a sentence that starts with a verb. In a nominal
sentence, a complete verbal sentence can come as predicate. Verbs are
being discussed in upcoming topics. This topic has been included here for
the purpose of completing the types of predicate. A simple example is as
below to understand the sentence structure.
Example: Mohammed did. (‫ـــــــ َﻞ‬ ‫) ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﻓَـــــ‬. Here Mohammed is subject
‫ــــــ َﻌـــــــ‬
(‫)اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬. ‫ ﻓَــــــ َﻌـــــــ َﻞ‬is a complete verbal sentence coming as a predicate.
 100

Difference between "This book" and "This is a book" (Seq # 60)

If somebody says in English “this” then it does not convey a complete
message. The listener will ask, what does it mean ? The term “this” can be
anything. It can be a computer, table, house etc.
If somebody says in English “this book”, then also it is not providing us
the complete explanation about the book except that the term “book” has
just substituted the term “this”. Hence the phrase “this book” is also not a
complete sentence. It is not giving any complete idea or information about
the object “book”.
Upon understanding it in English let us come to Arabic language. The
term “this” is ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬in Arabic language. ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬and definite by
default. Book is substituting ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬. So book should also have same
characteristics of ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬. So “this book” translates in the Arabic as
ُ َ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬
Here ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬is termed as ‫ ﺑ َـﺪَ ٌل‬and ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬is termed as ‫ ُﻣـ ْﺒـﺪَ ٌل ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻪ‬. Badal
should match all the characteristics of Mubdal Minhu. Now let us
understand “This is a book”. This statement is a complete sentence. Its
translation is as below.
ٌ َ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬
 101

ٌ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬is the single word

In the above statement ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬is the subject and ‫ـﺎب‬
predicate.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:6). ‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا اﻟْــ َﺤـ ِﺪﻳْـ ِﺚ‬
is a Badal - Mubdal Minhu construction.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:54). ‫ ٰﻫـ َﺬا اﻟْـ ُﻘــ ْﺮ َٔا ِن‬is
Badal - Mubdal Minhu construction.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The phrase ‫ﺎب‬ُ ‫( ٰذ ِﻟـ َﻚ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘَـ‬That book) is not a
Badal - Mubdal Minhu construction.
Simple grammatical analysis of Arabic statements (Seq # 60A)
Let us try to do some grammatical analysis with the below vocabulary.
ٌ َ‫( ِﻛـﺘ‬book), ‫( َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬Haamid), ‫( َﻋ َـﲆ‬on), ‫( ِﺟـﺪَ ٌار‬wall), ‫ـﺖ‬
‫( ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬this), ‫ـﺎب‬ َ ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬
(under).
Let us demonstrate the book by using a demonstrative pronoun.
ٌ َ‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬
Arabic statement: ‫ـﺎب‬
English translation: This is a book.
Grammatical Analysis:
Arabic Words
Words Grammatical Analysis
 102

‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬ ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬

ٌ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ (type 1‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬

Let us make Haamid as book owner using the concept of ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ
ُ َ‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬
Arabic statement: ‫ـﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬
English translation: This is the book of Haamid.
Grammatical Analysis:
Arabic Words
Words Grammatical Analysis
‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬ ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
ٌ َ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف‬
‫ـﺎب‬ُ َ ‫ﻛـ ﺘ‬ِ
(type 1 ‫)ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
Let us keep the book of Haamid on the wall. We use the concept of Jaar-
Majroor as ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
Arabic statement: ‫ـﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬
ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
English translation: Book of Haamid is on the wall.
Grammatical Analysis:
 103

Arabic Words
Words Grammatical Analysis
‫ـﺎب‬ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬ ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
‫ﻋَ ٰﲆ‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﺟــ ّ ٍﺮ‬
ْ َ ‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
‫ﻋَﲆ اﻟــ ِﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬
(type 2 ‫)ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
Let us now, try to know the size of book of Haamid by using a single word
‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
Arabic statement: ‫ـﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬
ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
English translation: Book of Haamid is small.
Grammatical Analysis:
Arabic Words Grammatical Analysis
‫ـﺎب‬ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬ ٌ َ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف‬
‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
‫َﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬ (type 1‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
Let us keep book of Haamid under the wall by using adverbial phrase as
‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
Arabic statement: ‫ــﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬ِ ْ‫ـﺖ اﻟ‬ ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬
َ ‫ـﺎب َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬
English translation: Book of Haamid is under the wall.
 104

Grammatical Analysis:
Arabic Words Grammatical Analysis
‫ـﺎب‬ُ َ‫ِﻛـﺘ‬ ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
‫َﻇ ْــﺮ ٌف ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬
َ ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ـﺖ‬
(type 3
‫اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
ِٕ
Vocative particle ‫( ﻳـَﺎ‬Seq # 61)
The meaning of vocative particle ‫ ﻳ َـﺎ‬in English language is “Oh”. Example
"Oh Mohammed", "Oh Abdullah" etc.
The rules for vocative particle are below.
1) If this particle is preceded with triptote person name noun like ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬,
then the noun drops its ‫ ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬as shown below.
ُ‫ﻳ َـﺎ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪ‬
Translation: Oh Mohammed.
As examples read the verses Quran (19:26:116) and Quran (19:26:167).
2) When it is preceded with a noun with ‫ ال‬, that is definite noun then ‫َاﻳ ُّــﻬَـﺎ‬
for masculine noun and ‫ َاﻳ َّـ ُﺘــﻬَـﺎ‬for feminine noun should be inserted before.
 105

‫ﻳ َـﺎَٔﻳ ُّــﻬَـﺎ اﻟـﻨ َّـ ُﺎس‬

Translation: Oh mankind
Refer to Quran (30:89:27) for feminine example.
3) If this particle is preceded with ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬then it will make
ِٕ ِ ُ‫( َﻋـ ْﺒـﺪ‬worshipper
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُْ ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. See below when preceded before ‫ﷲ‬
of Allah), it became "Ya, Abdallah"
ِ ُ‫َﻋـ ْﺒـﺪ‬
‫ﷲ‬
‫ﷲ‬ِ َ‫ﻳ َـﺎ َﻋ ْﺒﺪ‬
Let us take another Muzaaf-Muzaaf ilaihi ‫( َرﺑُّـﻨَـﺎ‬our lord) as an example. In
order to say “Oh, our lord”, the vocative particle ‫ ﻳـَﺎ‬will come before our
lord. Thus the phrase will become as ‫اي َرﺑَّـــــﻨَﺎ‬.َ It makes the Muzaaf ‫َر ُّب‬
(‫ ) َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( َر َّب‬
ُ ‫) َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. Sometimes it is seen that the vocative particle
gets dropped leaving simply as ‫ َرﺑَّـــــﻨَـﺎ‬. Under such a case, as the ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
became ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬it has to be understood that ‫ ﻳ َـﺎ‬is hidden before ‫ َرﺑَّـــــﻨَـﺎ‬.
Let us take another example, ‫( َرِﺑ ّـــ ْﻲ‬my lord).
‫ ي‬+ ‫َرﺑ ّـِ ْــﻲ = َر ُّب‬
Adding the vocative particle ‫ َاي‬as below.
‫ ي‬+ ‫ َر ُّب‬+ ‫َاي‬
Because of ‫اي‬,َ ‫ ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع( َر ُّب‬will become ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( َر َّب‬
ُ ْ‫) َﻣـﻨ‬.
 106

‫ ي‬+ ‫ َر َّب‬+ ‫َاي‬

Ya-Mutakallim (‫ )ي‬forces ‫ َر َّب‬to become ‫ َر ِ ّب‬by putting kasrah (ِ‫ )ــ‬and the
equation will become as below.
‫ ي‬+ ‫ َر ِ ّب‬+ ‫َاي‬
Now two things ( ‫ ﻳ َـﺎ‬and ‫ )ي‬will drop as below leaving only ‫ر ِ ّب‬.َ
‫َر ِ ّب‬
Hence ‫ َرﺑ ّـِ ْـﻲ‬means “my lord”
lord” and without ‫ ي‬which is ‫ َر ِ ّب‬means “Oh, my
lord” (This is a prayer/dua)
prayer/dua).
ua) Refer to Quran verses: Quran (16:19:4),
Quran (16:20:25) and Quran (16:20:125) for ‫ر ِ ّب‬.َ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:10). The vocative
particle ‫ ﻳَـﺎ‬exists before the word ‫ َر َّﺑـﻨَـﺎ‬and it translates as “Oh, our
lord”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:14). The vocative
particle ‫ ﻳَـﺎ‬does not exist before the word ‫ َرﺑ ُّـﻨَـﺎ‬and it translates as “Our
lord”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:109). The
vocative particle ‫ ﻳَـﺎ‬does not exist before the word ‫ َرﺑ ّـِ ْــﻲ‬and it translates
as “my lord”.
 107

4) State TRUE or FALSE: The vocative particle ‫ ﻳـَﺎ‬when comes before

‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬then it will make ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
ِٕ
5) State TRUE or FALSE: When the vocative particle ‫ ﻳ َـﺎ‬is preceded with
a noun with ‫ ال‬, that is definite noun then ‫ َاﻳ ُّــﻬَـﺎ‬should be inserted
before.
ْ ‫ ﻫَـ‬and ‫( ) َٔا‬Seq # 62)
Interrogative particle (‫َـﻞﻞ‬
Interrogative particles are used to ask a question. Examples are given in the
below table.
Arabic translation translation English question
‫َﻫـ ْﻞ َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ ؟‬ Are you in the cave ?
‫َﻫـ ْﻞ َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴﻨَ ِﺔ ؟‬ Are you in the ship ?
‫َٔا َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ﻳ ُــ ْﻮ ُﺳـ ُﻒ ؟‬ Are you Yousuf ?

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:103).
Interrogative particle ‫ َﻫـ ْﻞ‬exists in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “Are you on
the wall ?” is ‫َﻫـ ْﻞ َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ ﻋَ َﲆ اﻟْــ ِﺠـﺪَ ا ِر ؟‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the sentence “Is this for you
?” is ‫ـﻞ ٰﻫـ َﺬا ﻟ َـ ْﻚ ؟‬
ْ ‫ َﻫ‬.
 108

Adding emphasis to the sentence by ‫( ل‬Seq # 63)

Consider the below sentence.
‫ِذ ْﻛ ُــﺮ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ َٔا ْﻛـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬
The meaning of the above sentence is “Remembrance of Allah is great/(the
greatest)”. Now let us add an emphasis (giving special importance or
adding more value/weight) value/weight to the sentence by adding ‫( ﻻ ُم ْاﻻﺑْـ ِﺘـﺪَ ا ِء‬beginning
‫)ل‬.). It will be as below. ِٕ

‫ﻟَــ ِذ ْﻛ ُــﺮ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ َٔا ْﻛـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬

The meaning of the above statement is now “Indeed
Indeed,
Indeed, Remembrance of
Allah is great/(the greatest)”.
Few more examples are Quran (14:16:30) (…Indeed
Indeed,
Indeed home of hereafter is
Indeed reward of hereafter is great…) and
better…), Quran (14:16:41) (…Indeed
Indeed,
Quran (30:93:4) (Indeed
Indeed,
Indeed the hereafter is better for you than the present
life).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:8). This verse has
emphasis ‫ل‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:109). This verse
has emphasis ‫ل‬.
 109

3) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the statement “Indeed

Indeed,
Indeed you
are Yousuf” is ‫ﻟ َـﺎَٔﻧْـ َﺖ ﻳ ُــ ْﻮ ُﺳـ ُﻒ‬.
‫ إِ ﱠن‬, the particle of emphasis and nasbin (Seq # 64)
A sentence can also be emphasized by ‫ا َّن‬. Consider the following sentence.
ِٕ
‫َاﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ ُء َاب ِر ٌد‬
Its meaning is “The water is cool”. The grammatical analysis of the above
statement is as below.
‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ا ُء = اﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ ُء‬
‫اﻟْــ َﺨـ َﺒــ ُﺮ = َاب ِر ٌد‬
Let us now emphasize it by (‫ا َّن ) َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗَــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ‬. It is as explained
ِٕ
below.
‫َاب ِر ٌد‬ ‫اﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ َء‬ ‫ا َّن‬
ِٕ
‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن‬ ُ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن ) َﻣـ ْﻨ‬
(‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ِٕ ِٕ

Now its meaning is “Indeed

Indeed,
Indeed the water is cool”.
The particle of emphasis and nasbin (‫ )ا َّن‬brings the following changes in
ِٕ
the sentence.
 110

a) The terminology of ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ا ُء‬will change to “Noun of Inna” which is
‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬
ِٕ
b) The terminology of ‫ اﻟْــ َﺨـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬will change to “Predicate of Inna” which is
‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن‬
ِٕ
c) It will make the “Noun of Inna” (‫ ) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
ِٕ
Wherever we encounter ‫ ا َّن‬, it is our duty to find ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and it should be
ِٕ ِٕ
ُْ ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
For one more example, refer to the last part of Quran (2:2:153). Its
translation is “Indeed Indeed Allah is with the patient ones”.
Indeed,
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The particle of emphasis and nasbin ‫ ا َّن‬is not
ِ ِ َّ ِٕ
present in the verse Quran (15:18:30) and ‫ ا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬is ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( اﻟـﺬﻳ‬ ُ ْ‫) َﻣـﻨ‬.
ِٕ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The particle of emphasis and nasbin ‫ ا َّن‬is
ِ ْٔ ِٕ
present in the verse Quran (16:18:94) and ‫ ا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( ﻳ َـﺎ ُﺟــ ْﻮ َج‬ ُ ْ‫) َﻣـﻨ‬.
ِٕ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The particle of emphasis and nasbin ‫ ا َّن‬is
ِ ِ َّ ِٕ
present in the verse Quran (16:18:107) and ‫ ا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬is ‫ــﻦ‬َ ْ‫) َﻣـﻨْـ ُـﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( اﻟـﺬﻳ‬.
ِٕ
‫ إِ ﱠن‬when joins with 14 pronouns (Seq # 65)
Consider the below statement which starts with a personal pronoun. Let us
emphasize the below statement with ‫ا َّن‬.
ِٕ
‫( ُﻫــ َﻮ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬He is Mohammed)
 111

In this case ‫ ا َّن‬will join ‫ ُﻫــ َﻮ‬as below.

ِٕ
‫ ُﻫــ َﻮ = اﻧ َّـ ُﻪ‬+ ‫ا َّن‬
ِٕ ِٕ
‫اﻧ َّـ ُﻪ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬
ِٕ
Its translation is now “Indeed Indeed,
Indeed he is Mohammed”. Here the attached
pronoun ‫ ُه‬in ‫ اﻧ َّـ ُﻪ‬is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and it is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. Below table provides us the
ِٕ ِٕ
complete 14 combinations of ‫ا َّن‬.
ِٕ
Thumb finger 4 finger 3 finger 2 finger 1
(‫ا ِﻧ ّــ ْﻲ‬/‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ )اﻧ َّـ َﻚ( َٔاﻧ ِْﺖ )اﻧ َّـ ِﻚ( َٔاانَ )اﻧ َّـ ِﻨ ْــﻲ‬ (‫ُﻫــ َﻮ )اﻧ َّـ ُﻪ( ِﻫــ َﻲ )اﻧ َّـﻬَـﺎ‬
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ
‫ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬
(‫اﻧ َّـﺎ‬/‫َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ )اﻧ َّ ُﻜـﻤـَﺎ( َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ )اﻧ َّ ُﻜـﻤـَﺎ( ﻧ َـ ْﺤـ ُﻦ )اﻧ َّـﻨَﺎ‬ (‫ُﻫـﻤـَﺎ )اﻧ َّــﻬُـ َﻤﺎ‬
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ (‫)اﻧ َّــﻬُـ َﻤﺎ‬
ِٕ
(‫َٔاﻧ ُ ْْﱲ )اﻧ َّ ُﻜـ ْﻢ( َٔاﻧ ُ َّْﱳ )اﻧ َّ ُﻜ َّﻦ‬ (‫ُﻫـ ْﻢ )اﻧ َّــﻬُـ ْﻢ( ﻫ َُّﻦ )اﻧ َّـﻬُـ َّﻦ‬
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verses Quran (15:18:7) and Quran
(15:18:8). The word ‫( اﻧ َّـﺎ‬Indeed, we) is present in these two verses and
ِٕ
attached pronoun ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and it is ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
ِٕ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:20). The word
‫( اﻧَّــﻬـُ ْﻢ‬Indeed, they all) is present in this verse and attached pronoun
ِٕ
‫( ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬they) is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and it is ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
ِٕ
 112

3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:75). The word
َ ‫( اﻧ‬Indeed, you) is present in this verse and attached pronoun َ‫ك‬
‫َّـﻚ‬
ِٕ
(you) is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and it is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
ِٕ
Ladder slider game of ‫ إِ ﱠن‬and ‫( ل‬Seq # 66)
Consider the following statement.
‫َاﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ ُء ﺑ َـ ِﺎر ٌد‬
Its meaning is “The water is cool”. Let us first emphasize it with ‫ﻻ ُم اﻟْـﺎﺑْـ ِﺘـﺪَ ا ِء‬
. So, it will be like below. ِٕ

‫ﻟ َـﻠْـ َﻤـﺎ ُء َاب ِر ٌد‬

Its meaning is “Indeed, the water is cool”.
Now for the above statement, let us re-emphasize it with ‫ا َّن‬.
ِٕ
‫ ﻟ َـﻠْـ َﻤـﺎ ُء َاب ِر ٌد‬+ ‫ا َّن‬
ِٕ
Two emphasis particles cannot co-exist as neighbours or side-by-side (one
after another). So the coming ‫ ا َّن‬makes (pushes) the ‫ ل‬to slide farther in
ِٕ
the statement and it becomes as below.
.‫ا َّن اﻟْـ َﻤﺎ َء ﻟ َــ َﺒ ِـﺎر ٌد‬
ِٕ
In the above statement, ‫ ل‬left ‫ اﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ َء‬and joined ‫ ﺑ َـ ِﺎر ٌد‬. And ‫ اﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ َء‬became
‫ َﻣـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ْﻮ ٌب‬as it is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬. Thus this is the ladder slider game of ‫ ا َّن‬and ‫ل‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
 113

Double emphasis exists in the above statement with the presence of ‫ ا َّن‬and
ِٕ
‫ل‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In the statement ‫ا َّن ْاﻻﻧْـ َﺴـ َﺎن ﻟ َـ ِﻔــ ْﻲ ُﺧـ ْﺴــ ٍﺮ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
(Indeed/Verily, mankind is in loss) both ‫ ا َّن‬and ‫ ل‬exist.
ِٕ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:8). Double
emphasis exists in this verse with both ‫ ا َّن‬and ‫ل‬.
ِٕ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:58). Only single
emphasis exists in this verse with ‫ل‬.
Triple emphasis (Seq # 67)
Assume the below statement.
َ ْ‫( َٔاﻧ‬You are Yousuf).
‫ـﺖ ﻳ ُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ‬
It can be emphasized by ‫ ل‬as below.
َ ‫( ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬Indeed, you are Yousuf).
‫ْـﺖ ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ‬
The above nominal sentence can be made as ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬for another ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬as
‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ا ُء‬. See below.
‫ْـﺖ ﻳ ُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ‬ َ ‫ْـﺖ ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬
َ ‫( َٔاﻧ‬You
You,
You indeed you are Yousuf /* Underline text is coming
as ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬for You*/). You
 114

Let us now emphasize the above statement further by ‫ا َّن‬. It becomes as

ِٕ
below.
‫ْـﺖ ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ‬َ ‫َّـﻚ ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬ َ ‫ْـﺖ ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬
َ ‫ْـﺖ ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ = اﻧ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬+ ‫( ا َّن‬Indeed you, indeed you are
ِٕ ِٕ
Yousuf) (In simple English translation: Indeed you are Yousuf).
In the above statement َ‫ ك‬is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن‬and the sentence ‫ْـﺖ ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُﻒ‬ َ ‫ ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬is ‫ َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
Thus ‫ ا َّن‬is the first emphasis. ‫ ل‬is the second emphasis. ‫ َٔاﻧ َْﺖ‬is the third
ِٕ
emphasis. This example is present in the verse Quran (13:12:90).
Sisters of ‫( إِ ﱠن‬Seq # 68)
‫ ا َّن‬has six sisters. These sisters behave same as ‫ ا َّن‬and make their subject as
ِٕ ِٕ
ُْ ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. The terminology will also change accordingly, for example if ‫َٔا َّن‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
comes then it will term subject as ‫ﰟ َٔا َّن‬ ُ ْ ‫ ِا‬and predicate as ‫ـــﺮ َٔا َّن‬
ُ ‫ َﺧ َﺒ‬.
Meanings Sisters of ‫ا َّن‬
ِٕ
that ‫َٔا َّن‬
it looks as if ‫َ َٔاك َّن‬
because ‫ِ َٔﻻ َّن‬
but ‫ٰﻟـ ِﻜ َّﻦ‬
wish ‫ﻟ َ ْﻴ َﺖ‬
hope or fear ‫ﻟ َ َﻌ َّﻞ‬
Example (1)
 115

The cave is far.

‫اﻟ َﻜﻬ ُْـﻒ ﺑ َ ِﻌ ْﻴ ٌﺪ‬.
Now let us use ‫اك َّن‬. َٔ َ
.‫َﻛـﺎَٔ َّن ْاﻟ َﻜﻬ َْﻒ ﺑ َ ِﻌ ْﻴـ ٌﺪ‬
The translation of the above statement is “It looks as if, the cave is far”.
‫ ْاﻟ َﻜﻬ َْﻒ‬is ‫ﰟ َﻛـﺎَٔ َّن‬
ُ ْ ‫ ِا‬and ‫ ﺑ َ ِﻌـْﻴـ ٌﺪ‬is ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ َﻛـﺎَٔ َّن‬.
Example (2)
For them there is good reward.
‫ﻟَﻬ ُْﻢ َٔا ْﺟ ٌــﺮ َﺣ َـﺴــ ٌﻦ‬
Now let us use ‫ َٔا َّن‬.
‫َٔا َّن ﻟَﻬ ُْﻢ َٔا ْﺟ ًــﺮا َﺣ َـﺴـﻨًـﺎ‬
The translation of the above statement is “that, for them there is a good
reward”. ‫ َٔا ْﺟ ًــﺮ‬is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َٔا َّن‬and ‫ ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬is ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ َٔا َّن ُﻣـ َﻘ ِّـﺪ ْم‬.
Note:
Note ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬in the statement “‫اهلل‬ ِ ّ ٰ ‫” َا ْﺷـﻬَـﺪُ َٔا َّن ُﻣـ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا َّر ُﺳ ْـﻮ ُل‬
because it is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َٔا َّن‬.
Grammatical analysis (GA) of few Quranic
Quranic verses (Seq # 68A)
This section deals with some GA of few Quranic verses as below.
Quran (23:37:4)
 ‫‪116‬‬

‫‪Arabic Words‬‬ ‫‪Grammatical Analysis‬‬

‫ا َّن‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ِا ٰﻟــﻬَـ‬ ‫ُــﻮ ُﻣــﻀَ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎف‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َو ﻫ َ‬ ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن َﻣـ ْﻨ ُ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ُﻛ ْـﻢ‬ ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ٌور‬ ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ٌ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ﻟَــ‬ ‫ﻻ ُم ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ‬
‫َوا ِﺣـ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫‪Approximate translation: Indeed/Verily your Ilaah (God) is one.‬‬
‫)‪Quran (27:56:77‬‬
‫‪Arabic Words‬‬ ‫‪Grammatical Analysis‬‬
‫ا َّن‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ـ ُﻪ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن َﻣـﻨْ ُ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ﻟَــ‬ ‫ﻻ ُم ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ‬
‫ُﻗ ْــﺮ ٰء ٌن‬ ‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َو ﻫ َُـﻮ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫َﻛــ ِﺮﻳْـ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ـﺖ ِﻟـ ُﻘ ْــﺮ ٰء ٍن‬ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪Approximate translation: Indeed it is noble/honorable Quraan.‬‬
‫)‪Quran (29:68:4‬‬
‫‪Arabic Words‬‬ ‫‪Grammatical Analysis‬‬
‫َو‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬
 117

‫ا َّن‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ‬

ِٕ
َ‫ك‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن َﻣـﻨ‬
ِٕ
‫ﻟَــ‬ ‫ﻻ ُم ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ‬
‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﺟــ ّ ٍﺮ‬
ٍ ُ‫َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ﺧُـﻠ‬
‫ــﻖ‬ ‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ ا َّن‬
ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
ِٕ
‫ــﻈـ ْﻴـ ٍﻢ‬ ِ ‫َﻋ‬ ٍ ُ‫ـﺖ ِﻟــﺨُـﻠ‬
‫ــﻖ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬
Approximate translation: And verily, you (O Muhammad [sal-Allâhu
'alayhi wa sallam]) are on an exalted (standard of) character.
Reader is highly recommended to do grammatical analysis of the verses
Quran (27:52:7), Quran (27:54:47), Quran (27:54:54), Quran (30:82:13),
Quran (30:82:14) and Quran (30:86:13).
Usage of ‫ أَ ْم‬and ‫( أَ ْو‬Seq # 69)
The meaning of the words ‫ َٔا ْم‬and ‫ َٔا ْو‬is same and it is “or”. These words are
conjunctions. The word ‫ َٔا ْم‬is used in the interrogative sentences while the
word ‫ َٔا ْو‬is used in the non-interrogative sentences.
Examples
‫ْـﺖ َٔا ْم َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ ؟‬
َ ‫( َٔا ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َٔاﻧ‬Are you Mohammed or Haamid ?)
َّ ‫( َٔا ِﰲ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ َٔا ْم ِﰲ‬Are you in the cave or in the ship ?)
‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ ؟‬
 118

‫( ﺧ ََــﺮ َج ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َٔا ْو َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬Mohammed or Haamid went out).
One note is that ‫ َٔا‬should precede the first thing in comparison and ‫َٔا ْم‬
should precede the second thing in comparison. So it is wrong to say ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫َٔا َٔاﻧ‬
َّ ‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َٔا ْم ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬To understand clearly, it is wrong to write ‫ْـﺖ‬
‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ ؟‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
immediately after ‫ َٔا‬. ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬should come after ‫اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬. The correct sentence
will be ‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ ؟‬ َ ‫َٔا ِﻓ ْــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َٔاﻧ‬
َّ ‫ْـﺖ َٔا ْم ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:20). The word ‫َٔا ْو‬
is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:41). The word ‫َٔا ْو‬
is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The correct translation of the English
statement “Is dog present in the ship or on the wall ?” is ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬ َّ ‫َٔا ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬
‫ــﺠـﺪَ ِار ؟‬ ِ ْ‫ـﺐ َٔا ْم َﻋ َـﲆ اﻟ‬
ٌ ْ‫َﻛـﻠ‬
Few more categories of diptotes (Seq # 70)
In this section we will discuss four more categories of diptote nouns.
1) Masculine proper nouns with ending “ta marboutah” (‫)ة‬. Examples:
‫ َﺣـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة‬, ‫ ُٔاﺳـَﺎ َﻣـ ُﺔ‬, ‫ َﻃـﻠْــ َﺤـ ُﺔ‬etc.
ُ ‫ﺷـ ْﻌـ َﺒ‬,َ
2) Masculine proper nouns with ending ‫ان‬. Examples: ‫ َر َﻣــﻀَ ـ ُﺎن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
‫ـﺎن‬ُ ‫ ُﻋـﺜْـ َﻤ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ُ َّ‫ َﻋـﻔ‬, ‫ ِﻋـ ْﻤ ٰــﺮ ُن‬etc.
 119

3) Adjectives on the pattern ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌ‬. Examples: ‫( َٔا ْﺻـﻐ َُــﺮ‬smaller), ‫َٔا ْﻛ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬
(bigger) etc.
4) Broken plurals on the pattern ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬and ‫ َﻣـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋـ ْﻴـ ُﻞ‬. Examples: ُ‫ـﺎﺟـﺪ‬ِ ‫َﻣ َـﺴ‬
(mosques), ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ َ‫( ﻓَـﻨ‬cups). Quran (29:67:5) has a phrase ‫ــﺢ‬
ُ ‫ـﺎﺟـ ْﻴ‬ َ ‫ــﺼـﺎﺑِـ ْﻴ‬
َ ‫ ﺑِـ َﻤ‬,
which means “with lamps”.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:7). ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ َٔا ْﺣ َـﺴ‬means
best/better. This diptote noun is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:24). ‫ َٔا ْﻗ َــﺮ ُب‬means
“nearer” in English and it is a diptote noun. This verse has the “Jaar-
Majroor” construction ‫ﻻ ْﻗ َــﺮ َب‬.َٔ ِ
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:34). ‫ َٔا ْﻛـﺜ َ ُــﺮ‬means
“more than” in English and it is a diptote noun. This verse has this
diptote noun.
‫( ))أَ ﱡ‬Seq # 71)
Which (‫ي‬
The word ‫ َٔا ُّي‬is always ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. The noun following it will be ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬.
ِٕ
Example: Which companion entered the cave ?
‫ـﺐ َدﺧَـ َﻞ اﻟْ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ ؟‬
ٍ ‫َٔا ُّي َﺻـﺎ ِﺣ‬
The ‫ َٔا ُّي‬declines as ‫) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع( َٔا ُّي‬, ‫ ) َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( َٔا َّي‬and ‫) َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر( َٔا ِ ّي‬. Attached
pronouns can also present with ‫ َٔا ُّي‬as shown in the below example.
 120

Example: Which of them are best in deeds ?

‫َٔاﻳُّــﻬ ُْـﻢ َٔا ْﺣ َـﺴ ُﻦ َﻋـ َﻤ ًـﻼ ؟‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:12). ‫ ِﺣ ْــﺰ ٌب‬means
ِ ‫ ِﺣ ْــﺰﺑَـ ْﻴ‬. ‫ـﺎف‬
party/group. Dual in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case of this noun is ‫ــﻦ‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬construction exists in this verse which means “Which of
ِٕ
the two groups”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:19). The word ‫َٔا ُّي‬
is present with ‫ ﻫـﺎ‬as attached pronoun.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The word ‫ َٔا ُّي‬does not decline.
Comparative and superlative degrees (Seq # 72)
The comparative degree is used to compare two things. For the
ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬.
ُ ‫ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌ‬followed by ‫ــﻦ‬
comparative degree we use the noun on the pattern ‫ـﻞ‬
These nouns are adjectives and are diptotes.
Example:
The ship is smaller than the cave.
‫اﻟـ َّﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ َٔا ْﺻـﻐ َُــﺮ ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬
Mohammed is better than Haamid.
ْ ‫ــﻦ ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ َﺣـﺎﻣـِ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َٔا ْﺣ َـﺴ‬
 121

The superlative degree is used to represent the concepts like the best
student, the worst result, the best doctor etc. For the superlative degree as
well, we use the same noun on the pattern ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌ‬followed by a noun in
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case.
Example:
Ibrahim is the best student in the school.
‫ـﺐ ِﰲ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْـﺪ َر َﺳـ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ َٔا ْﺣ َـﺴ‬
ٍ ‫ــﻦ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟ‬
ِٕ
Interrogative particle ‫( َمــا‬Seq # 73)
The particle ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬has many uses depending on the context. One of its uses is
to ask a question. Its literal translated word in English language is “What”.
Example is shown below…
What is your name ?
َ ‫َﻣـﺎ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻤ‬
‫ـﻚ ؟‬
What is this ?
‫َﻣـﺎ ٰﻫ َـﺬا ؟‬
When preposition comes before ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬, then ending alif (‫ )ا‬gets drop as
below…
‫ َﻣـﺎ = ِﻟ َـﻢ‬+ ‫( ِل‬for what, why ?) Quran (28:61:2)
 122

‫ َﻣـﺎ = ِﻣـ َّﻢ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬

ْ ‫( ِﻣ‬from what ?) Quran (30:86:5)
‫ َﻣـﺎ = َﻋـ َّﻢ‬+ ‫ـــﻦ‬
ْ ‫( َﻋ‬about what ?) Quran (30:78:1)
‫ َﻣـﺎ = ِﻓ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬+ ‫( ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬in what ?) Quran (30:79:43)
‫ َﻣـﺎ = ﺑ َِـﻢ‬+ ‫( ِب‬with what, because ?) Quran (14:15:54), Quran (19:27:35)
But it is also observed in Quran that, at some other places the ending alif
(‫ )ا‬remained as is. Reader is recommended to go through the Quran verses
Quran (4:3:92) and Quran (4:3:99) for this observation.
Note: The word َ‫ ك‬is a preposition and its meaning is “like”. So ‫ َﻛـ َﻤـﺎ‬means
“like what” what”. Examples: Quran (1:2:13), Quran (1:2:19) and Durood-e-
Ibrahim.
Answering the question with ‫ ﺑَــلَى‬and ‫( ﻧَــ َعــ ْم‬Seq # 74)
In order to answer a question ‫ ﺑ َ َـﲆ‬and ‫ ﻧ َـ َﻌ ْـﻢ‬are used. Literally ‫ ﻧ َـ َﻌـ ْﻢ‬means
‘yes’ and ‫ ﺑ َ َـﲆ‬means ‘why not’ (of course). ‫ ﺑ َ َـﲆ‬is used to negate a negative
question by expressing a phrase ‘Yes of course’ (special form of yes). Let us
understand this by example.
Example
Asking the positive question to a person whose name is Mohammed.
Are you Mohammed ?
 123

َ ‫َـﻞ َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ؟‬ ْ ‫ﻫ‬
His answer can be…
‫ﻧ َـ َﻌ ْـﻢ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬. (Yes, I am Mohammed)
Asking the negative question to a person whose name is Mohammed.
Are you not Mohammed ?
His answer can be…
‫ﺑ َ َﲆ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬. (Yes of course /*Why not*/, I am Mohammed).
ٰ , ‫ ٰذلـِـ َك‬and َ‫( تِــ ْلــك‬Seq
ٰ , ‫ھــ ِذ ِه‬,
Duals of demonstrative pronouns ‫ھــذا‬,
# 75)
The duals of demonstrative pronouns ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬, ‫ ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬, ‫ ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬and ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫ ِﺗـﻠ‬are
َ ْ‫ ِﺗـﻠ‬are ‫ــﻲ‬
following. It is to note that ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬, ‫ ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬, ‫ ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬and ‫ـﻚ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬but their
duals are declinable.
Dual of Dual of Dual of Dual of
Case
‫ٰﻫـ َﺬا‬ ‫ٰﻫـ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬ ‫ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬ ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ْ‫ِﺗـﻠ‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬ ‫ٰﻫ َـﺬ ِان‬ ‫َـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ـﻚ ﻫَـﺎﺗ‬ َ ‫َذا ِﻧ‬ ‫ـﻚ‬َ ‫ﺗَـﺎ ِﻧ‬
‫َﻣـ ْﻨــ ُﺼــ ْﻮ ٌب‬ ِ ْ‫ــﻦ ٰﻫ َـﺬﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫َذﻳْـ ِﻨ‬
ِ ‫ـﻚ ﻫَـﺎﺗَـ ْﻴ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻴـ ِﻨ‬
‫ـﻚ‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ِ ْ‫ــﻦ ٰﻫ َـﺬﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫َذﻳْـ ِﻨ‬
ِ ‫ـﻚ ﻫَـﺎﺗَـ ْﻴ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻴـ ِﻨ‬
‫ـﻚ‬
 124

Examples
These two are caves.
ِ ‫ٰﻫ َـﺬ ِان َﻛــﻬَـ َﻔ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
Those two are gardens.
َ ‫ﺗَـﺎ ِﻧ‬
ِ َ‫ـﻚ َﺟـﻨَّـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
َ ‫ َذا ِﻧ‬is present in Quran (20:28:32)
ِ ‫ ﻫَـﺎﺗَـ ْﻴ‬is present in Quran (20:28:27), ‫ـﻚ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
and ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬ ِان‬is present in verses Quran (16:20:63) and Quran (17:22:19).
Duals of relative pronouns ‫ الﱠــ ِذي‬and ‫( الﱠــتِي‬Seq # 76)
The duals of relative pronouns ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬and ‫ اﻟ َّ ِـﱵ‬are the following. It is to note
that ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬and ‫ اﻟ َّ ِـﱵ‬are ‫ــﻲ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬but their duals are declinable.
Dual of Dual
Case
‫اﻟ َّ ِـﱵ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬of
‫َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬ ِ َ‫اﻟ َّـﺘ‬
‫ـﺎن َاﻟَّـﺎ َذ ِان‬
ِ ‫اﻟَّـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬
ِ ْ‫ــﻦ اﻟ َّ َـﺬﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ َﻣـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ْﻮ ٌب‬
‫ــﻦ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬ ِ ْ‫ــﻦ اﻟ َّ َـﺬﻳ‬ِ ‫اﻟَّـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬
In Quran, example verse Quran (24:41:29) should be read with extreme
َ ْ‫ )اﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬and dual (‫ــﻦ‬
care as plural (‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ْ‫ )اﻟ َّ َـﺬﻳ‬of ‫ اﻟَّـ ِﺬي‬is present.
 125

Introduction to verbal sentence (Seq # 77)

A verbal sentence is a sentence that starts with a verb. The formal structure
of a verbal sentence is as below.
Verbal sentence = Verb + Doer (‫ ) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬+ Object on which the action
happened (‫) َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
In Arabic language the verb is termed as ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ‬. The doer is termed as ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬.
The object on which the action happened is termed as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌل ِﺑـ ِﻪ‬. The doer
is a noun and it is always ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬. The object on which the action happened
is also a noun and it is always ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
As an example, consider the below statement.
‫ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ َد ُاو ُد َﺟـﺎﻟُــ ْﻮ َت‬
Translation: Dawood killed Jaloot.
‫ ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ‬is a verb to kill. ‫ د َُاو ُد‬is the doer and it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬. ‫ َﺟـﺎﻟُـ ْـﻮ َت‬is ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌل ِﺑـ ِﻪ‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. Note that ‫ د َُاو ُد‬and ‫ َﺟـﺎﻟُــ ْﻮ ُت‬are diptote nouns.
and it is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “Mohammed saw Haamid”
(‫ ) ُﻣـ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﻧ َ َـﻈ َـﺮ َﺣـﺎﻣـِﺪً ا‬is not a verbal sentence, because it does not start
with a verb.
 126

2) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “Mohammed helped Haamid”

(‫ ) ُﻣـ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﻧ َ َـﺼ َـﺮ َﺣـﺎﻣـِﺪً ا‬is not a verbal sentence, because it does not start
with a verb.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The sentence “Mohammed is in the cave”
(‫ ) ُﻣـ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ِﰲ ْاﻟ َﻜـﻬْـ ِﻒ‬is not a verbal sentence but a nominal sentence and
Mohammed is the subject.
Introduction to three radicals (or letters) (Seq # 78)
In Arabic language most of the verbs are trilateral. The trilateral verbs
come with three radicals (or letters). The terminology in English used for
this is: first radical (or first letter), second radical (or second letter) and
third radical (or third letter). The corresponding terminology in Arabic
language is mapped to the word (verb) ‫ﻓَــــــ َﻌـــــــ َﻞ‬. First letter is termed as ‫ف‬
‫ َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬. Second letter is termed as ‫ع َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬. Third letter is termed as ‫ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬.
For example consider the verbs ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬He collected) and ‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬ َ َ ‫( ﻧ‬He helped).
The below table explains their first, second and third letters.
Trilateral verb
Example # 1 (He collected) Example # 2 (He helped)
‫َع‬ ‫َم‬ ‫َج‬ ‫َر‬ ‫َص‬ ‫َن‬
‫ف َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ع َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ف َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ع َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬
Third Second First Third Second First
letter letter letter letter letter letter
 127

Note: The specimen word ‫ ﻓَــــــ َﻌـــــــ َﻞ‬itself is a verb and its meaning is “He
did”.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verb ‫ـــﻈ َــﺮ‬ َ َ ‫( ﻧ‬he saw) the ‫ ف َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ن‬, ‫َع‬
‫ َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ ظ‬and ‫ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ر‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verb ‫( ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ‬he killed) the ‫ ف َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ق‬, ‫ع‬
‫ َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ ت‬and ‫ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is ‫ل‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected) the ‫ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is
‫ع‬.
Transitive verb
verbs
erbs and Intransitive verbs (Seq # 79)
Verbs are of two kinds namely transitive verb and intransitive verb.
Transitive verb needs an object. In Arabic language, this object is termed as
‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌــ ْﻮ ٌل ِﺑـ ٖﻪ‬. To determine if a verb is transitive, ask two questions to the
verb. These questions are What ? or Whom ? If the verb needs an answer
then it is transitive verb. Let us take an example verb “To see”. In Arabic it
is ‫ـــﻈ َــﺮ‬َ َ ‫ﻧ‬. If we ask the question, See What ? then it needs an answer. That
answer is the object (‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬. Thus ‫ـــﻈ َــﺮ‬
َ َ ‫ ﻧ‬is a transitive verb. Let us take
another example verb “he went”. In Arabic it is ‫ َذ َﻫـ َﺐ‬. The above two
questions cannot be raised to this verb ‫َـﺐ‬ َ ‫ َذﻫ‬. Thus it does not need any
object and the verb ‫ َذ َﻫـ َﺐ‬is an intransitive verb.
 128

The object to the verb (‫ ) َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬is always ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The questions What ? or Whom ? can be
raised to the verb ‫( ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ‬he killed), so it is a transitive verb.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The questions What ? or Whom ? can be
raised to the verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he made), so it is a transitive verb.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The verb ‫َـﺐ‬ َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went) is a transitive verb.
Characteristics of the root of the verb (Seq # 80)
Study of the Arabic verbs always start with discussing the main root of the
verb. The root of the verb has the following characteristics.
1) The root verb is always in the past tense (past form)
2) The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬of the root verb is always the third per
person
3) The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬of the root verb is always masculine
4) The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬of the root verb is always singular
5) The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬of the root verb is hidden inside the verb itself
By considering points 2, 3 and 4 the doer of the root verb is always he
(‫) ُﻫ َــﻮ‬.
Example
َ َ‫( ﻓَـﺘ‬he opened)
‫ــﺢ‬
 129

The above verb is in the past tense, doer is a third person masculine
singular (he).
Important Baabs
Baabs (Chapters) of verb (Seq # 81)
Verbs are classified under the chapters or categories. Those are as below
1) Baab Fataha (‫( )ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬a-a group)
2) Baab Nasara (‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬َ َ ‫( )ﻧ‬a-u group)
3) Baab Zaraba (‫( )ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬a-i group)
4) Baab Sami`a (‫( َ)ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬i-a group)
5) Baab karuma (‫( ) َﻛ ُــﺮ َم‬u-u group)
6) Baab Hasiba (‫( ) َﺣ ِﺴ َﺐ‬i-i group)
The representation of a-a, a-u, a-i, i-a, u-u, and i-i groups will be discussed
later on. Few of the subsequent topics are related to some of these
important baabs.
Note: Reader is recommended
recommended to memorize the below table before going to
the next topic. This will help to learn verbs easily. ‫ت‬, ِ , ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
‫ َت‬, ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ت‬
‫ت‬, َّ ‫ﺗ‬,
‫ ُت‬, ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬are the doers.
‫ت‬, doers.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫ُت‬ ‫ِت‬ ‫َت‬
‫ﻧ َـﺎ‬ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
 130

‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬
َ َ‫ فَــت‬session # 1 (Seq # 82)
Understanding Baab ‫ــح‬
In this topic the verb “open” will be discussed. In one of the earlier topic,
14 personal pronouns have been discussed. These personal pronouns have
been mapped to the right hand finger cells. First finger (forefinger) was
mapped to three personal pronouns namely: ‫( ُﻫــ َﻮ‬he), ‫( ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬they two) and
‫( ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬they all). In English language upon using the verb “open” with these
three pronouns the sentences will be: “He opened” , “They two opened”
and “They all opened”. In Arabic language the root verb for “open” is ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬.
This Arabic verb changes its forms as below for the forefinger mapped
personal pronouns. This change in the verb structure for each personal
pronoun is called as conjugation. The below table shows the addition of
the doer to the main verb form to get the structure related to the associated
doer.
Detached
Meaning Doer Verb Structure
Pronoun
He opened Hidden َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
‫ــﺢ‬ ‫ُﻫـ َﻮ‬

They two opened ‫ا‬ ‫ ا = ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬+ ‫ــﺢ‬

َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬ ‫ُﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬
 131

They all opened ‫و‬ ‫ و = ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬+ ‫ــﺢ‬

َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬ ‫ُﻫـ ْﻢ‬
In case of the root form ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬the doer (he) is hidden in the verb itself. But
the doer can come in the sentence when needed. This concept is same for
all the verbs in Arabic language. In case of ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬the doer (they two) is the
attached alif ‫ ا‬. In case of ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬the doer (they all) is the attached ‫و‬. The
single ‫ ا‬in the last is the spelling rule, which we will discuss later. All these
doers are in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬case. This concept is same for all the verbs in Arabic
language, because doers are always ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Third person masculine pronoun conjugations
of the verb ‫( َرﻓَـ َﻊ‬he raised) is (‫رﻓَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫رﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ‬,َ ‫)رﻓَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا‬,
َ of the verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he
made) is (‫ َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬, ‫ َﺟـ َﻌ َـﻼ‬, ‫) َﺟـ َﻌـﻠُ ْــﻮا‬, and of the verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected) is
(‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬, ‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻌـﺎ‬, ‫) َﺟـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫( َﻣـﻨَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا‬They
stopped) is the Arabic letter ‫و‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The meaning of the verb form ‫ َذ َﻫـ َﺒـﺎ‬is “They
two went”.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is not hidden in ‫( َرﻓَـ َﻊ‬he
raised/elevated).
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The meaning of the verb form ‫ َرﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ‬is “They
two raised”.
 132

َ َ‫ فَــت‬session # 2 (Seq # 83)

Understanding Baab ‫ــح‬
In the earlier topic, the verb structure for third person masculine gender
(singular, dual and plural) was learnt. The verb structure for feminine
gender is given in the below table. These personal pronouns mapped to
second finger of right hand (it has been learnt earlier).
Verb Detached
Meaning Doer Explanation
Structure Pronoun
Hidden
(‫ ت‬is = ‫ ت‬+ ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
She opened ‫ِﻫ َــﻲ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
Add ‫ ت‬to ‫ــﺢ‬
not the ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
doer)
They two
= ‫ ا‬+ ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
(Fem.) ‫ا‬ ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
Add ‫ ا‬to ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ‬
Opened
They all Take ‫ــﺢ‬َ َ ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬and
= ‫ َن‬+ ‫ﻓـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬ َ
(Fem.) ‫َن‬ ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﻫ‬ put sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
Opened on ‫ ح‬and add ‫ن‬
In the case of “She opened” the doer is hidden. But the doer can come in
the sentence if needed. The ending ‫ ت‬in the verb structure is called as “‫ت‬
 133

of woman”. This ‫ ت‬will come for all the Arabic verbs for third person
feminine singular personal pronoun (she).
From ‫ ﻫ َُّﻦ‬, the third letter (in this case ‫ )ح‬till all other subsequent personal
pronouns will get sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬. This is same for all the Arabic verbs.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Third person feminine pronoun conjugations
of the verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ َﻌ‬he reached/raised) is (‫َـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬, ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ َـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ْــﻦ‬
َ ‫)ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬, of the
verb ‫َـﺐ‬ َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went) is (‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ َذﻫَـ َﺒ‬, ‫ َذﻫَـ َﺒـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫) َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬, and of the verb ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫َﺻـﻠ‬
(he became pious) is (‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ َﺻـﻠَــ َﺤ‬, ‫ﺻـﻠَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ‬,َ ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫)ﺻـﻠَــ ْﺤ‬.َ
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is hidden in the verb form
ْ ‫( َذﻫَـ َﺒ‬she went).
‫ـﺖ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The meaning of the verb form ‫ َﺻـﻠَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ‬is
“They two (feminine) became pious”.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬
(They all (fem.) reached/raised) is ‫ن‬.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: From ‫ ُﻫــ َّﻦ‬till the pronoun ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬the third
letter in the past tense verb forms will have sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬.
َ َ‫ فَــت‬session # 3 (Seq # 84)
Understanding Baab ‫ــح‬
In the earlier topic, the verb structure for third person feminine gender was
learnt. Proceeding further, third finger personal pronouns representing
second person masculine gender will be discussed in this topic. Second
 134

َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬. The

person masculine gender personal pronouns are ‫ْـﺖ‬
associated verb structure looks like below.
Verb Detached
Meaning Doer
Structure Pronoun
You = ‫ َت‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
‫َت‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ َﺖ‬
Opened ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
You two = ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
Opened ‫ﻓـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
You all = ‫ ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
‫ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
Opened ‫ﻓـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬
It is to be observed that the third letter (in this case ‫ )ح‬has sukoon (‫ ) ْــ‬in
the above table.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person masculine pronoun
conjugations of the verb ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did) is (‫ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠْـ َﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫)ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person masculine pronoun
conjugations of the verb ‫( َﺟــﻬ ََــﺰ‬he became ready) is (‫ َﺟــﻬ َْــﺰ َت‬, ‫ َﺟــﻬ َْــﺰﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
‫) َﺟــﻬ َْــﺰﺗُـ ْﻢ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person masculine pronoun
conjugations of the verb ‫( ﺧَـﺪَ َع‬he deceived) is (‫ﺧَـﺪَ ْﻋـ َﺖ‬, ‫ﺧَـﺪَ ْﻋـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
‫)ﺧَـﺪَ ﻋْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬.
 135

4) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫َﺟــﻬ َْــﺰﺗُـ ْﻢ‬
(You all (masc.) became ready) is ‫ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫ﺧَـﺪَ ْﻋـ َﺖ‬
(You (masc.) deceived) is ‫ت‬.
َ
َ َ‫ فَــت‬session # 4 (Seq # 85)
Understanding Baab ‫ــح‬
In the earlier topic, the verb structure for second person masculine gender
was learnt. Here second person feminine gender will be discussed which
ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
are ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬looks like
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬. The associated verb structure of ‫ــﺢ‬
below.
Verb Detached
Meaning Doer
Meaning
Structure Pronoun
You
= ‫ ِت‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
(fem.) ‫ِت‬ ِ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
ِ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬
‫ـﺖ‬
Opened
You two
= ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
(fem.) ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
Opened
You All
َّ ‫ ﺗ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
= ‫ُــﻦ‬
(fem.) ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗ‬ َّ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
Opened َّ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
 136

It is to note that, the dual form is same for masculine and feminine gender
(discussed in previous topic) which is ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person feminine pronoun conjugations
ِ ‫ﺧَـﺸَ ـ ْﻌ‬, ‫ﺧَـﺸَ ـ ْﻌـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
of the verb ‫( ﺧَـﺸَ ـ َﻊ‬he feared) is (‫ـﺖ‬ َّ ‫)ﺧَـﺸَ ـ ْﻌـ ُﺘ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person feminine pronoun conjugations
of the verb ‫( ﺧَـﻠَـ َﻊ‬he removed, he kept separate) is (‫ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻌ ِﺖ‬, ‫ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻌـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
َّ ‫)ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻌـ ُﺘ‬.
‫ــﻦ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Second person masculine pronoun
conjugations of the verb ‫( َﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬he intercede) is (‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﺷـ َﻔـ ْﻌ‬,َ ‫ﺷـ َﻔـ ْﻌـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,َ
َّ ‫)ﺷـ َﻔـ ْﻌـ ُﺘ‬.
‫ــﻦ‬ َ
َ َ‫ فَــت‬session # 5 (Seq # 86)
Understanding Baab ‫ــح‬
In the earlier topic, the verb structure for second person feminine gender
was learnt. Here the verb structure for first person pronouns will be
discussed. These pronouns are ‫ ٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬. The associated verb structure
َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬looks like below.
of ‫ــﺢ‬
Verb Detached
Meaning Doer
Structure Pronoun
= ‫ ُت‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
I Opened ‫ُت‬ ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬
ُ ‫ﻓـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ َ
We َ‫ان‬ = ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬ ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬
 137

Opened ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـﻨَـﺎ‬

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verses Quran (15:18:12) and Quran
(15:18:19). The verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ َﻌ‬he reached/raised) has been used. The
doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬which is representing to the detached pronoun ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:32). The verb
‫ َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬has been used two times. The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬which is
representing to the detached pronoun ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:82). The verb
‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did) has been used. The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is ‫ ُت‬which is
representing to the detached pronoun ‫ َاﻧ َـﺎ‬.
Putting
Putting together all the things learnt
learnt from the last 5 topics (Seq # 87)
The past tense verb forms of the root verb ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺢ‬has been learnt. Its
translation is “he opened”. It is in the past tense, singular, masculine and
for the third person pronoun (he).
Below are the few useful points to understand the verb structure in the
past tense.
1) Both in the case of ‫ــﺢ‬ ْ ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬the doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬is hidden
َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬and ‫ـﺖ‬
(underlined). But doer can come in the sentence. This is same for all
the verbs in Arabic language.
 138

2) Constructing third person feminine singular verb form is to add “‫ ت‬of

woman” to root verb form. Example: Add ‫ ت‬to ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬to get ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
(she opened). This is same for all the verbs in Arabic language.
3) Constructing duals for third person masculine and third person
feminine is to add one ‫ ا‬to their singular form. Example: add ‫ ا‬to
‫ــﺢ‬َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬to get ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬and add ‫ ا‬to ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ ْﺖ‬to get ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ‬. This is same for
all the verbs in Arabic language.
4) From ‫ ُﻫــ َّﻦ‬the third letter (in this case ‫ )ح‬will always get sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬
till ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬. This is same for all the verbs in Arabic language.
5) In all the forms the root verb ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬will exist but the endings will
undergo few changes. These endings are doers and they are always
‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. This is same for all the verbs in Arabic language.
6) After ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ُﻫ‬the doers are ‫ت‬, ِ , ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
‫ َت‬, ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗُـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ت‬
‫ت‬, َّ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ت‬
‫ت‬,
ُ , ‫ﻧ َـﺎ‬. As explained
earlier, one can memorize this pattern to form the verb structures
easily. This pattern is used for all the verbs in Arabic language.
7) The dual form in the second person masculine and feminine
pronouns ends with ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
The past tense conjugation of ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬is as follows.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
= ‫ ِت‬+ ‫ َت ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬+ ‫ ت = ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬+ ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
ُ ‫ ُت = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
‫ــﺢ‬
ِ ‫ـﺖ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ـﺖ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
 ‫‪139‬‬

‫ـﺖ ‪ +‬ا ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪ +‬ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪ +‬ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ــﺢ ‪ +‬ا = ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪ +‬ﻧ َـﺎ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـﻨَـﺎ‬
‫= ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤﺎ‬

‫ــﺢ ‪ +‬و= ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪َ +‬ن = ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪ +‬ﺗ ُْـﻢ ﻓَـﺘَ ْــﺢ ‪ +‬ﺗ َّ‬
‫ُــﻦ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬‫ــﻦ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ = ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘ َّ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ‬
‫‪Finally the table looks like below. The reader should practice this table as‬‬
‫‪much as he can.‬‬
‫‪Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1‬‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺖ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ِﺖ‬ ‫ـﺖ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ َﺖ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ ْ‬ ‫ــﺢ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَ َ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘ َّ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ َـﻦ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬
‫‪Exercises‬‬
‫‪1) State TRUE or FALSE: The 14 past tense verbal forms for the root‬‬
‫ﻓَ َﻌ َﻞ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌ َﻼ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮا‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠَ ْﺖ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠَ َﺘﺎ ‪,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ َﻦ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ َﺖ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ُ ْﱲ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ِﺖ‪ (he did) is ,‬ﻓَ َﻌ َﻞ ‪verb‬‬
‫ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ُ َّﱳ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْ ُﺖ‪ ,‬ﻓَ َﻌﻠْﻨَﺎ‬
‫‪2) State TRUE or FALSE: The 14 past tense verbal forms for the root‬‬
‫ﺑ َ َﻌ َﺚ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜَﺎ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ ُْﻮا‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ َْﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜَ َﺘﺎ ‪,‬ﺑ َ َﻌ ْ َﱹ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ َْﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‪ (he raised/reached) is ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌ َﺚ ‪verb‬‬
‫ﺑ َ َﻌﺜْ ُ ْﱲ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ ِْﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ ُ َّْﱳ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜ ُْﺖ‪ ,‬ﺑ َ َﻌﺜْﻨَﺎ‬
 140

3) State TRUE or FALSE: The 14 past tense verbal forms for the root
verb ‫( َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ‬He made) is ,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ َﺖ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ َﻦ‬, ‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠَ َﺘﺎ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠَ ْﺖ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮا‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌ َﻼ‬,‫َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ‬
‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْﻨَﺎ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ُﺖ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ُ َّﱳ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬,‫ َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ِﺖ‬,‫َﺟ َﻌﻠْ ُ ْﱲ‬
Practice session for the past tense of the verb (Seq # 88)
This topic covers some practice for few verbs in the past tense. Let us take
a root verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ َﻌ‬he raised). We will construct all the 14 verb forms for 14
personal pronouns in the past form by our earlier understanding.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌ‬the doer is hidden (underlined).
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the root ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ َـﺎ‬.
3) For ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬just add the doer ‫ و‬to the root ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮا‬. The
ending ‫ ا‬is just a spelling rule. We will learn it later on.
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. This “‫ ت‬of
woman” is not the doer. In this case doer is hidden (underlined).
Thus it is ‫َـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫َـﺖ( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬ ْ ‫)ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ َـﺘَـﺎ‬.
6) For ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬the condition is that the third radical should get sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬
and it is the same rule for the rest of the pronouns. So take the root
form ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌ‬and add sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. It becomes ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Now add the doer ‫َن‬
ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ْــﻦ‬
to ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
7) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬just add the doer ‫ َت‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
 141

8) For masculine ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
9) For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬.
10) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬just add the doer ‫ ِت‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
11) For feminine ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is
‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬. It is same as masculine ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
12) For ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬just add the doer ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﺗ‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘ‬.
13) For ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ُت‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ْـﺖ‬ ُ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
14) For ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬just add the doer ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬to ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
Thus your right hand looks like below table now.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
ُ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫َـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬
‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ َـﺘَـﺎ‬ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ َـﺎ‬
َّ ‫ْــﻦ ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ‬ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮا‬
The process of constructing the verb structures is same as above for all the
verbs in Arabic language. Navigate your right hand cells and read the verb
structure loudly. Practice them by reading/writing for couple of times to
master. Keep doing this practice for the below 5 verbs.
‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did)
‫( َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬he stopped)
‫َـﺐ‬َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went)
 142

‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected)

‫( َﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬he interceded)
Mutaharrik pronouns and Saakin pronouns for the past tense (Seq #
89)
The last topic has discussed the past tense forms for all the fourteen
pronouns of the verb ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫( ﻓَـﺘ‬He opened). They are ‫ﻓَﺘَ َﺢ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ َﺤﺎ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ُﺤ ْﻮا‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ َﺤ ْﺖ‬, ‫ ﻓَﺘَ َﺤ َﺘﺎ‬,
‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ َﻦ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ َﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُ ْﱲ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ِﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُ َّﱳ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤﻨَﺎ‬. In the case of ‫ــﺢ‬
َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬and
‫ـﺖ‬ْ ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬the doer is hidden. In the past tense, the below pronouns are
Saakin pronouns because on the doers (‫ و‬and ‫ )ا‬there is a sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬.
Saakin pronouns: ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـ ْﺎ‬, ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬and ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـ ْﺎ‬.
The below pronouns (which are suffixes) are Mutaharrik pronouns because
on the doers (‫ن‬,َ ‫ت‬, َ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ت‬, ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ت‬,ُ and ‫ )ﻧ َـﺎ‬the vowel signs exist.
Mutaharrik pronouns: ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ َﻦ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ َﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُ ْﱲ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ِﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺘ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُ َّﱳ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤ ُﺖ‬, ‫ﻓَﺘَ ْﺤﻨَﺎ‬.
To remember easily in the past tense the pronouns from ‫ ﻫ َُّﻦ‬consequently
till ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬are Mutaharrik pronouns, which are total 9 pronouns. This is
same for all the verbs present in Arabic language.
Exercises
 143

1) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer pronoun ‫ َن‬in the verb structure
form ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ ْﻌــ َﻦ‬they (fem.) collected) representing detached pronoun
‫ ُﻫــ َّﻦ‬is a Mutaharrik pronoun.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer pronoun ‫ ُت‬in the verb structure
form ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫( َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬I went) representing detached pronoun ‫ ٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬is a
Mutaharrik pronoun.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer pronoun ‫ ا‬in the verb structure form
‫( َرﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ‬they both (masc.) raised/reached) representing detached
pronoun ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬is a Saakin pronoun.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer pronoun ‫ و‬in the verb structure form
‫( َﺻﻠَ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬They became pious) representing the detached pronoun ‫ ﻫُـ ْﻢ‬is
a Saakin pronoun.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer pronoun ‫ ِت‬in the verb structure
form ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫( ﺧَـﺪَ ْﻋ‬You (fem.) deceived) representing the detached
pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬is a Mutaharrik pronoun.
Understanding Baab ‫ فَتَ َح‬present tense (‫ع‬
Understanding ٌ ‫ضــا ِر‬
َ ‫( ) ُم‬Seq # 90)
ِ َ‫( اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀ‬the present tense) are ‫ي‬, ‫ت‬, ‫ ٔا‬, ‫ن‬. These are the
The signs of ‫ـﺎر ُع‬
prefixes present in the verb forms. For easy understanding, let us divide all
14 present forms into three groups namely: “Five in pocket group”, “Mabni
group” and “Guest noon group”.
(Step # 1) Write an empty table as below.
 144

Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1

(Step # 2) “Five in pocket group” cells are simple and easy. These cells
represent the verb forms for the pronouns ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬, ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬, ‫ْـﺖ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, ‫ ٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬. In
these forms doers are hidden. For ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬take ‫ ﻓـﺘــﺢ‬and prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬as below.
‫ ﻓـﺘــﺢ = ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺢ‬+ ‫ﻳَـ‬
Now replace the prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬with ‫ت‬, ‫ت‬, ‫ ٔا‬, ‫ ن‬for the pronouns ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬, ‫ْـﺖ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, ‫ ٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬and
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬. In these forms doers are hidden (underlined). So the table looks like
below.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬

Reader is highly recommended to keep this into practice once he

encounters any new verb.
 145

(Step # 3) Two verb forms (for ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬come in “Mabni group”.
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
Only these forms have sukoon (‫ )ـ ْـ‬on Laam kalimah. For ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻫ‬, take ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬,
put sukoon (‫ )ـ ْـ‬on Laam kalimah and then add the doer ‫ن‬.َ
َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬+ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬. So the table looks
Now replace the prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬with ‫ ت‬for the pronoun ‫ــﻦ‬
like below.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
(Step # 4) “Guest noon group” cell represents the verb forms for the
pronouns ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ِﺖ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬. For ‫( ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬third person
masculine dual) take ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬and add the doer ‫ ا‬and then ‫ ِن‬as below.
‫ ِن = ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬+ ‫ ا‬+ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
Now replace the prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬with ‫ ت‬for the other dual pronouns ‫( ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬third
person feminine dual), ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫( َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬observe the arrow from right to left
below). So the table looks like below.
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
 ‫‪146‬‬

‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ ِن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
‫‪َ as below.‬ن ‪ and then‬و ‪ and add the doer‬ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ ‪ take‬ﻫ ُْـﻢ ‪For‬‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ ‪ +‬و ‪َ +‬ن = ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬
‫‪َٔ . So the table looks like‬اﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ ‪ for pronoun‬ت ‪ with‬ﻳَـ ‪Now replace the prefix‬‬
‫‪below.‬‬
‫‪Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1‬‬
‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬
‫ــﻦ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫‪ as below.‬ن ‪ and then‬ﻳـ ‪ and add the doer‬ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ ‪Take‬‬
‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ ‪ +‬ﻳـ ‪َ +‬ن = ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤـ ْﻴ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
‫‪Thus the final table looks like below.‬‬
‫‪Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1‬‬
‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤـ ْﻴ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬
‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
 147

Note: (1)
(1) The “Mabni group” verb forms will never change by any other
Arabic grammar rule.
(2)
(2) The “‫ ”ن‬of “Guest noon group” will disappear based on some
other Arabic grammar rules. This is discussed in further topics.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The signs of ‫ـﺎر ُع‬ ِ َ‫( اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀ‬the present tense) are
‫ي‬, ‫ت‬, ‫ ٔا‬, ‫ ن‬and they come as prefixes to the verbs.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The verb
form ‫( ﻧَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬we make) is present in this verse. So, “Five in pocket
group” for this verb will be derived as ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬, ‫َٔا ْﺟـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬
and ‫ﻧَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Mabni group” in present tense for the
root verb ‫( َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he made) has the verb forms as ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠ‬.
4) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Five in pocket group” for the root verb
‫( َرﻓَـ َﻊ‬he raised) are ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ ُﻊ‬, ‫ﺗ َْــﺮﻓَـ ُﻊ‬, ‫ﺗ َْــﺮﻓَـ ُﻊ‬, ‫ َٔا ْرﻓَـ ُﻊ‬and ‫ﻧ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ ُﻊ‬.
5) State TRUE or FALSE: The present tense verb form for the root verb
‫َـﺐ‬َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went) for the detached pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬is ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗ َْـﺬﻫَـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬.
Practice session for the present tense of the verb (Seq # 91)
Practice of present tense should be done carefully. No need to practice all
the 14 verb forms in a single attempt. Let us proceed with “Five in pocket
group” column practice. Under this category the doer is hidden. Assume
 148

that we have only verb form for ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬which is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. Follow the below
points to get the rest of the verb forms in “Five in pocket group” column.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. The doer is hidden.
2) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just change starting ‫ ﻳــ‬to ‫ت‬. Thus it is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. The doer is
hidden.
3) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬it is always same as that of ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬which is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. The doer is
hidden.
4) For ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬just start it with ‫ َٔا‬. Thus it is ‫ َٔاﺑْـ َﻌـ ُﺚ‬. The doer is hidden.
5) For ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬just start it with ‫ن‬.َ Thus it is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. The doer is hidden.
So “Five in pocket group” present tense forms for the root verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌ‬are
‫ـﺚ‬ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ َٔاﺑْـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬.
Practice the above steps for the below root verbs.
‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did), ‫( َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬he stopped), ‫َـﺐ‬ َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went), ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected), ‫َﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬
(he interceded).
Let us proceed now to practice “Mabni group”. Only two verb forms (for
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬comes in this group. The doer is ‫ َن‬for both the forms and
َّ ‫ ُﻫ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
the third radical will always get sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬. Following are the steps for the
root verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬.
1) For ‫ُــﻦ‬َّ ‫ ﻫ‬the doer is ‫ن‬.َ So the equation will be ‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬+ ‫ـﺚ‬ ْ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬.
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬just change the starting ‫ ﻳــ‬to ‫ت‬. Thus it is ‫ْــﻦ‬
2) For ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
 149

َ ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌ‬are ‫ْــﻦ‬

So “Mabni group” present tense forms for the root verb ‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
and ‫ْــﻦ‬
Practice the above steps for the below root verbs.
َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went), ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected), ‫َﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬
‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did), ‫( َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬he stopped), ‫َـﺐ‬
(he interceded)
Now comes, the difficult column namely “Guest noon group”. The ending
‫ ن‬will exist in all the forms but this ‫ ن‬is not the doer. The following are the
steps.
1) For the masculine dual ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the form of ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬
which is ‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is ‫َـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
2) From step # 1, just replace the prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬with ‫ ت‬for the other dual
pronouns ‫( ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬third person feminine dual), ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬and ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬. So it is
ِ ‫ ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬for these pronouns.
‫َـﺎن‬
3) For ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬add the doer ‫ و‬to the form of ‫ُــﻮ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬. Thus it is
َ ‫ ﻫ‬which is ‫ـﺚ‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮ َن‬.
4) From step # 3, just replace the prefix ‫ ﻳَـ‬with ‫ ت‬for ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬. Thus it is
‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮ َن‬.
5) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬the doer is ‫ي‬. Thus it is ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـ ِﺜـ ْﻴ‬.
Practice the above steps for the below root verbs.
‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did)
 150

‫( َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬he stopped)

‫َـﺐ‬َ ‫( َذﻫ‬he went)
‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬he collected)
‫( َﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬he interceded)
No need to get all the 14 forms at once. Understanding few forms in the
early stage of learning is very good.
Now let us try to fill our hand cells.
First fill “Five in pocket group” so it will look like this.
Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
ُ ‫َٔاﺑْـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬

Then fill “Mabni group”

Fore
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2
Fing.1
 151

ُ ‫َٔاﺑْـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬
َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬

Then fill “Guest noon group” (Remember the colour cells above to make
the recognition of cells of “Guest noon group”)
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫ـﺚ‬ َ ‫ـﺚ ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـ ِﺜـ ْﻴ‬
ُ ‫َٔاﺑْـ َﻌ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ـﺚ ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬ ُ ‫ـﺚ ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
ُ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺚ‬ ِ ‫َـﺎن ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫َـﺎن‬ ِ ‫َـﺎن ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬ ِ ‫َـﺎن ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬ ِ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
َ ‫ْــﻦ ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮ َن ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮ َن ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬
If we observe the above table finger 1 and finger 3 are same except the
initial ‫ ت‬and ‫ي‬. This is a tip to remember it further.
Practice the below steps by writing/reading to make it interesting and easy
as much as possible. Practice one of the below steps at one time.
1) Practice “Five in pocket group” (‫ـﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬ُ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫ َٔاﺑْـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
ُ ‫)ﻧ َـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬.
2) Practice “Mabni group” (‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫)ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬, ‫ْــﻦ‬
3) Practice finger 1 and finger 3. Observe it is just change in first letter
(finger 1 has ‫ ي‬and finger 3 has ‫)ت‬. Other structure of the verb is
same.
 152

4) Practice the middle cells of the hand for all duals. Only one ‫ ي‬and
ِ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬, ‫َـﺎن‬
then all ‫َـﺎن( ت‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬, ‫َـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬, ‫َـﺎن‬
ِ ‫)ﺗَـ ْﺒـ َﻌـﺜ‬.
Mutaharrik pronouns and Saakin pronouns for the present
resent tense (Seq
# 92)
The pronouns in “Five in pocket group” are hidden. The Mutaharrik
pronoun is ‫ َن‬which is available only in “Mabni group” (‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬and
َ ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬. This is because this ‫ َن‬is the doer in this case and has the vowel
‫ــﻦ‬
sign over it. The “Guest noon group” pronouns are Saakin pronouns.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ْﻌ‬
(They all (fem.) collect) is ‫ ن‬and it is Mutaharrik pronoun in present
tense. (Meaning of root verb ‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬is he collected).
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫( ﺗَ ْــﺮﻓَـ ْﻌ‬You
all (fem.) raise) is ‫ ن‬and it is Mutaharrik pronoun in present tense.
(Meaning of root verb ‫ َرﻓَـ َﻊ‬is he raised).
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The doer (‫ )ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬in the verb form ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻤـﻨَـ َﻌ‬
(they (two men) stop/prohibit) is ‫ ا‬and it is Saakin Pronoun in
present tense.
 153

Revisiting the topic “Verbal sentence as predicate (fifth type) for

nominal sentence”
sentence” (Seq # 93)
93)
We have learnt earlier that a verbal sentence can come as a predicate for a
nominal sentence. Consider the statement “Mohammed worshipped
Allah”. In this statement Mohammed is the doer and Allah is the object
(receiver of action). We will use the verb َ‫( َﻋـ َﺒـﺪ‬he worshipped) to construct
this statement which starts with a noun as follows.
‫ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻋـ َﺒـﺪَ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ َﻪ‬
Grammatical analysis is as below.
‫ = ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬subject (Mohammed). It is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. This is a nominal sentence as
it is starting here with a noun.
Now comes the verb َ‫ َﻋـ َﺒـﺪ‬. Thus a new sentence is starting here and it is
beginning with a verb. Putting the subsequent sentence in the brackets as
below. The sentence in brackets is a verbal sentence acting as a predicate
to ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬as the subject.
(‫ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ) َﻋـ َﺒـﺪَ اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ َﻪ‬
Analyzing the statement in brackets as below.
َ‫ = َﻋـ َﺒـﺪ‬Verb in past tense. Doer is hidden, pointing to ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬.
 154

‫ = اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ َﻪ‬Mafoolun bihi ‫( َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬object receiving the action from
Mohammed).
Exercises
ْ ‫ـﺐ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The statement ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ َ‫( َزﻳْـﻨ‬Zainab opened)
is a nominal statement.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The statement ‫ـﺐ َو ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َو َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬
ُ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬
(Zainab, Mohammed and Haamid opened) is a nominal statement.
َ ‫ــﻦ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The statement ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫( َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬You all (fem.)
opens) is not a nominal statement.
Unique Characteristics of second letter (ٌ‫( ))ع َكــلــِ َمــة‬Seq # 94)
94)
As we have learnt earlier that Arabic verbs are generally of three letters (or
radicals). The specimen verb in the past tense ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did) is used to
explain the concepts behind all the three letter verbs. The first letter (Fa
kalimah) and the third letter (Laam kalimah) always have Fatah. The
second letter (Ain kalimah) may have any of the three vowel signs: Fatah,
Kasrah or Dhammah.
Example: ‫ــﺢ‬َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬has Fatah on the second letter. ‫ َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬has kasrah on the
second letter. ‫ َﻛ ُــﺮ َم‬has Dhammah on the second letter.
 155

As second letter in the past tense can have vowel signs: Fatah, Kasrah or
Dhammah, the same second letter in the present tense can also have Fatah,
Kasrah or Dhammah.
Example: ‫ ﻳ َـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺢ‬has Fatah on the second letter. ‫ ﻳ َــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬has kasrah on the
second letter. ‫ ﻳ َـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ُﺮ‬has Dhammah on the second letter.
In order to explain this in the Arabic world there is a poem given in the
below table. Read the Poem column then immediately read the example
column (Poem column + Example Column) horizontally.
Poem Example Description
Fatah in past
will change
to Dhammah
‫ﻓَـ ْﺘــ ُﺢ‬ in present (a-
‫ﺿَ ـ ّ ٍﻢ‬ ‫ﻧ َــ َﺼــ َﺮ ﻳ َـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ُﺮ‬ u)
Fatah in past
will change
‫ﻓَـ ْﺘــ ُﺢ‬ ‫ﺿَ ــ َﺮ َب‬ to Kasrah in
‫َﻛـ ْﺴــ ٍﺮ‬ ‫ﻳ َــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬ present (a-i)
 156

Fatah in past
will remain
as Fatah in
ِ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺢ ﻳ َـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺢ ﻓَـ ْﺘــ َﺤـﺘ‬present (a-a)
‫ـﺎن‬
Dhammah in
past will
always
remain as
Dhammah in
‫ َﻛــ ُﺮ َم ﻳ َـ ْﻜــ ُﺮ ُم ﺿَ ـ ُّﻢ ﺿَ ـ ّ ٍﻢ‬present (u- (u-u)
Kasrah in
past will
change to
‫َﻛـ ْﺴــ ُﺮ‬ Fatah in
‫ َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ ﻳ َـ ْﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ ﻓَـ ْﺘــ ٍﺢ‬present (i-a)
Kasrah in
past will
remain as
‫ َﺣـ ِﺴـ َﺐ‬Kasrah in
ِ ‫َﻛـ ْﺴــ َﺮﺗ‬
‫َـﺎن‬ ‫ ﻳ َــ ْﺤـ ِﺴـ ُﺐ‬present (i-i)
As an example consider the group (a-a). The second letter in the past tense
of the verb “open” (‫ )ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬is Fatah and the same second letter in the present
 157

tense is also Fatah (‫)ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬. Thus the group is (a-a). There is no logic to
determine which category a verb belongs to. This knowledge comes by
time and not a worrying issue. In the next few sections sample verbs are
given for four Baabs (Fataha, Nasara, Zaraba, Sami`a). Keep practicing
them daily 5 verbs with all the 14 forms in past and present tense.
Perfection in these verbs will come by practice and by time. After getting
the confidence proceed to further topics. Follow the below procedure to
practice these verbs.
1) Understand the meaning of the root verb.
2) Practice all 14 verb forms in past tense.
3) Practice “Five in pocket group” verb forms in present tense.
4) Practice “Mabni group” verb forms in present tense.
5) Practice “Guest noon group” verb forms in present tense.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The first letter and third letter always have
Fatah in three letter verbs.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The second letter can have Fatah, Kasrah or
Dhammah both in the past or present tense.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: There is logic to determine which verb
belongs to which category.
 158

َ َ‫( )فَــت‬a
Few sample verbs from Baab Fataha (‫ــح‬ (a-a group)
group) (Seq # 95)
95)
The following two tables show past and present tense structure for the verb
َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬.
‫ــﺢ‬
Past tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺖ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ِﺖ‬ ‫ـﺖ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ َﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤ‬ ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬
َّ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ َـﻦ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬

Present tense structure

Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤـ ْﻴ‬
‫َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـ ِﺎن‬
َ ‫ــﻦ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
The below list provides few sample verbs that comes under Baab Fataha.
Both the past and present tense for third person masculine singular verb
along with nearly approximate meaning is given in the format (past tense,
present tense, meaning). It is organized as 5 verbs daily for practice.
 159

Day # 1 (‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬, He opened), (‫ﺧَـﺪَ َع‬, ‫ﻳَــﺨْـﺪَ ُع‬, He deceived), (‫َـﺐ‬ َ ‫ َذﻫ‬,
‫َـﺐ‬ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺬﻫ‬, He went/He took away), (‫ َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬, He made/created), (‫ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬,
‫ـﻞ‬ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـ َﻌ‬, He did).
Day # 2 (‫ــﻄـ َﻊ‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ‬, He cut), (‫ر َﻛـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﻛـ ُﻊ‬, to bow down), (‫ـﺚ‬
َ َ‫ﻗ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ُﻊ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـ َﻌ‬, He
َ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬
raised), (‫رﻓَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ ُﻊ‬, He raised), (‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ ‫ َذﺑ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺬﺑ َ ُــﺢ‬, to slaughter).
Day # 3 (‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـﻠْـ َﻌ‬, He cursed), (‫ﻧ َـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻔـ ُﻊ‬, to get profit), ( َ‫ـﺴــﺦ‬,
َ ‫ﻟَـ َﻌ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َ َ ‫ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴــﺦُ ﻧ‬,
To cancel), (‫ﺻـ َﻔ َــﺢ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼـ َﻔ ُــﺢ‬, to overlook), (‫ َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻤـﻨَـ ُﻊ‬, He stopped).
Day # 4 (‫ﺳـﺎَٔ َل‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺎَٔ ُل‬, He asked)), (‫ﻗَ َــﺮ َع‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ُع‬, He knocked), (‫ﻗَ َــﺮ َٔا‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ُٔا‬, He
read), (‫ﻧَــ َﺤ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨْــ َﺤ ُــﺮ‬, He slaughtered), (‫ﻇــﻬ ََــﺮ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻈــﻬ َُــﺮ‬, He came to know).
Day # 5 (‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬, He collected), (‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﺻـﻠ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼـﻠ َ ُــﺢ‬, He became pious),
(‫ َﺟــﻬ ََــﺰ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠــﻬ َُــﺰ‬, He became ready), (‫ﺧَـﻠَـ َﻊ‬, ‫ﻳَــﺨْـﻠَـ ُﻊ‬, He separated), (‫ﺧَـﺸَ ـ َﻊ‬,
‫ﻳَــﺨْـﺸَ ـ ُﻊ‬, He feared).
Day # 6 (‫ﺻـﻨَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼـﻨَـ ُﻊ‬, He did/made), (‫ﺷـ َﻔـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ َﻔـ ُﻊ‬, He intercede).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:55). The verb
‫ َﻣـﻨَـ َﻊ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:82). The past
tense verb form ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠْ ُﺖ‬I did) is not present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:99). The past
tense verb form ‫( َﺟـ َﻤـ ْﻌـﻨَـﺎ‬We collected) is present in this verse.
 160

َ ‫( )ﻧَــ‬a-
Few sample verbs from Baab Nasara (‫صــ َر‬ (a-u group) (Seq # 96)
96)
The following two tables show past and present tense structure for Baab
Nasara (a-u group).
Past tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ ُت‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ ِت‬
َ َ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ َت ﻧ‬ َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ﻧ َــ َﺼــ َﺮ ْت‬ ‫ﻧ َــ َﺼــ َﺮ‬
‫ــﺮ َـﺎ‬
‫ــﺼ ْ ﻧ‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َ َ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ ﻧ‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ َــﺮﺗَـﺎ‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ َــﺮا‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬
‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗ‬ َ َ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ ْﻢ ﻧ‬ َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ َن‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬ ‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ ْوا‬
َ َ‫ﻧ‬
Present tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫َٔاﻧْــ ُﺼـ ُﺮ‬
َ ْ‫ﻳَـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ُﺮ ﺗَـﻨْــ ُﺼـ ُﺮ ﺗَـﻨْـ ُﺼـ ُﺮ ﺗَـﻨْــ ُﺼـ ِﺮﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
‫ﻧ َـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ ُﺮ‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ َﺮ ِان ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ َﺮ ِان ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ َﺮ ِان ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ َﺮ ِان‬
‫ﻳَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ ُﺮ ْو َن ﻳَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ ْﺮ َن ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ ُﺮ ْو َن ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ُﺼـ ْﺮ َن‬
The below list provides few sample verbs that comes under Baab Nasara.
Both the past and present tense for the third person masculine singular
verb along with nearly approximate meaning is given in the format (past
tense, present tense, meaning). It is organized as 5 verbs daily for easy
practice.
 ‫‪161‬‬

‫ــﺼ َــﺮ( ‪Day # 1‬‬ ‫َ‪,‬ر َز َق( ‪, He worshiped),‬ﻳَـ ْﻌـ ُﺒـﺪُ ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ َﺒـﺪَ ( ‪, He helped),‬ﻳَـﻨْ ُــﺼ ُــﺮ ‪,‬ﻧ َ َ‬
‫‪, He rejected/was‬ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﻔ ُــﺮ ‪َ ,‬ﻛـ َﻔ َــﺮ( ‪, He gave provisioning (rizq)),‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ ُز ُق‬
‫‪, He understood).‬ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻌ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ﺷـ َﻌ َــﺮ( ‪unthankful),‬‬
‫ــﺾ( ‪, He created),‬ﻳَــﺨْـﻠُ ُــﻖ ‪,‬ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ( ‪, He left),‬ﻳَـ ْﺘ ُــﺮكُ ‪,‬ﺗ ََــﺮكَ ( ‪Day # 2‬‬ ‫‪, to‬ﻳَـﻨْـ ُﻘ ُ‬
‫ــﺾ ‪,‬ﻧ َـ َﻘ َ‬
‫‪, He prostrated).‬ﻳ َ ْـﺴــ ُﺠـﺪُ َ‪,‬ﺳــ َﺠـﺪَ ( ‪, to hide/conceal),‬ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﻢ ‪َ ,‬ﻛـﺘَ َـﻢ( ‪break),‬‬
‫ــﻦ( ‪Day # 3‬‬ ‫ــﻦ َ‪,‬ﺳـ َﻜ َ‬ ‫‪, He remembered),‬ﻳ َ ْـﺬ ُﻛ ُــﺮ ‪َ ,‬ذ َﻛ َــﺮ( ‪, to reside/dwell),‬ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ ُﻜ ُ‬
‫ــﻈ َــﺮ( ‪, to separate),‬ﻳَـ ْﻔ ُــﺮ ُق ‪,‬ﻓَ َــﺮ َق(‬ ‫‪, He‬ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻜ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ﺷـ َﻜ َــﺮ( ‪, He saw),‬ﻳَـﻨْ ُــﻈ ُــﺮ ‪,‬ﻧ َ َ‬
‫‪thanked).‬‬
‫‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻔ ُـﺴ ُــﻖ ‪,‬ﻓَ َـﺴ َــﻖ( ‪, He entered),‬ﻳ َ ْـﺪﺧُـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬دﺧَـ َﻞ( ‪, He killed),‬ﻳَـ ْﻘـ ُﺘـ ُﻞ ‪,‬ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ( ‪Day # 4‬‬
‫ـﺐ( ‪, He came out),‬ﻳَــﺨ ُْــﺮ ُج ‪,‬ﺧ ََــﺮ َج( ‪He disobeyed),‬‬ ‫‪, to write).‬ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ ُ‬
‫ـﺐ ‪َ ,‬ﻛـﺘَ َ‬
‫‪َ ,‬ﺣـ َﻜ َـﻢ( ‪, He said truth),‬ﻳ َ ْــﺼـﺪُ ُق َ‪,‬ﺻـﺪَ َق( ‪, He envied),‬ﻳَــ ْﺤ ُـﺴـﺪُ ‪َ ,‬ﺣ َـﺴـﺪَ ( ‪Day # 5‬‬
‫‪, to abide‬ﻳَــﺨْـﻠُـﺪُ ‪,‬ﺧَـﻠَـﺪَ ( ‪, to come/appear),‬ﻳ َــ ْﺤــﻀُ ُــﺮ ‪َ ,‬ﺣــﻀَ َــﺮ( ‪, to judge),‬ﻳَــ ْﺤـ ُﻜـ ُﻢ‬
‫‪forever).‬‬
‫ـﻞ َٔ‪,‬ا َﻛـ َﻞ( ‪, He seized/took),‬ﻳَـﺎْٔﺧ ُُـﺬ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺧَـ َﺬ( ‪, He ordered),‬ﻳَـﺎْٔ ُﻣ ُــﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َﻣ َــﺮ( ‪Day # 6‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﻳَـﺎْٔ ُﻛ ُ‬
‫‪, He‬ﻳَــ ْﺠـ ُﺒ ُــﺮ ‪َ ,‬ﺟـ َﺒ َــﺮ( ‪, He deceived by some plot),‬ﻳَـ ْﻤـ ُﻜ ُــﺮ ‪َ ,‬ﻣـ َﻜ َــﺮ( ‪He ate)),‬‬
‫‪recompensated).‬‬
‫‪, He got guidance),‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ ُﺷـﺪُ َ‪,‬ر َﺷـﺪَ ( ‪, He was back),‬ﻳَــﺨْـﻠُ ُـﻒ ‪,‬ﺧَـﻠَ َـﻒ( ‪Day # 7‬‬
‫ـﺖ( ‪, He disobeyed),‬ﻳَـ ْﻔــ ُﺠ ُــﺮ ‪,‬ﻓَــ َﺠ َــﺮ(‬ ‫ـﺖ ‪,‬ﻗَـﻨَ َ‬‫‪, He‬ﻳَـﻨْـ ُﻔ ُـﺶ ‪,‬ﻧ َـ َﻔ َـﺶ( ‪, He obeyed),‬ﻳَـ ْﻘـﻨُ ُ‬
‫‪, He made firm).‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮﺑُــﻂُ َ‪,‬رﺑَــﻂَ( ‪ruffled).‬‬
 162

Day # 8 (‫ﻃـﻠَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ــﻄـﻠُـ ُﻊ‬ ْ َ ‫ﻳ‬, to rose), (‫ﻏَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫ﻳَـﻐ ُْــﺮ ُب‬, to set), (‫ﺑَـﻠَـ َﻎ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـﻠُـ ُﻎ‬, He
reached), (‫ َﺣـﺸَ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤ ُـﺸ ُــﺮ‬, He gathered), (‫ﻧ َـﺸَ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨْ ُـﺸ ُــﺮ‬, He spread).
Day # 9 ( َ‫ﻧ َـ َﻔــﺦ‬, ُ‫ﻳَـ ْﻨـ ُﻔــﺦ‬, He blew), (‫ﺧ ََــﺮ َق‬, ‫ﻳَــﺨ ُْــﺮ ُق‬, He made hole), (‫ر َﺟ َـﻢ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ ُﺟـ ُﻢ‬,
He threw stone), (‫ز َﻋ َـﻢ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺰ ُﻋـ ُﻢ‬, He claimed), (َ‫ﺑ َ َـﺴــﻂ‬, ُ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒ ُـﺴــﻂ‬, He
extended/stretched).
Note:
(1) The verb ‫ ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ‬is present in the verse Quran (27:55:3). Its
translation is “He created the man”.
(2) The verb form ‫( ﻳ َ ْـﺴــ ُﺠـﺪَ ِان‬they two prostrate referring to the stars
and the trees) is present in the verse Quran (27:55:6). The
translation of this verse is “And the stars and the trees prostrate”.
َ ْ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ُﻣــ ِﺮﻳ‬you (fem. singular) order/command) is present in Quran
(3) ‫ــﻦ‬
(19:27:33).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:5). The present
tense verb form ‫ ﺗَــﺨ ُْــﺮ ُج‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:16). The present
tense verb form ‫( ﻳَـ ْﻌـ ُﺒـﺪُ ْو َن‬They all worship) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:43). The present
ُ ْ‫( ﻳَـﻨ‬They all help) is not present in this verse.
tense verb form ‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬
 163

Few sample verbs from Baab Zaraba (‫ضــ َر َب‬

َ ) (a-
(a-i group) (Seq # 97)
97)
The following two tables show past and present tense structure for Baab
Zaraba (a-i group).
Past tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
ُ ْ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ـﺖ ﺿَ َــﺮﺑ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ َ ْ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑ‬ ْ َ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬
‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑَـﺘَـﺎ‬ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑَـﺎ‬
‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـ ُﺘــ َّﻦ‬ ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑ‬ ‫ﺿَ َــﺮﺑُ ْــﻮا‬
Present tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
‫َٔاﺿْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬
َ ‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑِـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
‫ﻧَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬
ِ َ ‫ـﺎن ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ ‫ـﺎن ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬ِ َ ‫ـﺎن ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬
ِ َ ‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬
َ ْ‫ــﻦ ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑُ ْــﻮ َن ﺗَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑُ ْــﻮ َن ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑ‬
The below list provides few sample verbs that comes under Baab Zaraba.
Both the past and present tense for the third person masculine singular
verb along with nearly approximate meaning is given in the format (past
tense, present tense, meaning). It is organized as 5 verbs daily for easy
practice.
 164

Day # 1 (‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬, He stroke/gave example), (‫ﺧَـﺘَ َـﻢ‬, ‫ﻳَــﺨْـ ِﺘـ ُﻢ‬, to
stamp/close), (‫ َﻛ َـﺬ َب‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ِﺬ ُب‬, He lied), (‫ر َﺟـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ ِﺟـ ُﻊ‬, He returned), (‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺳـ َﻔ‬,َ
‫ـﻚ‬ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ ِﻔ‬, to flow/shed (blood)).
Day # 2 (‫ َﻋ َــﺮ َض‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌــ ِﺮ ُض‬, He presented/offered), (َ‫ﻫَـ َﺒــﻂ‬, ُ‫ﻳَــﻬْـﺒِــﻂ‬, to go down),
(‫ﻟَـ َﺒ َـﺲ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻠْـﺒ ُِـﺲ‬, to mix), (‫ َﻋـ َﻘـ َﻞ‬, ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـ ِﻘ‬, to understand), (‫ﻇـﻠَ َـﻢ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻈـ ِﻠـ ُﻢ‬, He
oppressed/wronged).
Day # 3 (‫ﻏَـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬, He forgave), (‫ َﺻـ َﺒــ َﺮ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼـﺒ ُِــﺮ‬, to be patient), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫ َﻛ َـﺴ‬,
‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜ ِـﺴ‬, He earned), (‫ َﻋ َــﺮ َف‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌــ ِﺮ ُف‬, to recognize), (‫ﻧ َـ َﺒـ َﺬ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨْـﺒ ُِﺬ‬, He threw)).
Day # 4 (‫ َﺣـ َﻤـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ ِﻤـ ُﻞ‬, He got laden), (‫ﻗَ َــﺮ َض‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘــ ِﺮ ُض‬, It passed away), (‫ َﻋـﺪَ َل‬,
‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪ ُل‬, to do justice), (‫ َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ُـﺲ‬, He sat), (‫ـﻚ‬ َ َ‫ َﻣـﻠ‬, ‫ـﻚ‬
ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻤـ ِﻠ‬, He owned).
Day # 5 ( َ‫ َﺣـ َﻔـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ ِﻔـﺪ‬, He served), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ َ‫ﻏَـﻠ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
ُ ‫ﻳَـﻐْـ ِﻠ‬, He prevailed/overtook),
(‫ـﻚ‬ َ َ‫ﻫَـﻠ‬, ‫ـﻚ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﻠ‬, He died/destroyed).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:58). The verb
form ‫( َﻛ َـﺴـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ‬They all earned) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:59). The verb
form ‫( َﻇـﻠَـ ُﻤ ْــﻮا‬They all oppressed) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:87). The verb
form ‫( َﻇـﻠَ َـﻢ‬He oppressed) is present in this verse.
 165

Few sample verbs from Baab Sami`a (‫سـ ِمــ َع‬

َ ) (i(i-a group) (Seq # 98)
98)
The following two tables show past and present tense structure for Baab
Sami`a (i-a group).
Past tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
ُ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ـﺖ َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌ‬ ْ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻌ‬ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬
‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌـﻨَـﺎ‬ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻌـﺘَـﺎ َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻌـﺎ‬
َّ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ــﻦ َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
َ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌ‬ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا‬
Present tense structure
Thumb Fing.4 Fing.3 Fing.2 Fing.1
َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬
‫َٔا ْﺳـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
‫ﻧ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬
ِ ‫ـﺎن ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ـﺎن ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻌ‬ ِ ‫ـﺎن ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻌ‬ ِ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻌ‬
َ ‫ــﻦ ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن ﺗ َْـﺴـ َﻤـ ْﻌ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ْﻌ‬
The below list provides few sample verbs that comes under Baab Sami`a.
Both the past and present tense for the third person masculine singular
verb along with nearly approximate meaning is given in the format (past
tense, present tense, meaning). It is organized as 5 verbs daily for easy
practice.
 166

Day # 1 (‫ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬, He listened), (‫ َﻋـ ِﻠ َـﻢ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬, He knew), (‫ َﻋـ ِﻤـ َﻪ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـ َﻤـ ُﻪ‬, to
become blind), (‫ِــﺢ‬ َ ‫رﺑ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﺑ َ ُــﺢ‬, to profit), (‫َــﻄ َـﻒ‬ ِ ‫ﺧ‬, ‫ْــﻄ ُـﻒ‬ َ ‫ﻳَــﺨ‬, to snatch/take
away).
Day # 2 (‫ َﻋـ ِﻤـ َﻞ‬, ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـ َﻤ‬, He worked), (‫ﺗَـﺒِـ َﻊ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﺘـ َﺒـ ُﻊ‬, to follow), (‫ َﺣــ ِﺰ َن‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤ َــﺰ ُن‬, He
got worried), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫ر ِﻫ‬,َ ‫َـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻫ‬, to fear), (‫ﻗَـﺒِـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘـ َﺒـ ُﻞ‬, to accept).
Day # 3 (‫ﺷــ ِﺮ َب‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸ َــﺮ ُب‬, He drank), (‫ﻃـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ــﻄـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬ ْ َ ‫ﻳ‬, to hope), ( َ‫ﺷــﻬِـﺪ‬,َ ُ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸــﻬَـﺪ‬,
He was witness), ( َ‫ َﻋــﻬِـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌــﻬَـﺪ‬, to take an agreement), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫ر ِﻏ‬,َ ‫ـﺐ‬
ُ َ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻏ‬, to turn
away).
Day # 4 (‫ﺳـ ِﻔـ َﻪ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻔـ ُﻪ‬, to be fool), (‫ﻗَــ ِﺮ َب‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ُب‬, to be near), (‫ر ِﺣ َـﻢ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﺣـ ُﻢ‬, to
show mercy)), (َ‫ َﺣـ ِﻔــﻆ‬, ُ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ َﻔــﻆ‬, He protected), (‫ َﻣــ ِﺮ َض‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻤ َــﺮ ُض‬, He became
patient).
Day # 5 (‫َـﺴ َــﺮ‬ ِ ‫ﺧ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺨ َـﺴ ُــﺮ‬, He got loss), (‫ َﺟــﻬِـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠــﻬَـ ُﻞ‬, to be ignorant),
( َ‫ َﺣـ ِﻤـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ َﻤـﺪ‬, He praised), (‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ‫ﻏ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
َ ‫ــﻀ‬ ُ َ‫ﻳَـﻐْــﻀ‬, to show wrath/anger), (‫ِـﺚ‬ َ ‫ﻟَـﺒ‬,
ُ ‫ﻳَـﻠْـ َﺒ‬, He remained).
‫ـﺚ‬
Day # 6 (‫ﻓَـ ِﻘـ َﻪ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـ َﻘـ ُﻪ‬, He understood), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫ر ِﻛ‬,َ ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﻛ‬, He embarked), (‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫ َﺣ ِـﺴ‬,
‫ـﺐ‬ُ ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤ َـﺴ‬, He thought/assumed), (َ‫ َﺣـﺒِــﻂ‬, ُ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ َﺒــﻂ‬, to became useless/vain),
( َ‫ﻧ َـ ِﻔـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻔـﺪ‬, He was exhausted).
Note: ‫ َٔا ْﺷــﻬَـﺪُ َٔا َّن ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً َّر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ُل اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬translates to “II bear witness that
Mohammed is the messenger of Allah”.
Exercises
 167

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:30). The past
tense verb form ‫ َﻋـ ِﻤـﻠُ ْــﻮا‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:79). The present
tense verb form ‫( ﻳَـ ْﻌـ َﻤـﻠُ ْــﻮ َن‬They all work) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:88). The past
tense verb root form ‫( َﻋـ ِﻤـ َﻞ‬He worked) is present in this verse.
Particle of futurity,
futurity, future
future tense (Seq # 99)
99)
The present tense can be converted into future tense exclusively by
preceding the verb with ‫ َس‬or ‫ﺳ ْﻮ َف‬.َ This ‫ َس‬is termed as particle of futurity
ِ ‫) َﺣ ْــﺮ ُف ْ ِاﻻ ْﺳـﺘَـ ْﻘـ َﺒ‬.
(‫ـﺎل‬
Example:
‫( ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬He opens)
‫( َﺳـ َﻴـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬He will open) or
‫( َﺳ ْﻮ َف ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬He will open)
Just a small note that, ‫ َس‬is not used in the questions for future purpose.
Example:
Where will you go ?
‫ــﻦ ﺗَـ ْﺬ َﻫـ ُﺐ ؟‬
َ ْ‫َٔاﻳ‬
 168

The verse Quran (4:3:181) uses ‫( َس‬We shall write, ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ َ)ﺳـﻨَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬and the
verses Quran (30:102:3) and Quran (30:102:4) use ‫ َﺳ ْﻮ َف‬to represent future
tense.
Exercises:
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:87). The word
‫ َﺳ ْﻮ َف‬is present in this verse.
Importance of Vowel signs, Understanding ‫( ذھــبــت‬Seq # 100)
100)
Correct vowel signs on the Arabic letters of any Arabic word are very
important to have the correct meaning. Consider the word ‫ذﻫـﺒـﺖ‬. Based
on its vowel signs it can have the following four meanings.
1) ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ َذﻫَـ َﺒ‬: It means “She went”.
2) ‫ـﺖ‬َ ‫ َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬: It means “You (masc.) went”.
ِ ‫ َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬: It means “You (fem.) went”.
3) ‫ـﺖ‬
4) ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫ َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬: It means “I went”.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The verb ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬means “He forgot”. This verb
comes under Baab ‫ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬.َ Read the verse Quran (15:18:24). This verse
has ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫( ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬You (masc.) forgot). Read the verse Quran (15:18:63).
This verse has ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫( ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬I forgot).
 169

Joining pronouns to the verbs (Seq # 101)

101)
When a detached pronoun joins to a verb, it becomes ‫( َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬object on
which action done). The following table provides two simple examples.
Verb + Detached
Meaning object Pronoun Verb
We raised them ‫= ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـﻨَـﺎﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬+ ‫ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـﻨَـﺎ‬
He killed him ‫= ﻗَـﺘَـﻠَـ ُﻪ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬+ ‫ﻗَـﺘَـ َﻞ‬
‫ُــﻮ‬
The attached pronouns in the above table ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ ُه‬are objects and objects
are always in ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:37). The letter ‫ك‬
in ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ ﺧَـﻠَـ َﻘ‬is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬with meaning “you (masculine singular)” and
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:99). The ending
word ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬in ‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ ْﻌـﻨَـﺎﻫُـﻢ‬is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬with meaning “they all (masculine
plural)” and ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: When a detached pronoun joins a verb, it
becomes “Jaar-Majroor”.
 170

Protection noon ‫( ن‬Seq # 102)

102)
In order not to disturb the verb structure protection ‫ ن‬is added, when the
detached pronoun ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬joins the verb. Let us understand by translating the
statement “You (Allah) created me” by using the verb ‫ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ‬.
‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ = ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻘـﺘَــ ِﻧـ ْـﻲ‬+ ‫ـﺖ‬
َ ‫ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻘ‬

Instead of ‫ ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻘـ ِﺘ ْــﻲ‬it is ‫ﺧَـﻠَـ ْﻘـﺘَــ ِﻧـ ْــﻲ‬. The added ‫ ن‬is called as protection ‫ﻧ ُ ْــﻮ ُن ( ن‬
‫)اﻟْــ ِﻮﻗَـﺎﻳَـ ِﺔ‬. Refer to the verse Quran (8: 7: 12) as an example.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The root verb َ‫ َﺣـ ِﻔــﻆ‬means “he protected”.
The construction ‫ َﺣـ ِﻔ ْــﻈـﺘَـ ِﻨــﻲ‬means “You protected me”.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The construction ‫ ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜْـﺘَـ ِﻨــﻲ‬means “You raised
me”.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The construction ‫ ﺿَ َــﺮﺑْـﺘَـ ِﻨــﻲ‬means “You hit
me”.
Protection alif ‫( ا‬Seq # 103)
103)
We know that the doer for the attached pronoun ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬in the verb structure
is ‫و‬. In order to mean this occurrence of ‫ و‬as the doer (‫)ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬, protection ‫ا‬
 171

will be attached to it. This is just like a spelling rule. Below are few
examples.
Examples
‫( ﻓَـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬They opened), ‫( ﺑَـ َﻌـﺜ ُْــﻮا‬They raised). From these examples it is
understood that ‫ و‬is the doer and protection ‫ ا‬is the spelling rule to it.
As opposite to this, a ‫ و‬representing the sign of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬is present in
‫ ُﻣ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ َن‬. This ‫ و‬is without protection alif ‫ا‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the complete verse Quran (15:18:21).
This verse does not have a verb ‫( ﻏَـﻠَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮا‬along with protection alif ‫ ا‬, ‫و‬
representing the doer).
Mafoolun bihi along with the doer ‫( تُــ ْم‬Seq # 104)
104)
The letter ‫ و‬should be placed when adding ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑـ ِﻪ‬to the verb structure
with doer ‫ ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬in the past tense. See the below example. The underlined ‫ و‬is
added extra. Examples are below.
‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ ُﻤ ْــﻮﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ َ َ ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ = ﻧ‬+ ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ ْﻢ‬
َ َ ‫( ﻧ‬You all helped them).
‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ = ﻗَـﺘَـﻠْـ ُﺘـ ُﻤ ْــﻮﻫُـ ْﻢ‬+ ‫( ﻗَـﺘَـﻠْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬You all killed them). Quran (4:3:183).
‫ُــﻮ = َﺳـﺎَٔﻟْـ ُﺘـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ ُﻩ‬َ ‫ ﻫ‬+ ‫( َﺳـﺎَٔﻟْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬You all asked him). Quran (13:14:34).
 172

Verbal sentence cannot have two doers (Seq # 105)

105)
Consider an English sentence ‘The men went’. Men is the plural of man.
In Arabic it is ‫ر ِﺟـﺎ ٌل‬.ِ It is not correct to say a verbal sentence ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ َذﻫَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮا ّ ِاﻟﺮ َﺟ‬.
This is because in the verb the first doer ‫ و‬is present and then noun ‫اﻟــ ّ ِﺮ َﺟـﺎ ُل‬
is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬representing the second doer. In order to avoid such a confusing
situation having two doers, singular form of the verb should be used in the
above verbal statement. The correct verbal sentence will be ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫َـﺐ اﻟــ ّ ِﺮ َﺟ‬
َ ‫ َذﻫ‬.
Alternatively, we can also construct a nominal sentence as below.
ُ ‫اﻟــ ّ ِﺮ َﺟ‬
‫ـﺎل َذﻫَـ ُﺒــ ْﻮا‬
In the above sentence ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ اﻟــ ّ ِﺮ َﺟ‬is the subject (‫ )اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫ َذﻫَـ ُﺒــ ْﻮا‬is the
complete verbal sentence acting as a predicate to the subject ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫اﻟــ ّ ِﺮ َﺟ‬. Just to
understand more clearly, let us correct another verbal sentence as below.
Example
“Those who believed said”.
َ ْ‫ﻗَـﺎﻟُ ْﻮا َّ ِاذلﻳ‬
Incorrect verbal sentence is ‫ــﻦ ا ٓ َﻣـﻨُــ ْﻮا‬
َ ْ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل َّ ِاذلﻳ‬
Correct verbal sentence is ‫ــﻦ ا ٓ َﻣـﻨُــ ْﻮا‬
Alternative Nominal sentence is ‫ــﻦ ا ٓ َﻣـﻨُــ ْﻮا ﻗَـﺎﻟُــ ْﻮا‬ َ ْ‫َّ ِاذلﻳ‬
Exercises
 173

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:21). This verse
َ ْ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل َّ ِاذلﻳ‬. The translation is “Those who overtook/won
has ‫ــﻦ ﻏَـﻠَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮا‬
said”.
Moods of the verb (Seq # 106)
106)
Verbs in Arabic language are moody. The verb structure in the past tense
is ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬. That means it does not change its form. But the verb structure in
the present tense has three cases or moods. They are ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُــ ْﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and
‫( َﻣــ ْﺠ ُﺰو ٌم‬verb having sukoon in the end). By default all the verbs in present
tense are ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬.
Example
Consider the verb ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬from “Five in pocket group” category in present
tense. It is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬by the presence of Dhammah (‫ )ـ ُـ‬in the end. To convert
it into ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬mood, put the Fatah in the end. Thus ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬is in ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬
mood. To convert into ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُﺰو ٌم‬mood, put the sukoon in the end. Thus
‫ـﻞ‬ْ ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌ‬is in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُﺰو ٌم‬mood.
Consider the verb ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬from “Guest noon group” category in the
present tense. It is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬by the presence of last ‫ن‬. In order to make it
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬or ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُﺰو ٌم‬we have to drop the end ‫ن‬. So, ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠُ ْﻮا‬is either ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬
or ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺰ ْو ٌم‬. That is the reason we name this category as “Guest noon
group”. The noon is a guest in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬mood.
 174

Consider the verbs ‫ــﻦ‬َ ْ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬

َ ْ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـﻠ‬from “Mabni group” category in
the present tense. These verbs are ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨــ ٌﻲ‬. These two verbs will not change
their form. It is to note that Noon in the last is the doer.
The below table shows few more examples for clear understanding
(translations are near to approximate but not exact).
Meaning ٌ‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬
He helps/(is helping) ‫ــﴫ‬ ُ ُ ْ‫ــﴫ ﻳَـﻨ‬ َ ُ ْ‫ــﴫ ﻳَـﻨ‬ ْ ُ ْ‫ﻳَـﻨ‬
They Collect ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮا ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن‬
They two raise ِ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ﻳ َ ْــﺮﻓَـ َﻌ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
They all (fem.) thank ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻜ ْــﺮ َن ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻜ ْــﺮ َن ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻜ ْــﺮ َن‬
You (fem.) open ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤ ْﻲ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤ ْﻲ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤـ ْﻴ‬

Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:1). The mood of
the present tense of the root verb (‫ ) َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:49). The mood of
the present tense of the root verb (‫)ﻇـﻠَ َـﻢ‬
َ is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:110). The mood
of the present tense of the root verb (‫ ) َﻋـ ِﻤـ َﻞ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬in this verse.
 175

Imperative tense (‫( )فِــ ْع ُل أَ ْمــ ٍر‬Seq # 107)

107)
The imperative tense is used to give command/order or request to the
front person (the second person) like “Sit!”, “Go!”, “Open!” etc. The
person who is giving the command/order is the first person.
The verbs in this tense are in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬mood. The following steps are used
to construct the imperative tense.
Steps
1) Take the verb of second person in the present tense. Example: ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
(You (masc.) open)
2) Remove the beginning ‫ ت‬sign of the present tense. Example: ‫ﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬
3) Make the verb into ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬case by replacing Dhammah with sukoon.
Example: ‫ﻓْـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬
4) In Arabic language it is not possible to read a word with the first
letter having sukoon (‫ )ـ ْـ‬as a vowel sign. If this is the case then
precede it with ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْ َــﻮ َﺻ‬. This Hamza will take Dhammah (‫ )ـ ُـ‬if
the second letter has Dhammah, otherwise it always takes Kasrah (ِ‫)ــ‬.
Example In ‫ ﻓْـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬there is Fatah (َ‫ )ــ‬on the second letter ‫ ت‬so Hamza
Example:
will take Kasrah (ِ‫)ــ‬. Thus the imperative tense will be ‫ ِاﻓْـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬. Its
meaning is “Open!”.
 176

By using the above steps, the following table shows the construction of
imperative tense for the verb ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬with respect to 6 personal pronouns.
Making
Removing Actual Detache
majzoom
Adding ‫ ٔا‬at the the verb in d
either by
beginning beginning present pronou
placing ‫ ْـ‬or
‫ت‬ tense n
dropping ‫ن‬
‫ِاﻓْـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَ ْــﺢ‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬
‫ِاﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬ ِ ‫ـﺎن ﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ِاﻓْـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن ﻓْـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
‫ِاﻓْـﺘَــ ِﺤــ ْﻲ‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَــ ِﺤــ ْﻲ‬ َ ‫ــﻦ ﻓْـﺘَــ ِﺤ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺤ ْﻴ‬ ِ ‫َٔاﻧ‬
‫ْـﺖ‬
‫ِاﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬ ‫ﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬ ‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ـﺎن ﻓْـﺘَــ َﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤ‬ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َ ‫ِاﻓْـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻓْـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ــﻦ ﻓْـﺘَــ ْﺤـ َـﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬ َّ ‫َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬
‫ــﻦ‬

Sample Case (Second letter taking Dhammah (‫))))ــ ُـ‬: )): In ‫ ﻧ ُْــﺼ ْــﺮ‬there is
Dhammah (‫ )ـ ُـ‬on the second letter ‫ ص‬so Hamza will take Dhammah (‫)ـ ُـ‬.
Thus the imperative tense will be ‫ ُاﻧ ُْــﺼ ْــﺮ‬. Its meaning is “Help!”.
Exercises
 177

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:28). The

imperative tense ‫( ِا ْﺻـﺒ ِْــﺮ‬be patient!) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:45). The
imperative tense ‫( ِاﺿْ ــ ِﺮ ْب‬give example!) is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:50). The
imperative tense ‫( ُا ْﺳــ ُﺠـﺪُ ْوا‬you all do prostration!) is present in this
verse.
Prohibitive ‫( ال‬Seq # 108)
108)
Prohibitive ‫ ﻻ‬is used when you give a command/order or request in
negation. It is termed as ‫ﻻ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻫـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬. This ‫ ﻻ‬will make ‫ـﺎر ٌع‬
ِ َ‫( ُﻣــﻀ‬present tense)
into ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬.
Example (1)
‫( ﻻ ﺗَــ ْﺤ َــﺰ ْن‬Don’t worry!). /* Arabic language is easy */
“Don’t worry” is present in the verse Quran (10:9:40).
Example (2)
Suppose in front of us many people are present. “Don’t open” has to be
said as follows.
‫ﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬
‫ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬by dropping ‫ ن‬from the ‫ َﻣــ ْﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬form ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬.
 178

Example (3)
“Don’t kill Yousuf” (‫ )ﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻘـ ُﺘـﻠُ ْــﻮا ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ َـﻒ‬is present in Quran (12:12:10).
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬because it is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬.
‫ ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ َـﻒ‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
Example (4)
“…Don’t prostrate for/to the sun and for/to the moon, and prostrate for/to
Allah…” (‫ ) َﻻ ﺗ َ ْﺴـ ُﺠـﺪُ ْوا ِﻟ َّﻠﺸـ ْﻤ ِـﺲ َو َﻻ ِﻟﻠْـﻘَـ َﻤـ ِﺮ َو ْاﺳـ ُﺠـﺪُ ْوا ِ ٰ ّ ِهلل‬is present in Quran
(24:41:36).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Suppose there are two security guards on the
gate of cave. The translation of the statement “Don’t open the door of
the cave” to these security guards is “‫ـﺎب اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬ َ َ ‫”ﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ ﺑ‬. ‫ ﻻ‬is the
prohibitive ‫ ﻻ‬and ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤـﺎ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬by dropping ‫ ن‬at the end from its
actual form ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺤ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The correct translation of the statement
“Don’t oppress/ do unjustice” to second person masculine singular is
‫ﻻ ﺗَ ْــﻈـ ِﻠـ ْﻢ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The prohibitive ‫ ﻻ‬will not make ‫ـﺎر ٌع‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬into
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬mood.
Negative particle for past, present and future (Seq # 109)
109)
The negative particle used for past tense is ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬.
 179

Example:
َ َ ‫ ( َﻣـﺎ ﻧ‬I did not see Mohammed).
ً‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ ُت ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪ‬
The negative particle used for present tense is ‫ﻻ‬. This ‫ ﻻ‬is termed as ‫ﻻ‬
‫اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻓـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬. This ‫ ﻻ‬does not change the mood of present tense. This ‫ ﻻ‬is
different than prohibitive ‫ ﻻ‬in the sense that it is not an order, but just
negating a fact.
Example
‫( ﻻ َٔاﻋْــ ِﺮ ُف ٰﻫ َﺬا‬I don’t know this).
The negative particle used for future tense is ‫ﻟ َــ ْﻦ‬. This particle will make
the verb ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
Example
‫َـﺐ اﻟ َــﻰ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ﻏَـﺪً ا‬ ُ ‫( َﺳـﺎَٔ ْذﻫ‬I will go to the cave tomorrow).
ِٕ
‫َـﺐ اﻟ َــﻰ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ ﻏَـﺪً ا‬ ْ َ ‫( ﻟ‬I will not go to the cave tomorrow).
َ ‫ــﻦ َٔا ْذﻫ‬
ِٕ
It is to observe that the particle of futurity (‫ َ)س‬is omitted when ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ َ ‫ ﻟ‬is used.
Here is an example of positive and negative sentences for the verb drink
with the doer I.
Past tense Present tense Future tense
Positive I drank I drink I will drink
Sentence (‫َ)ﺷﺷــ ِﺮﺑْ ُﺖ‬ (‫) َٔا ْﺷ َــﺮ ُب‬ (‫َ)ﺳﺳـﺎَٔ ْﺷ َــﺮ ُب‬
 180

Negative I did not drink I do not drink I will not drink

sentence (‫) َﻣـﺎ َﺷــ ِﺮﺑْ ُﺖ‬ (‫)ﻻﻻ َٔا ْﺷ َــﺮ ُب‬ ْ َ ‫)ﻟ‬
(‫ــﻦ َٔا ْﺷ َــﺮ َب‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The negative particle used for the past tense is
‫ﻻ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: ‫ ﻻ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻓـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬does not change the mood of the
present tense. It just negates the fact. It is not like an order in
negation.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The negative particle for future tense is ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ َ‫ﻟ‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
and this particle converts the present tense into ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
Negative particles ( ‫ لَــ ْم‬and ‫( ) لَــ ﱠمــا‬Seq # 110)
110)
‫ ﻟ َ ْـﻢ‬is a negative particle used in ‫ـﺎر ٌع‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. It brings two changes as below.
a) It converts the present tense into past tense.
b) It converts the verb from ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬to ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬.
Examples:
‫ـﻞ‬ْ ‫ـﻞ = ﻟ َ ْـﻢ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌ‬ُ ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ َﻌ‬+ ‫( ﻟ َ ْـﻢ‬He did not make)
‫ ﺗ َ ْــﻈـ ِﻠـ ُﻢ = ﻟَـ ْﻢ ﺗَ ْــﻈـ ِﻠـ ْﻢ‬+ ‫( ﻟ َ ْـﻢ‬She/You did not oppress)
‫ َٔا ْﺷ َــﺮ ُب = ﻟَـ ْﻢ َٔا ْﺷ َــﺮ ْب‬+ ‫( ﻟ َ ْـﻢ‬I did not drink)
 181

‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬is also a negative particle acts exactly like ‫ﻟ َ ْـﻢ‬. But the meaning of ‫ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬
is ‘Not yet’.

Example:
ْ ‫ ﻳ َ ْـﺪﺧُـ ُﻞ = ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ ﻳ َ ْـﺪﺧ‬+ ‫( ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬He did not yet enter)
‫ُـﻞ‬
Quran (4:3:142) and Quran (26:49:14) has the word ‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬with meaning as
‘Not yet’.
‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬has another meaning as “when”, which will be discussed later on.
The particle ْ‫ أَن‬and ‫ــل( ل‬
ِ ‫( ))ال ُم الــتﱠــ ْعــلِــ ْي‬Seq # 111)
111)
The particle ‫ َٔا ْن‬and ‫ ل‬can come before present tense verb. Both of them
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. The literal meaning of these particles are
convert the verb into ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
“to”, “that”, “for”.
Example
‫ـﻞ = َٔا ْن ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬
ُ ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌ‬+ ‫( َٔا ْن‬that you make)
َ ‫َـﺐ = َٔا ْن َٔا ْذﻫ‬
‫َـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ َٔا ْذﻫ‬+ ‫( َٔا ْن‬that I go)
‫ َٔاﻓْــﻬَـ ُﻢ = ِﻟـﺎَٔﻓْــﻬ ََـﻢ‬+ ‫( ِﻟــ‬to understand myself, for understanding)
Exercises
 182

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:12). ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ ﻻ ُم اﻟﺘَّـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬is
present in this verse and it makes the verb ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌـﻠَ َـﻢ‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:94). The particle
‫ َٔا ْن‬is present in this verse and it makes the verb ‫ ﺗَــ ْﺠـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:109). The particle
‫ َٔا ْن‬is present in this verse.
Masdar ‫ــصــ َد ٌر‬
ْ ‫( َم‬Seq # 112)
112)
Masdar (‫ ) َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is a verbal noun (a noun formed from the verb). It is the
name (or noun) of the action. ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬describes the action without time and
without doer. It cannot act as the verb of a sentence. Consider the verb
‫( َدﺧَـ َﻞ‬he entered). The name of this action can be expressed as “to enter”
or “entering”. ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬for the verb ‫ َدﺧَـ َﻞ‬is ‫ ُدﺧ ُْــﻮ ٌل‬. Consider another verb
‫( َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬he sat). The name of this action can be expressed as “to sit” or
“sitting”. The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬for the verb ‫ َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬is ‫ ُﺟـﻠُ ْــﻮ ٌس‬. Other similar examples
can be “to swim, swimming”, “to learn, learning”, “to cook, cooking” etc.
Understand the below example.
Example
He went towards cave to enter.
A possible translation with ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is as follows.
‫َـﺐ اﱃ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ِﻟـ ُّﺪﺧ ُْــﻮ ِل‬
َ ‫َذﻫ‬
 183

‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬nouns come in different pattern, we will learn about these patterns
as we go forward. Few of them are (‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬, ‫ــﺢ‬
ٌ ‫)ﻓَـ ْﺘ‬, (‫َـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ِذﻫ‬, ( َ‫ َﻋـ َﺒـﺪ‬, ‫) ِﻋـ َﺒـﺎ َد ٌة‬,
َ ‫ َذﻫ‬, ‫َـﺎب‬
( َ‫ﺳــ َﺠـﺪ‬,َ ‫)ﺳــ ُﺠ ْــﻮ ٌد‬, َ َ ‫ﻧ‬, ‫ )ﻧ َ ْــﺼ ٌــﺮ‬etc. Quran (30:110:1) has two ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬nouns:
ُ (‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
‫ ﻧ َ ْــﺼ ٌــﺮ‬and ‫ﻓَـ ْﺘـ ٌـﺢ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬nouns of the verbs ‫ﺻـ َﺒ َــﺮ‬,َ ‫ َﺟـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬,
‫ َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬are ‫ﺻـ ْﺒ ٌــﺮ‬,َ ‫ َﺟـ ْﻤـ ٌﻊ‬and ‫ﺳـ ْﻤـ ٌﻊ‬.َ These nouns are available as verse
endings in the verses Quran (15:18:67), Quran (16:18:99) and Quran
(16:18:101) in the ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬state.
Masdar muawwal (‫ــصــ َد ٌر ُمــ َؤ ﱠو ٌل‬
ْ ‫( ) َم‬Seq # 113)
113)
‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬is defined as per below equation.
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب = َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬ ِ َ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ُﻣــﻀ‬+ ‫َٔا ْن‬
ُ ْ‫ـﺎر ٌع َﻣـﻨ‬
We can replace the original ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬with ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬. Let us understand it
by the example present in the last topic.
Example
Below statement is with original ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬.
‫َـﺐ اﻟَــﻰ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ِﻟـ ُّﺪﺧ ُْــﻮ ِل‬
َ ‫َذﻫ‬
ِٕ
After replacing the original ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬the sentence will be as below.
 184

‫َـﺐ اﻟ َــﻰ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َٔا ْن ﻳ َ ْـﺪﺧُـ َﻞ‬

َ ‫َذﻫ‬
ِٕ
The above underlined part is ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬. The translation is “He went
towards the cave to enter”.
Below is a table for understanding other examples.

Sentence with original ‫ــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬

ْ ‫َﻣ‬ Sentence with ‫ــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬
ْ ‫َﻣ‬
To do justice is good for you
The justice is good for you all.
ُ‫اﻟْـ َﻌ ْـﺪ ُل ﺧَـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ﻟَـﻜـ ْﻢ‬ all.
‫َٔا ْن ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪﻟُ ْﻮا ﺧَـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ﻟَـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬
َ ‫ لَــ ْي‬and ‫ــجــا ِزيﱠــةُ( َمــا‬
Special verb ‫ــس‬ ِ ‫( ) َمــا ا ْل‬Seq # 114)
َ ‫ــح‬
The word ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬is a verb. It is a weak and Jaamid verb. In Arabic language
it is termed as ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ﻧـَﺎ ِﻗــ ٌﺺ َو َﺟـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬. A verb is said to be Jaamid if it only has
past tense. Jaamid verb does not have present and imperative tense. Jaamid
verb is used in a nominal sentence. The meaning of the verb ‫ ﻟ َـ ْﻴـ َﺲ‬is “is
not”. Though it has only past tense, its meaning is in present tense.
The conjugation of ‫ ﻟ َـ ْﻴـ َﺲ‬for 14 personal pronouns in the past tense is
‫ﻟ َـ ْﻴـ َﺲ‬, ‫ﻟ َـ ْﻴـ َﺴـﺎ‬, ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴـ ُﺴ ْﻮا‬, ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴـ َﺴ ْﺖ‬, ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴـ َﺴـ َﺘﺎ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴ َﻦ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴ َﺖ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴ ُﺘـ َﻤﺎ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴ ِﺖ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴﺘ ُـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴـ ُﺘــ َّﻦ‬, ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺴـ ُﺖ‬, ‫ﻟ َـ ْﺴـﻨَـﺎ‬.
As we know from ‫ ﻫ َُّﻦ‬the third letter (in this case ‫ )س‬will always get
sukoon (‫ )ـ ْـ‬till the personal pronoun ‫ﳓ ُﻦ‬. ْ َ If we put sukoon (‫ )ـ ْـ‬on ‫ س‬then
two consecutive letters ‫ ﻳــ‬and ‫ س‬will have sukoons. In Arabic language
 185

occurrence of sukoons on two consecutive letters is not possible and one

has to drop. As ‫ ﻳــ‬is a weak letter it will drop leading the word construction
as ‫ﻟ َ ْـﺲ‬. This explanation is given in the below equation for the personal
pronoun ‫ﻫ َُّﻦ‬.
َ ‫ َن = ﻟ َ ْـﺴ‬+ ‫ َن = ﻟ َ ْـﺴـ‬+ ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ ْـﺲ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
When the word ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬joins a nominal sentence it brings the following
changes.
a) The terminology of ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬changes to “Noun of Laisa” which is ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ‬
‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬.
b) The terminology of ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬changes to “Predicate of Laisa” which is ‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬
‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬.
c) It makes “Predicate of Laisa” (‫ ) َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬as ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬. It is also
observed that if the predicate is one word then it is taking the
preposition ‫ب‬. Under such case the predicate will be in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬state.
Example
‫( ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳـْ ٌﺪ‬The cave is new).
After introducing ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬the following two cases are possible.
‫( ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ ﺑِــ َﺠـ ِﺪﻳ ْـ ٍﺪ‬The cave is not new).
‫( ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳـﺪً ا‬The cave is not new).
 186

There exist one ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬called as ‫ـﺎزﻳَّـ ُﺔ‬ ِ ‫( َﻣـﺎ اﻟْــ ِﺤــ َﺠ‬the Hijaazi ma) behaves exactly
like ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬. This Hijaazi ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬is a sister of ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬. See below for understanding.
‫( َﻣـﺎ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ ﺑِــ َﺠـ ِﺪﻳ ْـ ٍﺪ‬The cave is not new).
‫( َﻣـﺎ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳـﺪً ا‬The cave is not new).
Another example of ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬is below. Here ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬is ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬because of this ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬.
‫( َﻣـﺎ ٰﻫـ َﺬا ﺑَـﺸَ ًــﺮا‬This is not a human being) Quran (12:12:31).
Two more examples are Quran (29:69:41) (Translation: And it is not the
word of a poet…) and Quran (30:86:14) (Translation: And it is not the
amusement).
Hope or fear by the verb ‫ســى‬
َ ‫( َعــ‬Seq # 114A)
َ ‫ ﻋ‬is a Jaamid verb like ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬. Its meaning is hope or fear similar to the
‫َـﺴــﻰ‬
meaning of particle ‫ﻟَـ َﻌـ َّﻞ‬. This verb literally means as “may be” or
“perhaps”.
The verb ‫َـﺴــﻰ‬ َ ‫ ﻋ‬can be used as an incomplete verb (incomplete in
meaning) or a complete verb. If it is an incomplete verb then ‫َـﺴــﻰ‬ َ ‫ ﻋ‬needs
‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬. ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬should always be ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬. Quran (11:9:102) is
an example where ‫ﷲ‬ ُ is its ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫ َٔا ْن ﻳَـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ َب‬is ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬. Here
it means as hope.
 187

If it is a complete verb then ‫َـﺴــﻰ‬ َ ‫ ﻋ‬is immediately followed by ‫َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬
as the ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬of ‫ َﻋـ َﺴــﻰ‬. Quran (15:18:24) is an example where ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ َ ‫ َٔا ْن ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳ‬is
َ ‫ﻋ‬.
the ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬of ‫َـﺴــﻰ‬
Understanding relative pronouns again (Seq # 114B)
114B)
We already know that ‫اذلي‬, ِ َّ ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ َاﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬etc are relative pronouns ( ٍ‫) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َﻣ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮل‬.
These pronouns basically means as “that which”. They provide some more
information about someone like “those who made”, “those who sat”,
“those who entered” etc. This extra information is termed in Arabic as
‫ﺻـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ِل‬.ِ This extra information can be a nominal statement or
verbal statement or a phrase. One simple example is given below.
Those who entered the cave are successful.
The Arabic translation is
‫ــﻦ َد َﺧﻠُ ْــﻮا اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ ُﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻠــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬
َ ْ‫َاﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬
Grammatical analysis is as follows.
Arabic Words Grammatical Analysis
َ ْ‫َاﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ُــﻮ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬
َ ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َﻣ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮلٍ َو ﻫ‬
‫َد َﺧﻠُ ْــﻮا اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ‬ ‫ِﺻـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ِل َو ِﻫ َــﻲ اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬
‫َد َﺧﻠُ ْــﻮا‬ ٌ ‫ـﺎض َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ ُ ‫ِﻓـ ْﻌ‬
ٍ ‫ـﻞ َﻣ‬
 ‫‪188‬‬

‫اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ َﻣـﻨْ ُ‬
‫ُﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻠــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬ ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع )ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‪(type 1‬‬
‫ـﺖ ‪Similarly, in the verse Quran (15:18:30) the phrase‬‬ ‫ــﺤ ِ‬ ‫ٰا َﻣـﻨُ ْــﻮ َو َﻋـ ِﻤـﻠُــﻮ ٰ ّ‬
‫ااﻟــﺼـ ِﻠ ٰ‬
‫ــﻦ ‪ِ for relative pronoun‬ﺻـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ِل ‪is‬‬
‫‪َ .‬اﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳْ َ‬
‫)‪Grammatical analysis (GA) of few Quran verses (Seq # 114C‬‬
‫)‪114C‬‬
‫‪This section deals with some GA of few Quran verses as below.‬‬
‫)‪Quran (27:55:3‬‬
‫‪Arabic Words‬‬ ‫‪Grammatical Analysis‬‬
‫ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ‬ ‫ـﺎض َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ ٌ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ ‫ـﻞ َﻣ ٍ‬ ‫ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُ‬
‫ْ ِاﻻﻧْ َـﺴ َ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ َﻣـﻨْ ُ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬

‫‪Approximate translation:‬‬
‫‪translation He created man.‬‬
‫)‪Quran (29:67:12‬‬
‫‪Arabic Words‬‬ ‫‪Grammatical Analysis‬‬
‫ا َّن‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف ﺗ َــ ْﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ٍﺪ َو ﻧ َــ ْﺼـ ٍﺐ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫َاﻟَّـ ِﺬﻳْ َ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ِل َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ ا َّن َﻣـﻨْ ُ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ِﺻـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﻮ ُﺻ ْــﻮ ِل َو ِﻫ َــﻲ اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ َﻴـ ُﺔ ﻳَــﺨْـﺸَ ْــﻮ َن َرﺑَّــﻬ ُْـﻢ ﺑِـﺎﻟْـﻐَـ ْﻴ ِ‬
‫ـﺐ‬
 189

‫ﻳَــﺨْـﺸَ ْــﻮ َن‬ ِ َ‫ـﻞ اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀ‬

ِ‫ـﺎرع‬ ُ ‫ِﻓـ ْﻌ‬
‫َرﺑَّـ‬ ٌ َ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َو ﻫ َُـﻮ ُﻣــﻀ‬
‫ـﺎف‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ َﻣـﻨ‬
‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬ ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ٕاﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ِ ‫ﺑِـﺎﻟْـﻐَـ ْﻴ‬ ‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
‫ﻟَــﻬ ُْـﻢ َّﻣـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ٌة َّو َا ْﺟ ٌــﺮ‬
‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ ا َّن َو ِﻫ َــﻲ اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬
‫َﻛـﺒِـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬ ِٕ ِٕ
‫ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ ‫ـﺎر َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ ُﻣـ َﻘ ِّـﺪ ٌم‬ ٌ ‫َﺟ‬
‫َّﻣـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ٌة‬ ‫َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
‫َّو‬ ‫َﺣــ ْﺮ ُف َﻋــ ْﻄـ ٍﻒ‬
‫َا ْﺟ ٌــﺮ‬ ‫ــﻄ ْــﻮ ٌف ﻋَ ٰﲆ َﻣـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ٍة‬ ُ ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع َﻣـ ْﻌ‬
‫َﻛـ ِﺒـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬ ‫ـﺖ ِﻟـ َﺎ ْﺟــ ٍﺮ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬

Appropximate translation:
translation Indeed, those who fear their Lord unseen, for
them there is forgiveness and a great reward.
Introduction to Weak verbs (Seq # 115)
115)
We have learnt that most of the Arabic verbs are of three letters (or
radicals). As per the sample verb ‫ ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬the first radical is ‫ف‬, the second
radical is ‫ ع‬and the third radical is ‫ل‬. If any one of these three radicals is ‫و‬
or ‫ ي‬then the verb is called as weak verb. In Arabic language it is termed
 190

as ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﻌـﺘَـ ُّﻞ‬. The weak verb undergoes few changes in past, present and
imperative tenses. If none of these three radicals is ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬then the verb is
called as sound verb. The next topic provides you few tips for
understanding weak verbs and then we will be learning weak verbs then
after.
Tips for understanding weak verbs (Seq # 116)
116)
The following are few tips to understand weak verbs.
1) In any verb form (present or past or imperative tense) doer cannot be
dropped.
2) In the case of Mutaharrik pronouns as the third radical always take
sukoon, this radical in these forms cannot be dropped, though they
are weak.
3) Consecutive sukoons (Two sukoons together) cannot be possible. So
under this situation, if one sukoon is present on weak letter then the
weak letter should be dropped.
4) Kasrah followed by ‫ و‬is incompatible in Arabic language. So Kasrah
should be changed to Dhammah.
5) Dhammah cannot be followed by ‫ ﻳــ‬in Arabic language. So Dhammah
should be changed to Kasrah.
 191

‫ ا ْلــ ِمــثَــا ُل‬verbs (Seq # 117)

117)
If the first radical (‫ )ف‬is ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬then the verb is called as weak of fa ( ‫ُﻣـ ْﻌـﺘَـ ُّﻞ‬
ُ ‫اﻟْـ ِﻤـﺜ‬. In case of present tense and when the weak
‫)اﻟ َﻔـﺎ ِء‬. It is also called as ‫َـﺎل‬
letter is ‫ و‬, it is lost as shown in the below table for the personal pronoun
‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬. Practice them each day 5 verbs.
Actual Present Present tense
Root
Meaning tense after before Group
verb
dropping ‫و‬ change
Day # 1

he stopped ‫ﻳَـ ِﻘ ُـﻒ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻗ ُـﻒ‬ ‫َوﻗَ َـﻒ‬ a-i

he found ِ َ‫ﻳ‬
ُ‫ــﺠـﺪ‬ ُ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﺟـﺪ‬ َ‫َو َﺟـﺪ‬ a-i

he weighed ‫ﻳَــ ِﺰ ُن‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِز ُن‬ ‫َو َز َن‬ a-i

 ‫‪192‬‬

‫‪to necessary‬‬ ‫ـﺐ‬ ‫ﻳَ ِ‬

‫ــﺠ ُ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﺟ ُ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ‫ـﺐ‬
‫َو َﺟ َ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬

‫‪to arrive‬‬ ‫ﻳَ ِ‬

‫ــﺼـ ُﻞ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﺻـ ُﻞ‬ ‫َو َﺻـ َﻞ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬
‫‪Day # 2‬‬

‫‪to promise‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌـﺪُ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻋـﺪُ‬ ‫َو َﻋـﺪَ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬

‫‪to enter‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ِﻠ ُــﺞ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻟ ُــﺞ‬ ‫َوﻟ َ َ‬

‫ــﺞ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬
‫‪to advice‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌــﻆُ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻋــﻆُ‬ ‫َو َﻋــﻆَ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬
‫‪to born‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ِﻠـﺪُ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻟـﺪُ‬ ‫َوﻟَـﺪَ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬
‫‪to‬‬ ‫ﻳَ ِ‬
‫ــﺼ ُـﻒ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﺻ ُـﻒ‬ ‫‪َ a-i‬و َﺻ َـﻒ‬
‫‪explain/describe‬‬
‫‪Day # 3‬‬
‫‪to spread‬‬ ‫ـﺐ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ِﻘ ُ‬ ‫ـﺐ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ِﻗ ُ‬ ‫ـﺐ‬ ‫َوﻗَ َ‬ ‫‪a-i‬‬
‫‪to place‬‬ ‫ﻳَــﻀَ ـ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮﺿَ ـ ُﻊ‬ ‫َوﺿَ ـ َﻊ‬ ‫‪a-a‬‬
‫‪to grant/give‬‬ ‫ﻳَــﻬ ُ‬
‫َـﺐ‬ ‫َـﺐ‬
‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮﻫ ُ‬ ‫َـﺐ‬
‫َوﻫ َ‬ ‫‪a-a‬‬
‫‪to‬‬
‫ﻳ َ َـﺴـ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻮ َﺳـ ُﻊ‬ ‫َو ِﺳـ َﻊ‬ ‫‪i-a‬‬
‫‪cover/encompass‬‬
 193

The construction of imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is shown below for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. There is no need of ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬, as the majzoom
form is not starting with a letter with sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬.
Removing
Making the Actual verb in
Meaning
majzoom beginning present tense
‫ت‬
find! ‫ِﺟ ْـﺪ‬ ُ‫ِﺟـﺪ‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬
ُ‫َــﺠـﺪ‬
grant!
Quran (3:3:38)
‫َـﺐ‬ْ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫َـﺐ‬
ُ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫َـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَــﻬ‬
& Quran
(19:25:74)
place! ‫ﺿَ ـ ْﻊ‬ ‫ﺿَ ـ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﺗَــﻀَ ـ ُﻊ‬
Note: Verbs with with first radical as ‫ ي‬will be discussed later.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Five in pocket group” category for
present tense, for the root verb َ‫( َو َﻋـﺪ‬he promised) are ُ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﺗَـ ِﻌـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﺗَـ ِﻌـﺪ‬,
ُ‫ َٔا ِﻋـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻧ َـ ِﻌـﺪ‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The Imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬for the root verb ‫( َوﻗَ َـﻒ‬he stopped) is ‫ ِﻗ ْـﻒ‬.
 194

3) State TRUE or FALSE: The present tense form for the personal
pronoun ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬for the root verb َ‫( َو َﻋـﺪ‬he promised) is ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌـﺪُ ْو َن‬.
‫ف‬
ُ ‫األجــ َو‬
ْ verbs (a-
(a-u group) (Seq # 118)
118)
Ajwaf verbs under the baab Nasara (a-u group) are discussed in this topic.
If the second radical (‫ )ع‬is ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬then the verb is called as weak of ain
(‫ـﲔ‬ِ ْ ‫) ُﻣـ ْﻌـﺘَـ ُّﻞ اﻟ َﻌ‬. It is also called as ‫ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ْف‬. Ajwaf verbs are hollow verbs as the
middle radical is weak. These verbs undergo many changes both in the
past tense and in the present tense.
Let us discuss one of the most important verb ‫( ﻗَـﺎ َل‬he said). If we observe
this verb then there is a sukoon over middle ‫ا‬. Thus it is actually ‫ﻗَـ ْﺎ َل‬. This
verb comes under baab Nasara (a-u group). The actual root of the verb is ‫َق‬
‫و َل‬.َ Now the question is how can we determine the middle letter ? For that
case, we have to observe the present tense form or the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼﺪَ ٌر‬form of the
verb. In the case of ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬, the present tense is ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬. Thus the weak letter ‫و‬
appeared in the present tense.
Let us try to conjugate this verb in the past tense.
َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬the doer is hidden.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the root ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬. Thus it is ‫ﻗَـﺎﻟَـﺎ‬. Refer to
the verse Quran (8:7:23).
 195

3) For ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬just add the doer ‫ و‬to the root ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬. Thus it is ‫ﻗَـﺎﻟُ ْــﻮا‬. The ending
‫ ا‬is just a spelling rule.
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬. This “‫ ت‬of
woman” is not the doer. Thus it is ‫ﻗَـﺎﻟ َـ ْﺖ‬. Doer is hidden.
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫)ﻗَـﺎﻟ َـ ْﺖ( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬.
Thus it is ‫ﻗَـﺎﻟَـﺘَـﺎ‬.
6) For ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬the condition is that the third radical should get sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬.
So take the root form ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬and adding sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. It becomes ‫ﻗَـ ْﺎ ْل‬. In
Arabic language occurrence of sukoons on two consecutive letters is
not possible and one has to drop. As ‫ ا‬is weak dropping it. It will
become ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ َ‫ﻗ‬. If the ajwaf verb is of a-u group then the first radical will
take Dhammah (‫ )ـ ُـ‬and if the ajwaf verb is a-i or i-a group then the
first radical will take Kasrah (ِ‫ )ــ‬from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬till ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ ُﻦ‬. As ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬is from a-u
group, it becomes ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Now adding the doer ‫ َن‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ َ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬.
ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ــﻦ‬
7) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬just add the doer ‫ َت‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬.
8) For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ ُﻗـﻠْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
9) For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ ُﻗـﻠْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬.
10) For ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬just add the doer ‫ ِت‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬.
11) For feminine ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ ُﻗـﻠْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
It is same as masculine ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬.
12) For ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬just add the doer ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ﺗ‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ُﻗـﻠْـ ُﺘ‬.
13) For ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ُت‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬.
 196

14) For ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬just add the doer ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬. Thus it is ‫ ُﻗـﻠْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
As ‫ ﻗَـ ْﺎ َل‬comes under baab Nasara (a-u group), the present tense form
should be ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻘ ُــﻮ ُل‬as ‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻨ‬. But as ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬is a weak verb, it undergoes a change
and becomes ‫( ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬exchange of vowel signs).
Thus the “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs are ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬, ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬, ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬,
‫ َٔا ُﻗ ْــﻮ ُل‬and ‫ﻧ َـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬.
The “Mabni group” present tense verbs gets sukoon on the third radical ‫ل‬
and in Arabic language occurrence of sukoons on two consecutive letters is
not possible and one has to drop. So the weak letter ‫ و‬gets drop. This is
explained below.
‫ــﻦ‬َ ْ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ُﻘـﻠ‬+ ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ُﻘ‬+ ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ْل‬
َ ْ‫ َن = ﺗَـ ُﻘـﻠ‬+ ‫ـﻞ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ َن = ﺗَـ ُﻘ‬+ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ْل‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs are ‫ﻻن‬ ِ ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮﻟُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ﻻن‬
ِ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ‬,
‫ﻻن‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮﻟُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ِﻟـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ﻻن‬ِ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ‬.
The construction of imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is shown below for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. There is no need of ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬, as the majzoom
form is not starting with a letter with sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. Because occurrence of
sukoons on two consecutive letters is not possible the weak letter ‫ و‬gets
drop and making it to ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ُﻗ‬as shown below in the table.
 197

Actual
Removing the verb in
Meaning Making majzoom
beginning ‫ ت‬present
tense
Say! ْ ُ‫ُﻗ ْــﻮ ْل = ﻗ‬
‫ـﻞ‬ ‫ُﻗ ْــﻮ ُل‬ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬
Note: Quran (1:2:104) has both ‫( ﻻ ﺗَ ُﻘ ْــﻮﻟُ ْــﻮ‬Don’t say) and ‫( ُﻗ ْــﻮﻟُــﻮ‬Say) forms.
Few sample verbs under ‫( ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ْف‬a-u group) are given below in table as
summary. Practice these verbs 5 per day.

Present Present Root

Actual
Meaning tense after tense before verb in Group
root
change change past
Day # 1
He said ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ ُــﻮ ُل‬ ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬ ‫َق َو َل‬ a-u
He stood ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻘ ُــﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﻗَـﺎ َم‬ ‫َق َو َم‬ a-u
He was ‫ﻳَـ ُﻜ ْــﻮ ُن‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜ ُــﻮ ُن‬ ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫َﻛ‬ ‫كَ َو َن‬ a-u
to be
‫ﻳَـ ُﻔ ْــﻮ ُز‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔ ُــﻮ ُز‬ َ َ‫ﻓ‬
‫ـﺎز‬ ‫َف َو َز‬ a-u
successful
to be under
protection/To ‫ﻳَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُذ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌ ُــﻮ ُذ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎ َذ‬ ‫َع َو َذ‬ a-u
seek refuge
 ‫‪198‬‬

‫‪Day # 2‬‬
‫‪He fasted‬‬ ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ُم‬‫ﻳَ ُ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼ ُــﻮ ُم‬ ‫َص َو َم َﺻـﺎ َم‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪He visited‬‬ ‫ﻳ َ ُــﺰ ْو ُر‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺰ ُو ُر‬ ‫َز َار‬ ‫َز َو َر‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪He tasted‬‬ ‫ﻳ َ ُـﺬ ْو ُق‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺬ ُو ُق‬ ‫َذ َاق‬ ‫َذ َو َق‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to go round‬‬ ‫ــﻄ ْــﻮ ُف‬ ‫ﻳَ ُ‬ ‫ــﻄ ُــﻮ ُف‬ ‫ﻳَ ْ‬ ‫ـﺎف‬‫َط َو َف َﻃ َ‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to turn‬‬ ‫ﻳَـﺪُ ْو ُر‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُو ُر‬ ‫د ََار‬ ‫َد َو َر‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪Day # 3‬‬
‫‪to‬‬
‫‪turn/(accept‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ ُب‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺘ ُــﻮ ُب‬ ‫َـﺎب‬
‫ﺗ َ‬ ‫َت َو َب‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫)‪repentance‬‬
‫‪to be hungry‬‬ ‫ﻳَــ ُﺠ ْــﻮ ُع‬ ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠ ُــﻮ ُع‬ ‫َﺟـﺎ َع‬ ‫َج َو َع‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to die‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ ُت‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻤ ُــﻮ ُت‬ ‫ـﺎت‬‫َﻣ َ‬ ‫َم َو َت‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to afflict‬‬ ‫ﻳ َ ُـﺴ ْــﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴ ُــﻮ ُم‬ ‫َﺳـﺎ َم‬ ‫َس َو َم‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to return‬‬ ‫ﻳَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ ُء‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒ ُــﻮ ُء‬ ‫ﺑَـﺎ َء‬ ‫َب َو َء‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪to become‬‬
‫ﻳَــﻬ ُْــﻮ ُد‬ ‫ﻳَــﻬ ُْــﻮ ُد‬ ‫ﻫَـﺎ َد‬ ‫َه َو َد‬ ‫‪a-u‬‬
‫‪Jew‬‬
 199

Note ‫اﻟــﺮ ِﺟـ ْﻴـ ِﻢ‬

Note: َّ ‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ــﻄ‬ َّ ‫( َٔا ُﻋ ْــﻮ ُذ ِﺑـﻠـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ ِﻣــ َﻦ‬I seek refuge in Allah, from the
َ ‫اﻟـﺸـ ْﻴ‬
rejected shaitaan).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The “Five in pocket group” category for
present tense, for the root verb ‫( ﻗَـﺎ َم‬he stood) are ‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬, ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬, ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬,
‫ َٔا ُﻗ ْــﻮ ُم‬and ‫ﻧ َـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The Imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬for the root verb ‫ـﺎن‬ ْ ‫ ُﻛ‬.
َ ‫( َﻛ‬he was) is ‫ــﻦ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: The present tense form for the personal
pronoun ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬for the root verb ‫( َﺻـﺎ َم‬he fasted) is ‫ﻳ َ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َن‬.
‫ف‬
ُ ‫األجــ َو‬
ْ verbs (a-
(a-i group) (Seq # 119)
119)
In this topic let us discuss ‫ ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ْف‬verbs under a-i group (Baab ‫)ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬. If
the ajwaf verb is from a-i or i-a group then the first radical will take Kasrah
(ِ‫ )ــ‬in past tense from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬till ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬. Let us discuss the verb ‫( َﺟـﺎ َء‬he came,
to come). The actual root letters of this verb are ‫ج َي َء‬.َ The middle letter ‫َي‬
is present in the present tense, ‫ــﺊ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬.
ُ ‫ــﺠـ ْﻴ‬
The 14 past verbal forms for the root verb ‫ َﺟـﺎ َء‬are ‫ َﺟـﺎ َء‬, ‫ﺟﺎ َءا‬, ‫ َﺟـﺎﺋُ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ َ ‫ َﺟـﺎﺋ‬,
‫ َﺟـﺎﺋَـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ْــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺟـﺌ‬,ِ ‫ﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,ِ ‫ﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬,ِ ‫ْـﺖ‬
َ ‫ﺟـﺌ‬,ِ ‫ْـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﺟـﺌ‬,ِ ‫ﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,ِ ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ِﺟـﺌ‬and ‫ﺟـﺌْـﻨَـﺎ‬.ِ
َّ ‫ﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘ‬,ِ ‫ْـﺖ‬
 200

As ‫ َﺟـﺎ َء‬comes under Baab ‫( ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬a-i group), the present tense form should
be ‫ِــﺊ‬ ُ ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺠـﻴ‬as ‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬. But as ‫ َﺟـﺎ َء‬is a weak verb, it undergoes a change and
becomes ‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬ ِ َ ‫( ﻳ‬exchange of vowel signs).
Thus the “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs are ‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗ‬,
ِ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ َٔا ِﺟ ْــﻲ ُء‬and ‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬
‫َــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬ ِ َ ‫ﻧ‬.
The “Mabni group” present tense verbs gets sukoon on the third radical ‫ء‬
and in Arabic language occurrence of sukoons on two consecutive letters is
not possible and one has to drop. So the weak letter ‫ ي‬gets drop. This is
explained below.
َ ‫ــﺠـﺌ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬ ِ َ ‫ َن = ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﺊ‬ ْ ‫ــﺠ‬ِ َ ‫ َن = ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ْء‬
ِ َ‫ﻳ‬
َ ‫ــﺠـﺌ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬ ِ َ‫ َن = ﺗ‬+ ‫ــﺊ‬ ِ ‫ َن = ﺗ‬+ ‫َــﺠ ْــﻲ ْء‬
ْ ‫َــﺠ‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ــﺠـ ْﻴـ ُﺌ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِ َ‫ــﺠـ ْﻴـﺌ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬,
ِ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ‫َــﺠـ ْﻴـﺌ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ــﺠـ ْﻴـﺌُ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِ َ‫َــﺠـ ْﻴـﺌ‬ َ ‫َــﺠـ ْﻴـ ِﺌـ ْﻴ‬
ِ َ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ ﺗ‬and ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬.
ِ َ‫َــﺠـ ْﻴـﺌ‬
The construction of Imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is shown below for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. There is no need of ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬, as the majzoom
form is not starting with a letter with sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. Because occurrence of
sukoons on two consecutive letters is not possible, the weak letter ‫ ي‬gets
drop and making it to ‫ــﺊ‬ ْ ‫ ِﺟ‬as shown below in the table.
 201

Actual verb
Removing the
Meaning Making majzoom in present
beginning ‫ت‬
tense

come! ْ ‫ِﺟ ْــﻲ ْء = ِﺟ‬

‫ــﺊ‬ ‫ِﺟ ْــﻲ ُء‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬
‫َــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬
Few sample verbs under ‫( ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ْف‬a-i group) are given below in table as
summary.
Present
Present Root
tense Actual
Meaning tense before verb Group
after root
change in past
change
Day # 1
to come ِ َ‫ﻳ‬
‫ــﺠ ْــﻲ ُء‬ ‫ﻳَــ ْﺠــ ِﻲ ُء‬ ‫َﺟـﺎ َء‬ ‫َج َي َء‬ a-i
to sell ‫ﻳَـﺒِـ ْﻴـ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﺒـﻴِـ ُﻊ‬ ‫ﺑَـﺎ َع‬ ‫َب َي َع‬ a-i
to walk ‫ﻳ َ ِـﺴـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﻴ ُِــﺮ‬ ‫َﺳ َـﺎر‬ ‫َس َي َر‬ a-i
to live ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ ُـﺶ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻌـﻴ ُِـﺶ‬ َ ‫َﻋ‬
‫ـﺎش‬ ‫َع َي َش‬ a-i
to
ُ‫ﻳَــ ِﺰﻳْـﺪ‬ ُ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺰِﻳـﺪ‬ ‫َزا َد‬ ‫َز َي َد‬ a-i
increase
 202

Day # 2
to be
hidden, ‫ﻳَـ ِﻐـﻴـْ ُﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳ َـﻐْـﻴ‬
‫ِـﺐ‬ َ َ‫َغ َي َب ﻏ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ a-i
absent
to plot ُ‫ﻳَـ ِﻜـ ْﻴـﺪ‬ ُ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـﻴِﺪ‬ ‫َﻛـﺎ َد‬ ‫كَ َي َد‬ a-i
to
‫ﻳَـ ِﻜـ ْﻴـ ُﻞ‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـﻴِـ ُﻞ‬ ‫َﻛـﺎ َل‬ ‫كَ َي َل‬ a-i
measure
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:48). The phrase
‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤــ ُﻦ = ِﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘـ ُﻤ ْــﻮﻧ َـﺎ‬+ ‫( ِﺟـﺌْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬You came to us) is present in this verse.
‫ف‬
ُ ‫األجــ َو‬
ْ verbs (i-
(i-a group) (Seq # 120)
120)
Let us discuss the verb ‫( ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬he slept) under this category. This group falls
under Baab ‫( َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬i-a group). The actual root letters of this verb are ‫ن ِو َم‬.َ
The middle letter ‫ ِو‬is present in the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬form ‫ﻧ َ ْــﻮ ٌم‬.
The 14 past verbal forms for the root verb ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬are ‫ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬, ‫ﻧ َـﺎ َﻣـﺎ‬, ‫ﻧ َـﺎ ُﻣ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻧ َـﺎ َﻣ‬,
َ ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬, ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ـ ْﻤـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬,‫ـﺖ ِﻧ‬
َ ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ﻧ َـﺎ َﻣـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬, ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬and ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻤـﻨَـﺎ‬.
As ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬comes under Baab ‫( َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬i-a group), the present tense form should
be ‫ ﻳَـﻨْ َــﻮ ُم‬as ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬. But as ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬is a weak verb, it undergoes a big change and
becomes ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬.
 203

Thus the “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs are ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬, ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬, ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬, ‫َٔاﻧ َـﺎ ُم‬
and ‫ﻧ َـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬.
The “Mabni group” present tense verbs gets sukoon on the third radical ‫م‬
and in Arabic language occurrence of sukoons on two consecutive letters is
not possible and one has to drop. So the second radical gets drop. This is
explained below.
َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـﻨَـ ْﻤ‬+ ‫ َن = ﻳَـﻨَـ ْﺎ ْم‬+ ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ َن = ﺗ َـﻨَـ ْﻤ‬+ ‫ َن = ﺗ َـﻨَـ ْﺎ ْم‬+ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬
‫ــﻦ‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ َﻣ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ َﻣ‬,
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ِﻣـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ َﻣ‬, ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ َﻣ‬.
The construction of Imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is shown below for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. There is no need of ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬, as the majzoom
form is not starting with a letter with sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. Because occurrence of
sukoons on two consecutive letters is not possible the second radical (or
letter) gets drop and making it to ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻢ‬as shown below in the table.

Removing Actual verb

Making
Meaning the in present
majzoom
beginning ‫ت‬ tense
 204

Sleep! ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺎ ْم = ﻧ َـ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻧ َـﺎ ُم‬ ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬

Few sample verbs under ‫( ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ْف‬i-a group) are given below in table as
summary. Practice these verbs 5 per day.
Present
Present Root
tense Actual
Meaning tense before verb Group
after root
change in past
change
to sleep ‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻨ َــﻮ ُم‬ ‫ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬ ‫َن ِو َم‬ i-a
ُ َ‫ﻳَـﻨ‬
to reach ‫ـﺎل‬ ‫ﻳَـﻨْ َــﻮ ُل‬ ‫ﻧ َـﺎ َل‬ ‫َن ِو َل‬ i-a
ُ ‫ﻳَــﺨ‬
to fear ‫َـﺎف‬ ‫ْــﻮ ُف‬
َ ‫ﻳَــﺨ‬ َ ‫ﺧ‬
‫َـﺎف‬ ‫خَ ِو َف‬ i-a
to be
about to ‫ﻳَـ َﻜـﺎ ُد‬ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜ َــﻮ ُد‬ ‫َﻛـﺎ َد‬ ‫كَ ِو َد‬ i-a
do
cease to
‫ﻳ َ َــﺰ ُال‬ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺰ َو ُل‬ ‫َزا َل‬ ‫َز ِو َل‬ i-a
do

to wish ‫ﻳَـﺸَ ـﺎ ُء‬ ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ َﻴ‬

‫ــﺊ‬ ‫َﺷـﺎ َء‬ ‫َش ِي َٔا‬ i-a
 205

Note (1):
(1): ‫( كَ ِو َد‬i-a group) means “to be about to do”. It should not be
confused with ‫( كَ َي َد‬a-i group) which means “to plot”. Both these verbs
take ‫ َﻛـﺎ َد‬as their past form.
Note (2): ‫( َﻣـﺎ َﺷـﺎ َء اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ‬What Allah wished!)
ُ ِ‫ النﱠــاق‬verbs (past tense) (Seq # 121
‫ــص‬ 121)
These verbs need careful attention for understanding them. If the third
radical (‫ )ل‬is either ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬then such a verb is called as weak of laam
(‫) ُﻣـ ْﻌـﺘَـ ُّﻞ َّاﻻ ِم‬. It is also called as ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬. Verbs in this category undergo
many changes both in past and present tenses. In this topic we will study
the past tense of ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs.
In the pronunciation the letters ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬are changed to the sound of ‫ا‬. The
letter ‫ و‬is written as ‫ ا‬and ‫ ي‬is written as ‫ى‬. Examples are ‫( َد َﻋـﺎ‬originally ‫َد‬
‫) َع َو‬, ‫( ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬originally ‫) َه َد َي‬.
The letter ‫ ي‬if present in third radical position then it will not change if
the second radical of the verb has Kasrah. Example is ‫ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬.
Let us try to conjugate the verb ‫( َد َﻋـﺎ‬he invited/prayed) in the past tense.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬.
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, the third radical ‫ و‬appears and after that the doer ‫ ا‬will be
added. Thus it is ‫ َد َﻋ َــﻮا‬.
 206

3) For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, the third radical ‫ و‬will be dropped. Originally it is ‫ َد َﻋ ُــﻮ ْوا‬.
Finally it is ‫ َد َﻋــ ْﻮا‬.
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬. After adding it is
‫ َد َﻋـ ْﺎ ْت‬. Because of two consecutive sukoons (‫)ـ ْـ‬, the ‫ ا‬gets drop. Finally
it is ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ َد َﻋ‬.
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫ـﺖ( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬ ْ ‫) َد َﻋ‬.
Thus it is ‫ َد َﻋـﺘَـﺎ‬.
6) For Mutaharrik pronouns the third radical should have sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬. To
do this, the third radical ‫ و‬appears. So the initial part will be ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ‬.
Thus the conjugation for all Mutaharrik pronouns from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬to ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬is
‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ َت‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ ِت‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ ُت‬and ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﻧ َـﺎ‬.
Thus the 14 past tense verb forms for the verb ‫( َد َﻋـﺎ‬a-u group) are ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬,
‫ َد َﻋ َــﻮا‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ْ ‫ َد َﻋ‬, ‫ َد َﻋـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ َت‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ ِت‬, ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﺗ‬,
‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮ ُت‬and ‫ َد َﻋ ْــﻮﻧ َـﺎ‬.
In the same way 14 past tense verb forms can be constructed for the verbs
of a-u group: ‫( ﺗ ََـﻼ‬to recite), ‫( ﺧ ََـﻼ‬to be alone/ to pass away), ‫( َﻋـ َﻔـﺎ‬to
forgive),, ‫( َﺷـ َﻜـﺎ‬to complain), ‫( َﻣــ َﺤـﺎ‬to erase), ‫( ﺑ َ َـﻼ‬to test) and ‫( َر َﺟـﺎ‬to
hope). The reader is recommended to practice all of the above by writing
them. (Note:The root ‫ َق َس َو‬means “to become hard”. This verb came in
Quran only in past form. Refer to verse Quran (1:2:74)).
 207

Now comes the turn of ‫( ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬he guided, a-i group). The actual root is ‫َه َد‬
‫ي‬.َ It is pronounced as Hadaa. The 14 past tense verb forms for the verb
‫ ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬are ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬, ‫ َﻫـﺪَ ﻳَـﺎ‬, ‫( ﻫَـﺪَ ْوا‬the third radical ‫ ي‬got dropped here), ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ْت‬,
‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﺗَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳ‬, ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳ‬, ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳ‬
َّ ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳْـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
and ‫ﻫَـﺪَ ﻳْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
In the same way 14 past tense verb forms can be constructed for the verbs
of a-i group: ‫( َﻣـﺸَ ــﻰ‬to walk), ‫( َﺳـ َﻘــﻰ‬to give water), ‫( َﺟ َــﺮى‬to flow), ‫( َٔاﺗَــﻰ‬to
come/to bring or produce), ‫( ﻗَــﻀَ ــﻰ‬to decree/decide), ‫( َﺟ َــﺰى‬to avail/(get in
َ ‫( َﻋ‬to disobey),, ‫( ﺑَـ َﻜــﻰ‬to
return)), ‫( َﺷ َــﺮى‬to sell), ‫( َﻛـ َﻔــﻰ‬to be sufficient), ‫ــﺼــﻰ‬
cry), ‫( َﺷـ َﻔــﻰ‬to cure), ‫( َر َﻣــﻰ‬to throw) and ‫( ﺑ َ َـﲎ‬to build).
Now comes the turn of ‫( ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬he forgot, i-a group). Here because the
Kasrah is present on the second radical, the weak letter ‫ ي‬is appearing. In
Arabic language the vowel sign Kasrah is not compatible with immediately
next letter ‫و‬. To solve, this Kasrah will be converted to Dhammah. Let us
understand it by constructing the verb form for the personal pronoun ‫ ُﻫ ْـﻢ‬.
We know that the doer for ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬is ‫و‬. See the below equation now.
‫ و = ﻧ َُـﺴ ْــﻮا‬+ ‫ و = ﻧ َُـﺲ‬+‫ و = ﻧ َِـﺲ‬+ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬
In the above equation the third radical ‫ ي‬gets dropped leading to the
combination ‫ و‬+‫ ﻧ َِـﺲ‬where Kasrah is followed by ‫ و‬which is incompatible.
This Kasrah will become Dhammah and the resulting structure is ‫ﻧ َُـﺴ ْــﻮا‬.
The 14 past tense verb forms for the verb ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬are ‫ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬, ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ َﻴـﺎ‬, ‫ﻧ َُـﺴ ْــﻮا‬,
 208

‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ َﻴ‬, ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ َﻴـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
َ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴـ ُﺘ‬,
ُ ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬.
‫ـﺖ‬
Similar exercise can be done for the verbs of i-a group: ‫( َر ِﺿ َــﻲ‬to please),
‫( ﻟَـ ِﻘ َــﻲ‬to meet),, ‫( ﺧ َِـﺸ َــﻲ‬to fear) and ‫( ﺑَـ ِﻘ َــﻲ‬to remain).
Let us now discuss the verb ‫( ﻧَــﻬَــﻰ‬to forbid/stop, a-a group). The actual
root is ‫ن َه َي‬.َ It is pronounced as Nahaa. The 14 past tense verb forms for
the verb ‫ ﻧَــﻬَــﻰ‬are ‫ﻧَــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ َﻴـﺎ‬, ‫( ﻧَــﻬ َْــﻮا‬the third radical ‫ ي‬got dropped here),
ْ ‫ﻧَــﻬ‬, ‫ﻧَــﻬَـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
‫َـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ َّ ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬
and ‫ﻧَــﻬَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬.
In the same way 14 past tense verb forms can be constructed for the verbs
of a-a group: group ‫( َٔاﺑَــﻰ‬to refuse), ‫( َﺳـ َﻌــﻰ‬to strive/struggle), ‫( َﻃـﻐَــﻰ‬to
transgress), ‫( ﻧ َـﺎَٔى‬to keep away/to become remote, Quran (15:17:83)) and
‫( َر َٔاى‬to see). Detailed discussion of the verb ‫ َر َٔاى‬is present in a later topic as
it behaves differently.
Note:
Note The verb ‫ ع ث و‬means “to act wickedly/to commit evil”. This verb
came in Quran only with prohibitive ‫( ﻻ‬Don’t act wickedly/Don’t commit
evil). Refer to Quran (1:2:60).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:57). The verb
‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬is present in this verse.
 209

2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:63). The verb
ُ ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬is present in this verse.
‫ـﺖ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:74). The verb
‫( ﻟَـ ِﻘـ َﻴـﺎ‬They two met) is present in this verse.
ُ ِ‫ النﱠــاق‬verbs (present tense) (Seq # 122)
‫ــص‬ 122)
ُ ‫ اﻟْـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs. The “Five in
In this topic we will study the present tense of ‫ــﺺ‬
pocket group” loses the last Dhammah (‫ )ـ ُـ‬for all ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verbs in the
present tense as shown below.
The “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬are
‫ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬, ‫ َٔا ْد ُﻋــﻮ‬and ‫( ﻧ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬instead of ‫)ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬.
The “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬are
‫ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬, ‫ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬, ‫ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬, ‫ َٔاﻫْـ ِﺪى‬and ‫( ﻧ َــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬instead of ‫)ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬.
The “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬are
‫ﻳَـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْ َـﺴــﻰ‬and ‫( ﻧ َـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬instead of ‫)ﻳَـ ْﻨ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬.
The “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻧَــﻬَــﻰ‬are
‫ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧْــﻬَــﻰ‬and ‫( ﻧ َـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬instead of ‫)ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَ ُــﻰ‬.
Let us now learn the “Mabni group”. In this group the third radical will
get sukoon. So just adding the doer ‫ َن‬is sufficient. The following equations
are helpful in understanding this group.
 210

‫ َن = ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬For ‫ُــﻦ‬

َّ ‫ ﻫ‬adding the doer ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬.
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬adding ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬.
‫ َن = ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬For ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ َن = ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳ‬+ ‫( ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬For ‫ُــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬adding the doer ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬.
َ ْ‫ َن = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬For ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬adding ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬.
َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـ ْﻨ َـﺴـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫( ﻳ َـﻨْ َـﺴــﻰ‬For ‫ُــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬adding the doer ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴــﻰ‬.
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬adding ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬.
َ ‫ َن = ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴــﻰ‬For ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬For ‫ُــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬adding the doer ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬.
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ‬adding ‫ َن‬to ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻨــﻬَــﻰ‬.
َ ‫ َن = ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻨــﻬَــﻰ‬For ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
Let us now learn “Guest noon group”. The “Guest noon group” present
tense verbs for the root verb ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬are constructed as follows.
‫ َا ِن = ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ َــﻮ ِان‬+ ‫( ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For third person masculine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ ْو َن = ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُو‬is lost)
‫ َا ِن = ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ َــﻮ ِان‬+ ‫( ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For third person feminine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ َا ِن = ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ َــﻮ ِان‬+ ‫( ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For second person masculine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ ْو َن = ﺗَ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﺗَ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُو‬is lost)
َ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗ َْـﺪ ِﻋـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗ َْـﺪ ُع‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, The third radical ‫ ُو‬is lost and
َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For ‫ْـﺖ‬
the Dhammah of ‫ ع‬changed to Kasrah as the Dhammah cannot be
followed by ‫ ﻳــ‬in Arabic language).
 211

‫ َا ِن = ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ َــﻮ ِان‬+ ‫( ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋ ُــﻮ‬For second person feminine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬are
constructed as follows.
‫ َا ِن = ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳـَ ِﺎن‬+ ‫( ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For third person masculine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ ْو َن = ﻳَــﻬْـﺪُ ْو َن‬+ ‫( ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost and the Kasrah of
‫ د‬changed to Dhammah as the Kasrah cannot be followed by ‫ و‬in Arabic
language).
‫ َا ِن = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳـَ ِﺎن‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For third person feminine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ َا ِن = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳـَ ِﺎن‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For second person masculine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ ْو َن = ﺗَــﻬْـﺪُ ْو َن‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost and the Kasrah of
‫ د‬changed to Dhammah as the Kasrah cannot be followed by ‫ و‬in Arabic
language).
َ ْ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ‬َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For ‫ْـﺖ‬
ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost).
‫ َا ِن = ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪﻳـَ ِﺎن‬+ ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪ ُي‬For second person feminine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬are
constructed as follows.
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For third person masculine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ْو َن = ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴ ْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost).
 212

‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For third person feminine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For second person masculine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ْو َن = ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴــ ْﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost).
َ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺲ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost).
َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For ‫ْـﺖ‬
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـ ْﻨ َـﺴـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴ ُــﻲ‬For second person feminine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
The “Guest noon group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ ﻧَــﻬَــﻲ‬are
constructed as follows.
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﻳَـﻨْــﻬَـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For third person masculine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ْو َن = ﻳَـﻨْــﻬ َْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost, Quran(4:3:104))
Quran(4:3:104)
‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For third person feminine ‫)ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For second person masculine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ْو َن = ﺗ َـﻨْــﻬ َْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For ‫ َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost, Quran (4:3:110))
(4:3:110)
َ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬, The third radical ‫ ُي‬is lost).
َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For ‫ْـﺖ‬
َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗ َـﻨْـ َﻪ‬
ِ ‫ َا ِن = ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﻨْــﻬ َُــﻲ‬For second person feminine ‫) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:14). The verb
form ‫ ﻧ َْـﺪ ُﻋ َــﻮ‬in ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬mood is present in this verb. The verb is in
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬mood because ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ْ َ ‫ ﻟ‬is present before the verb.
 213

2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:28). The verb
form ‫ ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:83). The verb
form ‫( َٔاﺗْـﻠُــﻮ‬I recite) is present in this verse. Thus “Five in pocket
group” verbs are ‫ﻳَـ ْﺘـﻠُــﻮ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﺘـﻠُــﻮ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﺘـﻠُــﻮ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗْـﻠُــﻮ‬, ‫ﻧ َـ ْﺘـﻠُــﻮ‬.
ُ ِ‫ النﱠــاق‬verbs (Imperative tense) (Seq # 123)
‫ــص‬
Let us learn imperative tense for ‫ اﻟْﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ ْــﺺ‬verbs in this section. These verbs
loses the third radical in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬mood. The below table shows three
examples for the personal noun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. The reader is recommended to
construct imperative tense for all the ‫ اﻟْﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ ْــﺺ‬verbs discussed in the earlier
topics.

Making
Removing Actual verb
Adding ‫ ا‬at the majzoom by
the beginning
beginning in present
beginning dropping the
‫ت‬ tense
third radical
‫ُا ْد ُع‬
‫ْد ُع‬ ‫ْد ُﻋــﻮ‬ ‫ﺗ َْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ‬
Quran (14:16:125)
‫ِاﻫْـ ِﺪ‬
‫ﻫْـ ِﺪ‬ ‫ﻫْـ ِﺪى‬ ‫ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬
Quran (1:1:5)
‫ِاﻧ َْـﺲ‬ ‫ﻧ َْـﺲ‬ ‫ﻧْ َـﺴــﻰ‬ ‫ﺗَـﻨْ َـﺴــﻰ‬
 214

‫ِاﻧْـ َﻪ‬ ‫ﻧْـ َﻪ‬ ‫ﻧْــﻬَــﻰ‬ ‫ﺗَـﻨْــﻬَــﻰ‬

AlMuzaafu (‫ــف‬ َ ‫ ))ا ْلــ ُمــ‬verbs
ُ ‫ضــ ﱠع‬ verbs (Seq # 124)
In this category of verbs the second and the third radical are same. These
verbs go some changes both in the past and present tenses. Let us learn
them first by considering a-u group.
Consider the verb ‫ــﻦ‬ َ َ‫ﻇـﻨ‬.َ The meaning of this verb is “He
َّ ‫ﻇ‬.َ Actually it is ‫ــﻦ‬
thought”. In the past tense the second radical loses its vowel sign and gets
sukoon for Saakin pronouns and retains its vowel sign for Mutaharrik
pronouns. See below…
َ ْ‫ــﻦ = َﻇـﻨ‬
َّ ‫ــﻦ = َﻇ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ َ‫َﻇـﻨ‬
Now let us learn all its forms
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻇ‬.َ
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, the verb form is ‫ﻇـﻨَّـﺎ‬.َ
3) For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, it is ‫ﻇـﻨ ُّ ْــﻮا‬.َ
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ــﻦ‬َّ ‫ﻇ‬.َ After adding it is
ْ َّ ‫ﻇـﻨ‬.َ
‫ـﺖ‬
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫ـﺖ( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬ َ
ْ َّ ‫)ﻇـﻨ‬.
Thus it is ‫ﻇـﻨَّـﺘَـﺎ‬.َ
6) For Mutaharrik pronouns the second radical retains its vowel sign. As
usual the third radical should get sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬. So the initial part will be
 215

‫ــﻦ‬ْ َ‫ﻇـﻨ‬.َ Thus the conjugation for all Mutaharrik pronouns from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬to
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬is ‫ــﻦ‬َّ َ‫ َن = َﻇـﻨ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﻇـﻨَـ ْﻨ‬,َ ‫ َﻇـﻨَـ ْﻨـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َﻇـﻨَـ ْﻨـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ْ َ‫ َﻇـﻨ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﻇـﻨَـ ْﻨ‬,َ ‫ َﻇـﻨَـ ْﻨـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
َّ ‫ َﻇـﻨَـﻨْـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻇـﻨَـﻨ‬and ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ = َﻇـﻨَـﻨَّـﺎ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ َ‫ َﻇـﻨ‬.
In the present tense also the second radical loses its vowel sign for Saakin
pronouns and retains its vowel sign for Mutaharrik pronouns. The
Dhammah of second radical gets shifted to the first radical as shown
below.
ُّ ‫ــﻦ = ﻳ َ ُــﻈ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ُ‫ﻳ َ ْــﻈـﻨ‬
ُ ْ‫ــﻦ = ﻳ َ ُــﻈـﻨ‬
The “Five in pocket group” present tense verbs for the root verb ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ َﻇ‬are
ُّ ‫ﻳ َ ُــﻈ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
ُّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ُّ ‫ﻧ َ ُــﻈ‬.
ُّ ‫ َٔا ُﻇ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ُ‫ َن = ﻳ َ ْــﻈـﻨ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ُ‫ ﻳ َ ْــﻈـﻨ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ُ‫ﺗ َْــﻈـﻨ‬.
The “Guest noon group” verbs are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َّ ‫ﻳ َ ُــﻈـﻨ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ُــﻈـﻨ ُّ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈـﻨ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈـﻨ‬, ‫ﺗ َُــﻈـﻨ ُّ ْــﻮ َن‬,
‫ــﻦ‬َ ‫ ﺗ َُــﻈـ ِﻨّـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈـﻨ‬.
The construction of Imperative tense (‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is shown below for the
personal pronoun ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬. There is no need of ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬, as the majzoom
form is not starting with a letter with sukoon (‫)ــ ْـ‬. After making majzoom
the sukoons will appear on two consecutive noons (‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ْ‫)ﻇـﻨ‬.ُ The letter ‫ ن‬is
not a weak letter, thus cannot be dropped. So the last ‫ ن‬will take Fatah and
the final form will become as ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ُﻇـ ْﻨ‬leading to ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻇ‬.ُ Explanation is given in
the below table.
 216

Making Removing the Actual verb in

Meaning
majzoom beginning ‫ ت‬present tense
= ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ْ‫ُﻇـﻨ‬ ُ
‫ــﻦ‬
ُّ ‫ﺗ َُــﻈ‬
think! ‫ــﻦ‬
ُّ ‫ﻇ‬
َّ ‫ــﻦ = ُﻇ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ُﻇـﻨ‬ (‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ْ‫) ﺗَ ُــﻈـﻨ‬
Similar exercise can be done for the verbs below. They are organized 5
verbs daily.
Day # 1 ‫( َﻣـ َّﺪ‬to prolong/elongate, a-u group), ‫( َﺳ َّــﺮ‬to please, a-u group),
‫( ﺿَ َّــﺮ‬to harm, a-u group), ‫( َر َّد‬to reply, a-u group),, ‫( َﺟ َّــﺮ‬to drag/pull, a-u
group).
Day # 2 ‫( َﻋـ َّﺪ‬to count, a-u group), ‫ـﺐ‬ َّ ‫( َﺻ‬to pour, a-u group), ‫( َﺳـ َّﺪ‬to block,
a-u group), ‫ـﺚ‬ َّ َ ‫( ﺑ‬to spread, a-u group), ‫( َد َّع‬to repulse/push, a-u group).
Day # 3 ‫ــﺾ‬ َّ ‫( َﺣ‬to urge, a-u group), ‫ــﺺ‬ َّ َ‫( ﻗ‬He narrated/told, a-u group), ‫ـﺐ‬ َّ ‫َﺳ‬
(to abuse, a-u group), ‫( َﻣ َّــﺮ‬to pass, a-u group), ‫ــﺞ‬ َّ ‫( َﺣ‬to do hajj, a-u group).
Consider a verb ‫( َﺷـ َّﻢ‬he smelled) in i-a group. Its construction is as below.
‫َﺷـ ِﻤ َـﻢ = َﺷـ ْﻤ َـﻢ = َﺷـ َّﻢ‬
The second radical will retain its vowel sign from ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﻫ‬. Thus the verb form
for ‫ُــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺷـ ِﻤـ ْﻤ‬.َ Two more example verbs in i-a group are ‫( َﻣ َّـﺲ‬he
َّ ‫ ﻫ‬is ‫ــﻦ‬
touched) and ‫( َو َّد‬To wish).
Likewise practice can be done for the below verbs from a-i group. The
below verbs are in the format (root verb, present tense for ‫ُــﻮ‬
َ ‫ﻫ‬, meaning).
 217

ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, to go astray), (‫َـﺐ‬

(‫ﺿَ ـ َّﻞ‬, ‫ــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬ ُّ ‫ﻳَـ ِﺘ‬, to perish), (‫ﺗَـ َّﻢ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ِﺘـ ُّﻢ‬, to
َّ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
finish/complete), (‫ــﻖ‬ ُّ ‫ﻳَــ ِﺤ‬, to be truth), (‫ﺧ ََّـﻒ‬, ‫ﻳَــ ِﺨ ُّـﻒ‬, to be light), (‫ َذ َّل‬,
َّ ‫ َﺣ‬, ‫ــﻖ‬
‫ﻳَـ ِﺬ ُّل‬, to be disrespected), (‫ز َّل‬,َ ‫ﻳَــ ِﺰ ُّل‬, to slip) and (‫ َﻋ َّــﺰ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌ ُّــﺰ‬, to get respect).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:35). The verb
form ‫ــﻦ‬ُّ ‫ َٔا ُﻇ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:36). The verb
ُّ ‫ َٔا ُﻇ‬is present in this verse.
form ‫ــﻦ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:53). The verb
form ‫ َﻇـﻨ ُّ ْــﻮا‬is present in this verse.
Classification of verbs (Seq # 125)
This topic is just to understand the architecture of verbs classification.
Don’t worry about this topic, just understand as much as possible. The
classification of the verbs is as follows.
1) Saalim verbs (‫)اﻟـﺴـﺎ ِﻟـ ُﻢ‬ َّ These verbs do not have ‫ ٔا‬, ‫و‬, or ‫ ي‬as one of its
letters and second and third letters are not the same. Example: ‫ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬,
َ َ ‫ﻧ‬, ‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫ َﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬etc.
‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
2) Mahmooz verbs (‫ )اﻟْـ َﻤــﻬْـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ ُز‬These verbs have ‫ ٔا‬as one of its letters.
Example: ‫ا َﻛـ َﻞ‬,َٔ ‫ﺳـﺎَٔ َل‬,َ ‫ ﻗَ َــﺮ َٔا‬etc.
3) Misaal verbs (‫َـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ )اﻟْـ ِﻤـﺜ‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as the first letter.
Example: َ‫و َﺟـﺪ‬,َ ‫ َو َز َن‬etc.
 218

4) Ajwaf verbs (‫ )ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as the second letter.
Example: ‫( ﻗَـﺎ َل‬actually ‫)ق َو َل‬, َ ‫( َﺳ َـﺎر‬actually ‫ َ)س َي َر‬etc.
5) Naaqis verbs (‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ )اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as the third letter.
Example: ‫( َد َﻋـﺎ‬actually ‫) َد َع َو‬, ‫ ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬etc.
6) Lafeef (‫ )اﻟَّـ ِﻔـ ْﻴ ُـﻒ‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as more than one letter. These
verbs are of two kinds.
a. Lafeef Maqroon (‫ )اﻟَّـ ِﻔـ ْﻴ ُـﻒ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻘ ُــﺮ ْو ُن‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as
second and third letter. Example: ‫( ﻳَـ ْﻜــ ِﻮى َﻛ َــﻮى‬He ironed), ‫َﺷ َــﻮى‬
‫ـﺸـِـ ِﻮى‬
ْ َ ‫( ﻳ‬to scald/roast/injure) Quran (15:18:29), ‫ــﻄــ ِﻮى َﻃ َــﻮى‬ ْ َ ‫( ﻳ‬to
fold) Quran (17:21:104), ‫( ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِوى َٔا َو َى‬to take shelter) Quran
(15:18:10), the root letters ‫ ه و ى‬has two forms: (F1) ‫َــﻮى‬ َ ‫ﻳَــﻬ َْــﻮى ﻫ‬
(to like/desire) Quran (1:2:87) and (F2) ‫( ﻳَــﻬْــ ِﻮى ﻫَــ ِﻮ َى‬to
incline/fall down) Quran (13:14:37).
b. Lafeef Mafrooq (‫ )اﻟ َّـ ِﻔـ ْﻴ ُـﻒ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔ ُــﺮ ْو ُق‬These verbs have ‫ و‬or ‫ ي‬as first
and third letter. Example:‫( ﻳَـ ِﻌــﻰ َو َﻋــﻰ‬He understood) Quran
(29:69:12), ‫( ﻳَـ ِﻘــﻰ َوﻗَــﻰ‬He saved) Quran (29:76:11). Note:
Construction of imperative of ‫ َوﻗَــﻰ‬is (‫ــﻰ‬ (‫ﺗَـ ِﻘــﻰ‬, ‫ ِﻗــﻰ‬, ‫قق‬,ِ , You save!
save!)
Quran (2:2:201).
(2:2:201).
7) AlMuzaafu verbs (‫ )اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀَ ـ َّﻌـ ُﻒ‬These verbs have second and third
letters same. Example: ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻇ‬,َ ‫ــﺞ‬
َّ ‫ َﺣ‬etc.
 219

Special verb ‫( َرأَى‬Seq # 126)

The main root letters of this verb are ‫ر َٔا َي‬.َ But the third letter ‫ ي‬is not
read in the root form. Because of this reason Fatah is not written on ‫ي‬.
This verb comes under the category of a-a group and it is a ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verb.
Let us try to conjugate this verb in the past tense.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ َر َٔاى‬.
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, the third radical ‫ ي‬appears and after that the doer ‫ ا‬will be
added. Thus it is ‫ر َٔاﻳَـﺎ‬.َ
3) For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, the third radical ‫ ي‬will be dropped. Originally it is ‫ر َٔاﻳُ ْــﻮا‬.َ
Finally it is ‫ر َٔا ْوا‬.َ
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ر َٔاى‬.َ After adding it is
‫ـﺖ‬ْ ْ‫ر َٔاﻳ‬.َ Because of two consecutive sukoons (‫)ـ ْـ‬, the ‫ ي‬gets drop. Finally
it is ‫ر َٔا ْت‬.َ
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫)ر َٔا ْت( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬. َ
Thus it is ‫ر َٔاﺗَـﺎ‬.َ
6) For Mutaharrik pronouns the third radical should have sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬.
For this to do, the third radical ‫ ي‬will appear. So the initial part will
be ‫ر َٔاﻳْــ‬.َ Thus the conjugation for all Mutaharrik pronouns from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬to
‫ــﻦ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬is ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ َر َٔاﻳ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ر َٔاﻳ‬,َ ‫ر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,َ ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ر َٔاﻳ‬,َ ‫ر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,َ ‫ر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬,َ ‫ـﺖ‬ َّ ‫ر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘ‬,َ ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ْ‫ َر َٔاﻳ‬and ‫ َر َٔاﻳْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
In the present tense originally it is ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َٔا ُى‬. But as it is ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verb it loses its
Dhammah (meaning it is hidden). So it became ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َٔاى‬. Now say ‫ ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َٔاى‬10
 220

times then you will end up saying ‫ﻳ َ َــﺮى‬. Such a change happened because
this verb is frequently used.
The “Five in pocket group” is now ‫ﻳ َ َــﺮى‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﺮى‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﺮى‬, ‫ َٔا َرى‬and ‫ﻧ َ َــﺮى‬.
The “Mabni group” is ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ ﻳ َ َــﺮﻳ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗ ََــﺮﻳ‬.
The “Guest noon group” is ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ َ َــﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﻳ َ َــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗ ََــﺮﻳ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗ ََــﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﺗَ َــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ ﺗ ََــﺮﻳ‬and
‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗ ََــﺮﻳ‬.
When you make this verb majzoom the third radical is lost.
Example: ‫( ﻟ َ ْـﻢ ﺗَ َــﺮ‬you did not see)
ُ ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ‬for this verb is not used, instead ‫ ُاﻧ ُْــﻈ ْــﺮ‬is used.
The ‫ـﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬
The specialty of this verb is that it has two meanings: a) to see, b) to think,
to consider or judge. The first meaning is called as ‫ َر َٔاى اﻟْـ َﺒــ َﺼــ ِﺮﻳ َّـ ُﺔ‬and the
second meaning is called as ‫ر َٔاى اﻟْـ َﻘـﻠْـﺒِـﻴَّـ ُﺔ‬.َ The first meaning needs only one
‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬. The example is below.
‫ـﺖ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬ُ ْ‫( َر َٔاﻳ‬I saw Ibrahim).
ِٕ
The second meaning needs two ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬which are ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
Refer to the Quran verses Quran (29:70:6) and Quran (29:70:7).
 221

Special verb ‫( أَتَــى‬Seq # 127)

The root letters of this verb are ‫ َٔا َت َي‬. But the third letter ‫ ي‬is not read in
the root form. This verb comes under the category of a-i group. Its
meaning is “He brought”.
Based on our previous experience, the 14 verbs form in the past tense is
‫ َٔاﺗَــﻰ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـ َﻴـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗ َْــﻮا‬, ‫َـﺖ‬
ْ ‫ َٔاﺗ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ َّ ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ‫َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴ‬
and ‫ َٔاﺗَـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺎ‬.
In the present tense the “Five in pocket group” is ‫ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬, ‫ ا ٓ ِﺗــﻲ‬and
‫ﻧ َـ ْﺎ ِﺗــﻲ‬. The ending Dhammah is lost (actually ‫)ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗ ُــﻲ‬
In “Mabni group”, the third letter will get sukoon so the construction will
be as below.
َ ‫ َن = ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗ ْــﻲ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ َن = ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــ ْﻲ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
The “Guest noon group” construction goes as follows.
ِ ‫ ْا ِن = ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For masculine third person dual)
‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ْو َن = ﻳَـﺎْٔﺗ ُْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﻳَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For masculine third person plural, The third radical is
lost and Kasrah of ‫ ت‬got changed to Dhammah)
ِ ‫ ْا ِن = ﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For feminine third person dual)
‫ـﺎن‬
 222

‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ ْا ِن = ﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For masculine second person dual)
‫ ْو َن = ﺗَـﺎْٔﺗ ُْــﻮ َن‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For masculine second person plural, The third radical is
lost and Kasrah of ‫ ت‬got changed to Dhammah)
َ ‫ــﻦ = ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For feminine second person singular, The third radical
is lost)
ِ ‫ ْا ِن = ﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِﺗـ َﻴ‬+ ‫( ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬For feminine second person dual)
‫ـﺎن‬
If two Hamzas meet together, the first having vowel sign and second
having sukoon then vowel of the first Hamza gets extra length as shown
below.
‫ ُا ْٔا = ُا ْو‬, ٓ ‫ َا ْٔا = ا‬, ‫ِا ْٔا= ِاﻳْــ‬
This information will help us to understand the imperative tense of this
verb as below.

Making Removing Actual

Adding ‫ ا‬at majzoom by the verb in Detached
the beginning dropping ‫ ي‬beginning present pronoun
and ‫ن‬ ‫ت‬ tense
ِ ْ‫ِا ْٔا ِت = ِاﻳ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ‫ْٔا ِت‬ ‫ْٔا ِﺗــﻲ‬ ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِﺗــﻲ‬ ‫َٔاﻧ َْﺖ‬
‫ِا ْٔاﺗ ُْــﻮ= ِاﻳْـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ‬ ‫ْٔاﺗ ُْــﻮ‬ ‫ْٔاﺗ ُْــﻮ َن‬ ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔﺗ ُْــﻮ َن‬ ‫َٔاﻧْ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬
 223

After understanding this let us understand how this imperative tense

behaves when some letter like ‫ و‬or ‫ ف‬comes before it. Once they come
before it, the first Hamza will be not be read as it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬. If it is
not read (will be dropped) then the second Hamza (first radical of the root
verb) will come back and looks like below.
‫ ِا ْٔا ِت = َو ْٔا ِت‬+ ‫ـﺖ = َو‬
ِ ْ‫ ِاﻳ‬+ ‫َو‬
‫ ِا ْٔاﺗ ُْــﻮ = ﻓَـﺎْٔﺗ ُْــﻮ‬+ ‫ ِاﻳْـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ = َف‬+ ‫( َف‬Quran (1:2:23), then you all bring!)
Laam of command (or request) for third and first person (Seq # 128)
In one of the last topics we have learned ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬which is used to give
command (or request) to second person. In order to give command (or
request) to third or first person ‫ ﻻ ُم ا َٔﻻ ْﻣــ ِﺮ‬is used. This Laam changes the
‫ـﺎر ٌع‬
ِ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬into the ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰو ٌم‬case. The example is given below.
Examples
‫( ِﻟـ َﻴـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ْٔا‬Let him read or he should read)
‫( ِﻟـﻨَـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ْٔا‬Let us read or we should read)
This ‫ ل‬takes Kasrah (ِ‫)ــ‬. But it loses this Kasrah if it comes after ‫َﺣ ْــﺮ ُف‬
‫ــﻄ ٍـﻒ‬
ْ ‫ َﻋ‬like ‫و‬,َ ‫ َف‬and ‫ﺛُـ َّﻢ‬.
Examples
 224

ْ ‫( ِﻟـﻨَــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ْـﺲ َوﻟْـﻨَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬We should sit and write). Quran (30:106:3) has ‫ﻻ ُم ا َٔﻻ ْﻣــ ِﺮ‬.
‫ـﺐ‬
The approximate meaning of this verse is “So let them worship the lord of
this house”.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:19). The
construction ‫ ﻓَـﻠْـﻴَـﻨْ ُــﻈ ْــﺮ‬with ‫ ﻻ ُم ا َٔﻻ ْﻣــ ِﺮ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:29). The
construction ‫ ﻓَـﻠْـﻴَـ ْﻜـ ُﻔ ْــﺮ‬with ‫ ﻻ ُم ا َٔﻻ ْﻣــ ِﺮ‬is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:110). The
ْ ‫ ﻓَـﻠْـﻴَـ ْﻌـ َﻤ‬with ‫ ﻻ ُم ا َٔﻻ ْﻣــ ِﺮ‬is present in this verse.
construction ‫ـﻞ‬
ِ ‫ســ ُم ا ْلــفَــا ِع‬
Doer (‫ــل‬ ْ ِ‫( )ا‬Seq # 129)
In simple terms, one who does an action is a doer. In English language this
doer is termed as “Active participle”. The person who works is a “worker”,
someone who worships is a “worshipper”, someone who protects is a
“protector”. The pattern of doer in Arabic language is ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬. This pattern is
derived from the specimen verb ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did). Thus ‫ َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﻞ‬is “worker”,
‫ َﻋـﺎﺑِـ ٌﺪ‬is “worshipper” and ٌ‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻓــﻆ‬is “protector”.
Sound masculine plurals from above singulars can be obtained as shown in
the below table.
S.no Singular ٌ‫ــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب َﻣـ ْـﺮ‬
 225

1 ‫ــﻦ َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـﻠُ ْــﻮ َن َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﻞ‬َ ‫ــﻦ َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬
َ ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬
2 ‫ــﻦ َﻋـﺎ ِﺑـﺪُ ْو َن َﻋـﺎﺑِـ ٌﺪ‬ َ ْ‫ــﻦ َﻋـﺎﺑِـ ِﺪﻳ‬ َ ْ‫َﻋـﺎﺑِـ ِﺪﻳ‬
3 ٌ‫ــﻦ َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ ُــﻈ ْــﻮ َن َﺣـﺎ ِﻓــﻆ‬ ِ ‫ــﻦ َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬
َ ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴ‬ ِ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬
َ ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴ‬
The above doers are masculine. To make them feminine add “ta
marbootah” (‫ )ة‬to them, ‫( َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬female worker), ‫( َﻋـﺎﺑِـﺪَ ٌة‬female worshipper)
and ‫ــﻈـ ٌﺔ‬
َ ‫( َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬female protector).
Sound feminine plurals from above singulars can be obtained as shown in
the below table. Remember again that ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬for sound
feminine plurals end with two Kasrah without ‫ َا ْل‬and with one Kasrah with
‫ َا ْل‬.
S.no Singular ٌ‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮع‬ ‫َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
1 ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣ َـﻼ ٌت َﻋـﺎ ِﻣـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬ ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣ َـﻼ ٍت‬ ‫َﻋـﺎ ِﻣ َـﻼ ٍت‬
2 ‫َﻋـﺎﺑِـﺪَ ٌة‬ ٌ َ‫َﻋـﺎﺑِـﺪ‬
‫ات‬ ‫َﻋـﺎﺑِـﺪَ ٍات‬ ‫َﻋـﺎﺑِـﺪَ ٍات‬
3 ‫ــﻈـ ٌﺔ‬
َ ‫ـﺎت َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬
ٌ ‫ــﻈ‬َ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬ ٍ ‫ــﻈ‬
‫ـﺎت‬ َ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬ ٍ ‫ــﻈ‬
‫ـﺎت‬ َ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻓ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:6). The doer ‫ﺑَـﺎ ِﺧـ ٌﻊ‬
(one who kills) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:18). The doer
ِ َ ‫( ﺑ‬one who stretches) is present in this verse.
ٌ‫ـﺎﺳــﻂ‬
 226

3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:35). The doer
‫( َﻇـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﻢ‬one who oppresses/wrongs/unjust) is present in this verse.
Noun for the object (on which the action is done)
done) (Seq # 130)
In English language the object on which the action done on is termed as
“Passive participle”. In Arabic language the pattern of this noun is ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل‬
which is derived from the specimen verb ‫( ﻓَـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬he did). Note that, this
noun can only be derived from the transitive verbs. If the verb is
َ ‫ َذﻫ‬then we cannot derive the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬from it. See the
intransitive like ‫َـﺐ‬
below examples.
Main Verb Passive Participle Meaning
One who has been
‫ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ‬ ‫َﻣــﺨْـﻠُ ْــﻮ ٌق‬
created.
َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬
‫ــﺢ‬ ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ ٌح‬ One that got opened.
One that got
َ‫َﻋـ َﺒـﺪ‬ ‫َﻣـ ْﻌـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ ٌد‬
worshipped.
ِ َ‫ﻏ‬ One that got
‫ـﺐ‬
َ ‫ــﻀ‬ ‫َﻣـﻐْــﻀُ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
wrath/anger.
Noun of place and time (Seq # 131)
Noun of place and time appears in two patterns either ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬or ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ٌﻞ‬.
Below are the conditions
 227

Conditions of pattern ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬

a) If the verb is Naaqis and irrespective of vowel signs on the second
letter. Example: ‫( ﻟَــﻬَـﺎ ﻳَـﻠْــﻬُــﻮ َﻣـﻠْــﻬًــﻰ‬place of entertainment).
b) If the second letter of Non-Naaqis verb having Fatah or Dhammah in
the present tense. Example: ‫( َﺷــ ِﺮ َب ﻳ َ ْـﺸ َــﺮ ُب َﻣ ْـﺸ َــﺮ ٌب‬drinking place),
ْ ‫ــﻄـ ُﺒــﺦُ َﻣ‬
ٌ‫ــﻄـ َﺒــﺦ‬ ْ َ ‫( َﻃـ َﺒــﺦَ ﻳ‬kitchen).
Conditions of pattern ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ٌﻞ‬
a) If the verb is Misaal and irrespective of vowel signs on the second
letter. Example: ‫( َوﻗَ َـﻒ ﻳَـ ِﻘ ُـﻒ َﻣ ْــﻮ ِﻗ ٌـﻒ‬place to park), ‫َوﺿَ ـ َﻊ ﻳَــﻀَ ـ َﻊ َﻣ ْــﻮ ِﺿـ ٌﻊ‬
(place), ‫( َو َﻋـﺪَ ﻳَـ ِﻌـﺪُ َﻣ ْــﻮ ِﻋـ ٌﺪ‬time of appointment/promise).
b) If the verb is Non-Mitral, Non-Naaqis and has Kasrah in the present
tense. Example: ‫( َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ُـﺲ َﻣــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ٌـﺲ‬Sitting room/place), ‫ﻧ َ َــﺰ َل ﻳَـ ْﻨــ ِﺰ ُل‬
‫( َﻣـﻨْــ ِﺰ ٌل‬place of getting down).
For both the forms ta marboutah (‫ )ة‬may be added. Example: ‫َﻣـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟَـ ٌﺔ‬
(position), ‫( َﻣ ْـﺪ َر َﺳـ ٌﺔ‬school).
There are few exceptions: ‫ــﺠـ ٌﺪ‬ ِ ‫( َﻣ ْـﺴ‬place of prostration) from ُ‫( ﻳ َ ْـﺴــ ُﺠـﺪ‬It
should be on pattern ‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫( َﻣ ْـﺸــ ِﺮ ٌق‬rising place of the sun) from ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺸ ُــﺮ ُق‬
(It should be on pattern ‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫( َﻣـﻐْــ ِﺮ ٌب‬setting place of sun) from ‫ﻳَـﻐ ُْــﺮ ُب‬
(It should be on pattern ‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ِﻠـ ٌﻊ‬ ْ ‫( َﻣ‬place of sun rise) from ‫ــﻄـﻠُـ ُﻊ‬
ْ َ ‫( ﻳ‬It
should on pattern ‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬.
 228

ْ ‫ َﻣ‬is the place of sun rise and ‫ــﻄـﻠَـ ٌﻊ‬

Note: ‫ــﻄـ ِﻠـ ٌﻊ‬ ْ ‫ َﻣ‬is the time of sun rise
(dawn). The word ‫ــﻄـﻠَـ ٌﻊ‬ْ ‫ َﻣ‬is present in Quran (30:97:5).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:59). The noun of
ٌ ‫( َﻣــﻬْـ ِﻠ‬time of destruction) in the phrase ‫( ِﻟـ َﻤــﻬْـ ِﻠـ ِﻜــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬for their
time ‫ـﻚ‬
time of destruction) is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:60) and Quran
(15:18:61). The noun of place ‫( َﻣــ ْﺠـ َﻤـ ٌﻊ‬place of meeting) is present in
these two verses.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verses Quran (16:18:86) and Quran
(16:18:90). The noun of places ‫( َﻣـﻐْــ ِﺮ ٌب‬setting place of the sun) and
‫ــﻄـ ِﻠـ ٌﻊ‬
ْ ‫( َﻣ‬place of sun rise) are present in these two verses.
Noun for instrument
instrument (Seq # 132)
In Arabic language noun for instrument is called as ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻻٓﻟَـ ِﺔ‬. The noun of
instrument describes the instrument name with which the action of the
ٌ َ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻔـﺘ‬, which is an instrument for
verb is carried out. One such example is ‫ـﺎح‬
opening denoted by the verb ‫ﻓَـﺘَ َــﺢ‬.
This noun comes in the following three patterns.
ٌ َ‫ﻧ َـﺸَ َــﺮ( ِﻣـ ْﻨـﺸ‬, he sawed, an instrument to
ٌ َ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻔـﺘ‬, ‫ـﺎر‬
a) ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. Example ‫ـﺎح‬
saw), ‫ ِﻣ ْــﻮ َز ٌان‬but converted to ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻴــﺰ ٌان‬as Kasrah cannot be followed by ‫و‬
 229

the Kasrah of ‫ م‬got elongated (‫و َز َن‬,َ he weighed, an instrument to

weight) etc.
b) ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬. Example ‫ﺻـ ِﻌـﺪَ ( ِﻣ ْــﺼـ َﻌـ ٌﺪ‬,َ he ascend, a lift).
c) ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬. Example ‫ َﻛـﻨَ َـﺲ( ِﻣـ ْﻜـﻨَ َـﺴـ ٌﺔ‬, he swept, a broom), ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻜ َــﻮﻳَـ ٌﺔ‬but
converted to ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻜ َــﻮا ٌة‬because Arabic phonetic system converted the
sound waya to waa (‫ َﻛ َــﻮي‬, he ironed, an iron), ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻘـﻠَـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬but converted to
‫ ِﻣـ ْﻘـﻼ ٌة‬because Arabic phonetic system converted the sound laya to laa
(‫ﻗَـﻠَــﻲ‬, he fried, frying pan) etc.
The plurals of these nouns of instrument are on the pattern ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋـ ْﻴ‬and
‫ َﻣـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋـ ُﻞ‬.
Quran (18:24:35), Quran (7:6:59), Quran (27:55:9) and Quran (30:101:6)
are few examples for nouns of instrument.
Note: It is to observe that noun of place and time starts with Fatah on ‫م‬
and noun of instrument starts with Kasrah on ‫م‬.
Revisiting the Nominal sentence structure (Seq # 133)
A nominal sentence is a sentence that starts with
a) a noun or pronoun.
Example: ‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟ‬.
ٌ َ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬. ‫ـﺐ‬
b) ‫َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬
Example: ‫( َٔا ْن ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪﻟُ ْﻮا ﺧَـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ﻟ َّـ ُﻜـ ْﻢ‬Translation: To do justice is good for
you. Here ‫ َٔا ْن ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪﻟُ ْﻮا‬is in the position of ٍ ‫ َرﻓْـﻊ‬, which is nothing but
 230

‫) َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. Quran (2:2:184) is another example with translation “…to fast
is good/best for you…”.
c) Particles that resembles like verb. For example ‫ ا َّن‬and its sisters etc.
ِٕ
Interrogative Nouns (Seq # 134)
ْ ‫( َﻣ‬Who), ‫( َﻣـﺎ‬what) and ‫( َﻛ ْـﻢ‬How many/much)
Interrogative nouns like ‫ــﻦ‬
can appear in nominal sentences. These interrogative nouns are indefinite.
We have to find out whether they are ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬or predicate. If we answer
the interrogative sentence then we will come to know.
Examples
‫ــﻦ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴـ ٌﺐ ؟‬
ْ ‫( َﻣ‬Who is doctor ?)
An answer to the above question can be ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬. Its translation is
‘Mohammed is a doctor’. So the ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ َﻣ‬in the above sentence is ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and
ٌ ‫ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬is ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬. That is ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬already exist in the sentence.
‫ـﺐ‬
‫ـﻚ ؟‬ َ ‫( َﻣـﺎ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻤ‬What is your name ?)
An answer to the above question can be ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ِﻤ ْــﻲ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬. Its translation is
‘My name is Mohammed’. So the ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬in the above interrogative sentence is
‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬, because somebody is looking for the ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
 231

Mubtada can be indefinite (Seq # 135)

In most of the cases ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬will be definite. ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬may be indefinite in
the following cases.
a) If ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬is ‫ ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ‬and ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬comes first.
Examples
‫( ِﻓ ْــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َر ُﺟـ ٌﻞ‬There is a man in the cave)
‫ــﺠـﺪَ ِار َﻛـﻨْ ٌــﺰ‬ ِ ْ‫ـﺖ اﻟ‬
َ ‫( ﺗَــ ْﺤ‬There is a treasure under the wall)
‫( ِﻋـﻨْـﺪَ ﻧ َـﺎ َﺳـﻴَّ َـﺎر ٌة‬We have a car)
b) If ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬is an interrogative noun like ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫( َﻣ‬Who), ‫( َﻣـﺎ‬what) and ‫َﻛـ ْﻢ‬
(How many). These interrogative nouns are indefinite.
Examples
‫ــﺾ ؟‬ ٌ ْ‫ــﻦ َﻣــ ِﺮﻳ‬
ْ ‫( َﻣ‬Who is sick ?)
‫( َﻛ ْـﻢ َر ُﺟـ ًﻞ ِﻓ ْــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ؟‬How many persons are there in the cave).
Order of Mubtada
Mubtada and Khabar (Seq # 136)
In the nominal sentence originally ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬comes first and ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬comes
after ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬. But it is allowed or optional to reverse this order.
Example
‫( َﻛـﺒِـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ َﻛــﻬْـ ُﻔــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬Their cave is big). Here ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬came first. This is still
allowed but not frequent.
‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬should precede ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬if
 232

a) ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬is an interrogative noun.

Example
‫ـﻚ ؟‬ َ ‫( َﻣـﺎ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻤ‬What is your name ?).
b) If ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬is ‫ ِﺷـ ْﺒـ ُﻪ ُﺟـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ٍﺔ‬and the ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬is indefinite.
Example
‫( ﻟَـ ٗﻪ ﺛَـ َﻤ ٌــﺮ‬For him a fruit).
Revisiting the Verbal sentence structure (Seq # 137)
A verbal sentence is a sentence that starts with
a) a complete verb. A complete verb is a verb conveying the complete
message. Example ‫( َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬He sat), ‫( ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬He hit) etc.
b) an incomplete verb. An incomplete verb is a verb that does not
convey the complete message. Example ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫( َﻛ‬He was) etc. As this verb
is incomplete in meaning, the sentence needs ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬and ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬to
complete the message from the sentence. Example: ‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫َﻛ‬
ً ‫ـﺎن ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
(Mohammed was a doctor).
Adverbs In detail (Seq # 138)
The adverb (‫)اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬ َّ is a noun that describes the time or place of an
action. Adverb is also called as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. The adverb is always ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬.
Few examples of adverb of time are below.
‫ـﺖ ا َﱃ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ﻟَـ ْﻴـ ًﻞ‬
ُ ‫( َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬I went to the cave in the night).
ِٕ
 233

‫اﻟﺼـﻼ ِة‬ ُ ‫( ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬I slept after prayer).

َّ َ‫ـﺖ ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬
Few examples of adverb of place are below.
‫اﻟـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫( َﺟـﻠَ ْـﺴ‬I sat above the ship).
َّ ‫ـﺖ ﻓَ ْــﻮ َق‬
ِ ْ‫ـﺖ َٔا َﻣـﺎ َم اﻟ‬
‫ــﺠـﺪَ ا ِر‬ ُ ‫( ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬I slept in front of the wall).
Few more adverbs are ‫( َو َرا َء‬behind), ‫( ُﻛـﻠَّـ َﻤـﺎ‬whenever, representing time),
‫( َﺣ ْــﻮ َل‬around), ‫( د ُْو َن‬other than), ‫( ﻏَـ ْﻴ َــﺮ‬other than), ‫( ﻟَـﺪُ ْن‬near/from) and
‫( َٔا ْﺳـ َﻔـ َﻞ‬lower).
Few other adverbs are ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌّ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬. Examples are ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫( َٔاﻳ‬where), ‫( َٔا ْﻣ ِـﺲ‬yesterday),
‫ـﺚ‬ُ ‫( َﺣـ ْﻴ‬wherever), ُّ‫( ﻗَــﻂ‬never), ‫( ﻫُـﻨَـﺎ‬here), ‫( َﻣ َـﱴ‬when), ‫( ا َذا‬when in future
ِٕ
time), ‫( ا ْذ‬when in past time) and ‫( ا ٔﻻ َن‬now). While describing these
ِٕ
adverbs in grammatical sentence analysis we should say “In the place of
nasbin” (‫ـﺐ‬ ٍ ‫) ِﻓــﻲ َﻣــ َﺤـ ِ ّﻞ ﻧ َ ْــﺼ‬. That means they are ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. Example is
below.
‫ـﺖ ا َﱃ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ َٔا ْﻣـ ِﺲ‬ ُ ‫( َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬I went to the cave yesterday).
ِٕ
In the above statement the adverb ‫ َٔا ْﻣـ ِﺲ‬is in the place of nasbin ( ‫ِﻓــﻲ َﻣــ َﺤـ ِ ّﻞ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ٍ ‫)ﻧ َ ْــﺼ‬.
 234

Words acting
acting like an Adverb (Seq # 139)
A word can act like an adverb though it is not representing time or place.
This word will take nasb-ending. The following words will act like an
adverb
a) Words like ‫( ُﻛـ َّﻞ‬all/every), ‫ــﺾ‬ َ ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻌ‬some), ‫( ِﻧ ْــﺼ َـﻒ‬half), ‫( ُرﺑْـ َﻊ‬one fourth)
acts like adverb if their ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬is actually denoting time or place.
ِٕ
Examples
‫ـﺖ ُﻛـ َّﻞ اﻟْـﻨَّــﻬَـﺎ ِر‬
ُ ‫( ِﻧـ ْﻤ‬I slept the whole day).
‫ــﺾ ﻳ َ ْــﻮ ٍم‬َ ‫ـﺖ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ﺑَـ ْﻌ‬ُ ‫( ﺑَـ ِﻘـ ْﻴ‬I remained in the cave part of the day).
b) The adjective of ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬ َّ after the ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬ َّ itself has been omitted.
Examples
‫ـﺖ َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـ ًﻼ‬ ُ ‫ َﺟـﻠَ ْـﺴ‬for ‫ـﺖ َو ْﻗـﺘًـﺎ َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـ ًﻼ‬ ُ ‫( َﺟـﻠَ ْـﺴ‬I sat for a long time). Here
‫ َﻃــ ِﻮﻳْـ ًﻼ‬is acting like a ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬ َّ where the actual ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬, َّ ‫ َو ْﻗـﺘًـﺎ‬got
omitted.
c) A demonstrative pronoun if the ‫ ﺑَـﺪَ ٌل‬is the actual ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬. َّ
Examples
‫ـﺖ ِا َﱃ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ٰﻫ َـﺬا اﻟْـﻴَ ْــﻮ َم‬ُ ‫( َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬I went to the cave this day). Here ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬is
in the place of nasb because acting like an adverb.
d) Numbers representing the place or time words.
Examples
 235

‫ْـﺖ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ﺧَـ ْﻤ َـﺴـ َﺔ َٔاﻳَّـﺎ ٍم‬

ُ ‫( َﻣـ َﻜـﺜ‬I remained in the cave for 5 days).
Here the word ‫ ﺧَـ ْﻤ َـﺴـ َﺔ‬is acting like a ‫اﻟــﻈ ْــﺮ ُف‬ َّ and has taken nasb
ending.
Words ‫ قَــ ْبــ ُل‬and ‫( ﺑَــ ْعــ ُد‬Seq # 140)
As learnt earlier, these words are adverbs. The noun after these words is
‫ـﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. If the ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬is dropped then these words behave like
ِٕ ِٕ
ٌّ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـﻨ‬and ends with Dhammah. If ‫ـﺎف ِٕاﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ ِ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬is present then these words
decline as normal.
Example
Mohammed was doctor before that.
‫ـﻞ ٰذﻟـ َِﻚ‬ ْ ‫ـﺐ ِﻣ‬
ِ ‫ــﻦ ﻗَـ ْﺒ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
Now dropping ‫ ٰذﻟـِ َﻚ‬will lead the below.
ْ ‫ـﺐ ِﻣ‬
‫ــﻦ ﻗَـ ْﺒـ ُﻞ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﻃـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬Here ‫ـﻞ‬ ٌّ ‫) َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬
ُ ‫ ﻗَـ ْﺒ‬is ‫ــﻲ‬
I did not see Mohammed after that.
‫ــﻦ ﺑَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪ ٰذﻟـِ َﻚ‬
ْ ‫ـﺖ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا ِﻣ‬
ُ ْ‫َﻣـﺎ َر َٔاﻳ‬
Now dropping ‫ ٰذﻟـِ َﻚ‬will lead the below.
ْ ‫ـﺖ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا ِﻣ‬
ُ‫ــﻦ ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬ ٌ ‫) َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬
ُ ْ‫( َﻣـﺎ َر َٔاﻳ‬Here ُ‫ ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺪ‬is ‫ــﻲ‬
 236

َ ‫ َك‬in Nominal sentence (Seq # 141)

Usage of verb ‫ــان‬
The word ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬is a verb. It is used in a nominal sentence. The meaning of
the verb ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬in past is “he was”. But it is also used to specify eternal
concepts (always). So, it can be “he/it was”, “he/it is” and “he/it will be”.
When the word ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬joins a nominal sentence it brings the following
changes.
a) The terminology of ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬will change to “Noun of Kaana” which is
َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َﻛ‬.
‫ـﺎن‬
b) The terminology of ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬will change to “Predicate of Kaana” which
َ ‫ َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ َﻛ‬.
is ‫ـﺎن‬
c) It will make the “Predicate of Kaana” (‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ ) َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ َﻛ‬as ‫ َﻣـﻨْــ ُﺼــ ْﻮ ٌب‬only if
the predicate is single/one word. If the predicate is prepositional
phrase then there is no change.
Example
‫( َا ْﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳـْ ٌﺪ‬The cave is new).
After introducing ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬the following thing will happen.
ً‫ـﺎن ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ُْـﻒ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳـﺪ‬
َ ‫( َﻛ‬The cave was new).
Prepositional phrase example is
‫( ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﰲ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬Mohammed is in the cave).
 237

After introducing ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬no change will happen as below.

‫ـﺎن ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﰲ ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬
َ ‫( َﻛ‬Mohammed was in the cave).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the last part of the verse Quran
(16:18:98). The approximate translation is “the promise of my lord is
َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َﻛ‬is ُ‫ َو ْﻋـﺪ‬and ‫ـﺎن‬
true”. ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ َﻛ‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب( َﺣـﻘًّـﺎ‬
ُ ْ‫) َﻣـﻨ‬.
َ ‫( ) َ)ال يَــ َزا ُل( َك‬Seq # 142)
Sister of ‫ــان‬
One of the sisters of ‫ـﺎن‬َ ‫ َﻛ‬is ‫ﻻ ﻳ َ َــﺰ ُال‬. It means “he is still”. It is based on the
verb ‫زا َل‬.َ It exactly behaves like ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬grammatically as explained in the
below example.
Example
Mohammed is still in the cave (‫)ﻻ ﻳ َ َــﺰ ُال ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ‬.
ً ْ‫)ﻻ ﻳ َ َــﺰ ُال َﻣــ ِﺮﻳ‬.
He is still sick. (‫ــﺾ‬
As far as, ‫( أَ ﱠمــا‬Seq # 143)
This word is used when discussing about two or more items. It is a
conjunction. Its literal translation in English language is “As far as…”.
Suppose, somebody asked a question as below…
 238

For whom the ship is and for whom the wall is ? An answer to this
question can be as follows.
‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ـﺎن ِﻟـﻐ َُـﻼ َﻣـ ْﻴ‬
ِ ‫ــﻦ ﻳَـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ َﻤـ ْﻴ‬ ِ ْ‫ــﻦ َو َٔا َّﻣـﺎ اﻟ‬
َ ‫ــﺠـﺪَ ُار ﻓَـ َﻜ‬ َ ‫َـﺖ ِﻟـ َﻤ َـﺴـﺎ ِﻛـ ْﻴ‬
ْ ‫اﻟﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـ ُﺔ ﻓَـ َﻜـﺎﻧ‬
َّ ‫ َٔا َّﻣـﺎ‬. (As far
as the ship, it was for poor people and as far as the wall it was for two
orphan boys/children).
It is to note that ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬after ‫ َا َّﻣـﺎ‬should take ‫ﻓَــ‬.
Taking oath ‘by’ (‫( ) َو‬Seq # 144)
The letter ‫ َو‬is also used for taking oath. In that case ‫ َو‬acts like a
preposition and makes the following noun as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬. Thus if a noun is
coming as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬after ‫ َو‬then it is being understood that someone is
taking oath.
Examples
By the dawn.
‫َو اﻟْـ َﻔــ ْﺠــ ِﺮ‬
By the fig, and the olive.
‫اﻟــﺰﻳْـ ُﺘ ْــﻮ ِن‬ ِ ‫َو اﻟـ ِﺘّـ ْﻴ‬
َّ ‫ــﻦ َو‬
 239

َ ‫( )ا ْل‬Seq # 145)
Circumstances (‫ــحــا ُل‬
Circumstances
Yet another usage of ‫ َو‬is to describe the circumstances under which an
action takes place. This ‫ َو‬is used to connect a subordinate nominal
sentence (describing circumstance) to another main sentence (main
action).
Example
I entered the cave while Mohammed was sitting.
‫ـﺖ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ َو ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﻳَــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ُـﺲ‬
ُ ْ‫َدﺧَـﻠ‬
It is to note that if the ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬of the subordinate nominal sentence is a verb
then it should be in present tense.
It is possible that a verbal sentence may also come after circumstances ‫و‬.َ
Under this situation the word ‫ ﻗَ ْـﺪ‬should be inserted as shown in the below
equation.
‫ اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬+ ‫ ﻗَ ْـﺪ‬+ ‫َو‬
Quran (16:20:125) and Quran (28:61:5) are examples using verbal sentence
after ‫و‬.َ
 240

Five Nouns (ُ‫ســة‬ َ ‫ســ َمــا ُء ا ْل‬

َ ‫ــخــ ْمــ‬ ْ ) (Seq # 146
ْ ‫)اال‬ 146)
In Arabic language there are five special nouns. These nouns are ‫َٔا ٌب‬
(father), ‫( َٔا ٌخ‬brother), ‫( َﺣـ ٌﻢ‬husband’s brother or father), ‫( ﻓَـ ٌﻢ‬mouth) and ‫َذ ٌو‬
(possessor of). The specialty of these nouns is that, their endings are not
normal when they are ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. When they come as ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬their ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬-
ending is ‫و‬, ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬-ending is ‫ ا‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬-ending is ‫ي‬. Another specialty
of ‫ ﻓَـ ٌﻢ‬is that, it behaves as explained above only when ‫ م‬is omitted
otherwise it behaves normal (‫ﻓَـ ُﻢ‬, ‫ ﻓَ َـﻢ‬and ‫)ﻓَـ ِﻢ‬. See the below table.
‫َذ ٌو ﻓَـ ٌﻢ َﺣـ ٌﻢ َٔا ٌخ َٔا ٌب‬
‫ُذ ْو ﻓُ ْــﻮ َﺣـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ َٔاﺧ ُْــﻮ َٔاﺑُ ْــﻮ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫َذا ﻓَـﺎ َﺣـ َﻤـﺎ َٔاﺧَـﺎ َٔاﺑَـﺎ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬
‫ِذ ْي ِﻓ ْــﻲ َﺣـ ِﻤ ْــﻲ َٔا ِﺧ ْــﻲ َٔاﺑ ِْــﻲ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
Examples
This is for the father of Ibrahim.
‫ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻟـﺎَٔﺑ ِْــﻲ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬
ِٕ
I listened to the brother of Mohammed.
‫ـﺖ َٔاﺧَـﺎ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫َﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻌ‬
Father of Ibrahim went.
‫َـﺐ َٔاﺑُ ْــﻮ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬
َ ‫َذﻫ‬
ِٕ
 241

Quran (13:13:14) has ‫( ﻓَـﺎ ُﻩ‬his mouth) as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـﻪ‬.
ِٕ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:82). The phrase
‫( َٔاﺑُ ْــﻮ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬father of those two) which is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is present in
ِٕ
this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:83). The word ‫ِذي‬
is present in this verse as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬because of
preposition ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ َﻋ‬before it.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:86). The word ‫َذا‬
is present in this verse as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and it is ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬because of harfu-
nida (‫ )ﻳَـﺎ‬before it.
Plural of ‫ــن‬
ٌ ‫( اِ ْﺑ‬Seq # 147
147)
There are two plurals of ‫( ِاﺑْــ ٌﻦ‬son) (‫ ا‬is ‫)ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬. One is sound
masculine plural and the second one is broken plural as shown in the
below table.
Case Sound Masculine Plural Broken Plural
‫َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬ ‫ﺑَـﻨُ ْــﻮ َن‬ ‫َٔاﺑْـﻨَـﺎ ٌء‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫َﻣـﻨ‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ ِﻨـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ً َ‫َٔاﺑْـﻨ‬
‫ـﺎءا‬
‫َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬ َ ‫ﺑَـ ِﻨـ ْﻴ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫َٔاﺑْـﻨَـﺎ ٍء‬
 242

Duals and sound

sound masculine plurals when become Muzaaf (Seq # 148
148)
The ending ‫ ن‬of duals and sound masculine plurals gets dropped when
they become ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
Examples

Example
Meaning of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬Dropping the ‫ ن‬Plural/Dual
‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ِٕ
Teachers of
ٍ‫ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ِﺑـﻼل‬ ‫ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر ُﺳ ْــﻮ‬ ‫ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر ُﺳ ْــﻮ َن‬
Bilal
Two books of
‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑَـﺎ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑَـﺎ‬ ِ َ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
Mohammed
+ ‫ ْي = ﻳَـﺪَ ْا‬+ ‫ﻳَـﺪَ ْا‬
My two hands ‫ﻳَـﺪَ ا‬ ‫ﻳَـﺪَ ِان‬
‫َي = ﻳَـﺪَ َاي‬
= ‫ ْي‬+ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑَـ ْﺎ‬
My two books = ‫ َي‬+ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑَـ ْﺎ‬ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑَـﺎ‬ ِ َ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬
‫ـﺎن‬
َ َ ‫ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬
‫ـﺎي‬

‫( ي‬Ya-Mutakallim) gets Fatah if an ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬with sukoon comes before it. So

َ َ ‫ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬.
my two hands and my two books get the form ‫ ﻳَـﺪَ َاي‬and ‫ـﺎي‬
 243

Assume that you have to say “Oh my two teachers”. Because of harfu-nida
(‫ )ﻳَـﺎ‬before ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬, the ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬will become ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. The below is the
construction steps.
َّ ‫ َي = ﻳَـﺎ ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر َﺳ‬+ ‫ ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر َﺳـ ْﻴــ‬+ ‫ ْي = ﻳَـﺎ‬+ ‫ ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر َﺳـ ْﻴــ‬+ ‫ ْي = ﻳَـﺎ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ ِ ‫ ُﻣـﺪَ ّ ِر َﺳـ ْﻴ‬+ ‫ﻳَـﺎ‬
( ‫( ) ِك‬Seq # 149
Word for Both (‫ــال‬ 149)
49)
The meaning of the word ‫ ِﻛـﻼ‬is ‘both’. The feminine is ‫ ِﻛـﻠْـﺘَـﺎ‬. These words
always come as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is always dual.
ِٕ
ِ ‫( ِﻛـﻼ اﻟْـ َﻘـﻠَـ َﻤـ ْﻴ‬Both the pens), ‫ــﻦ‬
Example: ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫( ِﻛـﻠْـﺘَـﺎ اﻟْــ َﺠـﻨَّـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬Both the gardens).
Other rules related to these words are given below.
Example Rule
Translation is ‘Both the gardens are
beautiful’. These words are treated as
singular words. Thus predicate
‫ــﻦ َﺟـ ِﻤـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬ِ ‫ ِﻛـﻠْـﺘَـﺎ اﻟْــ َﺠـﻨَّـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬should also be singular.
Translation is ‘I know both the
caves’. If ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬is a direct noun
ِٕ ِ
then there will be no change in ‫ـﻼ‬‫ﻛ‬
ِ ‫ َٔاﻋْــ ِﺮ ُف ِﻛـﻼ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ َﻔـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ ِ ْﳇـﺘـﺎ‬in ‫ ﻣـﻨــﺼــﻮب‬and ‫ﻣــﺠــﺮور‬
‫ــﻦ‬
َ ٌ ْ ُ ْ َ ٌُْ ْ َ
cases. In the example, ‫ ِﻛـﻼ‬remain
unchanged and it is in ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬case
 244

because the verb ‘I know’ is a

transitive verb.
Translation is ‘I saw both of them’.
If Muzaaf ilaihi is an attached
‫ـﺖ ِﻛـﻠ َـ ْﻴــﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬
ُ ْ‫َر َٔاﻳ‬ pronoun then these words decline
like dual (kila, kilai, kilai and kilta,
kiltai, kiltai).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:33). The phrase
ِ ‫( ِﻛـﻠْـﺘَـﺎ اﻟْــ َﺠـﻨَّـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬both the gardens) is present in this verse.
‫ــﻦ‬
2) State TRUE or FALSE: The translation of the English statement “I
went to both the ships” is ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ـﺖ ِﻛـﻠْـﺘَـﺎ اﻟْ َّـﺴـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـﻨَـﺘَـ ْﻴ‬
ُ ‫ َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: In the phrase ‫ـﺖ ِﻛـﻠَـ ْﻴــﻬِـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ُ ْ‫ َر َٔاﻳ‬the ‫ ِﻛـﻠَـ ْﻴــ‬is acting
as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬because ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ َر َٔاﻳ‬is a transitive verb.
Word for another (Seq # 150
150)
50)
The Arabic word which means ‘another’ is ‫( آﺧ َُــﺮ‬plural is ‫)آﺧ َُــﺮ ْو َن‬. The
feminine form is ‫( ُٔاﺧ َْــﺮى‬plural is ‫) ُٔاﺧ َُــﺮ‬. The masculine and feminine forms
(‫ آﺧ َُــﺮ‬and ‫ ) ُٔاﺧ َْــﺮى‬are diptotes.
Hope or fear (‫( )لَــ َعــ ﱠل‬Seq # 151
151)
We have learnt that ‫ ﻟَـ َﻌـ َّﻞ‬means either hope or fear. Its meaning depends
on the context. If the context is conveying a positive message then it means
 245

hope (called as ‫)اﻟْـﺘَّ َــﺮ ِ ّﺟــﻲ‬. If the context is conveying a negative message
then it means fear (called as ‫ـﺎق‬ ُ ‫)اﻻ ْﺷـ َﻔ‬.
ِٕ
Examples
‫( ﻟَـ َﻌـﻠَّـ ُﻪ ﺑِــﺨَـ ْﻴــ ٍﺮ‬Hope he is good). Here it is ‫اﻟْـﺘَّ َــﺮ ِ ّﺟــﻲ‬.
ٌ ْ‫( ﻟَـ َﻌـﻠَّـ ُﻪ َﻣــ ِﺮﻳ‬I am afraid, he is sick). Here it is ‫ـﺎق‬
‫ــﺾ‬ ُ ‫اﻻ ْﺷـ َﻔ‬.
ِٕ
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:6) and try to read
its English translation. Here the context of the verse means fear. So
the usage of ‫ ﻟَـ َﻌـ َّﻞ‬is ‫ـﺎق‬
ُ ‫ اﻻ ْﺷـ َﻔ‬here.
ِٕ
Extra min (ُ‫( ) ِمــنْ الــ ﱠزائِــ َدة‬Seq # 152
152)
This ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬is used to emphasize the meaning of the sentence. This ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬will
not change the function of the noun coming after it, though it converts it
to ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬. Using extra min needs some condition to fulfill which are as
follows.
1) The sentence should have negation or prohibition or interrogation
ْ ‫)ﻫ‬.
(only with particle ‫َـﻞ‬
2) The noun after extra min should be always indefinite.
Examples
Negation: I did not do anything. (‫ــﻦ َﺷ ْــﻲ ٍء‬ ُ ْ‫) َﻣـﺎ ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠ‬.
ْ ‫ـﺖ ِﻣ‬
 246

Prohibition: Don’t write anything. (‫ــﻦ َﺷ ْــﻲ ٍء‬ ْ ‫)ﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬.
ْ ‫ـﺐ ِﻣ‬
Interrogation: Is there something new ? or any update ? (‫ــﻦ َﺟـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٍﺪ ؟‬
ْ ‫َـﻞ ِﻣ‬
ْ ‫)ﻫ‬.
If there is no need to emphasize then the example of negation above will
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﺎ ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠ‬. Here ‫ َﺷ ْــﻲ ًء‬is Mafoolun bihi ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
be ‫ـﺖ َﺷ ْــﻲ ًء‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. Thus introducing
ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬will not change the function of the noun coming after ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬. Observe the
last three words of Quran (26:50:30).
ْ ‫( ))الــتﱠ‬Seq # 153
Taukeed (‫ــو ِكــ ْيــ ُد‬ 153)
ُ‫ اﻟـﺘَّ ْــﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـﺪ‬is a noun to emphasize another noun (example ‫ ُﻛـﻠُّــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬, ‫)ﻧ َـ ْﻔ ُـﺴـ ُﻪ‬. The
noun being emphasized is called as ُ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤــ َﺆ ِﻛّـﺪ‬. The declension of ُ‫اﻟـﺘَّ ْــﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـﺪ‬
depends on ُ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤــ َﺆ ِﻛّـﺪ‬.
Examples
‫ـﺎب اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ُﻛـﻠ َّـــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬ َ َ ‫( ﻧ‬I saw all the people of cave).
َ ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ ُت َٔا ْﺻــ َﺤ‬
‫ـﺖ َﻋ ٰـﲆ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ ﻧ َـ ْﻔ ِـﺴـ ِﻪ‬
ُ ‫( َﺳـﻠَّـ ْﻤ‬I greeted Mohammed himself).
In the above examples the word ‫ ُﻛـ َّﻞ‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬because it is following
َ ‫ َٔا ْﺻــ َﺤ‬and the word ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻔ ِـﺲ‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬because it is following ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٍﺪ‬. The
‫ـﺎب‬
verb ‫ َﺳـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬means “to greet” and it is discussed in a later topic. An example
from Quran is Quran (1:2:31) where ‫ ُﻛـﻠ َّـﻬَـﺎ‬is ُ‫اﻟـﺘَّ ْــﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـﺪ‬.
 247

Manqoos Noun (‫ص‬ ْ ُ‫( ))ا ْلــ َمــ ْنــق‬Seq # 154

ُ ‫ــو‬ 154)
Manqoos noun is a noun that ends with original ‫ي‬. This ‫ ي‬is called as ‫ﻳَـﺎ ٌء‬
‫ﻻز َﻣـ ٌﺔ‬
ِ in Arabic language. The letter before this ‫ ي‬will have a Kasrah.
Example: ‫ اﻟْ َــﻮا ِدي‬,‫ـﺎﺿــﻲ‬
ِ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻤ‬,‫ـﺎﺿــﻲ‬
ِ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻘ‬etc. This ending ‫ ي‬will be dropped when
making these nouns indefinite and the letter before it will take ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬.
Example: ‫ َوا ٍد‬,‫ـﺎض‬ ٍ ‫ َﻣ‬,‫ـﺎض‬
ٍ َ‫( ﻗ‬Originally ‫ــﻲ‬ ِ َ‫ﻗ‬, ‫ــﻲ‬
ٌ ‫ـﺎﺿ‬ ِ ‫ َﻣ‬, ‫)وا ِد ٌي‬.
ٌ ‫ـﺎﺿ‬ َ Refer to Quran
(16:20:72) for ‫ـﺎض‬ ٍ َ ‫ﻗ‬.
The ending ‫ ي‬will retain in Manqoos nouns in the following three cases.
a) If the noun has the definite article. Examples: ‫ـﺎﺿــﻲ‬ ِ ‫اﻟْـ َﻘ‬, ‫ اﻟـﺪَّا ِﻋ َــﻲ‬in
Quran (16:20:108).
b) If the noun is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬. Example: ‫( َوا ِدي َﻣـﻜَّـ َﺔ‬valley of Makkah).
c) If the noun is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. Examples: ‫ـﺎﺿ ًــﻲ‬ ِ ‫اﻟْـ َﻘ‬, ‫ دَاﻋـِﻴًـﺎ‬in Quran
ِ َ‫ﻗ‬, ‫ـﺎﺿ َــﻲ‬
(22:33:46), ‫ َوا ِدﻳًـﺎ‬in Quran (11:9:121) and ‫ ﻫَـﺎ ِدﻳًـﺎ‬in Quran(19:25:31).
The declension of this noun is explained below for both definite and
indefinite example.
Definite example
ِ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻘ‬is described as ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬by saying “It has hidden Dhammah on
‫ـﺎﺿــﻲ‬
ending ‫”ي‬.
ِ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻘ‬is described as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
‫ـﺎﺿ َــﻲ‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬by saying “It has visible Fatah on ending
‫”ي‬.
 248

ِ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻘ‬is described as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬by saying “It has hidden Kasrah on ending
‫ـﺎﺿــﻲ‬
‫”ي‬.
Indefinite example
ٍ َ‫ ﻗ‬is described as ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬by saying “It has hidden Dhammah on the
‫ـﺎض‬
dropped ‫”ي‬.
ِ َ‫ ﻗ‬is described as ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬by saying “It has visible Fatah on the visible
‫ـﺎﺿ ًــﻲ‬
‫”ي‬.
ٍ َ‫ ﻗ‬is described as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬by saying “It has hidden Kasrah on the
‫ـﺎض‬
dropped ‫”ي‬.
Understanding ‫ فَــا ِعــ ٌل‬for Naaqis verbs (Seq # 155
155)
This is the right place to understand the ‫ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬form for Naaqis verbs.
These nouns are Manqoos nouns nouns. Let us take the verb ‫ َد َع َو‬. Now the ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬
form will be ‫دَا ِﻋ ٌــﻮ‬. But as Kasrah is not compatible with ‫و‬, the ‫ و‬becomes
‫ ي‬and the noun looks like ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫دَا ِﻋ‬. Then it becomes ٍ‫دَاع‬. Other verbs with
their corresponding ‫ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬forms are given below (root verb,‫ ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬form).
(‫ﺗ ََـﻼ‬, ٍ‫)ﺗَـﺎل‬, (‫ﺷـ َﻜـﺎ‬,َ ‫ـﺎك‬
ٍ ‫)ﺷ‬, ٍ ‫) َﻋ‬, (‫ﺳـ َﻘــﻰ‬,َ ‫ـﺎق‬
َ (‫ َﻋـ َﻔـﺎ‬, ‫ـﺎف‬ َ (‫ﺧ َِـﺸ َــﻲ‬, ‫َـﺎش‬
ٍ ‫)ﺳ‬, ٍ ‫ )ﺧ‬etc.
Jazam for Demand (Seq # 156
156)
A sentence with ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬or negative ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬with ‫ ﻻ‬can come before a
verbal sentence in present tense. ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬or negative ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬is a demand
 249

ُ َ‫ــﻄـﻠ‬
(‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ‫ــﻄـﻠ‬
َّ ‫)اﻟ‬. The verbal sentence in present tense is called as ‫ـﺐ‬ َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬.
The verb in ‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ‫اﻟــﻄـﻠ‬
َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب‬becomes ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬.
Example
Visit the cave, you will find Mohammed.
ِ َ ‫ُز ِر ْاﻟ َﻜــﻬ َْـﻒ ﺗ‬
‫ــﺠ ْـﺪ ُﻣــ َﺤـ ّﻤـﺪً ا‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:16). The present
tense verb ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻨ ُـﺸ ْــﺮ‬got the jazam because it is preceded by the amr
statement ‫‘( ﻓَـ ْﺎ ۤٗوا ِا َﱃ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬْـ ِﻒ‬then seek refuge in the Cave’). Thus this
present tense verb ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻨ ُـﺸ ْــﺮ‬is ‫ــﻄـﻠ َـ ِﺐ‬ َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬.
Introduction to conditional sentences (Seq # 157
157)
The basic structure of conditional sentence is as shown below.
Conditional sentence = condition (‫)اﻟﺸ ْــﺮ ُط‬
َّ + answer to the condition ( ‫َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب‬
‫ـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬
َّ ‫)اﻟ‬
Few of the subsequent topics cover the details of conditional sentences.
 250

ْ َ‫( )ل‬Seq # 158

Particle of Unfulfilled condition (‫ــو‬ 158)
This particle is used to express unfulfilled condition in past. As the
condition did not happen in the past, something else did not happen. The
Jawaab sentence will take ‫ل‬. The literal meaning of ‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬is ‘if’.
Example
َ ‫ـﺖ اﻟْـ َﺒ‬
‫ـﺎب ﻟ َ َــﺮ َٔاﻳْـﺘَـ ِﻨــﻲ‬ َ ‫( ﻟ َ ْــﻮ ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬Had you opened the door, you would have seen
me).
This particle does not make the verb in Jawaab as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. If the Jawaab
sentence is negative, then ‫ ل‬of Jawaab sentence will be dropped.
Example
If I knew this, I would not have helped him.
ُ ‫ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻋـ ِﻠـ ْﻤ‬
َ َ ‫ـﺖ ٰﻫ َـﺬا َﻣـﺎ ﻧ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﺮﺗُـ ُﻪ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:77). The particle
‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬along with ‫ ل‬in the Jawaab sentence is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (16:18:109). The particle
‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬along with ‫ ل‬in the Jawaab sentence is present in this verse.
3) State TRUE or FALSE: If the Jawaab sentence is negative then ‫ ل‬of
Jawaab sentence will be dropped.
 251

Adverb ‫ إِ َذا‬with conditional meaning (Seq # 159

159)
59)
As we learnt, the word ‫ ا َذا‬is an adverb. This adverb has conditional
ِٕ
meaning. Its meaning is “when/if” in future. Mostly it is used with past
tense but meaning will be in future. Occasionally present tense is also
being used.
Example
If you see Mohammed in the cave, ask him.
ْ َ‫ـﺖ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـﺪً ا ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﻜــﻬ ِْـﻒ ﻓ‬
‫ـﺎﺳـﺎَٔﻟْـ ُﻪ‬ َ ْ‫ا َذا َر َٔاﻳ‬
ِٕ
The first part in the above statement is underlined. Note that in the above
example the second part (‫ـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬ َّ ‫ ) َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬takes the letter ‫ف‬. Quran
(1:2:117), Quran (2:2:186), Quran (2:2:198) and Quran (2:2:200) are some
other examples.
The word ْ‫ إِن‬and its sisters (Seq # 160
160)
Another important word representing condition (‫اﻟـﺸــ ْــﺮ ُط‬
َّ ) is ‫ا ْن‬. The
ِٕ
meaning of this word is “If”. It converts both the verbs present in
condition and answer to the condition as ‫ـــــــﺰ ْو ٌم‬
ُ ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ‬.

Example
ُ ْ‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ َٔاﻧ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﺮ‬ ُ ‫ا ْن ﺗَـ ْﻨ‬
ِٕ
 252

If you help, I help.

‫ ا ْن‬has below sisters which exactly acts like ‫ا ْن‬

ِٕ ِٕ
1) ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫( َﻣ‬he who)
Example ‫( َﻣ ْﻦ ﻳ َّـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ْٔا ُﻩ ﻳَـ ْﻔــﻬَـ ْﻤـ ُﻪ‬Who reads it, understands it). Another example
is the last part of the verse Quran (28:60:1).
2) ‫( َﻣـﺎ‬that which)
Examples: Quran (2:2:197) and Quran (4:3:115).
3) ‫( َﻣـﺘَــﻰ‬whenever)
Example: ‫( َﻣـﺘَــﻰ ﺗ َ َــﺮ َٔا َر‬Whenever you see, I see)
4) ‫ــﻦ‬َ ْ‫( َٔاﻳ‬wherever)
Example: ‫ــﻦ ﺗَــ ْﺠـ ِﻠ ْـﺲ َٔا ْﺟـ ِﻠ ْـﺲ‬
َ ْ‫( َٔاﻳ‬Wherever you sit, I sit)
‫ َﻣـﺎ‬is added to ‫ــﻦ‬َ ْ‫ َٔاﻳ‬often for emphasis. Refer to Quran (1:2:115).
5) ‫( َٔا ُّي‬whichever)
Example: ‫ــﺠ ْـﺪ ُﻩ ﻧ َـﺎْٔﺧ ُْـﺬ ُﻩ‬ ٍ َ‫( َٔا ُّي ِﻛـﺘ‬Whichever book we find, we take it)
ِ َ ‫ـﺎب ﻧ‬
6 ) ‫( َﻣــﻬْـ َﻤـﺎ‬whatever)
Examples: ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫( َﻣــﻬْـ َﻤـﺎ ﺗَـ ُﻘ‬Whatever you say, we do) and Quran
ْ ‫ـﻞ ﻧ َـ ْﻔـ َﻌ‬
(9:7:132).
 253

Verbs may come in past or present tense in both condition and answer to
condition. If the verb is in past tense then it will not change because it is
ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬. Only present tense verb changes to ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬.
‫ــﻲ‬
Note ‫( ا ْن َﺷـﺎ َء اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ُﻪ‬If Allah wishes).
Note:
ِٕ
Circumstances when Jawaab (answer to condition) takes ‫( ف‬Seq #
161
161)

Read and sing the following statement.

ْ َ ‫ِا ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ َو َﻃـﻠَـﺒِـﻴَـ ٌﺔ َو ﺑِــ َﺠـﺎ ِﻣ ْـﺪ َو ﺑِـ َﻤـﺎ َو ﻟ‬
‫ــﻦ َو ﺑِـ َﻘ ْـﺪ َو اﻟﺘَّـﻨْـ ِﻔـ ْﻴ ِـﺲ‬
The ‫ـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬ َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬will take ‫ َف‬in the following cases
1) If it is a nominal sentence (‫( )اﻟْــ ُﺠـ ْﻤـﻠَـ ُﺔ اﻟْـﺎ ْﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻴـ ُﺔ‬Example: Last part of
the verse Quran (4:3:94)). ِٕ
2) If it is a ‫ َﻃـﻠَـﺒِـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬. This includes imperative tense, prohibitive ‫ ﻻ‬and
question.
3) If it is a Jaamid verb like ‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬.
4) If it is ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬.
5) If it is ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ َ ‫( ﻟ‬Example: Quran (4:3:115) and Quran (4:3:144)).
6) If it is ‫( ﻗَ ْـﺪ‬Example: Last part of Quran (28:60:1)).
7) If it is ‫اﻟﺘَّـﻨْـ ِﻔـ ْﻴ ُـﺲ‬. It is future tense having ‫ س‬or ‫ﺳ ْــﻮ َف‬.َ
 254

In all the above cases ‫ َف‬will come in ‫ـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬ َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬and the verb present in
‫ـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬ َّ ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬will not be ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. Arabic grammatical description in such a
case is to say ‘the whole ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب اﻟْ َّـﺸ ْــﺮ ِط‬is in the place of jazm ( ‫ِﻓ ْــﻲ َﻣــ َﺤـ ِ ّﻞ‬
‫’)اﻟْــ َﺠ ْــﺰ ِم‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the complete verse Quran (16:18:87).
The conditional word ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ْ‫َﺟــﻮ ُاب اﻟ‬
ْ ‫ َﻣ‬is present in this verse and as ‫ـﺸـ ْـﺮ ِط‬
has ‫ َﺳ ْــﻮ َف‬the word ‫ َف‬is also present.
( ‫( )لَــ ﱠم‬Seq # 16
When (‫ــا‬ 162)
We learnt in one of the earlier topics about the word ‫ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬. There its
meaning was ‘not yet’. Another meaning of ‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬is ‘when’. This ‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬is
called as ‫ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ اﻟْــ ِﺤـ ْﻴـ ِﻨـﻴَّـ ُﺔ‬. The verb after it and its Jawaab should be in past
tense.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verses Quran (15:18:59), Quran
(15:18:61) and Quran (15:18:62). The word ‫( ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬when) is present in
these verses.
 255

about َ‫أ ُ ْو ٰلــئِــك‬,, ‫ تِــ ْلــ َك‬and ‫( ٰذلــِ َك‬Seq # 163

A word about 163)
The ‫ ك‬in the above given words can be replaced optionally by ‫ك‬,ِ ‫ ُﻛ ْـﻢ‬, ‫ُﻛـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َّ ‫ ُﻛ‬to whom it is being addressed (addressing to personal pronouns).
and ‫ــﻦ‬
Refer to the Quran verses: Quran (1:2:49), Quran (1:2:54), Quran (5:4:91)
and Quran (8:7:22).
A word about ْ‫( لَــ ِكــن‬Seq # 164
164)
We know that ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ٰﻟـ ِﻜ‬is the sister of ‫ ا َّن‬and the meaning of ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ٰﻟـ ِﻜ‬is ‘but’. The
ٰ ِٕ
word ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ
ْ ‫( ﻟـﻜ‬without tashdeed) is the lighter form of ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ٰﻟـ ِﻜ‬. The word ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ٰﻟـ ِﻜ‬
does not make the subject ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ْ ‫ ٰﻟـ ِﻜ‬can also appear in the verbal
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
sentences. For examples refer to Quran verses: Quran (1:2:13), Quran
(6:4:162), Quran (6:4:166) and Quran (10:9:88).
A word about ‫( إِﻧﱠــ َمــا‬Seq # 165
165)
The meaning of the word ‫ اﻧ َّـ َﻤـﺎ‬is “only”. It is ‫ ا َّن‬plus ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬. This ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬is called as
ُ‫( َﻣـﺎ اﻟْـ َﻜـﺎﻓَّـﺔ‬preventive ‫) َﻣـﺎ‬. ِٕ This ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬prevents ِٕ
‫ ا َّن‬from making the
ِٕ
coming/following noun as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُْ ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. ‫ اﻧ َّـ َﻤـﺎ‬can also come in verbal sentences.
ِٕ
For examples refer to Quran verses: Quran (1:2:11), Quran (1:2:14), Quran
(7:5:90), Quran (7:5:91), Quran (8:6:156) and Quran (11:10:20).
Exercises
 256

1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the complete verse Quran (16:18:110).

The word ‫ اﻧ َّـ َﻤـﺎ‬is not present in this verse.
ِٕ
ْ َ‫( ) َو ل‬Seq # 166
Even if (‫ــو‬ 166)
‘Even if’ is the translation of the Arabic phrase ‘‫’و ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬.
َ Understanding this
phrase depends on the context of the sentence. A past tense verb comes
after ‫ َو ﻟ َ ْــﻮ‬but its meaning will be in present tense. Refer to Quran verses:
Quran (16:18:109) and Quran (5:4:78).
Masdar muawwal (II) (Seq # 167
167)
We know that Masdar muawwal is defined by the following equation.
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب = َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬ ِ َ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ُﻣــﻀ‬+ ‫َٔا ْن‬
ُ ْ‫ـﺎر ٌع َﻣـﻨ‬
There is another type of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬which is constructed as ‫ َٔا َّن‬and its ‫ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬
and ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬.
Example
‫ َٔا َّن ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ َا ْﺟ ًﺮا َﺣ َﺴـﻨًﺎ‬is a Masdar muawwal (II) present in the verse Quran
(15:18:2). ‫ َا ْﺟ ًﺮا‬is the ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬of ‫ َٔا َّن‬and ‫ ﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬is the advanced ‫ ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬of ‫ َٔا َّن‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: There are two ‫( َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬II) present in the
verse Quran (15:18:21).
 257

“But for/Because
for/Because of” ْ َ‫( )ل‬Seq # 168
of” (‫ــو َال‬ 168)
This is a single word and its meaning is “but for/Because of”. In a broader
sense it means “If not”. One can derive meanings of this particle based on
the context. This particle is called as ‫ َﺣ ْــﺮ ُف ِا ْﻣـ ِﺘـﻨَـﺎعٍ ِﻟ ُــﻮ ُﺟ ْــﻮ ٍد‬. This word
signifies that something failed to happen because of another. To
understand this particle we should see the second thing first. The second
thing failed because of first thing. After ‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻻ‬a noun comes and it is ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬.
‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬of ‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻻ‬is always omitted and is ‫ َﻣ ْــﻮ ُﺟ ْــﻮ ٌد‬. The second sentence is
called as ‫ َﺟ َــﻮ ُاب ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻻ‬and is always a verbal sentence. If this verbal sentence
is affirmative then this verbal sentence takes ‫ ل‬and if this verbal sentence is
negative then it does not take ‫ل‬.
Consider a statement “And if Allah did not check one set of people by
means of another, the earth would indeed be full of mischief.” The second
statement failed to happen because of the first statement. This example is
from the verse Quran (2:2:251). One more example is Quran (1:2:64).
Note: Sometimes the meaning of particle ‫ ﻟ َ ْــﻮ َﻻ‬is “Why not”. Example is
Quran (1:2:118).
 258

Negative Laam for entire genus (‫)ال‬

( ) (Seq # 169
169)
69)
In Arabic language there exist a ‫ ﻻ‬which negates the entire genus. This ‫ ﻻ‬is
ِ ْ‫ﻻ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻓـﻴَـ ُﺔ ِﻟـﻠ‬. The definition of the word genus in English is
called as ‫ــﺠـ ْﻨـ ِﺲ‬
like a race, or family or kind etc. Let us take two examples as below.
Book: Note book, text book, dairy etc are kind of objects which can be
named as book or comes under the category of ‘book’.
Pen: Ball pen, ink pen, sketch pen, pencil etc are the kind of objects which
can be named as pen or comes under the category of ‘pen’.
The ‫ــﺠـﻨْ ِـﺲ‬ ِ ْ‫ ﻻ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻓـ َﻴـ ُﺔ ِﻟـﻠ‬takes ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬. The ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬should always
be indefinite and ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬should be indefinite if it is one word. The ‫ﻻ‬
‫ــﺠـﻨْ ِـﺲ‬ ِ ْ‫ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻓـ َﻴـ ُﺔ ِﻟـﻠ‬makes its ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬as ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬with single Fatah ending.
Thus the statement ‫ـﺎب ِﻋـﻨْـ ِﺪي‬ َ َ‫ ﻻ ِﻛـﺘ‬means “I don’t have any kind of book,
whatsoever”. Thus it is negating the entire category of ‘book’. As another
example, the statement ‫ ﻻ ﻗَـﻠَ َـﻢ ِﻋـﻨْـ ِﺪي‬means “I don’t have any kind of pen,
whatsoever”. Thus it is negating the entire category of ‘pen’. Sometimes its
‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬is dropped or hidden. Few other examples are given in below table.
English statement Arabic statement
No power is for us/
There is no power for ‫ﻻ َﻃـﺎﻗَـ َﺔ ﻟَـﻨَـﺎ‬
us.
 259

There is nobody in ِ ‫ﻻ َٔا َﺣـﺪَ ِﻓــﻲ اﻟْـ َﺒـ ْﻴ‬

‫ـﺖ‬
the house.
No one is absent. ٌ ِ‫ﻻ َٔا َﺣـﺪَ ﻏَـﺎﺋ‬
‫ـﺐ‬
There is no key for
ِ ‫ـﺎح ِﻟـﻠْـ َﺒ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ َ َ ‫ﻻ ِﻣـ ْﻔـﺘ‬
the door.
No cash is with us. ‫ﻻ ﻧ ُـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ َد َﻣـ َﻌـﻨَـﺎ‬
There is no doubt in
‫ـﺐ ِﻓـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
َ ْ ‫ﻻ َرﻳ‬
it.
Refer to Quran verses: Quran (2:2:197) and Quran (3:2:256) for more
examples.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read carefully the verse Quran (15:18:39).
The ‫ ﻻ‬in the phrase ‫ ﻻ ُﻗ َّــﻮ َة‬is negative Laam for entire genus.
ِ ‫ســ ُم ا ْلــفَــا ِع‬
Intensive form for ‫ــل‬ ْ ِ‫( ا‬Seq # 170
170)
There are 5 patterns of intensive form for the doer in Arabic language.
These patterns convey the message of continuity of action. These patterns
are called as ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِﺻـ َﻴـ ُﻎ ُﻣـ َﺒـﺎﻟَـﻐَـ ِﺔ ِا ْﺳـ ِﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬patterns representing intensity in the
doer form). Those are as below with examples in the format (Normal doer
form, Intensive form, meaning)
a) ‫ﻓَـ َّﻌـﺎ ٌل‬
 260

(‫ﻏَـﺎ ِﻓ ٌــﺮ‬, ‫ـﺎر‬ٌ َّ‫ﻏَـﻔ‬, One who forgives much)

(‫ َر ِاز ٌق‬, ‫ر َّز ٌاق‬,َ One who provides much)
(‫ﻓَـﺎﺋِ ٌــﺰ‬, ‫ﻓَ َّــﻮ ٌاز‬, One who is most successful)
b) ‫ﻓَـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ‬
(‫ َﻋـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ َﻋـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬, One who knows much)
(‫ﺳـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﻊ‬,َ ‫ﺳـ ِﻤـ ْﻴـ ٌﻊ‬,َ One who listens much)
c) ‫ﻓَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل‬
(‫ﻏَـﺎ ِﻓ ٌــﺮ‬, ‫ﻏَـ ُﻔ ْــﻮ ٌر‬, One who forgives much)
(‫ﺷـﺎ ِﻛ ٌــﺮ‬,َ ‫ﺷـ ُﻜ ْــﻮ ٌر‬,َ One who thanks much)
d) ‫ﻓَـ ِﻌـ ٌﻞ‬
(‫ َﺣـﺎ ِذ ٌر‬, ‫ َﺣـ ِﺬ ٌر‬, One who is very cautious)
e) ‫ِﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬
(‫ َﻋـﺎ ِﻃــ ٌﺊ‬, ‫ــﻄـﺎ ٌء‬َ ‫ ِﻣـ ْﻌ‬, One who gives much)

ْ ِ‫ ف‬with the verb ‫( َد َخــ َل‬Seq # 171

Usage of preposition ‫ــي‬ 171)
While entering into physical place like mosque or house we should not use
the preposition ‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬. But while entering into a conceptual/logical place like
religion, people etc then we should use the preposition ‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬.
Examples with ‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ‬are the verses Quran (30:110:2) and Quran (27:49:14).
 261

Example for both the cases are the verses Quran (30:89:29) and Quran
(30:89:30).
Meaning of surprise by ‫( اِ َذا‬Seq # 172
172)
Surprise is being expressed by ‫ ِا َذا‬. It is called as ‫ ِا َذا اﻟْـ ُﻔــ َﺠـﺎﺋِـﻴَّـ ُﺔ‬. Two things
about this ‫ ِا َذا‬is
a) ‫ َف‬is usually prefixed.
b) ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬occurring after this ‫ ِا َذا‬of surprise may be indefinite.
Quran (9:7:107), Quran (9:7:108) and Quran (16:20:20) use the ‫ ِا َذا‬of
surprise.
Two objects for ‫ــن‬
‫ظ ﱠ‬ َ (Seq # 173
173)
The verb ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ َﻇ‬takes two objects which are ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬. Example is
below.
ٌ ْ‫ـﺎن ﻗَــ ِﺮﻳ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫( ْ ِاﻻ ْﻣـ ِﺘــ َﺤ‬the examination is near)
َ ‫ــﻦ ْ ِاﻻ ْﻣـ ِﺘــ َﺤ‬
‫ـﺎن ﻗَــ ِﺮﻳْـ ًﺒـﺎ‬ ُّ ‫( َٔا ُﻇ‬I think, the examination is near)
َّ ‫ َﻇ‬may be followed by ‫ ا َّن‬or ‫ َٔا ْن‬as present in Quran (24:41:22)
The verb ‫ــﻦ‬
ِٕ
and Quran (15:18:35).
A word about the verb ‫( َجــ َعــ َل‬Seq # 174
174)
This verb has four meanings
 262

a) To cause something (object1) to be something (object2) or to become

something. In this case it needs two objects. Refer to the verse Quran
(1:2:22).
b) To think, to consider or to deem something. In this case also it needs
two objects.
c) To make or to create. In this case it only needs one object.
d) To begin. In this case it needs ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ٌﻢ‬and ‫ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬. Example is ‫َﺟـ َﻌـ َﻞ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ‬
‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮﺑُـ ِﻨ ْــﻲ‬. Translation is Haamid began beating me.
Partitive ْ‫( ِمــن‬Seq # 175
175)
If you are offering someone to eat whole thing then say ‫ـﻞ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬ ْ ‫ ُﻛ‬. If you are
offering only to eat part of something then use ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬as in the statement ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ُﻛ‬
ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬. In the verse Quran (1:2:3) ‫ َﻣـﺎ( ِﻣـ َّﻤـﺎ‬+‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬ ْ ‫ ) ِﻣ‬the ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬is partitive ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
signifying the part of the provisioning. In the verse Quran (1:2:8) the
Arabic text ‫ـﺎس‬ َ ‫ ِﻣ‬means ‘some people from the whole mankind’.
ِ َّ ‫ــﻦ اﻟـﻨ‬
Revisiting the badal concept (differentiating pronoun) (Seq (Seq # 176 176)
‘This is a book’ is ‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا ِﻛـﺘ‬. ‘This is the book’ is ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬. But the
listener may understand the second statement as ‘This book’ and waiting
for the ‫( ﺧَـ َﺒ ٌــﺮ‬information about it). To avoid such confusion or ambiguity
it is needed to insert an appropriate pronoun between ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬and ‫اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬.
This pronoun is called as differentiating pronoun (‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫)ﺿَ ـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ اﻟْـ َﻔ ْــﺼ‬. So the
second statement will become as ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ُــﻮ اﻟْـ ِﻜـﺘ‬
َ ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا ﻫ‬.
 263

This also happens when the ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬is a proper noun and ‫ اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬is an
adjective or a noun with ‫ َا ْل‬. Example is below.
َّ ْ‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ اﻟ‬.
ُ ‫ــﻄـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
‫ـﺐ‬
The above statement may mean ‘Haamid the doctor’ or ‘Haamid is the
doctor’. In order to avoid such confusion we have to insert differentiating
pronoun if we mean ‘Haamid is the doctor’ as below.
ُ ‫ــﻄـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
‫ـﺐ‬ َ ‫َﺣـﺎ ِﻣـ ٌﺪ ﻫ‬
َّ ‫ُــﻮ اﻟ‬
The use of differentiating pronoun is not mandatory. If there is no
confusion then it can be ignored. Quran (1:2:5), Quran (2:2:157) and
Quran (27:57:12) are few examples with differentiating pronouns. Quran
(7:5:119), Quran (28:64:9) are few examples without differentiating
pronouns.
Attached and Separate/detached pronouns (Seq # 177
177)
We have already learnt that pronouns are of two types: attached or
separate/detached. Let us discuss these types once again to have
understanding of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬cases under them.
Attached pronouns
a) ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case of attached pronouns appear as doer of the verb
which is always ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬. Example: The letter ‫ ا‬in ‫ َذﻫَـ َﺒـﺎ‬is an attached
 264

pronoun in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case. The letter ‫ َت‬in ‫ـﺖ‬َ ‫ َذﻫَـ ْﺒ‬is an attached pronoun
in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case.
b) ‫ َﻣـﻨْـ ُـﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case
The ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case of attached pronouns appear as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬or when
joined with ‫ ا َّن‬and its sisters. Example: The ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬in the words ‫َﺳـﺎَٔﻟَــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬
ِٕ
and ‫ اﻧَّــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬is an attached pronoun in ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬case.
ِٕ
c) ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case
The ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case of attached pronouns appear when joined with any
preposition or when it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. Examples: (1) The ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬in the word
ِٕ
‫ ِﻣـ ْﻨــﻬُـ ْﻢ‬is an attached pronoun and it is in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case, (2) The ‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬in the
word ‫ ِﻛ َﺘﺎﲠُ ُ ْﻢ‬is an attached pronoun and it is in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case.
Separate/Detached pronouns
a) ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case of separate pronouns appears as an atomic word: ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ﻫ‬,
‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬etc.
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬case
b) ‫ــﺼـ ْـﻮ ٌب‬
This form has never been introduced before. If we need to have
separate pronouns under ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case then these have to be
composed with the word ‫اﻳَّـﺎ‬. Example: ‫اﻳَّـﺎ ُﻩ‬, ‫اﻳَّـﺎﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ اﻳَّـﺎﻫ ُْـﻢ‬etc. However
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ
 265

this ‫ َﻣـﻨْــ ُﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case should be used under some conditions which will
be discussed in the next topic.
c) ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــ ُﺮ ْو ٌر‬case
This form does not exist.
Note: As Ya-Mutakallim gets Fatah if a ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬with sukoon comes before it,
‫ ْي‬+‫ اﻳَّـﺎ‬becomes ‫ـﺎي‬ َ َّ ‫اﻳ‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
Usage of separate pronouns (‫ب‬
ٌ ‫ــو‬
ْ ‫ص‬ ُ ‫ َمــ ْنــ‬case) (Seq # 178
178)
In the following conditions the usage of separate pronouns (‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬case)
is possible.
1) If the pronoun is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬and is preceded before the verb. For
example instead of َ‫( ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ُﺒـﺪُ ك‬We worship you) we can say ُ‫“ اﻳ َّـﺎكَ ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ُﺒـﺪ‬It
ِٕ
is to you that we worship” as present in Quran (1:1:5). Other
examples are Quran (2:2:172) and Quran (11:10:28).
2) Suppose we say ‘I saw you and him’. Here we can say ‫ـﻚ َو اﻳَّـﺎ ُﻩ‬ َ ‫ َر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘ‬. We
َ ُ َ ِٕ
cannot say ‫ر َٔاﻳْـ ُﺘـﻚ َو ُه‬.َ Phrase ‫ ﻳُــﺨْــ ِﺮ ُﺟ ْــﻮ َن اﻟ َّــﺮ ُﺳ ْــﻮل َو اﻳ ّ َـﺎﻛ ْـﻢ‬is an example
ِٕ
from the verse Quran (28:60:1).
3) If it occurs after َّ‫اﻻ‬. Quran verse Quran (15:17:67) is an example.
ِٕ
4) There are some verbs which needs two ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬. Under such
condition you cannot join these two ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬together to the verb.
For example if we say ‘I gave it to him’ then we cannot say ‫ْــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﺘــﻬُــﻬَـﺎ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻋ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﻋ‬is a verb and it is discussed in a later topic). This is not
(‫ْــﻄــﻰ‬
 266

correct. Under such circumstance we should say ‫ْــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ ُﻪ اﻳَّـﺎﻫَـﺎ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻋ‬. If we
ِٕ
observe the above case then both ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬are of third person. But if
one ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬is in third person and second ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬is in second
person then we can use both attached and detached pronoun as
‫ْــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﺘـ َﻜـ ُﻪ‬
َ ‫ َٔاﻋ‬or ‫ـﻚ اﻳَّـﺎ ُﻩ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻋ‬. But usage of detached pronouns is
َ ‫ْــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﺘ‬
ِٕ
recommended.
5) If it is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬for the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the verb. Example is ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ ِزﻳ َ َـﺎر َة‬
ِ َ‫ﻧ َـﻨْـﺘ‬
‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ِﺪﻳْــ ِﺮ اﻳَّـﺎﻧ َـﺎ‬. Its translation is “We are waiting for the manager’s visit
ِٕ
to us”. Here ‫ اﻳَّـﺎﻧ َـﺎ‬is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬for the Masdar ‫زﻳ َ َـﺎر َة‬.ِ
ِٕ
Introduction to Mazeed (‫ ))ا ْلــ َمــ ِز ْيــ ُد‬verbs (Seq # 179
179)
79)
We have learnt the verbs with three letters. These verbs are called as
ُ ‫)اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌ‬.
triliteral verbs (‫ـﻞ اﻟـﺜ َُّـﻼﺛِــﻲ‬
There are few verbs which consist of four letters like for example ‫( ﺗ َْــﺮ َﺟ َـﻢ‬he
translated), ‫( ﺑ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻞ‬he said bismillah). Verbs containing 4 letters are called
as four letter verbs (‫ــﻲ‬ ُّ ‫ـﻞ اﻟْ ُّــﺮﺑَـﺎ ِﻋ‬
ُ ‫)اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌ‬. Four letter verbs are very few and
these verbs are discussed in later topics.
Broadly, a verb is classified as Mujarrad (‫ )اﻟْـ ُﻤــ َﺠ َّــﺮ ُد‬or Mazeed ( ُ‫)اﻟْـ َﻤــ ِﺰﻳْـﺪ‬.
Original three letter verbs like ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬, ‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
َ َ ‫ ﻧ‬and original four letter verbs like
‫ﺗ َْــﺮ َﺟ َـﻢ‬, ‫ َزﻟْ َــﺰ َل‬comes under ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤــ َﺠ َّــﺮ ُد‬. Under Mujarrad category no extra letters
are added to change the meaning of the verb. In Mazeed verbs one or
more letters are added to the base three or four letters to change the
 267

meaning of the verb. Each of such additions (modifications) is again

treated as a separate form called as baab (‫ـﺎب‬ ُ ‫)اﻟْـ َﺒ‬. In the next topics we will
try to understand these Baabs. One of the specialties of Mazeed verbs is
that, they have fixed pattern of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬. This is not the case of Mujarrad
verbs, where there is no fixed pattern.
Some general rules for understanding Mazeed verbs (Seq # 180
180)
80)
1) In all the Mazeed verbs if the verb is of four letter then present tense
first letter (sign of present tense) will take Dhammah.
2) All the Baabs of Mazeed verbs have a fixed pattern of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬.
3) The ‫ ) َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬is same as ‫ـﻞ‬
ِ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬except the second
letter (the original ‫ ) َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ ع‬takes Fatah instead of Kasrah.
4) The noun of place and time is same as ‫) َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬.
Form-II (‫ــل‬
Form- ِ ‫ــاب تَــ ْف‬
ٍ ‫ــعــ ْي‬ ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 181
181)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now adding another ‫ ع‬letter between ‫ َف‬and ‫ َع‬. So the below are the
resulting boxes.
‫َف ْع َع َل‬
ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬
Thus the form becomes ‫ﻓَـ َّﻌـ َﻞ‬. This is also called as Form-II or ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬.
 268

َ َّ‫ﺳـﺒ‬.َ Its meaning is ‘He glorified’.

Let us discuss one important verb ‫ــﺢ‬
The past tense conjugation of this verb is ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َّ‫ﺳـﺒ‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ َﺤـﺎ‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ُﺤ ْــﻮا‬,َ ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ َﺤ‬,َ
‫ﺳـﺒَّــ َﺤـﺘَـﺎ‬,َ ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ َﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤ‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬,َ ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤ‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,َ ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤـ ُﺘ‬,َ
‫ـﺖ‬ُ ‫ َﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤ‬and ‫ﺳـﺒَّــ ْﺤـﻨَـﺎ‬.َ
Let us learn present tense “Five in pocket group” conjugation of this verb.
As a general rule if the verb is of four letters then sign of present tense (‫ي‬,
‫ت‬, ‫ ٔا‬and ‫ )ن‬takes Dhammah. The second letter takes sukoon, the third
letter takes Kasrah and the last letter takes the case ending (‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬,
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and ‫) َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. So the “Five in pocket group” for the verb ‫ــﺢ‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ َ َّ‫ َﺳـﺒ‬are
ُ ّ‫ﻳُ َـﺴـﺒ‬, ‫ِــﺢ‬
‫ِــﺢ‬ ُ ّ‫ﺗ َُـﺴـﺒ‬, ‫ِــﺢ‬ ُ ّ‫ ُٔا َﺳـﺒ‬and ‫ِــﺢ‬
ُ ّ‫ﺗ َُـﺴـﺒ‬, ‫ِــﺢ‬ ُ ّ‫ﻧ ُ َـﺴـﺒ‬.
The verbs in “Mabni group” are as follows.
َ ‫ َن = ﻳُ َـﺴـﺒِّــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ِــﺢ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ّ‫ـﺴـﺒ‬ َ ُ‫ﻳ‬
َ ‫ َن = ﺗُـ َﺴـﺒِّــ ْﺤ‬+ ‫ِــﺢ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ّ‫ـﺴـﺒ‬ َ ُ‫ﺗ‬
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻳُ َـﺴـﺒِّــ َﺤ‬, ‫ﻳُ َـﺴـﺒِّــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ﺗ َُـﺴـﺒِّــ َﺤ‬,
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ﺗ َُـﺴـﺒِّــ ِﺤـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﺗُ َـﺴـﺒِّــ َﺤ‬, ‫ﺗ َُـﺴـﺒِّــ ُﺤ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺴـﺒِّــ َﺤ‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form is very simple. Just remove the first letter of present
tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ‫ِــﺢ‬ ْ ّ‫ﺳـﺒ‬.َ
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this baab is on the pattern ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ‬. That is the reason
this baab is also called as ‫ـﻞ‬ ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬
ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the verb ‫ــﺢ‬ َ َّ‫ َﺳـﺒ‬is
‫ــﺢ‬ ٌ ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬. There is an exception to this pattern. If the verb is ‫ــﺺ‬ ُ ‫ اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ‬verb or
 269

if the verb has Hamza (‫ ) ٔا‬as Laam kalimah then the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬pattern is
‫ﺗَـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬. Three examples are ‫رﺑَّــﻲ‬,َ ‫( ﺗ َْــﺮﺑ ِـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬He brought up, nurturing /
upbringing), ‫و َّﺻــﻲ‬,َ ‫( ﺗ َْــﻮ ِﺻـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬to make a will, ‘making will’, refer to Quran
(23:36:50)) and َٔ‫ﻫَـﻨَّـﺎ‬, ‫( ﺗَــﻬْـ ِﻨـﺌَـ ٌﺔ‬He congratulated, ‘congratulation’).
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ِــﺢ‬
ُ ّ‫ ﻳُ َـﺴـﺒ‬to ‫م‬. It
will become ‫ِــﺢ‬ ٌ ّ‫( ُﻣ َـﺴـﺒ‬one who is glorifying).
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ــﺢ‬ ٌ َّ‫ ُﻣ َـﺴـﺒ‬.
Similarly the below few verbs in the format (root verb, present tense
masculine singular form, doer, Mafoolun bihi, Masdar, meaning) comes
under this Baab. Reader is recommended to practice these verbs as much
as possible. This list is arranged 5 verbs per day.
Day # 1
(‫ﻧ َ َّــﺰ َل‬, ‫ﻳُـﻨَ ّ ِــﺰ ُل‬, ‫ ُﻣـﻨَ ّ ِــﺰ ٌل‬, ‫ ُﻣـﻨَ َّــﺰ ٌل‬,‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﺰﻳْـ ٌﻞ‬, He came down),
(‫ـﺸ َــﺮ‬ َّ َ ‫ﺑ‬,‫ـﺸ ُــﺮ‬ ّ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺸ ٌــﺮ‬ َّ ‫ ُﻣـ َﺒ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﺒ ِـﺸـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬, He gave glad tidings (news)),
ّ ِ ‫ ُﻣـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺸ ٌــﺮ‬
(‫ﺳ َّــﻮى‬,َ ‫ﻳُ َـﺴ ِّــﻮي‬, ‫ ُﻣ َـﺴ ٍّــﻮ‬, ‫ ُﻣ َـﺴ ًّــﻮى‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴــ ِﻮﻳَـ ٌﺔ‬, to fashion),
(‫ َﻋـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬, ‫ﻳُـ َﻌـ ِﻠ ّـ ُﻢ‬, ‫ ُﻣـ َﻌـ ِﻠ ّـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ ُﻣـ َﻌـﻠَّـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬, He taught),
ٌ ْ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ِﺬﻳ‬, He denied),
(‫ َﻛـ َّﺬ َب‬, ‫ﻳُـ َﻜـ ِّﺬ ُب‬, ‫ ُﻣـ َﻜـ ِّﺬ ٌب‬, ‫ ُﻣـ َﻜـ َّﺬ ٌب‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
Day # 2
 ‫‪270‬‬

‫ــﺞ ‪,‬ﻳُـﻨَــ ِ ّﺠــﻰ ‪,‬ﻧَــ َّﺠــﻰ(‬ ‫ــﺠـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨَــ ًّﺠــﻰ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨَ ّ ٍ‬ ‫‪, to save),‬ﺗَـﻨْ ِ‬
‫‪, to turn back),‬ﺗ َْــﻮ ِﻟـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َــﻮ ًّﱄ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َــﻮ ٍ ّل ‪,‬ﻳُ َــﻮ ِﻟ ّــﻲ َ‪,‬وﻟَّــﻰ(‬
‫‪, He changed),‬ﺗَـ ْﺒـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﺒـ َّﺪ ٌل ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﺒـ ِّﺪ ٌل ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﺒ ِّـﺪ ُل ‪,‬ﺑَـ َّﺪ َل(‬
‫‪, to send after/(follow up)),‬ﺗَـ ْﻘـ ِﻔـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘـﻔًّــﻰ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘ ٍّـﻒ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻘـ ِﻔّــﻰ ‪,‬ﻗَـﻔَّــﻰ(‬
‫‪, He differentiated),‬ﺗَـ ْﻔــ ِﺮﻳْ ٌ‬
‫ــﻖ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔ َّــﺮ ٌق ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔ ّ ِــﺮ ٌق ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻔ ّ ِــﺮ ُق ‪,‬ﻓَ َّــﺮ َق(‬
‫‪Day # 3‬‬
‫‪, He‬ﺗَــ ْﺤـ ِﻤـ ْﻴـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤـ ِّﻤـ ٌﺪ ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺤـ ِّﻤـﺪُ ‪َ ,‬ﺣـ َّﻤـﺪَ (‬
‫‪He praised much),‬‬
‫‪much),‬‬
‫‪, He gave/placed),‬ﺗ َْـﺴــ ِﺨـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺴــﺨ ٌَّــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺴــ ِّﺨ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬ﻳُ َـﺴــ ِّﺨ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ﺳــﺨ ََّــﺮ(‬
‫ـﺐ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌـ َّﺬ ٌب ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌـ ِّﺬ ٌب‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻌـ ِّﺬ ُب ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ َّﺬ َب(‬ ‫‪, He punished),‬ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﺬﻳْ ٌ‬
‫‪, He sent forward),‬ﺗَـ ْﻘـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﻢ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘـ َّﺪ ٌم ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘ ِّـﺪ ٌم ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻘ ِّـﺪ ُم ‪,‬ﻗَـ َّﺪ َم(‬
‫‪, He got loaded),‬ﺗَــ ْﺤـ ِﻤـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤـ ِّﻤـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺤـ ِّﻤـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﺣـ َّﻤـ َﻞ(‬
‫‪Day # 4‬‬
‫ــﺼـ ِﻠ ّــﻲ َ‪,‬ﺻـﻠَّــﻰ(‬ ‫ــﺼـ ٍ ّﻞ ‪,‬ﻳُ َ‬‫ــﺼـﻠ ًّــﻲ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫‪, he prayed/to send blessings) (Note‬ﺗ َْــﺼـ ِﻠـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫‪Note1‬‬
‫‪Note1:‬‬
‫‪.‬ص ل و ‪original root is‬‬ ‫ــﺺ ‪. This verb is‬ص‬ ‫‪).‬اﻟـﻨَّـﺎ ِﻗ ُ‬ ‫ــﺼـ ٍ ّﻞ ‪Note2:‬‬
‫‪ (Note2:‬اﻟـ‬ ‫‪ُ is a manqoos‬ﻣ َ‬
‫‪).‬ل ‪ is shifted to‬ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ ‪ is dropped and‬ي ‪noun so the ending‬‬
‫ــﺼ ِّــﻮ ُر َ‪,‬ﺻ َّــﻮ َر(‬
‫ــﺼ ِّــﻮ ٌر ‪,‬ﻳُ َ‬
‫ــﺼ َّــﻮ ٌر ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬
‫‪, He prepared picture),‬ﺗ َْــﺼــ ِﻮﻳْ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬
‫ــﻄ ٌﻊ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻘ ِّ‬
‫ــﻄ ُﻊ ‪,‬ﻗَ َّ‬
‫ــﻄ َﻊ(‬ ‫ــﻄ ٌﻊ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘ ِّ‬ ‫‪, He cut),‬ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِ‬
‫ــﻄ ْﻴـ ٌﻊ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘ َّ‬
 ‫‪271‬‬

‫‪, He gave pain),‬ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ِﻠ ْﻴ ٌـﻒ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻜـﻠ َّ ٌﻒ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻜـ ِﻠ ّ ٌﻒ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻜـ ِﻠ ّـ ُﻒ ‪َ ,‬ﻛـﻠ َّـ َﻒ(‬
‫‪, He counted),‬ﺗَـ ْﻌـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌـ َّﺪ ٌد ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌـ ِّﺪ ٌد ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻌ ِّـﺪ ُد ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ َّﺪ َد(‬
‫‪Day # 5‬‬
‫‪, He elongated),‬ﺗَـ ْﻤـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻤـ َّﺪ ٌد ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻤ ِّـﺪ ٌد ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻤ ِّـﺪ ُد ‪َ ,‬ﻣـ َّﺪ َد(‬
‫ــﻦ ‪َ ,‬ﻣـﻜَّ َ‬
‫ــﻦ(‬ ‫‪, He established),‬ﺗَـ ْﻤـ ِﻜـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻤـﻜَّــ ٌﻦ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻤـ ِﻜّــ ٌﻦ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻤـ ِﻜّ ُ‬
‫ــﺼ ّ ِــﺮ ُف َ‪,‬ﺻ َّــﺮ َف(‬‫ــﺼ ّ ِــﺮ ٌف ‪,‬ﻳُ َ‬
‫ــﺼ َّــﺮ ٌف ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬
‫‪, He explained),‬ﺗ َْــﺼــ ِﺮﻳْ ٌـﻒ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬
‫ـﺐ ‪,‬ﻗَـﻠ َّ َ‬
‫ـﺐ(‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻘـ ِﻠ ّ ُ‬
‫ـﺐ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻘَـ ِﻠ ّ ٌ‬
‫ـﺐ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻘـﻠ َّ ٌ‬
‫‪, He turned),‬ﺗَـ ْﻘـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ ٌ‬
‫‪, He caused to gush forth),‬ﺗَـ ْﻔ ِ‬
‫ــﺠـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔــ َّﺠ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔــ ِ ّﺠ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻔــ ِ ّﺠ ُــﺮ ‪,‬ﻓَــ َّﺠ َــﺮ(‬
‫‪Day # 6‬‬
‫‪, He caused to move),‬ﺗ َْـﺴـﻴِـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺴـﻴَّ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺴـﻴّــِ ٌﺮ ‪,‬ﻳُ َـﺴـﻴّــِ ُﺮ َ‪,‬ﺳـﻴَّ َــﺮ(‬
‫‪, He reminded),‬ﺗ َْـﺬ ِﻛـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺬﻛَّ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﺬ ِﻛّ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬ﻳُ َـﺬ ِﻛّ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ذﻛَّ َــﺮ(‬
‫ــﺠـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌــ َّﺠـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻌــ ِ ّﺠـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻌــ ِ ّﺠـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻋــ َّﺠـ َﻞ(‬
‫‪, He hastened),‬ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِ‬
‫‪, He offered them hospitality),‬ﺗَــﻀْ ـﻴِـ ْﻴ ٌـﻒ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻀَ ـﻴَّ ٌـﻒ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻀَ ـﻴّ ٌِـﻒ ‪,‬ﻳُــﻀَ ـﻴّ ُِـﻒ ‪,‬ﺿَ ـﻴَّ َـﻒ(‬
‫‪, to facilitate),‬ﺗَــﻬِـ ْﻴـﺌَـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻬَـﻴَّــ ٌﺊ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻬَـ ِﻴّــ ٌﺊ ‪,‬ﻳُــﻬَـﻴّ ُ‬
‫ِــﺊ ‪,‬ﻫَـﻴَّـﺎَٔ(‬
‫‪Day # 7‬‬
‫‪, to inform),‬ﺗَـﻨْـ ِﺒـﺌَـ ٌﺔ‪/‬ﺗَـﻨْـ ِﺒـﻴ ْـ ٌﺊ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨَـﺒَّـﺎٔ ٌ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨَـﺒِّــ ٌﺊ ‪,‬ﻳُـﻨَـﺒّ ُ‬
‫ِــﺊ ‪,‬ﻧ َـﺒَّـﺎَٔ(‬
‫‪, He made astray),‬ﺗَــﻀْ ـ ِﻠ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻀَ ـﻠ َّ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻀَ ـ ِﻠ ّ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻳُــﻀَ ـ ِﻠ ّ ُﻞ ‪,‬ﺿَ ـﻠ َّ َﻞ(‬
 272

(‫ َﺣ َّـﲆ‬, ‫ﻳُــ َﺤـ ِﻠ ّــﻲ‬, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ ٍ ّﻞ‬, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤ ًّـﲆ‬, ‫ﺗَــ ْﺤـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ ٌﺔ‬, to adorn),
(‫ َٔا َّو َل‬, ‫ﻳُــ َﺆ ِّو ُل‬, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺆ ِّو ٌل‬, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺆ َّو ٌل‬, ‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ِوﻳْـ ٌﻞ‬, to understand).
Few other selected verbs are (Group (Group 1) (‫ﻇـﻠَّـ َﻞ‬,َ to shade), (‫ﻗَـﺪ ََّس‬, to
sanctify/(make holy)), (‫ﺻـﺪ ََّق‬,َ to confirm the truth), (‫ﻓَــﻀَّ ـ َﻞ‬, to prefer),
(‫ َذﺑ َّ َــﺢ‬, to slaughter), (Group
(Group 2) (‫ــﻦ‬ َ َّ‫ﺑَـﻴ‬, to make clear), (‫ﺳـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬,َ to greet/ to be
sound (good with no fault)), (‫ َﺣـﺪ ََّث‬, to tell), (‫ َﺣ َّﺮ َم‬, to forbid/(make illegal)),
(‫ﺧَـﻔَّ َـﻒ‬, to be light (in weight)), (Group (Group 3) (‫ َﻋـ َّﻤ َــﺮ‬, to grant life (age)), ( َ‫ َٔاﻳَّـﺪ‬,
to support), (‫ َﻛـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬, to speak), (‫ﻃــﻬ ََّــﺮ‬,َ to purify), (‫ َﻣـﺘَّـ َﻊ‬, to grant enjoyment),
(Group 4) (‫ َﺣ َّــﺮ َف‬, to change/distort), (‫زﻛَّــﻰ‬,َ to purify).
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:54). The verb
form ‫ َﺻ َّـﺮﻓْـﻨَـﺎ‬is present in this verse.
2) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:33). The verb
‫ ﻓَــ َّﺠ ْ ﻧ‬is present in this verse.
form ‫ــﺮ َـﺎ‬
3) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:47). The verb
present tense form ‫ ﻧ ُ َـﺴـﻴّ ُِــﺮ‬is present in this verse.
Extensive and Intensive action property of Form-
Form-II (Seq # 182
182)
Form-II denotes an extensive action on large scale or done repeatedly. In
the below example all the doors (large scale) of the masjid got opened.
Example
 273

‫ـﺎب‬َ ‫ـﺖ اﻟْـ َﺒ‬

ُ ‫( ﻓَـﺘَــ ْﺤ‬I opened the door).
ِ ‫ـﺖ َٔاﺑْ َــﻮ َاب اﻟْـ َﻤ ْـﺴ‬
‫ــﺠـ ِﺪ‬ ُ ‫( ﻓَـﺘَّــ ْﺤ‬I opened all the doors of masjid).
Form-II also denotes sometimes intensive action done thoroughly with
great force.
Example
‫ـﺖ اﻟْــ َﺤـ ْﺒـ َﻞ‬ َ َ‫( ﻗ‬I cut the rope).
ُ ‫ــﻄـ ْﻌ‬
‫ـﺖ اﻟْــ َﺤـ ْﺒـ َﻞ‬ َّ َ‫( ﻗ‬I cut the rope to pieces).
ُ ‫ــﻄـ ْﻌ‬
Quran (3:2:286) is an example where ‫ َﺣـ َﻤـ َﻞ‬and ‫ َﺣـ َّﻤـ َﻞ‬forms are used.
Form-III (‫ــال‬
Form- ٍ ‫ــاب فِــ َع‬
ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 183
183)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now adding another ‫ ٔا‬letter between ‫ َف‬and ‫ َع‬. This ‫ ا‬takes sukoon and the
below are the resulting boxes.
‫َل‬ ‫َف ا َع‬
So the form becomes ‫ﻓَـﺎ َﻋـ َﻞ‬. This baab has two ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬patterns as ‫ُﻣـ َﻔـﺎ َﻋـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬
or ‫ ِﻓـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬.
Let us discuss one important verb of this baab. It is َ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎرك‬. It means ‘He
blessed’.
 274

The 14 past forms are َ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎرك‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر َﻛـﺎ‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ُﻛ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر َﻛ‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر َﻛـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـ َـﻦ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛ‬,
‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ِ ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛ‬, ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ‫ ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛ‬and ‫ﺑ َ َـﺎر ْﻛـﻨَـﺎ‬.
As the verb is a four letter verb, the sign of present tense will take
Dhammah. Thus it is ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬. The “Five in pocket group” forms are ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬,
ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬, ُ‫ـﺎرك‬
ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬, ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ َ ‫ ُٔاﺑ‬and ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫ﻧ ُـ َﺒ‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ـﺎر ْﻛ‬
ِ ‫ ﻳُـ َﺒ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ـﺎر ْﻛ‬ ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺎر ُﻛــ ْﻮ َن‬
ِ ‫ـﺎر َﻛ‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ـﺎر َﻛ‬
ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ـﺎر َﻛ‬
ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬,
‫ـﺎر ُﻛ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ـﺎر ُﻛـ ْﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ِ ‫ـﺎر َﻛ‬
ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﺒ‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ُ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ‬. Just
remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ْ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ َ ‫ﺑ‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ ُﻣـ َﻔـﺎ َﻋـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of
the verb َ‫ ﺑ َ َـﺎرك‬is ‫ ُﻣـ َﺒ َـﺎر َﻛـ ٌﺔ‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ُ‫ ﻳُـ َﺒـ ِﺎرك‬to ‫م‬. It will
become ٌ‫ـﺎرك‬ ِ ‫( ُﻣـ َﺒ‬one who is blessing).
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ٌ‫( ُﻣـ َﺒ َـﺎرك‬Quran (17:21:50)).
Similarly the below few verbs in the format (root verb, present tense
masculine singular form, doer, Mafoolun bihi, Masdar, meaning) comes
under this Baab. Reader is recommended to practice these verbs as much
as possible.
 ‫‪275‬‬

‫‪Day # 1‬‬
‫‪ُ , He deceived),‬ﻣــﺨَـﺎ َد َﻋـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﺨَـﺎ َد ٌع ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﺨَـﺎ ِد ٌع ‪,‬ﻳُــﺨَـﺎ ِد ُع ‪,‬ﺧَـﺎ َد َع(‬
‫‪ُ , to ransom/return/pay),‬ﻣـ َﻔـﺎدَا ٌة ‪ِ /‬ﻓـﺪَ ا ٌء ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔـﺎدًى ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َﻔـﺎ ٍد ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻔـﺎ ِدى ‪,‬ﻓَـﺎدَى(‬
‫ـﺎق(‬‫ـﺎق َ‪,‬ﺷ َّ‬ ‫ـﺎق ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﺸَ ـﺎﻗَــﻖٌ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﺸَ ـﺎ ِﻗــﻖٌ ‪,‬ﻳُـﺸَ ُّ‬ ‫‪ُ , to disagree/discord) Quran‬ﻣـﺸَ ـﺎﻗَّـ ٌﺔ ‪ِ /‬ﺷـ َﻘ ٌ‬
‫‪(1:2:137),‬‬
‫)‪(1:2:137‬‬
‫‪ُ , to meet),‬ﻣ َـﻼﻗَـﺎ ٌة‪ِ /‬ﻟـ َﻘـﺎ ٌء ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﻼﻗًــﻰ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َـﻼ ٍق ‪,‬ﻳُ َـﻼ ِﻗــﻰ َ‪,‬ﻻﻗَــﻰ(‬
‫ـﺐ(‬‫ـﺎﺳ َ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪َ ,‬ﺣ َ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺤ ِ‬
‫ـﺎﺳ ُ‬ ‫ـﺎﺳ ٌ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤ ِ‬ ‫ـﺎﺳ ٌ‬ ‫ـﺎﺳـ َﺒـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤ َ‬
‫‪ُ , He was accounted),‬ﻣــ َﺤ َ‬
‫‪Day # 2‬‬
‫ـﺐ(‬‫ـﺐ َ‪,‬ﺻـﺎ َﺣ َ‬ ‫ــﺼـﺎ ِﺣ ُ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪,‬ﻳُ َ‬‫ــﺼـﺎ ِﺣ ٌ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫ــﺼـﺎ َﺣ ٌ‬ ‫ﺎب ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َ‬ ‫‪ُ , He made companion),‬ﻣ َﺼﺎ َﺣ َﺒ ٌﺔ‪َ ِ /‬‬
‫ﲱ ٌ‬
‫‪ُ , he disputed),‬ﻣــ َﺠـﺎ َدﻟَـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺠـﺎ َد ٌل ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺠـﺎ ِد ٌل ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺠـﺎ ِد ُل ‪َ ,‬ﺟـﺎ َد َل(‬
‫‪ُ , He caught),‬ﻣ َﺆا َﺧـ َﺬ ٌة ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َﺆا َﺧـ ٌﺬ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َﺆا ِﺧـ ٌﺬ ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺆا ِﺧ ُـﺬ ‪,‬آﺧَـ َﺬ(‬
‫‪,ِ He struggled),‬ﺟــﻬَـﺎ ٌد ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺠـﺎﻫَـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺠـﺎ ِﻫـ ٌﺪ ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺠـﺎ ِﻫـﺪُ ‪َ ,‬ﺟـﺎﻫَـﺪَ (‬
‫ـﺎو َر(‬ ‫‪ُ , He was talking),‬ﻣ َﺤ َﺎو َر ٌة‪ِ /‬ﺣ َﻮ ٌار ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤ َ‬
‫ـﺎو ٌر ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ َﺤـﺎ ِو ٌر ‪,‬ﻳُــ َﺤـﺎ ِو ُر ‪َ ,‬ﺣ َ‬
‫‪Day # 3‬‬
‫‪ُ , He left behind),‬ﻣﻐَﺎد ََر ٌة‪ِ /‬ﻏﺪَ ٌار ‪ُ ,‬ﻣﻐَﺎد ٌَر ‪ُ ,‬ﻣﻐَﺎ ِد ٌر ‪,‬ﻳُـﻐَـﺎ ِد ُر ‪,‬ﻏَـﺎد ََر(‬
‫‪ُ , He fell into it),‬ﻣــ َﻮاﻗَـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ‪ِ /‬وﻗَـﺎ ٌع ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َــﻮاﻗَـ ٌﻊ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ َــﻮا ِﻗـ ٌﻊ ‪,‬ﻳُ َــﻮا ِﻗـ ُﻊ َ‪,‬واﻗَـ َﻊ(‬
‫‪ُ , He parted),‬ﻣـ َﻔـ َﺎرﻗَـ ٌﺔ‪ِ /‬ﻓــ َﺮ ٌاق ‪َ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔـ َﺎر ٌق ‪َ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔـ ِﺎر ٌق ‪,‬ﻳُـ َﻔ ِـﺎر ُق ‪,‬ﻓَ َـﺎر َق(‬
 276

(‫ـﺎو َز‬ َ ‫ ُﻣــ َﺠ‬, ‫ـﺎو َز ٌة‬

َ ‫ َﺟ‬, ‫ﻳُــ َﺠـﺎ ِو ُز‬, ‫ ُﻣــ َﺠـﺎ ِو ٌز‬, ‫ـﺎو ٌز‬ َ ‫ ُﻣــ َﺠ‬, to pass beyond),
(‫ﻧ َـﺎدَى‬, ‫ﻳُـﻨَـﺎ ِدى‬, ‫ ُﻣﻨَـﺎ ٍد‬, ‫ ُﻣـﻨَـﺎدًى‬, ‫ ُﻣـﻨَـﺎدَا ٌة‬, to call).
Few other selected verbs are ( َ‫وا َﻋـﺪ‬,َ to appoint/promise), ( َ‫ َﻋـﺎﻫَـﺪ‬, to take
covenant) and (‫ـﺎج‬َّ ‫ َﺣ‬, to argue).
Note: ‫( َﺻـﻠَّــﻰ‬Form-II, Imperative & Past form) and َ‫( ﺑ َ َـﺎرك‬Form-III,
Imperative & Past form) are present in Durood-e-Ibrahim.
Form- ٍ ‫ــاب إِ ْفــ َع‬
Form-IV (‫ــال‬ ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 184
184)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now adding another ‫ ٔا‬letter before ‫ف‬.َ The first letter loses its vowel sign
and takes the sukoon. So the below are the resulting boxes.
‫َل‬ ‫َع‬ ‫َٔا ْف‬
So the form becomes ‫ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬. The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of this form is on the pattern ‫اﻓْـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬.
ِٕ
Let us discuss one important verb of this baab. It is ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰ َل‬. It means ‘He sent
down’.
The 14 past forms are ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰ َل‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰ َﻻ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟُ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟَـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
َ ْ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ِ ْ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟ‬, ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ُ ْ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟ‬and ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰﻟْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
 277

The present tense should be ‫ ﻳُـﺎَٔﻧْــ ِﺰ ُل‬as per the rule. But Hamza is omitted
and it becomes ‫ﻳُـ ْﻨــ ِﺰ ُل‬. The “Five in pocket group” forms are ‫ﻳُـ ْﻨــ ِﺰ ُل‬, ‫ﺗُـ ْﻨــ ِﺰ ُل‬,
‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰ ُل‬, ‫ ُٔاﻧْــ ِﺰ ُل‬and ‫ﻧ ُـﻨْــ ِﺰ ُل‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟ‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟ‬, ‫ﻳُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰ َﻻ ِن‬, ‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰ َﻻ ِن‬,
‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰﻟـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﺗُـﻨْــ ِﺰ َﻻ ِن‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form is constructed from the original form of present tense
which is ‫ﻳُـﺎَٔﻧْــ ِﺰ ُل‬. Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ‫ َٔاﻧْــ ِﺰ ْل‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this baab is on the pattern ‫اﻓْـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. That is the reason
ِٕ
this baab is also called as ٍ‫ـﺎب اﻓْـ َﻌـﺎل‬ ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬ . So the ‫ر‬
ٌ َ‫ـﺪ‬ ‫ــﺼ‬
ْ َ ‫ﻣ‬ of the verb ‫ َٔاﻧ َْــﺰ َل‬is ‫اﻧ َْــﺰا ٌل‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ ﻳُـ ْﻨــ ِﺰ ُل‬to ‫م‬. It will
become ‫( ُﻣـﻨْــ ِﺰ ٌل‬one who is sending).
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨ َــﺰ ٌل‬.
Let us discuss the verb ‫ ا َٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬in form-IV. Let us take one example ‫ َٔا ْﻗ َــﻮ َم‬. In
the past form, exchange of sukoon and Fatah takes place between ‫ ق‬and ‫و‬.
So it becomes ‫ َٔاﻗَ ْــﻮ َم‬. Now as ‫ و‬is weak letter, it converts to ‫ ا‬and the verb
becomes ‫ َٔاﻗَـﺎ َم‬. In the present form, its first form is ‫ﻳُـﺎَٔ ْﻗــ ِﻮ ُم‬. The ‫ ٔا‬gets drop
 278

and exchange of sukoon and Kasrah takes place between ‫ ق‬and ‫و‬. So it
becomes ‫ﻳُـ ِﻘ ْــﻮ ُم‬. Now ‫ و‬changes to ‫ ي‬and then it becomes ‫ﻳُـ ِﻘـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ‬.
It is worth to discuss the verb ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀَ ـ َّﻌ ُـﻒ‬in form-IV as it is little
complicated than ‫ا َٔﻻ ْﺟــ َﻮ ُف‬. Let us take one example ‫ َٔاﺿْ ـﻠَـ َﻞ‬. In the past form,
exchange of sukoon and Fatah takes place between ‫ ض‬and the first ‫ل‬. So it
becomes ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـﻠْـ َﻞ‬. And then it is ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـ َّﻞ‬. From the 14 past forms the first 5
forms are ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـ َّﻞ‬, ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـﻠَّـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـﻠ ُّ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ َّ ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـﻠ‬, ‫ َٔاﺿَ ـﻠَّـﺘَـﺎ‬. From ‫ ﻫ َُّـﻦ‬the ‫ ل‬kalimah takes
sukoon the original form is used, which is ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ َٔاﺿْ ـﻠَـﻠ‬. Likewise, after ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬the
doers are ‫ت‬, ِ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
َ ‫ﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬, ‫ت‬, َّ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ت‬,ُ ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬can be suffixed and other forms can
be obtained (‫ َٔاﺿْ ـﻠَـﻠْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬is present in Quran (18:25:17)). In the present form
initially it is ‫ﻳُـﺎَٔﺿْ ـ ِﻠـ ُﻞ‬. The Hamza gets drop and exchange of sukoon and
Kasrah takes place between ‫ ض‬and the first ‫ل‬. So it becomes ‫ــﻀـﻠْـ ُﻞ‬ ِ ُ‫ ﻳ‬and
then it is ‫ــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻳ‬. The “Five in pocket group” forms are ‫ــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ُــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬
ِ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ُــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬
ِ ‫ﺗ‬,
‫ ُٔا ِﺿـ ُّﻞ‬, ‫ــﻀـ ُّﻞ‬
ِ ُ ‫ﻧ‬. The “Mabni group” forms are ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳُــﻀْ ـ ِﻠـﻠ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ﺗُــﻀْ ـ ِﻠـﻠ‬. The verbs
in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َّ ‫ــﻀـﻠ‬ِ ُ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ــﻀـﻠ ُّ ْــﻮ َن‬ ِ ُ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َّ ‫ــﻀـﻠ‬
ِ ُ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ِ َّ ‫ــﻀـﻠ‬
ِ ُ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ُــﻀـﻠ ُّ ْــﻮ َن‬
ِ ‫ﺗ‬,
‫ــﻦ‬َ ‫ُــﻀـ ِﻠ ّـ ْﻴ‬ ِ َّ ‫ــﻀـﻠ‬
ِ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ُ ‫ﺗ‬.
Similarly the below few verbs in the format (root verb, present tense
masculine singular form, doer, Mafoolun bihi, Masdar, meaning) comes
under this Baab. Reader is recommended to practice these verbs as much
as possible.
Day # 1 (‫ َٔاﻧْـ َﻌ َـﻢ‬, ‫ﻳُـ ْﻨـ ِﻌـ ُﻢ‬, ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨـ ِﻌـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨـ َﻌـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫اﻧْـ َﻌـﺎ ٌم‬, to bestow favour/gift).
ِٕ
 ‫‪279‬‬

‫ـﺎق ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨْـ َﻔــﻖٌ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـﻨْـ ِﻔــﻖٌ ‪,‬ﻳُـﻨْـ ِﻔ ُــﻖ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻧْـ َﻔ َــﻖ(‬ ‫‪, to spend),‬اﻧْـ َﻔ ٌ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ــﺢ(‬ ‫ــﺢ ‪,‬ﻳُ ْــﺼـ ِﻠ ُــﺢ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺻـﻠَ َ‬‫ــﺢ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْــﺼـ ِﻠ ٌ‬‫ـﻼح ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْــﺼـﻠ َ ٌ‬ ‫‪, He corrected/decorated),‬ا ْﺻ ٌ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ْــﺮ ٌج ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْﺨ ِﺮ ٌج ‪,‬ﻳُــ ْﺨ ِﺮ ُج ‪َٔ ,‬اﺧ َْــﺮ َج(‬
‫‪,ِٕ He brought out),‬اﺧ َْــﺮ ٌاج ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﺨ َ‬
‫ــﻦ(‬‫ــﻦ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺣ َـﺴ َ‬ ‫ـﺎن ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ ْﺤ َـﺴــ ٌﻦ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــ ْﺤ ِـﺴــ ٌﻦ ‪,‬ﻳُــ ْﺤ ِـﺴ ُ‬ ‫‪, He did good),‬ا ْﺣ َـﺴ ٌ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫‪, He associated partner),‬ا ْﺷ َــﺮاكٌ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْـﺸ َــﺮكٌ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْـﺸــ ِﺮكٌ ‪,‬ﻳُ ْـﺸــ ِﺮكُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺷ َــﺮكَ ( ‪Day # 2‬‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ــﻀـ ُّﻞ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺿَ ـ َّﻞ(‬ ‫‪, to let astray),‬اﺿْ ـﻼ ٌل ‪ُ ,‬ﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌّﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ِ‬
‫ــﻀـ ٌّﻞ ‪,‬ﻳُ ِ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ـﺎت(‬ ‫ـﺖ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َﻣ َ‬ ‫ـﺖ ‪,‬ﻳُـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ ُ‬ ‫‪, to give death),‬ا َﻣـﺎﺗَـ ٌﺔ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ َﻤ ٌ‬
‫ـﺎت ‪ُ ,‬ﻣـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ ٌ‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫‪, to guide),‬ا ْر َﺷـﺎ ٌد ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْــﺮ َﺷـ ٌﺪ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْــﺮ ِﺷـ ٌﺪ ‪,‬ﻳُ ْــﺮ ِﺷـﺪُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْر َﺷـﺪَ (‬
‫ِٕ‬
‫ـﺎر ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْـﺸـ َﻌ ٌــﺮ ‪ُ ,‬ﻣ ْـﺸـ ِﻌ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬ﻳُ ْـﺸـ ِﻌ ُــﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺷـ َﻌ َــﺮ(‬ ‫‪,ِٕ to be aware).‬ا ْﺷـ َﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪With such similar understanding, the reader is recommended to‬‬
‫‪write/learn the following verbs.‬‬
‫ــﻦ( ‪, to stand/establish),‬ﻳُـ ِﻘـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻗَـﺎ َم( ‪Day # 3‬‬ ‫‪, to believe),‬ﻳُ ْــﺆ ِﻣ ُ‬
‫ــﻦ ‪َ ,‬ا ‪ +‬ا م ن = ٰا َﻣ َ‬
‫‪, to become success),‬ﻳُـ ْﻔـ ِﻠ ُــﺢ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻓْـﻠَ َــﺢ( ‪, to be certain/sure/affirm),‬ﻳُـ ْﻮ ِﻗـ ُﻦ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻳْـ َﻘـ َﻦ(‬
‫‪, to warn).‬ﻳُـﻨْـ ِﺬ ُر ‪َٔ ,‬اﻧ َْـﺬ َر(‬
‫ـﺎط( ‪, to light),‬ﻳُـ ِﻀـ ْﻲ ُء ‪َٔ ,‬اﺿَ ـﺎ َء( ‪, to corrupt),‬ﻳُـ ْﻔ ِـﺴـﺪُ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻓْ َـﺴـﺪَ ( ‪Day # 4‬‬ ‫‪, to‬ﻳُــ ِﺤـ ْﻴــﻂُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َﺣ َ‬
‫‪, to return).‬ﻳُـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـﺪُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َﻋـﺎ َد( ‪, to become dark),‬ﻳُـ ْﻈـ ِﻠـ ُﻢ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻇﻠَـ َﻢ( ‪surround),‬‬
 ‫‪280‬‬

‫‪, to‬ﻳُـﻨْـ ِﺒــ ُﺊ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻧْـ َﺒـﺎَٔ( ‪, to give life),‬ﻳُـ ْﺤـ ِﻴــﻲ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺣ َﻴـﺎ( ‪, He wanted),‬ﻳُــ ِﺮﻳْـﺪُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َرا َد( ‪Day # 5‬‬
‫‪َٔ ,‬ا ْو َﰱ( ‪, to make someone slip),‬ﻳُـ ِﺰ ُّل ‪َٔ ,‬ا َز َّل( ‪, to reveal/show),‬ﻳُـ ْﺒـ ِﺪي ‪َٔ ,‬اﺑْـﺪَ ا( ‪inform),‬‬
‫‪, to fulfill).‬ﻳُـ ْﻮ ِﻓـ ْﻲ‬
‫‪, to drown),‬ﻳُـﻐْــ ِﺮ ُق ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻏ َــﺮ َق( ‪, to save),‬ﻳُ ْﻨ ِﺠ ُﺊ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْ َﳒﺎ( ‪, to give),‬ﻳُـ ْﺆ ِﺗــﻲ ‪,‬ا ٓ ﺗَــﻰ( ‪Day # 6‬‬
‫‪, to plough).‬ﻳُـ ِﺜـ ْﻴــ ُﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺛَـ َﺎر( ‪, to grow),‬ﻳُ ْﻨ ِﺒ ُﺖ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻧْﺒَ َﺖ(‬
‫ﴎ( ‪, to show),‬ﻳُـ ِﺮي ‪َٔ ,‬ا َرى( ‪Day # 7‬‬ ‫‪, to‬ﻳُ ْﻌ ِﻠ ُﻦ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻋﻠَ َﻦ( ‪, to conceal),‬ﻳ ِ ُّ‬
‫ُﴪ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َ َّ‬
‫‪,‬ﳜ ِﻠ ُﻒ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺧﻠَ َﻒ( ‪declare/announce),‬‬ ‫‪, to‬ﻳُ ْﻌ ِﺮ ُض ‪َٔ ,‬اﻋ َْﺮ َض( ‪ْ ُ to break/(do opposite)),‬‬
‫‪refuse).‬‬
‫ﴍ َب( ‪, to humiliate),‬ﻳُـﻬ ْ ُِﲔ ‪َٔ ,‬ا َﻫـ َﺎن( ‪, to accept/agree),‬ﻳُـ ِﻘـ ُّﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻗَـ َّﺮ( ‪Day # 8‬‬ ‫ُﴩ ُب ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْ َ‬
‫‪,‬ﻳ ْ ِ‬
‫‪, to be forgotten).‬ﻳُـ ْﻨـ ِﴗ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻧ ْ َﴗ( ‪, to wish),‬ﻳُـ ْﻤـ ِﲎ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻣ َﲎ( ‪to make someone drink),‬‬
‫‪,‬ﻳُـﺘـِ ُّﻢ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺗَـ َّﻢ( ‪, to accept/submit),‬ﻳُ ْـﺴـ ِﻠـ ُﻢ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺳـﻠَ َـﻢ( ‪, to send),‬ﻳُ ْــﺮ ِﺳـ ُﻞ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْر َﺳـ َﻞ( ‪Day # 9‬‬
‫‪,‬ﳜ ِﻠ ُﺺ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺧﻠَ َﺺ( ‪to fulfill),‬‬ ‫ــﺼ َــﺮ( ‪ْ ُ to be sincere),‬‬ ‫‪, to see).‬ﻳُـ ْﺒ ِ‬
‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺑْ َ‬
‫‪, to make know, Quran (30:97:2),‬ﻳُ ْﺪ ِري ‪َٔ ,‬اد َْرى( ‪Day # 10‬‬ ‫ْـﺖ = َٔاد َْراكَ ‪(30:97:2),‬‬ ‫‪َٔ ),‬اد َْرى‪َٔ +‬اﻧ َ‬
‫ـﻞ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻏـ َﻔـ َﻞ( ‪, to hear clearly),‬ﻳُ ْـﺴـ ِﻤـ ُﻊ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺳـ َﻤـ َﻊ(‬ ‫‪,‬ﻳُـ ْﻌــ ِﺮ ُض ‪َٔ ,‬اﻋ َْــﺮ َض( ‪, to be heedless),‬ﻳُـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُ‬
‫‪, He present/informs).‬ﻳُــ ْﺤـ ِﺪ ُث ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺣـﺪَ َث( ‪He turns away),‬‬
‫َــﻖ( ‪, to make hole),‬ﻳُــ ْﺤــ ِﺮ ُق ‪َٔ ,‬اﺧ َْــﺮ َق( ‪Day # 11‬‬ ‫‪, to overburden),‬ﻳُ ْــﺮ ِﻫ ُــﻖ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْرﻫ َ‬
‫‪, to pour).‬ﻳُـ ْﻔــ ِﺮ ُغ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻓْ َــﺮ َغ( ‪, to follow),‬ﻳُـ ْﺘـﺒِـ ُﻊ ‪َٔ ,‬اﺗْـ َﺒـ َﻊ( ‪, to change),‬ﻳُـ ْﺒـ ِﺪ ُل ‪َٔ ,‬اﺑْـﺪَ َل(‬
‫ـﻚ( ‪Day # 12‬‬ ‫ـﻚ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻫْـﻠَ َ‬
‫‪َٔ ,‬اﻋْـﺘَـﺪَ ( ‪, to make known),‬ﻳُـ ْﻌـ ِﺜ ُــﺮ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻋْـﺜ َ َــﺮ( ‪, to destroy),‬ﻳُــﻬْـ ِﻠ َ‬
‫‪, to make‬ﻳُ ْـﺸــﻬِـﺪُ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺷــﻬَـﺪَ ( ‪, to do crime),‬ﻳُــ ْﺠــ ِﺮ ُم ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺟ َــﺮ َم( ‪, to prepare),‬ﻳُـ ْﻌـ ِﺘـﺪُ‬
‫‪witness).‬‬
 281

Day # 13 (‫ َٔا ْﺷـ َﻔ َــﻖ‬, ‫ﻳُ ْـﺸـ ِﻔ ُــﻖ‬, to be fearful), (‫ــﺾ‬ ُ ‫ﻳُ ْـﺪ ِﺣ‬, to refute),
َ ‫ َٔا ْد َﺣ‬, ‫ــﺾ‬
ِ ‫ﻳُــ ْﺤ‬, to judge/calculate best), (‫ َٔا ْو َﺣــﻰ‬, to reveal), (‫ َٔا َﻃـﺎ َع‬, ‫ــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﻊ‬
َ ‫ َٔا ْﺣ‬, ‫ــﺼــﻰ‬
(‫ــﺼــﻰ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻳ‬, to
obey).
Day # 14 (‫ـﺎن‬ ُ ‫ﻳُـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬, to assist), (‫ َٔاﺿَ ﺎ َع‬, ‫ﻳُ ِﻀ ْﻴ ُﻊ‬, to let go waste), (‫ َٔا ْﻃـ َﻌـ ُﻢ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ِﻌـ ُﻢ‬
َ ‫ َٔا َﻋ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ُ ‫ﻳ‬,
to feed), (‫ْــﻄــﻰ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻋ‬, ‫ــﻄــﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻳُـ ْﻌ‬, to give), (‫ َٔا ْﻏـﻨَــﻰ‬, ‫ﻳُـﻐْـ ِﻨــﻰ‬, to avail/benefit).
Day # 15 (َٔ‫ َٔا ْﺧــ َﻄـﺎ‬, ‫ــﺊ‬ ِ ‫ﻳُــﺨ‬, to make mistake/error), (‫ َٔا َﻋـ َّﺪ‬, ‫ﻳُـ ِﻌـ ُّﺪ‬, to prepare).
ُ ‫ْــﻄ‬
Making intransitive verb into transitive
transitive verb (Seq # 185
185)
We already know that transitive verb takes object which receives the
action. The intransitive verb does not take any object.
An intransitive verb can be converted into transitive verb by making the
verb from base form into form-II or form-IV as shown in the below two
examples.
Form-II: ‫( ﻧ َ َــﺰ َل‬He got down), ‫( ﻧ َ َّــﺰ َل‬He brought down).
Form-IV: ‫( َﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬He sat), ‫( َٔا ْﺟـﻠَ َـﺲ‬He made someone to sit).
Certain base verbs can be converted into both of these forms.
Base form: ‫ ﻧ َ َــﺰ َل‬form-II: ‫ ﻧ َ َّــﺰ َل‬form-IV: ‫َٔاﻧ َْــﺰ َل‬
If the base form is already transitive then converting the verb into form-II
or form-IV will make the verb into doubly transitive, which means it
 282

requires two objects. Example is ‫ د ََر َس‬Form-II is ‫د ََّر َس‬. Example sentence is
below.
‫( د ََّر َﺳـﻨَﺎ اﻟـﻠُّـﻐَـ َﺔ اﻟْـ َﻌ َــﺮﺑِـﻴَّـ َﺔ‬He taught us Arabic language). Here there are two
objects ‫ ﻧ َـﺎ‬and ‫ اﻟـﻠُّـﻐَـ َﺔ‬and both are ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. In this case, we get the answers
to the questions like “He taught to whom ? (answer: to us)”, and “He
taught what ? (answer: Arabic language)”.
Special verb ‫( أَ َري‬Seq # 186
186)
This verb is based on the form-IV (‫) َٔاﻓْـ َﻌـ َﻞ‬. The ‫ َٔا‬has been added to the
main root verb ‫( َر َٔاى‬he saw) to get form-IV ‫ َٔا ْر َٔاى‬. The second Hamza has
been dropped and it becomes ‫ َٔا َرى‬. The meaning of this verb is ‘He showed’.
Let us try to conjugate this verb in the past tense.
1) For ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫ ﻫ‬the verb form is ‫ َٔا َرى‬.
2) For ‫ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, the doer ‫ ا‬will be added. Thus it is ‫ َٔا َرﻳَـﺎ‬.
3) For ‫ﻫ ُْـﻢ‬, the third radical ‫ ي‬will be dropped. Originally it is‫ َٔا َرﻳُ ْــﻮا‬.
Finally it is ‫ َٔا َر ْوا‬.
4) For ‫ ِﻫ َــﻲ‬just add the “‫ ت‬of woman” to the root ‫ َٔا َرى‬. After adding it is
ْ ْ‫ َٔا َرﻳ‬. Here the ‫ ي‬gets drop. Finally it is ‫ َٔا َر ْت‬.
‫ـﺖ‬
5) For feminine ‫ ﻫُـ َﻤـﺎ‬just add the doer ‫ ا‬to the verb form of ‫) َٔا َر ْت( ِﻫ َــﻲ‬.
Thus it is ‫ َٔا َرﺗَـﺎ‬.
 283

6) For Mutaharrik pronouns the third radical ‫ ي‬should have sukoon (‫)ـ ْـ‬.
So the initial part will be ‫ َٔا َرﻳْــ‬. Thus the conjugation for all Mutaharrik
pronouns from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬to ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ َٔا َرﻳ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ‫ ﻧَــ ْﺤ‬is ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ْ‫ َٔا َرﻳ‬, ‫ َٔا َرﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
َ ْ‫ َٔا َرﻳ‬, ‫ َٔا َرﻳْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ َٔا َرﻳْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
َّ ‫ َٔا َرﻳْـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ْ‫ َٔا َرﻳ‬and ‫ َٔا َرﻳْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
In the present tense originally it is ‫ﻳُـﺎَٔ ْرا ُي‬. The first Hamza has been
dropped so it is ‫ﻳُ ْــﺮاي‬. Now further changesِٕ took place it becomes ‫ﻳُــ ِﺮي‬.
ِٕ
The “Five in pocket group” is now ‫ﻳُــ ِﺮي‬, ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮي‬, ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮي‬, ‫ ُٔا ِري‬and ‫ﻧُــ ِﺮي‬.
The “Mabni group” is ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ ﻳُــ ِﺮﻳ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮﻳ‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳُــ ِﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﻳُ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮﻳ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﺗ ُُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮﻳ‬,
‫ـﺎن‬
ِ َ ‫ﺗُــ ِﺮﻳ‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬for this verb is to remove the present tense letter and
dropping the last ‫ي‬. So the original first ‫ ٔا‬will appear and finally we get ‫ َٔا ِر‬.
Refer to Quran (1:2:128) and Quran (3:2:260). (3:2:260)
َ ‫( َك‬Seq # 187
Some more sisters of ‫ــان‬ 187)
The verbs ‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒ َــﺢ‬, ‫ َٔا ْﻣ َـﺴــﻰ‬and ‫ َٔاﺿْ ــ َﺤــﻰ‬are sisters of ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬. ‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒ َــﺢ‬means ‘to
become/do/enter in morning’. Sometimes ‫ــﺢ‬ َ ‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒ‬is also used to convey the
meaning ‘He became’ irrespective of time. ‫ َٔا ْﻣ َـﺴــﻰ‬means ‘to
become/do/enter in evening’ and ‫ َٔاﺿْ ــ َﺤــﻰ‬means ‘to become/do/enter in
dawn”.
 284

In the verse Quran (4:3:103), ‫ ﺗ ُْـﻢ‬in ‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒــ ْﺤـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬is ‫ــﺢ‬َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒ‬and ‫ْــﻮاﻧ ًـﺎ‬
َ ‫ ِٕاﺧ‬is ‫َﺧـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬
َ ‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﺒ‬which is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
‫ــﺢ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬.
‫ َٔا ْو َﺷـ َﻚ‬is also one of the sisters of ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬. “He is about to…” is the meaning of
‫ـﻚ‬َ ‫ َٔا ْو َﺷ‬. The predicate (‫ )اﻟْــ َﺨـ َﺒــ ُﺮ‬of these verbs will be ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
Form- ٍ ‫ــاب تَــفَــ ﱡع‬
Form-V (‫ــل‬ ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 188
188)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Form-II has obtained by the following change.
‫َف ْع َع َل‬
We know that the sequence of letter ‫ ت‬in Arabic alphabets is 3. Just to
remember keep the below equation
Form-II + 3 (sequence number of letter ‫ = )ت‬Form-V
Adding ‫ ت‬to Form-II as below and the resulting boxes are shown below.
‫َل‬ ‫َت َف ع َع‬
As the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬pattern for this baab is ‫ﺗَـ َﻔـ ُّﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, it is called as ‫ـﻞ‬ ٍ ‫ـﺎب ﺗَـ َﻔـ ُّﻌ‬
ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬.
Let us discuss one main verb ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـ َﻞ‬. Its meaning is “to trust”.
The 14 past forms are ‫ﺗَـ َـﻮﻛَّـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّ َـﻼ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠُ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ْ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬,
ْ َ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠَـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬, ‫ﺗَ َــﻮﻛَّـﻠْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ْ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠْـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠْـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ْ‫ ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬and ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـﻠْـﻨَـﺎ‬.
 285

As the verb is of five letter verb, the sign of present tense will take Fatah.
Thus it is ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ َّ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛ‬. The “Five in pocket group” forms are ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬,
‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬and ‫ـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬.َ ‫ﻧ‬
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫ ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـﻠ‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّ َـﻼ ِن‬, ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـﻠُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّ َـﻼ ِن‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّ َـﻼ ِن‬,
َ ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّ َـﻼ ِن‬.
‫ﺗَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـﻠُ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬.
Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ َّ‫ﺗَ َــﻮﻛ‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ﺗَـ َﻔـ ُّﻌـ ٌﻞ‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the
verb ‫ ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـ َﻞ‬is ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛُّـ ٌﻞ‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬to ‫ م‬along
with Dhammah and ‫ ع‬kalimah will take Kasrah. It is ‫ ُﻣـﺘَ َــﻮ ِﻛّـ ٌﻞ‬.
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ ُﻣـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ٌﻞ‬.
This baab starts with ‫ ت‬and if the sign of the present tense is also ‫ ت‬then
it will be difficult to pronounce two ‫ت‬. So, literally one ‫ ت‬is dropped. For
example in the verse Quran (30:97:4) instead of ‫ ﺗَـﺘَـﻨَ َّــﺰ ُل‬it is ‫ ﺗَـﻨَ َّــﺰ ُل‬and in the
verse Quran (27:49:12) instead of ‫ ﻻ ﺗَـﺘَــ َﺠ َّـﺴ ُـﺴ ْــﻮا‬it is ‫ﻻ ﺗَــ َﺠ َّـﺴ ُـﺴــ ْﻮا‬.
The generic verb structure for the verb ‫ ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـ َﻞ‬in the format (root verb,
present tense masculine singular form, doer, Mafoolun bihi, Masdar,
 286

meaning) is (‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛَّـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ ُﻣـﺘَ َــﻮ ِﻛّـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫ ُﻣـﺘَ َــﻮﻛَّـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫ﺗ ََــﻮﻛُّـ ٌﻞ‬, He trusted). The reader
is recommended to conjugate the below few verbs in this format for more
practice.
(Group 1) (‫ﺗَـﻠَـﻘَّــﻰ‬, to receive), (‫ﺗَ َــﻮﻟَّــﻰ‬, to turn back), (‫ﺗَـ َﻔــ َّﺠ َــﺮ‬, to gush forth),
(‫ﺗَـ َﻤـﻨَّــﻰ‬, to wish), (‫ﺗَـ َﻌـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬, to learn).
(Group 2) (‫ﺗَـ َﺒـ َّﺪ َل‬, to exchange/change), (‫ــﻦ‬ َ َّ‫ﺗَـ َﺒـﻴ‬, to become clear), (‫ﺗَـ َﻘـﺒَّـ َﻞ‬, to
accept), (‫ﺗَـﺸَ ـﻘَّ َــﻖ‬, to split) (Quran Quran (1:2:74) has this verb. In present tense it
should be ‫ﻳَـﺘَـﺸَ ـﻘَّ ُــﻖ‬. But the letter ‫ ت‬got converted to ‫ش‬. Because of two ‫ش‬,
it gets tashdeed).
(Group 3) 3) (‫ﺗ ََـﺬﻛَّــ َـﺮ‬, He advised), (‫ﺗَـ َﻔـﻜَّ َــﺮ‬, He pondered), (‫ــﻄ َـﻒ‬ َّ َ‫ﺗَـﻠ‬, to be
cautious).
Form- ٍ ‫ــاب تَــفَــا ُع‬
Form-VI (‫ــل‬ ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 189
189)
89)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Form-III has obtained by the following change.
‫َل‬ ‫َف ا َع‬
Adding letter ‫ ت‬before and it resulted in the below equation.
Form-III + 3 (sequence number of letter ‫ = )ت‬Form-VI
The below are the resulting boxes.
 287

‫َل‬ ‫َع‬ ‫َت َف ا‬

Let us discuss one main verb ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ‬. Its meaning is “to work for extra”.
The 14 past forms are ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮا‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ ْوا‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ ْت‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮﺗَـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ َن‬,
‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ َت‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮﺗُ ْـﻢ‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ ِت‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮﺗ‬, ‫ ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ ُت‬and
‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْ ﻧ‬.
‫ــﺮ َـﺎ‬
As the verb is of five letter verb, the sign of present tense will take Fatah.
Thus it is ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬. The “Five in pocket group” forms are ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬,
‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ َٔاﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬and ‫ﻧ َـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ َن‬and ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ َن‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ ِان‬, ‫ﻳ َـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ ِان‬,
‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ ِان‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَــ ِﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﺗَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ ِان‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬.
Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ْــﺮ‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ﺗَـ َﻔـﺎ ُﻋـ ٌﻞ‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the
verb ‫ ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ‬is ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛُ ٌــﺮ‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬to ‫م‬
along with Dhammah and ‫ ع‬kalimah will take Kasrah. It is ‫ ُﻣـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎ ِﺛ ٌــﺮ‬.
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ ُﻣـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ٌــﺮ‬.
 288

This baab starts with ‫ ت‬and if the sign of the present tense is also ‫ ت‬then
it will be difficult to pronounce two ‫ت‬. So, literally one ‫ ت‬is dropped.
Quran (27:49:11), Quran (27:49:13) and Quran (6:5:2) are the Quran
verses for the examples of ‫ﺗَـﻨَـﺎﺑ َ ُــﺰ ْوا‬, ‫ ﺗَـ َﻌ َـﺎرﻓُ ْــﻮا‬and ‫ـﺎوﻧ ُ ْــﻮا‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ َﻌ‬.
The generic verb structure for the verb ‫ ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ‬in the format (root verb,
present tense masculine singular, doer, Mafoolun bihi, Masdar, meaning)
is (‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ ُﻣـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎ ِﺛ ٌــﺮ‬, ‫ ُﻣـﺘَـ َﻜـﺎﺛَ ٌــﺮ‬, ‫ﺗَـ َﻜـﺎﺛُ ٌــﺮ‬, to work to get extra).
Reader is recommended to come up with such format for the following few
verbs.
(‫ﺗَـﺸَ ـﺎﺑَـ َﻪ‬, to resemble), (‫ﺗ ََــﻈـﺎﻫ ََــﺮ‬, to assist/support), (‫ﺗَـﺪَ َار َٔا‬, to dispute/fight)
Quran (1:2:72) has this verb and initial ‫ ت‬got changed to ‫د‬. Because of
(Quran
two ‫د‬, it gets tashdeed. Translation is “then you all disputed…”), (‫ﺗ ََــﺰ َاو َر‬, to
incline away), (‫ﺗ ََـﺴـﺎ َء َل‬, to question), (‫ـﺎز َع‬ َ َ‫ﺗَـﻨ‬, to dispute).
Form-
Form-VII (Seq # 190
190)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now add ‫ ِا ْن‬before these three boxes as shown below.
‫َل‬ ‫َع‬ ‫ِا ْن َف‬
The first Hamza is ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْ َــﻮ َﺻ‬, so should be ignored when comes in the
middle. The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬form is ‫ ِاﻧْـ ِﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So this baab is also called as ٍ‫ـﺎب ِاﻧْـ ِﻔـ َﻌـﺎل‬
ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬.
 289

Let us discuss one verb under this category, which is ‫ـﺐ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠ‬. It means
return/(turn upside down).
The 14 past forms are ‫ـﺐ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ َﺒـﺎ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮا‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ َﺒ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ َﺒـﺘَـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒ‬,
‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬ ِ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒـ ُﺘـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒـ ُﺘ‬, ‫ـﺖ‬
ُ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒ‬and
َ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠَـ ْﺒ‬.
‫ــﻦ‬
The sign of present tense will take Fatah. The “Five in pocket group”
forms are ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ َٔاﻧْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬and ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻧ َـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ ْﺒ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ ْﺒ‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ َﺒ‬, ‫ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ َﺒ‬,
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـ َﻘـ ِﻠـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬
ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ َﺒ‬, ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـ َﻘـ ِﻠـ َﺒ‬.
The ‫ـﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬ ُ ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻨـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬.
Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is ‫ـﺐ‬ ْ ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ ِاﻧْـ ِﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the
verb ‫ـﺐ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻘـﻠ‬is ‫ ِاﻧْـ ِﻘ َـﻼ ٌب‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ ﻳَـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬to ‫م‬
along with Dhammah. It is ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣـﻨْـ َﻘـ ِﻠ‬.
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣـﻨْـ َﻘـﻠ‬.
The few other verbs in this baab in the format (root verb, its meaning) are
as below.
 290

(‫ ِاﻧْـ َﻔــ َﺠ َــﺮ‬, to gush forth), (‫ ِاﻧ َْــﻄـﻠَ َــﻖ‬, He set out to go) and (‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, He
supported).
Form- ٍ ‫ــاب اِ ْفــ ِتــ َع‬
Form-VIII (‫ــال‬ ُ َ‫( )ﺑ‬Seq # 191
191)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now add ‫ ِا‬before the first radical and ‫ ت‬after the first radical as shown
below.
‫َل‬ ‫ِا ْف َت َع‬
The first Hamza is ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْ َــﻮ َﺻ‬, so should be ignored when comes in the
middle. The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬form is ‫ ِاﻓْـ ِﺘـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So this baab is also called as ٍ‫ـﺎب ِاﻓْـ ِﺘـ َﻌـﺎل‬ ُ َ ‫ﺑ‬.
Let us discuss one verb under this category, which is ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬. It means “to
wait”.
The 14 past forms are ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ َــﺮا‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘَ َــﻈ ُــﺮ ْوا‬, ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ ْت‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ َــﺮﺗَـﺎ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬,
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ َت‬
‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ َن‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮﺗُـ ْﻢ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ ِت‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, ‫ُــﻦ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬,
َّ ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮﺗ‬
َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬and ‫ــﺮ َـﺎ‬
‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ ُت‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬.
‫ــﻈ ْ ﻧ‬
The sign of present tense will take Fatah. The “Five in pocket group”
forms are ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬ ِ َ‫ﻳَـﻨْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬
ِ َ‫ﺗَـﻨْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬ِ َ‫ﺗَـﻨْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬
ِ َ‫ َٔاﻧْـﺘ‬and ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬ِ َ‫ﻧ َـﻨْـﺘ‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ َن‬ ِ َ‫ ﻳَـﻨْـﺘ‬and ‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ َن‬ ِ َ‫ﺗَـﻨْـﺘ‬.
 291

The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ ِان‬ ِ َ‫ﻳَـﻨْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬
ِ َ‫ﻳَـﻨْـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ ِان‬ِ َ‫ﺗَـﻨْـﺘ‬,
ِ َ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬
‫ــﻈ َــﺮ ِان‬ ِ َ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ َ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ ِان‬
َ ْ‫ــﻈــ ِﺮﻳ‬ ِ َ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨـﺘ‬.
The ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬ ِ َ‫ﻳَـﻨْـﺘ‬.
Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is
ِ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬.
‫ــﻈ ْــﺮ‬
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ ِاﻓْـ ِﺘـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the
verb ‫ــﻈ َــﺮ‬ َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬is ‫ـﺎر‬ٌ ‫ــﻈ‬َ ‫ ِاﻧْـ ِﺘ‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ــﻈ ُــﺮ‬ ِ َ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻨـﺘ‬to ‫م‬
along with Dhammah. It is ‫ــﻈ ٌــﺮ‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻣـﻨْـﺘ‬.
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ــﻈ ٌــﺮ‬ َ َ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨـﺘ‬.
The few other verbs in this baab in the format (root verb, its meaning) are
as below.
Day # 1 (‫ ِا ْﺷـﺘَ َــﺮى‬, to buy), (‫ ِاﻫْـﺘَـﺪَ ى‬, ‫ﻳَــﻬْـﺘَـ ِﺪي‬, to guide), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَ َــﻮى‬, to turn),
(‫ ِاﻋْـﺘَـﺪَ ى‬, to transgress (to cross limit)), (‫ ِاﺗ َّـ َﺒـ َﻊ‬, to follow).
Day # 2 (‫ــﺺ‬ َّ َ‫ ِاﺧْـﺘ‬, to choose), (‫ ِاﺧْـﺘَـﻠَ َـﻒ‬, to differ), (‫ ِاﺑْـﺘَـﻠَــﻰ‬, to
try/command/test), (‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﻣـﺘَــ َﺤ‬, He examined), (‫ ِا ْﺟـﺘَـ َﻤـ َﻊ‬, to gather).
Day # 3 (‫ ِاﻋْـﺘَ َــﺰ َل‬, to withdraw), ( َ‫ ِاﻟْـﺘَــ َﺤـﺪ‬, to take refuge), (‫ ِا ْرﺗَـ َﻔ َــﻖ‬, to take rest),
(‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬َ َ‫ ِاﻧْـﺘ‬, to support), (َ‫ ِاﺧْـﺘَـﻠَــﻂ‬, to mingle).
 292

Day # 4 (‫ ِا ْﻗـﺘَـﺪَ َر‬, He is all able), (َٔ‫ ِاﺗ َّـ َﻜـﺎ‬, to recline), (‫ ِاﻓْـﺘَ َــﺮى‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ ِﺮي‬, to invent),
ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـﺘَ ِـﺴ‬, to earn).
(‫ ِا ْﻛـﺘَـ َﺴـ َﺐ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:16). The phrase
‫ ﻫ ُْـﻢ = ِاﻋْـﺘَ َــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘـ ُﻤ ْــﻮﻫ ُْـﻢ‬+ ‫( ِاﻋْـﺘَ َــﺰﻟْـ ُﺘـ ْﻢ‬You all withdraw from them) is present
in this verse.
Changes in Form-
Form-VIII (Seq # 192
192)
If the first radical is ‫ و‬then it is assimilated to the extra ‫ ت‬and gets
tashdeed (ّ‫)ـ‬.
( َ‫و َﺣـﺪ‬,َ َ‫ ِا ْوﺗَــ َﺤـﺪ‬, َ‫ ِاﺗَّــ َﺤـﺪ‬, to unite)
(‫وﻗَــﻰ‬,َ ‫ ِا ْوﺗَـ َﻘــﻰ‬, ‫ ِاﺗ َّـ َﻘــﻰ‬, He feared or He protected himself)
Exceptional case: (‫ َٔاﺧ ََـﺬ‬, ‫ ِا ْٔاﺗَــﺨَـ َﺬ‬, ‫ ِاﺗَّــﺨَـ َﺬ‬, he took). Quran (1:2:80) has this verb.
Moreover the first Hamza is ignored in this verse, because it is ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة‬
‫اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬. Instead of ‫ َا ِاﺗَّــﺨ َْـﺬﺗُـ ْﻢ‬it is just ‫ َاﺗَّــﺨ َْـﺬﺗُـ ْﻢ‬. Its translation is “Have you
(all) taken…”.
If the first radical is ‫د‬, ‫ذ‬, ‫ ز‬the extra ‫ ت‬changes to ‫د‬.
(‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬, ‫ ِا ْدﺗَـ َﻌــﻰ‬, ‫ ِا َّد َﻋــﻰ‬, He claimed)
(‫ذ َﻛ َــﺮ‬,َ ‫ ِا ْذﺗَـ َﻜ َــﺮ‬, ‫ ِا ْذ َد َﻛ َــﺮ‬, again further changes – ‫ ِا َّد َﻛ َــﺮ‬, He remembered)
(‫زا َد‬,َ ‫ ِا ْزﺗَـﺎ َد‬, ‫ ِا ْزدَا َد‬, to add)
 293

If the first radical is ‫ص‬, ‫ض‬, ‫ط‬, ‫ ظ‬the extra ‫ ت‬changes to ‫ط‬.
َ ْ‫ ِاﺿ‬, to force), (‫ﺻـ َﻔــﻰ‬,َ ‫ــﻄـ َﻔــﻰ‬
(‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َر‬, ‫ــﻄ َّــﺮ‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﺻ‬, to choose), (‫ﺻـ َﺒ َــﺮ‬,َ ‫ ِا ْﺻـﺘَـ َﺒ َــﺮ‬,
َ ‫ ِا ْﺻ‬, “He was patient”), (‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫ ِاﺿْ ـﺘَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫ــﻄ َــﺮ َب‬
‫ــﻄـ َﺒ َــﺮ‬ َ ْ‫ ِاﺿ‬, He was in the state of
unrest), (‫ﻃـﻠَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ ِا ْﻃـﺘَـﻠَـ َﻊ‬, ‫ ِا َّﻃـﻠَـ َﻊ‬, he knew), (‫ﻇـﻠَ َـﻢ‬,َ ‫ ِا ْﻇـﺘَـﻠَ َـﻢ‬, ‫ــﻄـﻠَ َـﻢ‬
َ ‫ ِا ْﻇ‬, He put up
with wrong).
Form-
Form-IX (Seq # 193
193)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now add ‫ ِا‬before the first letter and the third letter is doubled so the new
form looks like below.
‫َّل‬ ‫َع‬ ‫ْف‬ ‫ِا‬
This baab is generally used for specifying the colours and defects.
Examples: ‫( ِا ْﺣـ َﻤ َّــﺮ‬It became red), ‫ــﺾ‬ َّ ‫( اﺑْـ َﻴ‬It became white), ‫( ا ْﺳ َــﻮ َّد‬It became
ِٕ ِٕ
black), ‫( ا ْﺻـ َﻔ َّــﺮ‬It became yellow), ‫( اﺧْــﻀَ َّــﺮ‬It became green), ‫( ِاﻋ َْــﻮ َّج‬It
ِٕ ِٕ
became crooked).
The present tense of ‫ ِا ْﺣـ َﻤ َّــﺮ‬is ‫ ﻳَــ ْﺤـ َﻤ ُّــﺮ‬and doer is ‫ ُﻣــ ْﺤـ َﻤ ٌّــﺮ‬and it does not
have ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬. Its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is ‫ ِا ْﺣـ ِﻤــﺮ ٌار‬. Example verses are Quran(4:3:106),
Quran (4:3:107) and Quran (13:12:84).
 294

This baab has another pattern with one extra alif after second letter
resulting as ‫ ِاﻓْـ َﻌـﺎ َّل‬. Verbs of this form describe intensity in color. Examples:
َّ ‫( ِا ْﺣـ َﻤ‬It became red), ‫( ِٕا ْدﻫَـﺎ َّم‬It became deep green).
‫ـﺎر‬
The present tense is ‫ـﺎر‬ ٌّ ‫ ُﻣــ ْﺤـ َﻤ‬and its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is ‫ ِا ْﺣـ ِﻤـ ْﻴــﺮ ٌار‬.
ُّ ‫ﻳَــ ْﺤـ َﻤ‬. Its doer is ‫ـﺎر‬
Quran (27:55:64) has dual doer form of verb ‫ ا ْدﻫَـﺎ َّم‬which means “Both,
ِٕ
dark green in colour”. This baab is not frequently used so we limit its
discussion to very little as above.
Form-
Form-X (Seq # 194
194)
We know that the base three letters are as below.
‫َف َع َل‬
Now add ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﺳ‬before these three boxes as shown below.
‫َل‬ ‫َع‬ ‫ـﺖ ْف‬ َ ‫ِا ْﺳ‬
The first Hamza is ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْ َــﻮ َﺻ‬, so should be ignored when comes in the
middle. The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬form is ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ِﺘـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So this baab is also called as ‫ـﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ﺑ‬
ٍ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ِﺘـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﺎل‬. Let us discuss one verb under this category, which is ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬. It
means he asked forgiveness.
The 14 past forms are ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮا‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ُــﺮ ْوا‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮ ْت‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮﺗـﺎ‬,
‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮ َن‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮ َت‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮﺗُـ ْﻢ‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮ ِت‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮﺗُـ َﻤـﺎ‬,
َّ ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮﺗ‬, ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْــﺮ ُت‬and ‫ــﺮ َـﺎ‬
‫ُــﻦ‬ ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ْ ﻧ‬.
 295

The sign of present tense will take Fatah. The “Five in pocket group”
forms are ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ َٔا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬and ‫ﻧ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬.
The “Mabni group” verbs are ‫ ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ْــﺮ َن‬and ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ْــﺮ َن‬.
The verbs in “Guest noon group” are ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ِان‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ِان‬,
‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ِان‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ ْو َن‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
َ ْ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔــ ِﺮﻳ‬, ‫ﺗ َْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ِان‬.
The ‫ـﻞ َٔا ْﻣ ٍﺮ‬ ُ ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ‬form is constructed from the present tense which is ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬.
Just remove the first letter of present tense and make it ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺰ ْو ٌم‬. It is
‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ْــﺮ‬.
The ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun for this verb is on the pattern ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ِﺘـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل‬. So the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of
the verb ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬is ‫ـﺎر‬ ٌ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ِﺘـﻐْـ َﻔ‬.
To obtain the ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) just replace the first ‫ ي‬of ‫ ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬to ‫م‬
along with Dhammah. It is ‫ ُﻣ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ٌــﺮ‬.
The ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬object) can be obtained by replacing the Kasrah of ‫ع‬
kalimah to Fatah in the doer form. Thus it is ‫ ُﻣ ْـﺴـﺘَـﻐْـ َﻔ ٌــﺮ‬.
The few other verbs in this baab in the format (root verb, present tense, its
meaning) are as below.
Day # 1 (‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ َﻌ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ‬, to ask help), (‫ ِا ْﺳـ َﺘ ْﺤ َﻴــﻰ‬, ‫ﻳ َـ ْﺴـﺘَــ ْﺤـ ِﻴــﻲ‬, to feel
shame/to let live), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ ْﻜـ َﺒ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ْﻜـﺒ ُِــﺮ‬, to be arrogant), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ َﻘ َّــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ِﻘ ُّــﺮ‬,
to dwell/reside), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَ ْـﺴـ َﻘــﻰ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَ ْـﺴـ ِﻘــﻰ‬, to ask for water).
 296

Day # 2 (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ ْﺒـﺪَ َل‬, ‫ﻳ َـ ْﺴـﺘَـ ْﺒـ ِﺪ ُل‬, to exchange/change), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ ْﻔـﺘَــ َﺢ‬, ‫ﻳ َـ ْﺴـﺘَـ ْﻔـ ِﺘــ ُﺢ‬, to
pray/want victory), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَــﻬ َْــﺰ َئ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَــﻬْــ ِﺰ ُئ‬, to mock), ( َ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَ ْــﻮﻗَـﺪ‬, ُ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَ ْــﻮ ِﻗـﺪ‬, to
kindle/lit (a fire)), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَــﺨ َْــﺮ َج‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَــﺨْــ ِﺮ ُج‬, to bring forth).
ْ َ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ِﻌـ ُﻢ‬
Day # 3 (‫ــﻄـ َﻌ َـﻢ‬ ْ َ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘ‬, to ask for food), (‫ـﺎب‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَــ َﺠ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘ‬, to
ُ ‫ــﺠـ ْﻴ‬
َ َ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﻊ‬
respond), (‫ــﻄـﺎ َع‬ ِ َ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘ‬, to be able/capable), (‫َـﺎث‬ َ ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـﻐ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬ُ ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ‬, to
call for relief), (‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَـ ْﻔـﺘَــﻰ‬, ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘَـ ْﻔـ ِﺘــﻲ‬, to inquire).
Note {Keeping together all the verbs present in Sayyid
Note: Sayyid--ul
ul--Isti
Istighfaar
ghfaar}}
ghfaar
(‫ﺧَـﻠَ َــﻖ‬, ‫ﻳَــﺨْـﻠُ ُــﻖ‬, to create), (‫ــﻄـﺎ َع‬
َ َ‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘ‬, ‫ــﻄـ ْﻴـ ُﻊ‬
ِ َ‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺘ‬, to be able/capable {Form-
{Form-
X} (‫ َﻋـﺎ َذ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُذ‬, to be under protection/to seek refuge), (‫ﺻـﻨَـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫ﻳ َ ْــﺼـﻨَـ ُﻊ‬, He
X}),
did/made), (‫ﺑَـﺎ َء‬, ‫ﻳَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ ُء‬, to return {and acknowledge/admit}) and (‫ﻏَـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬,
‫ﻳَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ‬, to forgive).
Four letter verbs (Seq # 195
195)
The verb which contains four letters are called as quadriliteral verbs ( ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫اﻟْـ ِﻔـ ْﻌ‬
ُّ The base form is ‫ ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَـ َﻞ‬and present tense is ‫ﻳُـ َﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ ُﻞ‬. As the verb is
ُّ ‫)اﻟــﺮﺑَـﺎ ِﻋ‬.
‫ــﻲ‬
made up of four letters, the present tense started with Dhammah. The
ِ ‫( ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬doer) is ‫ ُﻣـ َﻔـ ْﻌـ ِﻠـ ٌﻞ‬. This is the
pattern of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬. The ‫ـﻞ‬
only one Baab of four letter verb. Below are few examples of four letter
verbs in this Baab in the format (base form, present tense, meaning).
(‫ﺗ َْــﺮ َﺟ َـﻢ‬, ‫ﻳُـﺘَ ْــﺮ ِﺟـ ُﻢ‬, He translated),
(‫ﺑ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳُـ َﺒ ْـﺴـ ِﻤـ ُﻞ‬, He said bismillah),
 297

(‫ﺑَـ ْﻌـﺜ َ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳُـ َﺒـ ْﻌـ ِﺜ ُــﺮ‬, He scattered),

(‫ز ْﺣ َــﺰ َح‬,َ ‫ﻳُ َــﺰ ْﺣــ ِﺰ ُح‬, to remove) Quran (1:2:96),
(‫زﻟْ َــﺰ َل‬,َ ‫ﻳُ َــﺰﻟْــ ِﺰ ُل‬, to shake) Quran (17:22:1),
(‫و ْﺳ َــﻮ َس‬,َ ‫ﻳُ َــﻮ ْﺳــ ِﻮ ُس‬, to whisper) Quran (30:114:5),
(‫زﺑْ َــﺰ َب‬,َ ‫ﻳُ َــﺰﺑْــ ِﺰ ُب‬, to wander) Quran (5:4:143).
Mazeed verbs for base four letter verbs (Seq # 196
196)
There are three Baabs for Mazeed verbs of four letter verbs.
They are
a) ‫ﺗَـ َﻔـ ْﻌـﻠَـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَـﺘَـ َﻔـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ُﻞ‬
In this baab initial ‫ ت‬has been attached to the base form ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَـ َﻞ‬. Examples
are ‫( ﺗَـ َﻤــﻀْ ـ َﻤــ َﺾ‬He rinsed his mouth with water), ‫( ﺗ ََــﺮﻋ َْــﺮ َع‬He grew up).
b) ‫ ِا ْﻓـ َﻌـﻠَـ َّﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ِﻠـ ُّﻞ‬
In this baab ‫ ا‬is prefixed to the first radical and the fourth radical is
doubled. Examples are ‫( ِا ْﻃـ َﻤـﺎَٔ َّن‬He felt reassured, see Quran (3:2:260),
Quran (13:13:28)), ‫( ِا ْﺷـ َﻤـﺎَٔ َّز‬He detested, see Quran (24:39:45)) and ‫ِا ْﻗـﺸَ ـ َﻌ َّــﺮ‬
(He shivered, see Quran (23:39:23)).
c) ‫ ِاﻓْـ َﻌـﻨْـﻠَـ َﻞ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﻨْـ ِﻠـ ُﻞ‬
 298

In this baab ‫ ا‬is prefixed to the first radical and noon is added after the
‫( ِاﻓْ َ ﻧ‬He dispersed).
second radical. Example is ‫ــﺮْـ َﻘـ َﻊ‬
As these verbs are very few, detail level of conjugation is not done. But
reader is recommended to the do practice of conjugation whenever
possible.
Introduction to Passive voice (Seq # 197
197)
Consider the statement “Mohammed opened the door”. In English
language the tense/voice is active. Converting to passive voice leads to the
statement “The door was opened”. In Arabic language the doer of the
active tense is completely removed. Thus it is not possible to say “The door
was opened by Mohammed”. The object which receives the action ( ‫َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل‬
‫ )ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬takes the place of actual doer. This object taking the place of actual
doer is called as deputy doer (‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬
ُ ِ‫)ﻧ َـﺎﺋ‬. In Arabic language the active
tense is termed as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﻠُ ْــﻮ ٌم‬and the passive voice is termed as ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠــﻬ ُْــﻮ ٌل‬.
Passive voice form of the verb also comes by practice and time. Reader is
recommended to practice them as much as possible. We will discuss the
details of Passive voice in the next few topics.
Passive voice for Saalim verbs (Seq # 198
198)
In this section passive voice for Saalim verbs is being discussed. To convert
the active voice into passive voice for the past tense the last but one letter
gets Kasrah and the letters before it gets the following..
 299

i) Every Mutaharrik letter (letter having vowel sign) gets Dhammah.

ii) All the sukoon letters are left as it is. No change to Sukoon letters.
Examples
By following the above rules few examples in the format (active voice,
passive voice) are given below. The last but one letter in the below
examples is ‘‫ ’ع‬kalimah and it is getting Kasrah in passive form.
(‫ــﺢ‬ َ ‫)ﻓُـ ِﺘ‬, (‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬
َ َ‫ﻓَـﺘ‬, ‫ــﺢ‬ ِ ُ ‫)ﻧ‬, (‫ﺿَ َــﺮ َب‬, ‫)ﺿُ ــ ِﺮ َب‬, (‫ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬,َ ‫)ﺳـ ِﻤـ َﻊ‬.
َ َ ‫ﻧ‬, ‫ــﺼ َــﺮ‬ ُ
َ ‫ــﺢ اﻟْـ َﺒ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ َ َ‫( ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ ﻓَـﺘ‬Mohammed opened the door, active voice)
ُ ‫ــﺢ اﻟْـ َﺒ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ ُ ‫)اﻟْـ َﺒ‬
َ ‫( ﻓُـ ِﺘ‬The door was opened, passive voice, Deputy doer= ‫ـﺎب‬
In the present tense the first letter (sign of the present tense) always gets
Dhammah and the last but one letter gets Fatah.
Examples
By following the above rule for present tense, few examples in the format
(active voice, passive voice) are given below. The last but one letter in the
below examples is ‘‫ ’ع‬kalimah and it is getting Fatah.
(‫ﻳَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬, ‫)ﻳُـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬, (‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ‬
ُ ْ‫ﻳَـﻨ‬, ‫)ﻳُـﻨْـ َـﺼ ُــﺮ‬, (‫ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب‬, ‫)ﻳُــﻀْ َــﺮ ُب‬, (‫ﻳ َ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬.
‫( ﻳُ ْـﺴـ َﻤـ ُﻊ‬It is listened)
‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ‬َ ْ‫( ﻳُـﻨ‬It is helped)
 300

If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬is a pronoun, then its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬form will be used in the
passive form.
‫ــﺼ َــﺮ ُﻫ ْـﻢ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬
َ َ ‫( ﻧ‬Mohammed helped them, active voice)
ِ ُ ‫( ﻧ‬They were helped, passive voice, Deputy doer = ‫ْ)و‬
‫ــﺼ ُــﺮ ْوا‬
Passive voice for Misaal verbs (Seq # 199)
199)
In the Misaal verbs the past tense passive form is same as for Saalim verbs.
One example is ( َ‫و َﺟـﺪ‬,َ َ‫)و ِﺟـﺪ‬. ُ In the present tense passive form the first
radical will appear back as shown in the below examples with format
(present tense active voice, present tense passive voice).
(‫ﻳَـ ِﻘ ُـﻒ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮﻗَ ُـﻒ‬, ( ُ‫ــﺠـﺪ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ُ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﺟـﺪ‬, (‫ﻳَــ ِﺰ ُن‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َز ُن‬, (‫ـﺐ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ‫ـﺐ‬
ُ ‫ــﺠ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﺻـ ُﻞ‬,
ُ ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬, (‫ــﺼـ ُﻞ‬
( ُ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌـﺪ‬, ُ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﻋـﺪ‬, (‫ﻳَـ ِﻠ ُــﺞ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮﻟ َ ُــﺞ‬, (ُ‫ﻳَـ ِﻌــﻆ‬, ُ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﻋــﻆ‬, ( ُ‫ﻳَـ ِﻠـﺪ‬, ُ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮﻟَـﺪ‬, (‫ــﺼ ُـﻒ‬
ِ َ ‫ﻳ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﺻ ُـﻒ‬,
ُ ‫ﻳَــﻬ‬, ‫َـﺐ‬
(‫ﻳَــﻀَ ـ ُﻊ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮﺿَ ـ ُﻊ‬, (‫َـﺐ‬ ُ ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮﻫ‬, (‫ﻳ َ َـﺴـ ُﻊ‬, ‫)ﻳُ ْــﻮ َﺳـ ُﻊ‬. Example: Quran (30:112:3) has
both active and passive present tense forms of the verb َ‫ووﻟَـﺪ‬.َ .
Passive voice for Ajwaf and Naaqis verbs (Seq # 200)
200)
Ajwaf verbs
Irrespective of ajwaf verb groups (a-u, a-i, i-a) the past tense fixed pattern
is ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻴـ َﻞ‬and present tense fixed pattern is ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ﻳُـ َﻔ‬.
Examples of past tense are given below.
ِ (‫ﻧ َـﺎ َم‬, ‫) ِﻧـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬, (‫َـﺎف‬
(‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬, ‫) ِﻗـ ْﻴـ َﻞ‬, (‫ﺑَـﺎ َع‬, ‫)ﺑِـ ْﻴـ َﻊ‬, (‫زا َد‬,َ َ‫)زﻳْـﺪ‬, َ ‫ﺧ‬, ‫) ِﺧـ ْﻴ َـﻒ‬.
 301

Examples of present tense are given below.

(‫ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬, ‫ـﺎل‬
ُ ‫ )ﻳُـ َﻘ‬Quran (17:21:60), (‫ﻳَـﺒِـ ْﻴـ ُﻊ‬, ‫)ﻳُـ َﺒـﺎ ُع‬, ( ُ‫ﻳَــ ِﺰﻳْـﺪ‬, ‫)ﻳُ َــﺰا ُد‬, (‫ﻳَـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬, ‫)ﻳُـﻨَـﺎ ُم‬,
ُ ‫ﻳَــﺨ‬, ‫َـﺎف‬
(‫َـﺎف‬ ُ ‫)ﻳُــﺨ‬.
Naaqis verbs
The passive form of Naaqis verbs with ‫ ل‬kalimah as ‫ و‬has an exception.
Both in the past and present tenses ‫ و‬gets converted to ‫ى‬. As an example
instead of ‫ ُد ِﻋ َــﻮ‬it is ‫ـﻰ‬ َ ‫ ُد ِﻋ‬in past tense (refer to Quran (24:40:12)). Instead
‫ــﻰ‬
of ‫ﻳُ ْـﺪ َﻋــﻮ‬, it is ‫ ﻳُ ْـﺪ َﻋــﻰ‬in present tense (refer to Quran (28:61:7)).
Past tense examples
(‫ﺗ ََـﻼ‬, ‫ـﻲ‬‫ )ﺗُـ ِﻠ َــﻲ‬Quran (9:8:2), (‫ﻫَـﺪَ ى‬, ‫ )ﻫُـ ِﺪ َي‬Quran (4:3:101), (‫ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬, ‫)ﻧ ُ ِـﺴ َــﻲ‬,
ِ ‫ ) ُﻗ‬Quran (24:40:78).
(‫ﻧَــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫)ﻧُــﻬ َِــﻲ‬, (‫ﻗَــﻀَ ــﻰ‬, ‫ــﻀ َــﻲ‬
Present tense examples
(‫ﻳَـ ْﺘـﻠُــﻮ‬, ‫ــﻰ‬
‫ )ﻳُـ ْﺘـﻠَ ـﻰ‬Quran (4:3:101), (‫ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪى‬, ‫)ﻳُــﻬْـﺪَ ى‬, (‫ﻳَـﻨْ َـﺴــﻰ‬, ‫ )ﻳُـﻨْ َـﺴــﻰ‬Quran
(16:20:126), (‫ﻳَـ ْﻨــﻬَــﻰ‬, ‫)ﻳُـ ْﻨــﻬَــﻰ‬.
ُ ‫ــو ُل ا ْلــ ُمــ ْطــلَــ‬
‫ق‬ ْ ‫( ا ْلــ َمــ ْفــ ُع‬Absolute object) (Seq # 201
201)
The absolute object is a ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of a verb. It comes in a sentence having the
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. It has four uses as below.
same verb. It is always ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
a) Emphasis
 302

It occurs in the sentence in the form of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of a verb occurring for
the sake of emphasis. As an example the verse Quran (6:4:164) uses
the Masdar ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ ًﻤـﺎ‬for the verb ‫( َﻛـﻠ َّ َـﻢ‬He spoke). Another example is
Quran (29:73:4) which uses ‫ ﺗ َْــﺮِﺗـ ْﻴ ًـﻼ‬for the verb ‫( َرﺗ َّـ َﻞ‬He read slowly).
b) To specify number
The absolute object is used to specify the number. Consider an Arabic
sentence ‫ َﺳــ َﺠـ ْﺪ ُت َﺳــ ْﺠـﺪَ ًة َوا ِﺣـﺪَ ًة‬. Its translation is ‘I performed One
Sajdah’. Another example is Quran (5:4:102), where single
assault/attack is mentioned (‫) َﻣـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ًﺔ َوا ِﺣـﺪَ ًة‬.
c) To specify how the action was done
In this case the absolute object is used to specify how the action was
done. Consider an Arabic sentence ‫ـﺖ اﻟْـ ُﻘ ْــﺮا ٓ َن ِﺣـ ْﻔــ ًﻈـﺎ َﺟـﻴِّـﺪً ا‬
ُ ‫ َﺣـ ِﻔ ْــﻈ‬. Its
translation is ‘I memorized the Quran perfectly’. Quran (22:33:70)
and Quran (22:33:71) are examples for the verbs ‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬and ‫ـﺎز‬ َ َ ‫ﻓ‬.
d) As a substitute for the main verb
In this case only the ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬of the main verb is used skipping the
main verb itself. Example is ‫ﺷـ ْﻜ ًــﺮا‬.ُ Its translation is ‘I thank you’. It is
substitute for the main verb ‫( َٔا ْﺷـ ُﻜ ُــﺮ‬I thank). Another example is ‫َﺻـ ْﺒ ًــﺮا‬
(Have patience). It is substitute for the ‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form of the verb ‫ِا ْﺻـﺒ ِْــﺮ‬
(‘be patient’). As third example (with with little knowledge of author of
 303

this book and for the purpose of understanding), understanding consider the word
ٌ ‫( ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬pattern: ‫ )ﻓُـ ْﻌ َـﻼ ٌن‬which is a ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬noun form derived from
‫ـﺎن‬
the root ‫( س ب ح‬meaning of this root is “to swim on the surface”).
The meaning of ‫ـﺎن‬ ٌ ‫ ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬is someone that floats above the incorrect
statements made against him. Hence that someone is perfect (no
imperfections at all) and can be glorified. Now this overall concept is
given a name glorification. glorification The Arabic text ‫اهلل‬ ِ ّ ٰ ‫ـﺎن‬
ُ ‫ ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬is ‫ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬
‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬and it means “Glorification of Allah”. The verb form
ِٕ ُٔ
ُ ّ ‫ ا َﺳ‬means “I glorify”. A question can be raised “To whom the
‫ِــﺢ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ـ‬
glorification is being done ?”. A suitable answer can be “Glorification
of Allah”, and this answer can be used for emphasis. emphasis This emphasis
comes as absolute object (‫ــﻄـﻠَ ُــﻖ‬ ْ ‫ )اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل اﻟْـ ُﻤ‬and it will be ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
So the Arabic text of English statement “I glorify, the glorification of
Allah” is ‫اهلل‬ ‫ـﺎن ا ٰ ّ ِهلل‬
َ ‫ِــﺢ ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬ُ ّ‫ ُٔا َﺳـﺒ‬. Now the main verb itself is skipped and it
is just ‫اهلل‬ ‫ـﺎن ا ٰ ّ ِهلل‬ َ ‫ﺳﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬.ُ Thus the text ‫اهلل‬ ‫ـﺎن ا ٰ ّ ِهلل‬
َ ‫ ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬has a hidden verb. verb So
when someone says ‫اهلل‬ ِ ّ ٰ ‫ـﺎن‬
َ ‫ ُﺳـ ْﺒــ َﺤ‬he means (or thinks) that “Allah is
perfect” or “Allah is free from any imperfection”. It is used in Quran
frequently when someone makes incorrect statements against Allah
(example: He has a son, He has partners etc)..
 304

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 1 (Seq # 202)

It has been learnt that Arabic language has many ways of emphasis. In this
topic we will learn to have the emphasis with verb by using energetic ‫ن‬. It
is written in the Arabic as ‫ َّن‬and termed as ‫ﻧ ُ ْــﻮ ُن اﻟـﺘَّ ْــﻮ ِﻛـ ْﻴـ ِﺪ اﻟـﺜ َّـ ِﻘـ ْﻴـﻠَـ ُﺔ‬. It is equal
to ‫ْــﻦ‬
َ ‫ﻧ‬. It comes with verb only in present tense and imperative tense. In
order to understand this topic it has been divided into few sessions.
Let us add this ‫ ن‬to “Five in pocket group” verbs of root ‫ـﺐ‬ َ َ‫ َﻛـﺘ‬.
َّ ‫ َّن = ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬+ ‫ـﺐ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ َّن = ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬+ ‫ـﺐ‬
ُ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬
The final Dhammah will be replaced by Fatah and ‫ َّن‬got attached to the
verb. Thus the “Five in pocket group” verbs with energetic ‫ ن‬are ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬,
َّ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ُٔا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬. After this change, these “Five in
pocket group” verbs become ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:23). This verse
has energetic ‫ ن‬with the ‫ﺗَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُل‬.
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 2 (Seq # 203)
Let us now add energetic ‫ ن‬to “Guest noon group”.
َ ْ ‫ ﻧ‬+ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ َن‬
‫ــﻦ‬
 305

Because of three successive ‫ ن‬we cannot pronounce it. So the ‫ن‬

representing ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case gets dropped as below.
َ ْ‫ ﻧ‬+ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ‬
‫ــﻦ‬
Now there is sukoon on ‫ و‬and ‫ن‬, thus meeting of two sukoons is not
possible. So dropping ‫ و‬and it becomes as below.
َ ‫ ﻧ‬+ ‫ــﻦ = ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒـ‬
‫ْــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ‬
Similarly for ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ َن‬, we get ‫ــﻦ‬
َّ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ‬.
In case of duals we only drop the ‫ ن‬representing ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case and the
energetic ‫ ن‬gets a Kasrah. Example: ‫ـﺎن‬ ِّ ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬and ‫ـﺎن‬
ِّ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬.
In case of second person feminine singular ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬both the ‫ن‬
representing ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case and the doer ‫ ي‬gets drop as below.
َّ ‫ َّن = ﺗ َـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـﺒ‬+ ‫ـﺐ‬
‫ِــﻦ‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـﺒِـ ْﻴ‬
ِ ‫ َّن = ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘ‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
In the case of “Mabni group” (‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ ﻫ‬and ‫ ) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘــ َّﻦ‬one extra ‫ ا‬is added between
the noons and energetic ‫ ن‬gets a Kasrah as below.
ِّ َ‫ َّن = ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ْﺒـﻨ‬+ ‫ ا‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ْﺒ‬
ِّ َ‫ َّن = ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ْﺒـﻨ‬+ ‫ ا‬+ ‫ــﻦ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ ْﺒ‬
 306

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 3 (Seq # 204)

The following table provides the verb forms after adding energetic ‫ ن‬to the
‫ ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬form.
With ‫َّن‬ ‫ِﻓـ ْﻌ ُﻞ َٔا ْﻣــ ٍﺮ‬ Comment
Remove the jazm & put the
َّ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘ‬
‫ـﺐ‬
Fatah.
ِّ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﺒـﺎ‬ Same as dual in present tense.
َّ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ ُﺒ ْــﻮا‬ Same as plural in present tense.
Same as second person feminine
َّ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـﺒ‬
‫ِــﻦ‬ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـﺒِــﻲ‬
singular in present tense.
ِّ َ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ ْﺒـﻨ‬
‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ ْﺒ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ Same as in “Mabni group”.
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 4 (Optional usage) (Seq # 205)
The usage of energetic ‫ ن‬is optional in case of amr and present tense (if it
ُ َ‫)اﻟــﻄـﻠ‬.
is ‫ـﺐ‬ َّ
Example of amr
َّ ‫( ُا ْﻛـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬Write down in your book)
َ ‫ــﻦ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬
‫ِـﻚ‬
Example of present tense (‫ـﺐ‬ ُ َ‫اﻟــﻄـﻠ‬
َّ )
َ ‫ــﻦ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ِﻛـﺘَـﺎﺑ‬
‫ِـﻚ ؟‬ َّ ‫َـﻞ ﺗَـ ْﻜـ ُﺘـ َﺒ‬
ْ ‫( ﻫ‬Have you written in your book ?)
 307

Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 5 (Compulsory usage) (Seq #

206)
The use of energetic ‫ ن‬is compulsory in present tense if it is Jawaab Al
Qasm. However, the following conditions should be met.
a) The verb should be affirmative.
b) The verb should be future.
c) The ‫ ل‬should be attached to the verb.
Example
By Allah! I will help him.
‫ــﺮ َّـ ُﻪ‬ ُ ْ ‫ﷲ َﺳ ْــﻮ َف ﻟَـﺎَٔﻧ‬
‫ــﺼ َ ﻧ‬ ِ ‫َو‬
Understanding Energetic ‫ ن‬session # 6 (Near Compulsory
Compulsory usage)
(Seq # 207)
The conditional particle ‫ ا َّﻣـﺎ‬is equal to ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬+ ‫ا ْن‬. The meaning of this particle
ِٕ ِٕ
is “If”. It is near compulsory to use energetic ‫ ن‬after the conditional
particle ‫ا َّﻣـﺎ‬. Quran (15:17:23) is an example of this case.
ِٕ
 308

Learning
Learning more about Diptotes (Seq # 208)
We know that a diptote noun has Fatah when it is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬. But it behaves
like a regular noun and gets Kasrah in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case in the following
conditions.
1) When it has the definite article ‫ ال‬then a diptote declines normally.
Example: Quran (2:2:187) has diptote noun ُ‫ـﺎﺟـﺪ‬ ِ ‫ َﻣ َـﺴ‬with the definite
article ‫ ال‬and got the Kasrah in ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬case. Refer to Quran
(29:70:40) and Quran (28:58:11) for other examples.
2) When it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬then diptote declines normally. Observe ‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ َٔا ْﺣ َـﺴ‬in
the verse Quran (30:95:4). It took Kasrah and it is ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬. A similar
case for the diptote noun ‫ َا ْﺣـ َﻜـ ُﻢ‬in the verse Quran (30:95:8). As an
additional example, observe ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـﻨَـﺎ ِﻛ‬in the verse Quran (29:67:15),
which took Kasrah and acting as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
َ ‫( ))ا ْل‬Seq # 209)
State or Circumstance (‫ــحــا ُل‬
State or Circumstance can be represented in Arabic language by a noun in
ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬case. In Arabic language this noun is called as ‫ـﺎل‬
‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫اﻟْــ َﺤ‬. The noun of
whose, the state is described is termed as ‫ـﺎل‬ ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬
ُ ‫ﺻـﺎ ِﺣ‬.َ
Example: ‫( ﻗَـﺎ َل ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ َﺟـﺎ ِﻟ ًـﺴـﺎ‬Mohammed said while sitting).
ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬
Here ‫ ُﻣــ َﺤـ َّﻤـ ٌﺪ‬is ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫اﻟْــ َﺤ‬.
ُ ‫ َﺻـﺎ ِﺣ‬and ‫ َﺟـﺎ ِﻟ ًـﺴـﺎ‬is ‫ـﺎل‬
ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬
‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ َﺻـﺎ ِﺣ‬can be one of the following
 309

a) ‫( ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬doer)

b) ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬ ُ ِ‫( ﻧ َـﺎﺋ‬deputy doer)
c) ‫( َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ﺑِـ ٖﻪ‬object)
d) ‫( َاﻟْـ ُﻤـ ْﺒـﺘَـﺪَ ُٔا‬subject)
e) ‫( اﻟْــﺨَـ َﺒ ُــﺮ‬predicate)
ُ ‫ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬can be a single word or a sentence as learned earlier in the topic of
‫ـﺎل‬
circumstances ‫و‬.َ ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬and ‫ـﺎل‬
ِ ‫ـﺐ اﻟْــ َﺤ‬
ُ ‫ َﺻـﺎ ِﺣ‬should match in number and
gender. Quran (15:17:24) has a word ‫( َﺻ ِﻐـ ْﻴــ ًﺮا‬small) representing ‫ـﺎل‬ ُ ‫اﻟْــ َﺤ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:48). The
approximate meaning in English language for the beginning part of
the verse is “And they will be set before your Lord in (lines as)
rows…”. Here the rows is a state or circumstance. Thus represented
by the Arabic word ‫ َﺻـﻔًّـﺎ‬which is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨــ ُﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
‫ الــتﱠــ ْمــيـِـ ْيــ ُز‬noun (Seq # 210)
210)
This noun helps us to understand an unclear idea. It makes the quantity
being counted/measured or an unclear concept clear in the sentence. This
noun is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. There are two kinds of ‫ اﻟـﺘَّـ ْﻤـ ِﻴـ ْﻴ ُــﺰ‬.
a) ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻤـ ِﻴـ ْﻴ ُــﺰ اﻟـ ُّﺬ ِات‬This comes after quantity)
 310

1) Number (refer ‫ َﻛ ْــﻮ َﻛـ ًﺒـﺎ‬in the verse Quran (12:12:4))

2) Linear measurement
3) Measure of capacity
4) Weight
b) ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻤـ ِﻴـ ْﻴ ُــﺰ اﻟـ ِﻨّ ْـﺴـ َﺒـ ِﺔ‬This comes after unclear concept) Example refer ‫ُﻗ َّــﻮ ًة‬
in the verse Quran (24:41:15). It is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬in this verse acting as
‫اﻟـﺘَّـ ْﻤـ ِﻴـ ْﻴ ُــﺰ‬.
ْ ‫( ا ْلــ َمــ ْفــ ُع‬or) ‫ــو ُل ِألَ ْجــلِــ ِه‬
ُ‫ــو ُل لَــه‬ ْ ‫( ا ْلــ َمــ ْفــ ُع‬Seq # 211)
This noun is a ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬which specify the reason for doing an action. This
‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬denotes a mental situation like fear, love, desire, respect etc. This
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
Example
َ ‫ــﻦ اﻟْـ َﻤ‬
‫ــﻄــ ِﺮ‬ َ ‫ﻟَـ ْﻢ َٔاﺧ ُْــﺮ ْج ﺧ َْــﻮﻓًـﺎ ِﻣ‬
I did not go out for fear of rain.
This ‫ َﻣـ ْـﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬is mostly with ‫ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْــ ٌﻦ‬, but it may also be ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. In the verse
Quran (15:17:31) ‫َـﺸـ َﻴـ َﺔ‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬coming as ‫اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل ﻟ َـ ُﻪ‬. Another example
ْ ‫ ﺧ‬is ‫ـﺎف‬
is Quran (1:2:19), where ‫( َﺣ َـﺬ َر‬fear) is ‫ـﺎف‬ ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬coming as ‫اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ُل ﻟ َـ ُﻪ‬.
 311

Introduction to exceptions (Seq # 212)

212)
Consider the below student
All the students have passed except Khalid. In Arabic language it can be
translated as
‫اﻟــﻄ َّـﻼ ُب ُﻛـﻠُّــﻬ ُْـﻢ ا َّﻻ ﺧَـﺎ ِﻟـﺪً ا‬
ُّ ‫ــﺢ‬َ ‫ﻧَــ َﺠ‬
ِٕ
It is an example of exception clause. As understanding exception in Arabic
language is important, we will discuss this topic in couple of next sessions.
Elements of exceptions (Seq # 213)
213)
There are three elements of exceptions
a) In the last topic, ‫ ﺧَـﺎ ِﻟـﺪً ا‬is excepted. It is termed in Arabic language as
‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ‬.
b) In the last topic, Khalid is excepted from the students. Thus exception
is made from the students. The noun from which exception (in this
case ‫)اﻟــﻄ َّـﻼ ُب‬ ُّ is made is termed as ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ ِﻣـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬.
c) In the last topic, the tool of exception (‫ ) ٔادا ُة ا ِﻻ ْﺳـ ِﺘـﺜْـﻨـﺎ ِء‬is ‫ا َّﻻ‬. This ‫ ا َّﻻ‬is a
ِٕ ِٕ
particle. There are many tools of exception. But we study only three
which are ‫ا َّﻻ‬, ‫ـــﺮ‬ ُ ‫ ﻏَـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ﺳ َــﻮى‬.ِ ‫ـــﺮ‬
َ ‫ ﻏَـ ْﻴ‬and ‫ ِﺳ َــﻮى‬are the nouns.
ِٕ
 312

Types of exceptions (Seq # 214

214)
14)
If ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ‬is of same kind as ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ ِﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻪ‬then exception is said to be
ِ َّ‫ ُﻣـﺘ‬. If ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ‬is of different kind from ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ ِﻣـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬then
‫ــﺼـ ٌﻞ‬
exception is said to be ‫ــﻄـ ٌﻊ‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨـﻘ‬.
From the second point of view, the exception is ‫ ﺗَـﺎ ٌم‬if ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ ِﻣـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬is
present, otherwise the exception is said to be ٌ‫ ُﻣـ َﻔ َّــﺮغ‬. In the ٌ‫ ُﻣـ َﻔ َّــﺮغ‬exception
the sentence is always negative, or prohibitive or interrogative.
From the third point of view, the sentence containing the exception is of
two types a) Affirmative sentence (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬or b) Negative, prohibitive or
ٍ ‫)ﻏَـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬.
interrogative sentence (‫ـﺐ‬
ُ ّ ٰ ‫ َﻻ ِا ٰﻟـ َﻪ ِا َّﻻ‬is ‫ـﺐ‬
Thus the Arabic statement ‫اهلل‬ ٍ ‫ﻏَـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬.
Grammatical Rules of exceptions
exceptions (Seq # 215)
215)
The following are the grammatical rules of exceptions
ِ ‫ ُﻣـ ْﻨـ َﻘ‬then the exception is always ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬.
1) If the exception is ‫ــﻄـ ٌﻊ‬
Example: Quran (15:18:50).
ِ َّ‫ ُﻣـﺘ‬then the following applies
2) If the exception is ‫ــﺼـ ٌﻞ‬
a) If the sentence is ‫ـﺐ‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬. Example:
ٌ ‫ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬then the exception is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
‫ ﻗَـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ ًـﻼ‬in Quran (1:2:83).
 313

b) If the sentence is ‫ـﺐ‬ ٍ ‫ ﻏَـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬then the exception is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬, or
may have the same case as that of ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ ِﻣـﻨْـ ُﻪ‬. Example: ‫َر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ٌل‬
in Quran (4:3:144).
3) If the exception is ٌ‫ ُﻣـ َﻔ َّــﺮغ‬then it is not in fixed case and will follow the
‫ اﻟْـﺎﻋ َْــﺮ ُاب‬as per need. It will become clear when we remove the
ِٕ
exception and observe the role/function of the ‫ َاﻟْـ ُﻤ ْـﺴـﺘَـﺜْـﻨَــﻰ‬. Example is
the word with meaning “Satan” in the verse Quran (15:18:63). It is
the doer of the Form-IV verb ‫ َٔاﻧْ َـﺴــﻰ‬.
4) The exception after ‫ ﻏَـ ْﻴ ُــﺮ‬and ‫ ِﺳ َــﻮى‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬as this exception comes
as ‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬.
ِٕ
Verses Quran (15:18:16), Quran (15:18:22) and Quran (15:18:39) are few
examples with negative exceptions.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: Read the verse Quran (15:18:50). The part of
the verse is an affirmative sentence with exception (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬and the
exception (‫ ) ِاﺑْـ ِﻠـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬which is a diptote noun is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬
ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬.
Introduction to numbers (Seq
(Seq # 216)
216)
Numbers are little difficult in Arabic language. So we learn in few
subsequent sessions and we limit our scope to learn few selected numbers.
The reader is highly recommended to read other books in references to
 314

have complete idea. The number is termed as ‫ َﻋـﺪَ ٌد‬. The thing being
counted is termed as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬. The following are the masculine and feminine
Arabic words used for 1 to 10.
(masculine, ‫وا ِﺣـ ٌﺪ‬/َ ‫ َٔا َﺣـ ٌﺪ‬, ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ ِاﺛْـﻨ‬, ‫ﺛَ َـﻼ ٌث‬, ‫ َٔا ْرﺑَـ ٌﻊ‬, ‫ﺧَـ ْﻤ ٌـﺲ‬, ٌّ‫ﺳـﺖ‬,ِ ‫ﺳـ ْﺒـ ٌﻊ‬,َ ‫ﺛَـ َﻤـﺎ ِﻧ ْــﻲ‬, ‫ ِﺗ ْـﺴـ ٌﻊ‬,
ْ ‫)ﻋ‬
‫َـﺸ ٌــﺮ‬
(feminine, ‫وا ِﺣـﺪَ ٌة‬/‫ى‬ ِ َ‫ ِاﺛْـﻨَـﺘ‬, ‫ﺛَ َـﻼﺛَـ ٌﺔ‬, ‫ َٔا ْرﺑَـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ‬, ‫ﺧَـ ْﻤ َـﺴـ ٌﺔ‬, ‫ﺳـﺘَّـ ٌﺔ‬,ِ ‫ﺳـ ْﺒـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ‬,َ ‫ﺛَـ َﻤـﺎ ِﻧـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬,
َ َ‫ا ْﺣـﺪ‬,ِٕ ‫ـﺎن‬
‫ ِﺗ ْـﺴـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ‬, ‫َـﺸ َــﺮ ٌة‬
ْ ‫)ﻋ‬.
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: The feminine form of three, five and seven is
present in the verse Quran (15:18:22).
Numbers 1 and 2 (Seq # 217)
217)
The numbers 1 and 2 always come as adjectives. Examples are given below.
One god (‫ ) ِا ٰﻟـ ٌﻪ َّوا ِﺣـ ٌﺪ‬refer to Quran (16:18:110)
One female student (‫َ)ﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـ ٌﺔ َّوا ِﺣـﺪَ ٌة‬
One female sheep (‫ )ﻧَـ ْﻌـ َﺠـ ٌﺔ َّوا ِﺣـﺪَ ٌة‬refer to Quran (23:38:23)
Two male students (‫ـﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ـﺎن اﺛْـﻨ‬ِ ‫َ)ﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒ‬
ِ َ‫َ)ﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـﺘ‬
ِ َ‫ـﺎن اﺛْـﻨَـﺘ‬
Two female students (‫ـﺎن‬
 315

Numbers 3 to 10 (Seq # 218)

218)
The numbers 3 to 10 are always ‫ـﺎف ِاﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬ ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬. These numbers do not
agree with ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬. If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬is masculine then these numbers are
feminine. If the ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬is feminine then these numbers are masculine.
Another important point is that ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬is always written as plural.
Examples are given below.
Three nights ( ٍ‫( )ﺛَـ ٰﻠ ُﺚ ﻟَـ َﻴـﺎل‬Here night is feminine)
Three days (‫( )ﺛَ َـﻼﺛَـ ُﺔ َاﻳَّـﺎ ٍم‬Here day is masculine)
ٍ ٰ‫( ِﰱ ﺗِ ْـﺴـﻊ ِ ٰاﻳ‬among (in) the nine signs, Here sign is feminine, Quran
‫ـﺖ‬
(19:27:12))
ٍ‫( ِﺗ ْﺴ َﻌ ُﺔ َرﻫْــﻂ‬nine family heads, Here family head is masculine, Quran
(19:27:48))
Numbers 11 to 19 (Seq # 219)
219)
The numbers 11 to 19 are compositions of two words. In this case ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬is
always singular and ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد( َﻣـﻨ‬is also ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬up to 99). For 11 and
12 both the parts of the composition agrees in gender with ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬. For 13
to 19 the first part does not agree and second part agrees with ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٌد‬in
gender. Examples are given below.
11 male students (‫) َٔا َﺣـﺪَ َﻋـﺸَ َــﺮ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
 316

11 female students (‫َـﺸ َــﺮ َة َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـ ًﺔ‬

ْ ‫)ا ْﺣـﺪَ ى ﻋ‬
ِٕ
12 male students (‫) ِاﺛْـﻨَـﺎ َﻋـﺸَ َــﺮ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
ْ ‫) ِاﺛْـﻨَـﺘَـﺎ ﻋ‬
12 female students (‫َـﺸ َــﺮ َة َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـ ًﺔ‬
15 male students (‫)ﺧَـ ْﻤ َـﺴـ َﺔ َﻋـﺸَ َــﺮ َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
15 female students (‫َـﺸ َــﺮ َة َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـ ًﺔ‬
ْ ‫)ﺧَـ ْﻤ َـﺲ ﻋ‬
Numbers 20, 30, 40 …. 90 (Seq # 220)
220)
These numbers are called as ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻌـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُد‬in Arabic language. They always come
in the form of sound masculine plural. Examples are given below.
Forty students (‫) َٔا ْرﺑَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
Twenty students (‫) ِﻋ ْـﺸ ُــﺮ ْو َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟ ًﺒـﺎ‬
Learning few middle numbers (Seq # 221)
Let us learn few selected numbers here, for example 34, 56, 79 and 99. The
units should be read first (from right to left) in Arabic language. Between
units and tens a ‫ َو‬is placed. Examples are given below.
Thirty four male students (‫) َٔا ْرﺑَـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ َو ﺛَ َـﻼﺛُ ْــﻮ َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
Fifty six male students (‫) ِﺳـﺘَّـ ٌﺔ َو ﺧَـ ْﻤ ُـﺴ ْــﻮ َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ ًﺒـﺎ‬
Seventy nine male students (‫) ِﺗ ْـﺴـ َﻌـ ٌﺔ َو َﺳـ ْﺒـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـﺒًـﺎ‬
Seventy nine female students (‫) ِﺗ ْـﺴـ ٌﻊ َو َﺳـ ْﺒـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن َﻃـﺎ ِﻟـ َﺒـ ًﺔ‬
 317

Ninety nine female sheeps (‫ ) ِﺗ ْـﺴـ ٌﻊ َو ِﺗ ْـﺴـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ َن ﻧ َـ ْﻌــ َﺠـ ًﺔ‬refer to Quran (23:38:23)
The ordinal numbers (Seq # 222)
This topic deals with the ordinal numbers from “first” to “tenth”. The
word for “first” is ‫ َٔا َّو ُل‬. The ordinal numbers from 2 to 10 comes on the
pattern of ‫ﻓَـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬. In Arabic “second”, “third”, “fourth” etc till “tenth” are
ٍ َ‫{ ﺛ‬originally ‫ــﻲ‬
written as (‫ـﺎن‬ ٌ ‫ﺛَـﺎ ِﻟ‬, ‫راﺑِـ ٌﻊ‬,َ ‫ﺧَـﺎ ِﻣ ٌـﺲ‬, ‫ﺳـﺎ ِد ٌس‬,َ ‫ﺳـﺎﺑِـ ٌﻊ‬,َ ‫ﺛَـﺎ ِﻣــ ٌﻦ‬, ‫َـﺎﺳـ ٌﻊ‬
ٌ ‫}ﺛَـﺎ ِﻧ‬, ‫ـﺚ‬ ِ ‫ﺗ‬,
ِ ‫) َﻋ‬.
‫ـﺎﺷ ٌــﺮ‬
Exercises
1) State TRUE or FALSE: “Fourth of them”, “sixth of them”, “eight of
them” are ‫ـﺎف ِاﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬and is present in the verse Quran
(15:18:22).
Few miscellenious grammatic rules (Seq # 223)
1. As an exception, non-Arabic proper nouns (foreign name nouns)
having only three letters and the second letter has sukoon are
triptotes Examples: ‫ ﻟُ ْــﻮ ٌط‬, ‫ﻧ ُ ْــﻮ ٌح‬
triptotes.
2. As an exception certain proper name nouns have ‫( ال‬Al). Examples
ُ ‫ اﻟْــ ُﺤ َـﺴـ ْﻴ‬etc.
ُ ‫اﻟْــ َﺤ َـﺴ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
are ‫ــﻦ‬
3. As we learnt earlier, the word َ‫ ك‬is a preposition and the noun coming
after this َ‫ ك‬is ‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬. The meaning of this preposition is ‘like’.
ِ ‫ـﺖ َﻛـﺎﻟْـ َﻤ ْـﺴ‬
Example is ‫ــﺠـ ِﺪ‬ ُ ‫( ٰﻫ َـﺬا اﻟْـ َﺒـ ْﻴ‬This house is like the mosque).
 318

This preposition cannot be used directly with pronouns. In such a

case the word ‫ ِﻣـﺜْـ ٌﻞ‬is added between the preposition and the pronoun.
Example is Quran (25:42:11).
4. Regarding Ya-Mutakallim: (a) Sometimes the “Ya-Mutakallim” is
dropped from the attached form (‫) ِﻧ ْــﻰ‬. Instead of ‫ ِدﻳْـ ِﻨ ْــﻰ‬it is ‫ــﻦ‬ ِ ْ‫ ِدﻳ‬in the
verse Quran (30:109:6) and instead of ‫ َد َﻋـﺎ ِﻧ ْــﻰ‬it is ‫ـﺎن‬ ِ ‫ َد َﻋ‬in the verse
Quran(2:2:186). (b) As Ya-Mutakallim gets Fatah if a ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬with
sukoon comes before it, ‫ــﻲ‬ َّ َ‫ َﻋـﻠ‬is constructed as (‫ ْي‬+‫ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴــ‬, ‫ َي‬+‫ َﻋـﻠَـ ْﻴــ‬,
َّ َ‫) َﻋـﻠ‬. Similar case is for ‫ــﻲ‬
‫ــﻲ‬ َّ ‫ ِﻓ‬and ‫ــﻲ‬ َّ َ ‫اﻟ‬.ِٕ (c) When Ya-Mutakallim
becomes ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬then it can be read with either jazam or Fatah.
ِٕ
Two examples of reading with Fatah are ‫( ﺑَـ ْﻴـ ِﺘ َــﻲ‬my house, Quran
(1:2:125)) and ‫( َو ْﺟــﻬ َِــﻲ‬my face, Quran (7:6:79)).
5. The past and imperative tenses do not undergo any change. Thus they
are ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬.
6. The majzoom forms of “Five in pocket group” of the verb ‫ـﺎن ﻳَـ ُﻜ ْــﻮ ُن‬ َ ‫َﻛ‬
may optionally drop the ‫ن‬.ْ Thus instead of ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ﻳَـ ُﻜ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻜ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ َٔا ُﻛ‬and
ْ ‫ﺗَـ ُﻜ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫ﻧ َـ ُﻜ‬, those may be ‫ﻳَـ ُﻚ‬, ‫َـﻚ‬
‫ــﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﺗ‬, ‫َـﻚ‬ ُ ‫ﺗ‬, ُ‫ َٔاك‬and ‫َـﻚ‬ ُ ‫ﻧ‬. Examples are Quran
(16:19:9) and Quran (16:19:20).
7. The word ‫ َﺣـﺘَّــﻰ‬which means “till” has hidden ‫ َٔا ْن‬. Thus verb form
coming after ‫ َﺣـﺘَّــﻰ‬will be ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬. The word ‫ ﺗُـ ْﻨـ ِﻔـ ُﻘ ْــﻮا‬is ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨ‬and
 319

it came after ‫ َﺣـﺘَّــﻰ‬in the verse Quran (4:3:92). ‫ َﺣـﺘَّــﻰ‬also acts as

preposition when a noun comes after it. Refer to Quran (30:97:5).
8. The word ‫ َﻛ ْــﻲ‬means “so that” and this word denotes futurity. This
word converts the ‫ـﺎر ُع‬ِ َ‫( اﻟْ ُﻤــﻀ‬present tense) into ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬. Example is
Quran (16:20:33). ‫ َﻛـ ْﻴ َـﻼ‬means “so that not” and it is present in
Quran (14:16:70).
9. Similar to ‫ َو‬the word ‫ َت‬is also used to take oath and it acts as
preposition. Example is Quran (13:12:73).
10. The Maqsoor nouns (‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ُر‬ ُ ‫ )اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻘ‬are the nouns ending with long
Alif (‫)ا‬. Examples are ‫( ُﻣ ْــﻮ ٰﺳــﻰ‬Moses, on pattern ‫)ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬, ‫اﻟْــ ُﺤ ْـﺴـ ٰﻨــﻰ‬
(The best, on pattern ‫)ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬, ‫( اﻟْـ َﻔـ ٰﺘــﻰ‬The young man, on pattern
‫)ﻓَـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫( اﻟْـ َﻌ ٰــﺼــﻰ‬The stick, on pattern ‫)ﻓَـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫( اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪى‬the guidance, on
pattern ‫)ﻓُـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬, ‫( اﻟْـ ُﺒ ْـﺸ ٰــﺮى‬the good news, on pattern ‫)ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬, ‫اﻟْـ ُﻜـ ْﺒ ٰــﺮى‬
(the greater, on pattern ‫)ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬, ‫( اﻟـ ِّﺬ ْﻛ ٰــﺮى‬the remembrance, on the
pattern ‫ ) ِﻓـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬etc.
11. Analysis of an example ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ُر‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻘ‬noun with root letters ‫ ه د ي‬is
as follows. It is on the pattern of ‫ﻓُـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬. Its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬and
‫ َﻣــ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬forms are (‫ﻫُـﺪَ ٌي‬, ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ﻳًـﺎ‬, ‫)ﻫُـﺪَ ٍي‬. Let us open ‫ ﺗَـﻨْــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬and it forms
are now (‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ُ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ﻳ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ َ ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ﻳ‬, ‫ــﻦ‬
ْ ‫)ﻫُـﺪَ ِﻳ‬. As Fatah is present before weak letter
‫ ي‬and ‫ ي‬is Mutaharrik, it will convert to ‫ا‬. So forms look as (‫ﻫُـﺪَ ْان‬,
‫ﻫُـﺪَ ْان‬, ‫)ﻫُـﺪَ ْان‬. As ‫ ا‬has hidden sukoon and two sukoons cannot exist
 320

together, the ‫ ا‬gets drop. Now the forms look like (‫ﻫُـﺪَ ْن‬, ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ْن‬, ‫)ﻫُـﺪَ ْن‬.
Let us pack ‫ د َْن‬into ‫ ﺗَـ ْﻨــ ِﻮﻳْـ ٌﻦ‬again and it looks like ( ً‫ﻫُـﺪ‬, ً‫ﻫُـﺪ‬, ً‫)ﻫُـﺪ‬. Now
to show that ‫ ي‬is present in the root, it is rewritten as (‫ﻫُـﺪً ى‬, ‫ﻫُـﺪً ى‬,
‫)ﻫُـﺪً ى‬. Thus it is same in all the forms.
12. Analysis of the word ‫ اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪى‬: (a) (‫اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ ُي‬, ‫اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ َي‬, ‫( )اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ ِي‬b) As
Fatah is present before weak letter ‫ ي‬and ‫ ي‬is Mutaharrik, it will
convert to ‫اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ ا( ا‬, ‫اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ ا‬, ‫( )اﻟْــﻬُـﺪَ ا‬c) Now it is written as (‫اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪ‬, ‫اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪ‬,
‫)اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪ‬. To preserve ‫ ي‬it is written as (‫اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪى‬, ‫اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪى‬, ‫)اﻟْــﻬ ُٰـﺪى‬.
13. Analysis of “My guidance (‫ـﺎف اﻟَـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬
My guidance” ٌ َ‫ـﺎف ُﻣــﻀ‬
ٌ َ‫) ُﻣــﻀ‬: (a) ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ‬+ ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ٌي‬
ِٕ
(b) ‫ ْي‬+ ‫( ﻫُــﺪَ ُي‬c) As Fatah is present before weak letter ‫ ي‬and ‫ ي‬is
Mutaharrik, it will convert to ‫ ا‬and whole construction becomes
‫ ْي‬+‫ﻫُـﺪَ ا‬. (d) Ya-Mutakallim gets Fatah if a ‫ ا‬or ‫ ي‬with sukoon comes
before it and thus it becomes ‫ﻫُـﺪَ ا َى‬. Refer to Quran (1:2:38). Same
analysis is for “My My stick”:
stick ‫ــﺼـﺎ َى‬ َ ‫ َﻋ‬. Refer to Quran (16:20:18).
14. (a) Analysis of the word ‫ اﻟـ ُّﺪﻧْـ َﻴـﺎ‬: The root words are ‫د ن و‬. It is on
the pattern of ‫ َاﻟـ ُﻔـ ْﻌـ ٰﻠــﻰ‬. So it is ‫اﻟـ ُّﺪﻧ ْٰــﻮى‬. The ‫ و‬changes to ‫ي‬. So it
becomes ‫اﻟـ ُّﺪﻧْـ ٰﻴــﻰ‬. The last ‫ ى‬is dropped and is written finally as ‫اﻟـ ُّﺪﻧْـ َﻴـﺎ‬.
(b) Analysis of the word ‫ َا ْدﻧٰــﻰ‬: Its meaning is something inferior or
less or lower. It is on the pattern of ‫ َاﻓْـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬. So it is ‫ َا ْدﻧ َ ُــﻮ‬. The ‫ و‬changes
to ‫ي‬. So it becomes ‫ َا ْدﻧ َ ُــﻲ‬. As Fatah is present before weak letter ‫ ي‬and
‫ ي‬is Mutaharrik, it will convert to ‫ا‬. So it becomes now as ‫ َا ْدﻧ َـﺎ‬. Now it
 321

is written with elongated Fatah and ‫ ى‬is written for preservation. At

last it looks as ‫ َا ْدﻧٰــﻰ‬.
15. Some interrogative words like ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫( َﻣ‬who), ‫ــﻦ‬ َ ْ‫( َٔاﻳ‬where), ‫( َﻣـﺎ‬what),
‫( َﻣـﺘَــﻰ‬when), ‫( َﻛـ ْﻴ َـﻒ‬how), ‫ـﺎن‬ َ َّ ‫( َٔاﻳ‬when), ‫( َٔاﻧٰ ّــﻰ‬from where/how come)
are ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـ ْﺒـ ِﻨ‬.
16. The past tense is also used to express a wish. Examples ‫ﷲ‬ ُ ‫ﻏَـ َﻔ َــﺮ‬
‫( ﻟَـ ُﻪ‬May
May Allah forgive {for} him! him!), ‫ﷲ ﺧَـ ْﻴ ًــﺮا‬
ُ َ‫( َﺟ َــﺰاك‬May May Allah return
you better! better!) ( َ‫ َٔاﻧ َْﺖ = َﺟ َــﺰاك‬+‫) َﺟ َﺰى‬.
17. Either … or: ‫…و ا َّﻣـﺎ‬. َِٕ ‫ ا َّﻣـﺎ‬is used for “either…. or”. Example is ‫ا َّﻣـﺎ‬
ِٕ ِٕ
‫( ﺗَـ ْﻔـﺘَ ُــﺢ َو ا َّﻣـﺎ َٔاﻓْـﺘَ ُــﺢ‬Either you open or I open). This combination comes
ِٕ
under conjunction.
18. Color names have both masculine and feminine forms. Both
these forms are diptotes. Few examples in the format (masculine,
feminine, color name) are : (‫ َٔاﺧْــﻀَ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ َﺧــﻀْ َــﺮا ٓ ُء‬, green), (‫ َٔا ْﺳ َــﻮ ُد‬, ‫ َﺳ ْــﻮ َدا ٓ ُء‬,
black), (‫ َٔا ْﺻـ َﻔ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ َﺻـ ْﻔ َــﺮا ٓ ُء‬, yellow), (‫ َٔا ْﺣـ َﻤ ُــﺮ‬, ‫ َﺣـ ْﻤ َــﺮا ٓ ُء‬, red), (‫ــﺾ‬ ُ ‫ َٔاﺑْـ َﻴ‬, ‫ﺑَـ ْﻴــﻀَ ـﺎ ٓ ُء‬,
white). Quran (1:2:69), Quran (2:2:187) and Quran (23:36:80) have
color names as adjectives.
19. The word ‫ ٰﻫــﻬُـﻨَـﺎ‬means “here” and the word ‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ ﻫُـﻨَـﺎ ِﻟ‬is adverb of
time with meaning “there/at that time”. Examples are Quran (6:5:24),
Quran (3:3:38) and Quran (15:18:44).
 322

20. Who/whoever (‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ) َﻣ‬and what/whatever (‫ ) َﻣـﺎ‬are also used as

relative nouns. For living things ‫ َﻣـ ْـﻦ‬is used and for non-living things
‫ َﻣـﺎ‬is used. Quran (14:16:97) has both these relative pronouns.
21. The adjective (‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ )ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬can qualify ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬or ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬. In either
case ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬comes after the complete ‫ ُﻣــ ِٕﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف ُﻣــﻀَ ـﺎ ٌف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬phrase. If ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬
ِٕ
ٌ
qualifies ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـﺎف‬then it has to follow the ‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ ِاﻋ َْــﺮ‬of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬and if ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬
qualifies ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬then it has to follow the ‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ ِاﻋ َْــﺮ‬of ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف اﻟ َـ ْﻴـ ِﻪ‬.
ِٕ َ ْ ِ ِٕ
‫ـ‬
Examples : a) (‫ﺎب َﺣـﺎﻣـﺪ ا ِ ْﻴ ُــﺮ‬‫ـﺒ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ﻟ‬ ٍ ِ ُ ‫ ـﺘـ‬, The big book of Haamid), b) ( ‫َﺟﺎ ِﻧ َﺐ‬
َ ‫ﻛ‬
‫اﻟﻄ ِﻮر ا َٔﻻﻳْـ َﻤ َﻦ‬
ُّ , the right side of the mount in Quran (16:20:80)), c)
(‫اﻟﻄـﺎ ِﻟ ِﺐ اﻟْــ َﺠـ ِﺪﻳْـ ِﺪ‬ ُ ‫ ِﻛـﺘ َـ‬, Book of the new student).
َّ ‫ﺎب‬ student
22. The meaning of word ‫ ﻗَ ْـﺪ‬is certainly or indeed or verily. This
word is used for emphasis and is used before past tense. Quran
(16:18:76) is an example. An additional ‫ ل‬is attached before ‫ ﻗَ ْـﺪ‬to
emphasize further the meaning of the verb. Two such examples are
Quran (15:18:54) and Quran (15:18:74).
23. If the doer is directly available in a sentence and it is a broken
plural noun or a feminine gender singular noun then the verb used
will be third person feminine singular. Quran (16:18:105) is an
example where ‫ـﺖ‬ َ ‫( َﺣـﺒ‬feminine singular verb) is used because the
ْ ‫ِــﻄ‬
doer ‫ َاﻋْـ َﻤـﺎ ٌل‬is a broken plural. Quran (1:2:16) is another example
 323

ْ ‫( َرﺑِــ َﺤ‬feminine singular verb) is used because the doer ‫ِﺗــ َﺠ َـﺎر ٌة‬
where ‫ـﺖ‬
(business) is a feminine gender singular.
24. If the doer is directly available in a sentence and neither it is a
broken plural noun nor a feminine gender singular noun then a third
person masculine singular verb (the root verb) is used irrespective of
the doer’s situation (singular, dual or plural). In the same sentence if
a second verb is required, then it should follow the doer. The second
verb ‫ ﻗَـﺎﻟُ ْــﻮا‬in Quran (28:63:1) is in according to the doer ‫اﻟْـ ُﻤـ ٰﻨـ ِﻔـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ َن‬
while the first verb ‫ َﺟـﺎ ٓ َء‬is a third person masculine singular verb. Two
more such examples are Quran (15:18:10) and Quran (15:18:53).
25. In the past tense, if a pronoun joins with third person masculine
plural verb form (‫ )ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠُ ْــﻮا‬then the protection ‫ ا‬will be dropped. Quran
(1:2:57) (‫)ﻇــﻟ َ ُﻤ ْــﻮﻧ َـﺎ‬
َ is an example.
26. The verb (‫و ِﺟـ َﻞ‬,َ ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ ﻳ َ ْــﻮ َﺟ‬, to fear) is an exception of ‫َـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْـ ِﻤـﺜ‬verb
where the weak letter ‫( و‬as first radical) is not dropped in present
tense. Example verses are Quran (9:8:2) and Quran (14:15:53).
27. If the first radical is weak letter ‫ ي‬in ‫َـﺎل‬ ُ ‫ اﻟْـ ِﻤـﺜ‬verbs then unlike the
case of weak letter ‫و‬, it is not dropped in present tense. Few example
verbs are (‫ﻳ َ ِـﺴ َــﺮ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻴ َـﺴ ُــﺮ‬, to become easy), (‫ﻳَـ ِﺌ َـﺲ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻴـﺌَ ُـﺲ‬, to lose hope),
(‫ﻳَـﺒ َِـﺲ‬, ‫ﻳَـ ْﻴـ َﺒ ُـﺲ‬, to dry) etc. Example verses for the verb ‫ ﻳَـ ْﻴـﺌَ ُـﺲ ﻳ َـ ِﺌ َـﺲ‬are
Quran (6:5:3) and Quran (13:12:87).
 324

28. The verb ‫ـﺎت‬ َ ‫ َﻣ‬has two forms (‫( ) َم َو َت‬a-u group) and (‫( ) َم ِو َت‬i-a
group). Because of this reason the verb in past tense may start with
‫ـﺖ‬ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬or ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬from ‫ُــﻦ‬ َّ ‫ﻫ‬. Quran (4:3:158) and Quran (23:37:16) are
examples for this case.
29. When the verb ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬comes before ‫ـﺎر ٌع‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻣــﻀ‬, it gives the meaning of
past continuous tense. ‫ـﺎن ﻳ َ ْـﺸ َــﺮ ُب‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬means “He was drinking”.
30. The text “that not” means َّ‫ َﻻ = َٔاﻻَّ( َٔاﻻ‬+ ‫) َٔا ْن‬. Observe َ‫َٔاﻻَّ ﻧ َـ ْﻌـ ُﺒـﺪ‬
(that not we worship) in Quran (3:3:64).
31. The text “if not/unless” means َّ‫ َﻻ = اﻻَّ( اﻻ‬+ ‫)ا ْن‬. The present
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ
tense becomes majzoom when it comes after َّ‫اﻻ‬. Refer to Quran
ِٕ
(12:11:47).
32. In the case of verbs having first letter as ‫ ٔا‬, there is no need of
extra ‫ ٔا‬for imperative tense (after removing ‫)ت‬. Moreover the existing
‫ ٔا‬also gets drop. Two such examples of imperative tense for ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬:
(‫ﺗَـﺌْـ ُﻜـ ُﻞ‬, ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ ‫ ) ُﻛ‬for ‫( َٔا َﻛـ َﻞ‬He eat) and (‫ﺗَـﺌْــﺨ ُُـﺬ‬, ‫ﺋْــﺨ ُْـﺬ‬, ‫ )ﺧ ُْـﺬ‬for ‫( َٔاﺧَـ َﺬ‬He
ْ ‫ﺋْـ ُﻜ‬, ‫ـﻞ‬
took). Refer to verses Quran (1:2:35) and Quran (11:9:103). In the
case of verbs having second letter as ‫ ٔا‬, the imperative tense can be
made with or without ‫ ٔا‬. As an example for the verb ‫( َﺳـﺎَٔ َل‬He asked),
imperative tense for ‫ْـﺖ‬ َ ‫ َٔاﻧ‬is ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ َ‫ ا ْﺳـﺌ‬or ‫ـﻞ‬
ْ ‫ﺳ‬.َ
ِٕ
33. The doer (‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ ) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬form of ‫ ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬verbs is ‫ﻓَـﺎﺋِـ ٌﻞ‬. Examples
are (‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬, ‫ )ﻗَـﺎﺋِـ ٌﻞ‬Quran (12:12:10), (‫ﻗَـﺎ َم‬, ‫)ﻗَـﺎﺋِـ ٌﻢ‬, (‫ز َار‬,َ ‫ َ)زاﺋِ ٌــﺮ‬etc. The doer
 325

form of ‫ اﻟْـ ُﻤــﻀَ ـ َّﻌ ُـﻒ‬verbs takes ‫)ـّ( ﺗ َْـﺸـ ِﺪﻳْـ ٌﺪ‬. Examples are (‫ــﻦ‬ ٌ ‫َﻇـﺎ ِﻧ‬
َّ ‫ﻇ‬,َ ‫ــﻦ‬
changes to ‫)ﻇـﺎ ٓ ٌّن‬, َ (‫ﺿَ ـ َّﻞ‬, ‫ ﺿَ ـﺎ ِﻟـ ٌﻞ‬changes to ‫ )ﺿَ ـﺎ ٓ ٌّل‬etc.
34. The passive participle (‫ ) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬form of ‫ ا ٔﻻ ْﺟ َــﻮ ُف‬verbs is
‫ َﻣـ ُﻔ ْــﻮ ٌل‬if the second letter is ‫و‬. Its form is ‫ َﻣـ ِﻔـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ‬if the second letter is ‫ي‬.
Examples are (‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬, ‫) َﻣـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ٌل‬, (‫زا َد‬,َ ‫ ) َﻣــ ِﺰﻳْـ ٌﺪ‬etc.
35. The passive particle form of Naaqis verbs is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل‬if the third
letter is ‫و‬. Its form is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ‬if the third letter is ‫ي‬. Examples are (‫ َد َﻋـﺎ‬,
‫ َﻣ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ْــﻮ ٌو‬changes to ‫) َﻣ ْـﺪ ُﻋ ٌّــﻮ‬, (‫ﻧ َِـﺴ َــﻲ‬, ‫ــﻲ‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ِـﺴـ ْﻴ‬, ‫ــﻲ‬
ٌّ ‫ ) َﻣـﻨْ ِـﺴ‬etc. Quran
(16:19:21) and Quran (16:19:23) have these type of nouns.
36. The passive participle (‫ ) ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌـ ْـﻮ ِل‬form of the derived verbs is
considered as the noun of place and time. Examples are (‫ َا ْدﺧَـ َﻞ‬, ‫ ُﻣ ْـﺪﺧَـ ٌﻞ‬,
entrance), (‫ َاﻗَـﺎ َم‬, ‫ ُﻣـ َﻘـﺎ ٌم‬, place), (‫ﺻـﻠَّــﻰ‬,َ ‫ــﺼـﻠ ًّــﻰ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬, place of worship) and
(‫ ِا ْﺳـﺘَ ْــو َد َع‬, ‫ ُﻣ ْـﺴـﺘَ ْــﻮ َد ٌع‬, warehouse).
37. Few other categories of feminine gender noun are <Fire names> names>
(‫ﺳـ َﻘ ٌــﺮ‬,َ ‫ َﺟــ ِﺤـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫ﺳـ ِﻌـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ‬,َ ‫ َﺟــﻬَـﻨَّـ ٌﻢ‬, ‫)ﻧ ٌَـﺎر‬, <Feminine names by meaning>
(‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ْ‫ﺑِـﻨ‬, a girl), (‫ا ْﻣ َــﺮ َٔا ٌة‬, a woman), (‫ ُٔا ٌّم‬, a mother), <Wind names> (‫ َﺳـ ُﻤ ْــﻮ ٌم‬,
ِٕ
scorching wind), (‫ﺻ ْــﺮ َﺻ ٌــﺮ‬,َ furious and intensely cold wind), (‫ــﺢ‬ ٌ ْ‫رﻳ‬,ِ
wind), (‫ـﺎﺻ ٌـﻒ‬ ِ ‫ َﻋ‬, violent wind), <Town/Village/country names such as>
(‫ ِﻣ ْــﺼ ُــﺮ‬, Egypt), (‫اﻟــﺮ ْو ُم‬, ُّ Rome) etc. <Miscellenious other nouns> (‫اﻻ ْر ُض‬, َٔ ْ
the earth), (‫اﻟﺸـ ْﻤ ُـﺲ‬, َّ the sun), (‫ﻧ َـ ْﻔ ٌـﺲ‬, soul/self), (‫ﺧَـ ْﻤ ٌــﺮ‬, wine), (‫ﺑِـﺌ ٌْــﺮ‬,
well), (‫د ٌَار‬, house) etc.
 326

38. The particle ‫ ا ْن‬or ‫ َﻣـﺎ‬when followed by َّ‫ اﻻ‬is merely a negative
ِٕ ِٕ
particle which translates to “It is …. nothing but”. Refer to Quran
(1:2:99), Quran (22:35:23) and Quran (27:53:4).
39. As it was learnt earlier, both the particles ‫ ا َّن‬and ‫ َٔا َّن‬are used for
ِٕ
emphasis. But ‫ ا َّن‬comes in the beginning of the sentence and ‫ َٔا َّن‬comes
ِٕ
in the middle of the sentence. Also, when in a sentence, verb forms of
‫ ﻗَـﺎ َل‬and ‫ ا َّن‬come, ‫ ا َّن‬always comes after the verb forms of ‫ﻗَـﺎ َل‬.
ِٕ ِٕ
40. Sometimes ‫ اﻧ َّـ ُﻪ‬and ‫ اﻧَّــﻬَـﺎ‬are used in the beginning of a sentence to
ِٕ ِٕ
mean “Indeed” or “as a matter of fact”. They don’t give the literal
meaning as “Indeed he”, “Indeed she”. Examples are Quran (7:6:21)
and Quran (17:22:46).
41. Selected few other sisters of ‫ـﺎن‬ َ ‫ َﻛ‬are (‫ﺻ َـﺎر‬,َ to become), (‫ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬,
not), (‫ـﺎت‬ َ َ ‫ﺑ‬, to become or pass the night), (‫ َﻣـﺎ دَا َم‬, forever/continuously)
and (‫ﻇـ َّﻞ‬,َ remain/to be/continue).
42. The verb ‫ ِﻧـ ْﻌ َـﻢ‬is used for praise (meaning excellent) and the verb
‫ ﺑِـﺌ َْـﺲ‬is used for blame (meaning evil). These verbs like ‫ ﻟَـ ْﻴ َـﺲ‬only
occur in the past tense but provide the meaning in present tense.
Moreover they exist only in third person person forms.
forms Refer to Quran
(3:3:136) and Quran (17:22:13).
43. The verbs to express wonder about something good or bad are
on two patterns ‫ َﻣـﺎ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌـﻠَـ ُﻪ‬and ‫ـﻞ ﺑِـ ِﻪ‬
ْ ‫ َٔاﻓْـ ِﻌ‬. Refer to Quran (30:80:17),
 327

Quran (2:2:175), Quran (15:18:26) and Quran (16:19:38) for such

verbs. They act like interjections.
44. The special noun ‫ َذ ٌو‬has both masculine and feminine forms.
Moreover they also have duals and plurals. Its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and
‫ َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬forms for masculine are (singular, ‫ ُذ ْو‬, ‫ا َذ‬, ‫) ِذ ْى‬, (dual, ‫ َذ َوا‬, ‫ َذ َو ْى‬,
‫ ) َذ َو ْى‬and (plural, ‫ ُٔا ْوﻟُ ْﻮا‬, ‫ ُٔا ْو ِﻟــﻰ‬, ‫) ُٔا ْو ِﻟــﻰ‬. Its ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬, ‫ َﻣـﻨْ ُــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬and ‫َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬
forms for feminine are (singular, ‫ َذ ُات‬, ‫ َذ َات‬, ‫) َذ ِات‬, (dual, ‫ َذ َواﺗَـﺎ‬, ‫ َذ َواﺗ َْــﻰ‬,
‫ ) َذ َواﺗ َْــﻰ‬and (plural, ‫ ُٔا ْو َﻻ ُت‬, ‫ ُٔا ْو َﻻ ِت‬, ‫) ُٔا ْو َﻻ ِت‬.
45. Some more information about vocative particle (‫( )ﻳَـﺎ‬a) The
vocative particle is dropped and only ‫ َاﻳُّـ َﻪ‬is used to address a
gathering. Refer to Quran (18:24:31). (b) Vocative particle is used to
express emotional feelings while addressing to father and son ((‫ـﺖ‬ ِ َ ‫ﻳٰ ٓـﺎَٔﺑ‬,
Oh my father!), (‫ــﻰ‬ َّ َ‫ﻳٰـ ُﺒـﻨ‬, Oh my son!)). (c) Vocative particle is used to
express good or sorrow feelings. Refer to Quran (12:12:19) for good
feelings and Quran (13:12:84) for sorrow feelings. (d) Sometimes
vocative particle is completely omitted. It is completely omitted in
Quran (12:12:29) to address ‫ﻳُ ْــﻮ ُﺳ ُـﻒ‬, while it is present in Quran
(12:11:76) to address ‫اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴـ ُﻢ‬. (e) For the purpose of prayer, instead of
ِٕ
vocative particle (‫ )ﻳَـﺎ‬the vocative particle suffix ‫ َّم‬is attached to the
name of Allah (Quran (3:3:26)).
 328

46. A nominal or verbal sentence can come as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬for few
verbs. Consider the English statement “I said”. A question can be
raised “What was said ?”. The answer to this question is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬for
the verb “said”. Now the complete sentence can be “I said that water
is cool”. Its translation is ‫ـﺎر ٌد‬ ِ َ ‫ـﺖ َٔا َّن اﻟْـ َﻤـﺎ َء ﺑ‬
ُ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬. The under line text is
‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬for ‫ـﺖ‬ ُ ْ‫ ُﻗـﻠ‬. One more example of similar kind is ‫ُــﻮ‬ َ ‫َٔاﻋْـﻠَـ ُﻢ ﻫ‬
‫ـﺎب‬ٌ َ‫ ِﻛـﺘ‬. (I know, it is a book). Refer to the verses Quran (30:112:1),
Quran (30:113:1), Quran (30:114:1) and Quran (23:38:67).
47. Three points regarding the verb ‫( َٔا َو َى‬To take shelter) (a)
construction of second person plural (‫ ) َٔاﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬in present tense is (‫ﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِوى‬,‫ﺗ‬,
‫ ْو َن‬+ ‫ﺗﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِوى‬,, ‫و َن‬+
‫ ْو‬+‫ﺗﺗ َـﺎْٔ ِو‬,, ‫وو َن‬+
ْ +‫ﺗﺗ َـﺎْٔ ُو‬,, ‫)ﺗَـﺎْٔ ٗو َن‬. Here the weak letter ‫ ى‬gets dropped
and ‫ و‬takes Dhammah which results in an elongated ‫و‬. (b)
Construction of imperative of ‫ ﺗَـﺎْٔ ٗو َن‬is (‫ﺗَـﺎْٔ ٗو َن‬, ‫ ْٔا ٗو‬, ‫ ْٔا ٗو‬+ ‫ ِا‬, ‫ ِاﻳْ ٗــﻮ‬, You all take
shelter!). (c) But if ‫ َف‬comes before ‫ ِاﻳْ ٗــﻮ‬then ‫ ﻫَـ ْﻤ َــﺰ ُة اﻟْــ َﻮ َﺻـ ِﻞ‬gets
shelter!
dropped and it is read as ‫( ﻓَـﺎْٔ ٗو‬Refer to Quran(15:18:16)).
48. Sometimes a word acts as ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬for ‫ـﻞ‬ ِ ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻔـﺎ ِﻋ‬. Example: In
Quran (1:2:30) ‫ َﺧـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ َﻔـ ًﺔ‬is ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ِﺑ ِﻪ‬for ‫ َﺟـﺎ ِﻋـ ٌﻞ‬.
49. Adjectives on pattern ‫ـﻞ‬ ُ ‫ َٔاﻓْـ َﻌ‬having ‫ ع َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬and ‫ ل َﻛـ ِﻠـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬same get ّ‫ــ‬
after exchange of vowel signs. Example (‫ َٔا ْﺷـﺪَ ُد‬, ‫ َٔا َﺷ ْـﺪ ُد‬, ‫ َٔا َﺷـ ُّﺪ‬, more
difficult). Refer to Quran (30:79:27).
 329

50. The adjective used for comparative or superlative degree (‫) َٔاﻓْـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬
should not be confused with the first person singular present tense
form (‫) َٔاﻓْـ َﻌـ ُﻞ‬. One can differentiate the usage based on the context of
the sentence. Example: ‫ َٔاﻧ َـﺎ َٔاﻋْـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬means “I know” while ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫َﺷـﺎ ِﻫـ ٌﺪ َٔاﻋْـﻠَـ ُﻢ ِﻣ‬
‫ َﺣـﺎ ِﻣ ٍﺪ‬means “Shaahid knows better than Haamid” (comparative
degree sentence). In the verse Quran (1:2:33), ‫ َٔاﻋْـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬means “I know”
and in the verse Quran (1:2:140), ‫ َٔاﻋْـﻠَـ ُﻢ‬means “know better”.
51. 100 = ‫ ِﻣـﺌَـ ٌﺔ‬, 1000 = ‫ َٔاﻟْ ٌـﻒ‬.
52. Sometimes ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬will not come immediately after ‫ َﻣـ ْﻨـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌت‬. It
comes after few other words. Example (1) Quran (1:2:49): ‫ــﻈـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬ ِ ‫ َﻋ‬is a
‫ـﺖ‬ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬for ‫ﺑ َ َـﻼٓ ٌء‬. Example (2) Quran (1:2:89): ‫ــﺼ ِّـﺪ ٌق‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬for ‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ِﻛـ ٰﺘ‬.
Example (3) Quran (1:2:101): ‫ــﺼ ِّـﺪ ٌق‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is ‫ـﺖ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧ َـ ْﻌ‬for ‫ر ُﺳ ْــﻮ ٌل‬.َ
53. It was learnt earlier that all the broken plurals are feminine
singular (Topic # 45). There is an exception or change to this general
rule. It is observed in Quran that broken plurals are also treated as
feminine plurals. In the verse Quran (1:2:80) the adjective ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو َد ًة‬is
feminine singular because ‫( َاﻳ َّـﺎ ًﻣـﺎ‬days) is treated as feminine singular.
In the verse Quran (3:3:24) the adjective ‫ َﻣـ ْﻌـﺪُ ْو ٰد ٍت‬is sound feminine
plural because ‫( َاﻳَّـﺎ ًﻣـﺎ‬days) is treated as feminine plural.
54. There is a kind of ‫ َﻣ ْــﺼـﺪَ ٌر‬called as ‫ــﻲ‬ ُّ ‫ َاﻟْـ َﻤ ْﺼﺪَ ُر اﻟْـ ِﻤـ ْﻴ ِﻤ‬. It comes on the
pattern ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ‬/ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ َﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬and ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـ ٌﻞ‬/ ‫ َﻣـ ْﻔـ ِﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ‬. Examples: ‫ـﺎت‬ ٌ ‫( َﻣـ َﻤ‬death),
 330

‫( َﻣـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَـ ٌﺔ‬knowledge) and ‫( َﻣـﻐْـ ِﻔ َــﺮ ٌة‬forgiveness). For Mazeed verbs it is
same as ‫ ِا ْﺳـ ُﻢ اﻟْـ َﻤـ ْﻔـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ِل‬. Examples: ‫( ُﻣ ْﺪﺧَـ ٌﻞ‬entering in) and ‫( ُﻣـﺨ َْﺮ ٌج‬exiting
out).
55. My father: ‫ ْي = َٔاﺑ ِْــﻲ‬+ ‫ ْي = َٔا ِب‬+ ‫ ْي = َٔا ُب‬+ ‫ َٔاﺑُ ْــﻮ‬. (Here ‫ و‬is dropped
as two sukoons cannot co-exist). This should not be confused with
‫ َﻣـ ْﺠ ُــﺮ ْو ٌر‬form of ‫ َٔا ٌب‬when it becomes ‫) َٔاﺑ ِْــﻲ( ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬.
56. The word ‫ﺎت‬ َ ‫ ﻫَـ ْﻴــﻬ َـ‬is used as َ‫ ﺑَـ ُﻌـﺪ‬to express a distant or far
possibility of occurrence. Quran (18:23:36) is an example.
57. The word ‫ ا ْى‬means ‘Yes’. Refer to Quran (11:10:53).
ِٕ
58. A word of warning is ‫ﻫَـﺎ‬. It means “Ah, be aware”. ‫ ٰﻫٓـ َﺎﻧْـ ُﺘ ْـﻢ‬is
present in Quran (3:3:66) and Quran (4:3:119).
59. The meaning of the word ‫ـﻞ‬ ْ َ ‫ ﺑ‬is ‘but’.
60. The meaning of the word ‫ ﻟَـ َّﻤـﺎ‬has been learned as ‘not yet’ and
‘when’. It’s one more meaning is ‘but’. Refer to Quran (25:43:35) and
Quran (30:86:4).
61. When ‫ َﻛ ْـﻢ‬and ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ّ ‫ َﻛـ َﺎ ِﻳ‬are followed by ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, they mean “many”.
Refer to Quran (2:2:211) and Quran (4:3:146).
62. The word ‫ ِﺑــﻀْ ـ ٌﻊ‬means few/some. It comes as ‫ ُﻣــﻀَ ـ ٌﺎف‬. Refer to
Quran (21:30:4).
 331

63. The fractions (except one half) are on pattern of ‫ ﻓُـ ُﻌـ ٌﻞ‬: (one half,
ٌ ُ‫ﺛُـﻠ‬, one fourth, ‫رﺑُـ ٌﻊ‬,ُ one fifth, ‫ﺧُـ ُﻤ ٌـﺲ‬, one sixth,
‫ ِﻧ ْــﺼ ٌـﻒ‬, one third, ‫ـﺚ‬
‫ﺳـﺪُ ٌس‬,ُ one seventh, ‫ﺳـ ُﺒـ ٌﻊ‬,ُ one eighth, ‫ﺛُـ ُﻤــ ٌﻦ‬, one ninth, ‫ﺗ ُُـﺴـ ٌﻊ‬, one tenth,
ُ ‫)ﻋ‬.
‫ُـﺸ ٌــﺮ‬
64. The verb ‫ ﻫَـﺎﺗُــ ْﻮا‬is in imperative tense and its meaning ‘bring!’.
65. The word ٓ ‫ َا َﻻ‬means “Beware” (expressing an attention).
66. The word ‫ َﻫـﻠُـ َّﻢ‬means “come or bring forward”.
67. The word ‫ ﺛَـ َّﻢ‬is a location adverb and its meaning is “there”.
68. The word ‫ َﻣـﺎ َذا‬is an interrogative particle and its meaning is
“what”.
69. Though some nouns ends with “ ‫” ة‬, they are either considered as
feminine or as masculine (Demonstrative pronoun ‫ ٰﻫ َـﺬا‬is used in
Quran (16:18:98) because ‫ َر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬is treated as masculine and the third
person feminine singular verb form ‫ـﺖ‬ ْ ‫ َو ِﺳـ َﻌ‬is used in Quran (9:7:156)
because ‫ َر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ِﺘ ْــﻰ‬is treated as feminine).
70. As an exception, while writing the ‫ــﺼ ْــﻮ ٌب‬ ُ ْ‫ َﻣـﻨ‬form of indefinite
nouns ending either with ‫ )اﻟـﺘَّـﺎ ُء اﻟْـ َﻤ ْــﺮﺑ ُ ْــﻮ َﻃـ ُﺔ( ة‬or with ‫ )ﻫَـ ْﻤ َـﺰ ٌة( ء‬no extra
alif is added (‫( ﺑَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮﺿَ ـ ًﺔ‬a mosquito) in Quran (1:2:26) and ‫( َﻣـﺎ ٓ ًء‬water)
in Quran (1:2:22)).
 332

71. As a revision (and for deep observation) few selected examples of

Jaar-Majroor construction with diptote nouns are (‫ ِﻣ ْـﻦ ِﻓ ْــﺮ َﻋ ْــﻮ َن‬, from
Firoun, Quran (25:44:31)), (‫ ِﻓ ْـﻰ ﻳ ُ ْـﻮ ُﺳ َـﻒ‬, in Yousuf (AS), Quran
(12:12:7)), (‫ ِ ٰﻻ َد َم‬, for Adam (AS), Quran (1:2:34)), (‫ﺑِـ َﺒـﺎﺑِـ َﻞ‬, in Babylon,
Quran (1:2:102)), (‫ َﻋ ٰـﲆ ﻳُ ْـﻮ ُﺳ َـﻒ‬, on Yousuf (AS), Quran (12:12:11)),
(‫ا ٰﻟـﻰ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬, towards Ibrahim (AS), Quran (1:2:136)) and (‫ــﻦ اﺑْ َــﺮا ِﻫـ ْﻴ َـﻢ‬
ْ ‫ َﻋ‬,
ِٕ ِٕ ِٕ
from Ibrahim (AS), Quran (12:11:74)).
References for future reading (Seq # 22
224)
This book has given a little overview of Arabic language. Reader is
recommended to go through the below references for future reading.
1) Institute of the language of the Quran, http://www.lqtoronto.com
2) Understand Quran Academy, http://www.understandquran.com
3) The Quranic Arabic Corpus, http://www.corpus.quran.com
Answers to the exercises
T=True, F=False
(Set # 1) (Seq # 1,T,T,T), (Seq # 2,T,T,T), (Seq # 3,T,T,T,F,T), (Seq # 4,T,T,F),
(Seq # 5,T,T,T), (Seq # 6,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 7,T,F,T), (Seq # 8,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq #
10,T,F,T).
 333

(Set # 2) (Seq # 11,T,T,F,T,T), (Seq # 12,T,T,T), (Seq # 13,T,T,T), (Seq #

14,T,T,T,F,T), (Seq # 15,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 16,T,T,T), (Seq # 17,F,T,T), (Seq #
18,T,T,T), (Seq # 19,T,F,T,T,T), (Seq # 20,T,T,T).
(Set # 3) (Seq # 21,T,T,T,F,T), (Seq # 22,T,F,T), (Seq # 23,T,T,T), (Seq #
24,T,T,F,T,T), (Seq # 25,T,T,F), (Seq # 27,T,T,T), (Seq # 28,T,T,T), (Seq #
29,T,F,T), (Seq # 30,T,T,F,T,F).
(Set # 4) (Seq # 31,T,T,T), (Seq # 33,T,F,T,T,T), (Seq # 34,T,T,T), (Seq #
35,T,T,F), (Seq # 36,T,T,F,F,T), (Seq # 37,T,T,T), (Seq # 38,T,T,T), (Seq #
41,T,T,F), (Seq # 42,T,T,T,T,F), (Seq # 43,T,T,T), (Seq # 44,T,T,T), (Seq #
46,T,T,T), (Seq # 48,T,T,T).
(Set # 5) (Seq # 49,T,T,T), (Seq # 50,T,T,T), (Seq # 51,F,T,T), (Seq #
53,T,T,T,F,F), (Seq # 54,T,T,T), (Seq # 55,T,T,T), (Seq # 56,T,T,F), (Seq #
58,T,T,F), (Seq # 60,T,T,F), (Seq # 61,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 62,T,T,T), (Seq #
63,T,T,T).
(Set # 6) (Seq # 64,F,T,T), (Seq # 65,T,T,T), (Seq # 66,T,T,T), (Seq # 69,T,T,T),
(Seq # 70,T,T,T), (Seq # 71,T,T,F), (Seq # 77,T,T,T),
(Seq # 78,T,T,T), (Seq # 79,T,T,F), (Seq # 82,T,T,T,F,T).
(Set # 7) (Seq # 83,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 84,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 85,T,T,T), (Seq #
86,T,T,T), (Seq # 87,T,T,T), (Seq # 89,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq # 90,T,T,T,T,T), (Seq #
92,T,T,T), (Seq # 93,T,T,F).
(Set # 8) (Seq # 94,T,T,F), (Seq # 95,T,T,T), (Seq # 96,T,T,T), (Seq # 97,T,T,T),
(Seq # 98,T,T,T), (Seq # 99,T), (Seq # 100,T), (Seq # 101,T,T,F).
 334

(Set # 9) (Seq # 102,T,T,T), (Seq # 103,F), (Seq # 105,T), (Seq # 106,T,T,T), (Seq
# 107,T,T,T), (Seq # 108,T,T,F), (Seq # 109,F,T,T).
(Set # 10) (Seq # 111,T,T,T), (Seq # 112,T), (Seq # 117,T,T,T), (Seq # 118,T,T,T),
(Seq # 119,T), (Seq # 121,T,T,T), (Seq # 122,T,T,T), (Seq # 124,T,T,T), (Seq #
128,T,T,T), (Seq # 129,T,T,T).
(Set # 11) (Seq # 131,T,T,T), (Seq # 141,T), (Seq # 146,T,T,T), (Seq # 149,T,T,T),
(Seq # 151,T), (Seq # 156,T), (Seq # 158,T,T,T), (Seq # 161,T), (Seq # 162,T),
(Seq # 165,F), (Seq # 167,T).
(Set # 12) (Seq # 169,T), (Seq # 181,T,T,T), (Seq # 191,T), (Seq # 202,T), (Seq #
209,T), (Seq # 215,T), (Seq # 216,T), (Seq # 222,T).
Appendix A
The following are the phrases organized as 5 per day (for easy practice)
where preposition comes before ‫ ُﻣﻀَ ٌﺎف ُﻣﻀَ ٌﺎف اﻟ َ ْﻴ ِﻪ‬. The translation is
ِٕ
approximate.
Day # 1 (‫ َﻋـﻠـ ٰـﻰ َﻋـ ْﺒـ ِﺪ ِﻩ‬, on his slave), (‫ــﻦ َاﻓْ َــﻮا ِﻫــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from their mouths), ( ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ ٰاﻳٰـﺎ ِﺗـﻨَـﺎ‬, from our signs/verses), (‫ـﺎر ِﻫـ ْﻢ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬,
ِ َ‫ َﻋـﻠـ ٰـٓﻰ ٰاﺛ‬, on their footsteps), (‫ــﻦ َا ْﻣــ ِﻧﺮ َـﺎ‬
from our order).
Day # 2 (‫ﺑ َِــﺮﺑِّــﻬ ِْـﻢ‬, On their lord), (‫ َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ُﻗـﻠُ ْــﻮ ِﺑــﻬ ِْـﻢ‬, On their hearts), ( ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ِﺘـ ٖﻪ‬,َّ from his mercy), (‫ــﻦ َا ْﻣــ ِﺮ ُﻛـ ْﻢ‬
ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from your work/affair/order), ( ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫َﻋ‬
‫ َﻛــﻬْـ ِﻔــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, from their cave).
 335

Day # 3 (‫ـﺎت اﻟـ ٰﻠ ّـ ِﻪ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from the signs of Allah), (‫ﺑ َِــﻮ ِر ِﻗـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬, your
ِ ٰ‫ــﻦ ٰاﻳ‬
coin/money), (‫ ِﻓ ْــﻰ ِﻣـﻠَّـ ِﺘــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, in their religion), (‫ َﻋـﻠـ ٰـٓﻰ َا ْﻣــ ِﺮ ِﻫـ ْﻢ‬, on their work),
(‫ﺑِـ ِﻌـ َّﺪ ِﺗــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, about their numbers).
Day # 4 (‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ َﻛــﻬْـ ِﻔــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, in their cave), (‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ُﺣـ ْﻜـ ِﻤـ ٖﻪ‬, in his decision), (‫ ِﻟـ َﻜـ ِﻠ ٰـﻤـ ِﺘـ ٖﻪ‬,
to his words), (‫ــﻦ ِذ ْﻛــ ِﻧﺮ َـﺎ‬ ْ ‫ َﻋ‬, of/about our rememberance), (‫ــﻦ َّرﺑِّـ ُﻜ ْـﻢ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from
your lord).
Day # 5 (‫ ِﻟـ َﺎ َﺣـ ِﺪ ِﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬, to one of them (dual)), (‫ــﺼـﺎ ِﺣـﺒِـ ٖﻪ‬ َ ‫ ِﻟ‬, to his companion),
(‫ ِا ٰﻟــﻰ َرﺑ ّ ِْــﻲ‬, to my lord), (‫ﺑ َِــﺮﺑ ّ ِْــﻲ‬, with my lord), (‫ـﻚ‬ َ ‫ــﻦ َﺟـﻨَّـ ِﺘ‬
ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from your garden).
Day # 6 ( ٖ‫ﺑِـﺜ َـ َﻤــ ِﺮﻩ‬, with his fruits), (‫ َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ُﻋ ُــﺮ ْو ِﺷــﻬَـﺎ‬, on its trellises), (‫ِـﻚ‬ َ ّ ‫ َﻋ ٰـﲆ َرﺑ‬,
before your lord), (‫ َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ُﻗـﻠُ ْــﻮﺑِــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, on their hearts), (‫ ِﻓ ْــﻲ ٰا َذا ِﻧــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, in their ears).
Day # 7 (‫ ِﻟـ َﻤــﻬْـ ِﻠـ ِﻜــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, for their destruction), (‫ ِﻟـ َﻔـ ٰﺘـ ُﻪ‬, to his servant), ( ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ﺳـ َﻔــ ِﻧﺮ َـﺎ‬,َ from our journey), (‫ـﺎر ِﻫـ َﻤـﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ َﻋـ ٰﻠــﻰ ٰاﺛ‬, on their (dual) footsteps), ( ‫ــﻦ‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ‬
‫ ِﻋـ َﺒـﺎ ِدﻧ َـﺎ‬, from our slaves).
Day # 8 (‫ــﻦ‬ ‫ــﻦ ِذى اﻟْـ َﻘ ْ ﻧ‬
ِ ‫ــﺮ َـ ْﻴ‬ ْ ‫ َﻋ‬, about zil-Qarnian), (‫ــﻦ ُﻛـ ِ ّﻞ َﺷ ْــﻰ ٍء‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from
everything), (‫ ِا ٰﻟــﻰ َرﺑِّـ ٖﻪ‬, to his lord), (‫ــﻦ َّرﺑ ّ ِْــﻰ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻣ‬, from my lord), (‫ــﻦ ِذ ْﻛــ ِﺮ ْى‬ ْ ‫ َﻋ‬,
about my remembrance), (‫ َﻋـﻠـ ٰـٓﻰ ٰا َذا ِﻧــﻬِـ ْﻢ‬, on their ears).
Appendix B
Some selected Arabic vocabulary is given below in ‫ َﻣ ْــﺮﻓُ ْــﻮ ٌع‬case.
Day # 1 (‫ ِﻋ َــﻮ ٌج‬, crookedness), (‫ﻗَـﻴِّـ ٌﻢ‬, straight), (‫ َا َﺳ ٌـﻒ‬, grief), (‫ـﺐ‬
ٌ ‫ َﻋــ َﺠ‬,
wonder),(‫ ِﻓـ ْﺘـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬, youths).
 336

Day # 2 (‫ر َﺷـ ٌﺪ‬,َ right way), (‫ َا َﻣـ ٌﺪ‬, time period), (ٌ‫ــﻄــﻂ‬ َ ‫ﺷ‬,َ enormity), (‫ﺑَـﻴِّــ ٌﻦ‬,
clear), ( ٌ‫ ِﻣ ْــﺮﻓَــﻖ‬, ease).
Day # 3 (‫ﻳَـ ِﻤـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬, right), (‫ﺷـ َﻤـﺎ ٌل‬,ِ left), (‫ر ُﻗ ْــﻮ ٌد‬,ُ sleep), (‫ ِﻓ َــﺮ ٌار‬, run away/flight),
(‫ْـﺐ‬
ٌ ‫رﻋ‬,ُ terror).
Day # 4 (‫ َاﺑَـ ٌﺪ‬, ever), (‫ر ْﺟـ ٌﻢ‬,َ guess), (‫ﻗَـ ِﻠـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ‬, few), (‫ َﻛـ ْﻴ َـﻒ‬, how), (‫ﻏَ ٰـﺪو ٌة‬,
morning).
Day # 5 (‫ــﻲ‬ ٍ ّ ‫ﻋ َِـﺸ‬, evening), (‫ﻓُ ُــﺮ ٌط‬, excess), (‫ ُﻣــﻬْـ ٌﻞ‬, molten brass), (‫َـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ َذﻫ‬, gold),
(‫ﺧُــﻀْ ٌــﺮ‬, green).
Day # 6 (‫ﺳـ ْﻨـﺪُ ٌس‬,ُ fine silk), (‫ﻧَــﺨْـ ٌﻞ‬, date), (‫ز ْر ٌع‬,َ crops), (‫ﻧ َـ َﻔ ٌــﺮ‬, men), (‫اب‬ ٌ ‫ﺗ َُــﺮ‬,
dust).
Day # 7 (‫ــﻄـ َﻔـ ٌﺔ‬ ْ ُ ‫ﻧ‬, semen), (‫ر ُﺟـ ٌﻞ‬,َ man), ( ٌ‫زﻟَــﻖ‬,َ slippery), (‫و َﻻﻳـَ ٌﺔ‬,َ protection),
(‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻋـ ْﻘ‬, final end).
Day # 8 (‫ـﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ َﺒ‬, vegetation), (‫ﻫ َِـﺸـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬, dry stalks), (‫ َا َﻣـ ٌﻞ‬, hope), (‫ـﺎر َز ٌة‬
ِ َ ‫ﺑ‬, leveled
plain), (‫ َﻋـﺪُ ٌّو‬, enemy).
Day # 9 (‫ﺻـ ِﻐـ ْﻴ َــﺮ ٌة‬,َ small), (‫ َﻛـﺒِـ ْﻴ َــﺮ ٌة‬, big), (‫ﻏَ ْﻮ ٌر‬, deep sunken/underground),
( ٌ‫ َﻣ ْــﻮﺑِــﻖ‬, barrier), (‫ َﺟـﺪَ ٌل‬, quarrelsome).
Day # 10 (‫ ُﻗـ ُﺒـ ٌﻞ‬, before), (‫ﻫ ُُــﺰ ٌو‬, ridicule/joke), (‫اَ ِﻛـﻨَّـ ٌﺔ‬, covering), (‫و ْﻗ ٌــﺮ‬,َ
deafness), (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ــﺼ‬ َ َ ‫ﻧ‬, fatigue).
 337

Day # 11 (‫ْــﺮ ٌة‬ َ ‫ﺻــﺨ‬,َ rock), (‫ر ْﺷـ ٌﺪ‬,ُ right guidance), (‫ﺧُـ ْﺒ ٌــﺮ‬, knowledge), (‫ﻋ ُْـﺴ ٌــﺮ‬,
difficulty), (‫ ُﻏـ ٰﻠـ ٌﻢ‬, boy).
Day # 12 (‫ز ِﻛـﻴَّـ ٌﺔ‬,َ pure), (‫ﻧ ُـ ْﻜـ ٌـﺮ‬, evil), (‫ـﺐ‬ٌ ‫ﻏَ ْــﺼ‬, force), (‫ـﺎن‬ ٌ ‫ﻃـﻐْـ َﻴ‬,ُ transgression),
(‫ر ْﺣـ ٌﻢ‬,ُ affection).
Day # 13 (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﺳـ َﺒ‬,َ course/means), (‫ َﻋـ ْﻴــ ٌﻦ‬, spring), (‫ َﺣـ ِﻤـﺌَـ ٌﺔ‬, dark mud), (‫ﻳُ ْـﺴ ٌــﺮ‬,
ease), (‫ﺳـ ْﺘ ٌــﺮ‬,ِ shelter).
Day # 14 (‫ﺧ َْــﺮ ٌج‬, expenditure), (‫ َﺳـ ٌّﺪ‬, barrier), (‫ر ْد ٌم‬,َ barrier), (‫ــﻄ ٌــﺮ‬ ْ ‫ ِﻗ‬, molten
copper), (‫ـﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َـ ْﻘ‬, penetration).
Day # 15 (‫ ِﻏــ َﻄـﺎ ٓ ٌء‬, cover), (‫ﻧ ُ ُــﺰ ٌل‬, lodging), (‫ﺻـ ْﻨـ ٌﻊ‬,ُ work), (‫ ِﺣ َــﻮ ٌل‬, transfer), (‫ ِﻣـﺪَ ا ٌد‬,
ink).
Day # 16 (‫ َاﺑَـ ٌﺪ‬, forever), (‫رِﻗـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ‬,َ inscription), (‫ ُﺳـﻠْ ٰــﻄــ ٌﻦ‬, authority), (‫ـﺎظ‬ ٌ ‫ َاﻳْـ َﻘ‬,
awake), (‫و ِﺻـ ْﻴـ ٌﺪ‬,َ entrance).
Day # 17
(‫ﻃـ َﻌـﺎ ٌم‬,َ food), (‫ ِﻣ َــﺮا ٓ ٌء‬, argument), (‫ﻏَـﺪً ا‬, tomorrow), (‫ــﻲ‬ ٌّ ‫و ِﻟ‬,َ protector), (‫ َا َﺣـ ٌﺪ‬,
one/anyone).
Day # 18 (‫ﺳ َــﺮا ِد ٌق‬,ُ wall), (‫ـﺎب‬ ٌ ‫ ِﺛـ َﻴ‬, garments), (‫ ِﺧـ ٰﻠـ ٌﻞ‬, within), (‫ﺳـﺎ َﻋـ ٌﺔ‬,َ hour),
ٌ ‫ ُﺣ ْـﺴـ َﺒ‬, calamity).
(‫ـﺎن‬
Day # 19 (‫ﺧَـﺎ ِوﻳَـ ٌﺔ‬, collapsed), (‫ ِﻓـﺌَـ ٌﺔ‬, group), (‫ َﻣ َّــﺮ ٌة‬, time/frequency), (‫ ُﺣ ْــﻮ ٌت‬,
fish), (‫ ِا ْﻣ ٌــﺮ‬, grave/evil).
 ‫‪338‬‬

‫ـﺐ( ‪, town),‬ﻗَ ْــﺮﻳَـ ٌﺔ( ‪Day # 20‬‬ ‫‪,َ cliff/mountain),‬ﺻـﺪَ ٌف( ‪,ُ sheet),‬زﺑ َ ٌــﺮ( ‪,َ course),‬ﺳـ َﺒ ٌ‬
‫‪,ُ produce/production).‬ا ُﻛـ ٌﻞ(‬
‫ــﻲ( ‪Day # 21‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﻗَـﺎٓﺋِـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ( ‪َ , display/show),‬ﻋ ْــﺮ ٌض( ‪,َ hearing),‬ﺳـ ْﻤـ ٌﻊ( ‪,َ efforts),‬ﺳـ ْﻌ ٌ‬
‫‪ُ , offspring/children).‬ذ ّ ِرﻳَّـ ٌﺔ( ‪establish/occurrence),‬‬
‫ـﺐ( ‪, meal),‬ﻏَـﺪَ ا ٓ ٌء( ‪َ , escape),‬ﻣ ْــﻮﺋِـ ٌﻞ( ‪Day # 22‬‬ ‫‪,َ back/after),‬و َرا ٓ ٌء( ‪َ , defect),‬ا ِﻋـ ْﻴ ٌ‬
‫‪َ , purity).‬ز ٰﻛــﻮ ٌة(‬
‫‪Appendix C‬‬
‫‪Masdar Patterns for 3 letter Mujarrad verbs‬‬
‫‪Below are Masdar patterns. Just to note that some verbs may have more‬‬
‫‪than one Masdar. These patterns are present in (past tense, present tense,‬‬
‫)‪Masdar of the verb, Masdar pattern‬‬ ‫‪pattern format.‬‬
‫‪(Set‬‬‫)‪Set 1‬‬ ‫ـﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ ِﻤـ َﻞ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ﺿَ‪,‬ﺿَ ْــﺮ ٌب ‪,‬ﻳَــﻀْ ــ ِﺮ ُب ‪,‬ﺿَ َــﺮ َب( ‪1‬‬ ‫‪َ ,‬ﻛ َـﺬ َب( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ َﻤـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻌـ َﻤ ُ‬
‫) ِﻓـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪ِ ,‬رﺿً ـ‪, 4‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮﺿَ ــﻰ َ‪,‬ر ِﺿ َــﻲ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪ِ ,‬ﻋـﻠْـ ٌﻢ ‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ُﻢ ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ ِﻠ َـﻢ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ِﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻛـ ِﺬ ٌب ‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻜـ ِﺬ ُب‬
‫‪(Set‬‬‫)‪Set 2‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﺷـ ْﻜ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺸـ ُﻜ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ﺷـ َﻜ َــﺮ( ‪2‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﺣـ ُﻢ َ‪,‬ر ِﺣ َـﻢ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻫُـﺪًى ‪,‬ﻳَــﻬْـ ِﺪي ‪,‬ﻫَـﺪَ ى( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ُﺷ‬
‫ـﺐ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ َ‪,‬رر ْﺣـ َﻤـ ٌﺔ‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪,‬ﻏَـﻠَ َ‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓَـ ِﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ َ‪,‬ﺳﺳــ ِﺮﻗَـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺴــ ِﺮ ُق َ‪,‬ﺳ َــﺮ َق( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻏَـﻠَـ َﺒـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻳَـﻐْـ ِﻠ ُ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬‫)‪Set 3‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺬ ُﻛ ُــﺮ َ‪,‬ذ َﻛ َــﺮ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَــﻰ ‪َ ,‬دﻋ َْــﻮى ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺪ ُﻋــﻮ ‪َ ,‬د َﻋـﺎ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪ِ ,‬ﺣـ ْﻤـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻳَــ ْﺤـ ِﻤــﻲ ‪َ ,‬ﺣـ َﻤــﻰ( ‪3‬‬
‫‪).‬ﻓَـ َﻌ َـﻼ ٌن ‪,‬د ََو َرا ٌن ‪,‬ﻳَـﺪُ ْو ُر ‪,‬د ََار( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ْﻌـﻠَــﻰ ُ‪,‬رر ْﺟـ َﻌــﻰ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ ِﺟـ ُﻊ َ‪,‬ر َﺟـ َﻊ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌـﻠَــﻰ ‪ِ ,‬ذ ْﻛ َــﺮى‬
‫‪(Set‬‬‫)‪Set 4‬‬ ‫َـﺐ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ْﻌ َـﻼ ٌن ‪,‬ﻏُـ ْﻔ َــﺮا ٌن ‪,‬ﻳَـﻐْـ ِﻔ ُــﺮ ‪,‬ﻏَـ َﻔ َــﺮ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌ َـﻼ ٌن ِر‪,‬رﺿْ َــﻮ ٌان ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮﺿَ ــﻰ َ‪,‬ر ِﺿ َــﻲ( ‪4‬‬ ‫‪َ ,‬ذﻫ َ‬
‫َـﺐ‬‫َـﺎب ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺬﻫ ُ‬ ‫‪,‬ﺳــ َﺆا ٌل ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺴـﺎَٔ ُل َ‪,‬ﺳـﺎَٔ َل( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل ‪ِ ,‬ﻗـ َﻴـﺎ ٌم ‪,‬ﻳَـ ُﻘ ْــﻮ ُم ‪,‬ﻗَـﺎ َم( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل ‪َ ,‬ذﻫ ٌ‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓُـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل ُﺳ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬‫)‪Set 5‬‬ ‫ــﻈـﺎﻓَـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻳَـﻨْ ُــﻈ ُـﻒ ‪,‬ﻧ َ ُــﻈ َـﻒ( ‪5‬‬ ‫ــﻦ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ َﻌـﺎﻟَـ ٌﺔ ‪ِ ,‬ﻗــ َــﺮﺮا َء ٌة ‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻘ َــﺮ ُٔا ‪,‬ﻗَ َــﺮ َٔا( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎﻟَـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻧ َ َ‬ ‫‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻌـﻠَ ُ‬
‫ــﻦ ‪َ ,‬ﻋـ ِﻠ َ‬
‫ـﻞ ‪,‬ﻗَـﺒِـ َﻞ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ِﻟـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪َ ,‬ﻋ َـﻼ ِﻧـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ‬
‫‪).‬ﻓُـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ُر‪,‬ر ُﻛ ْــﻮعٌ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﻛـ ُﻊ َ‪,‬ر َﻛـ َﻊ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ‪,‬ﻗَـ ُﺒ ْــﻮ ٌل ‪,‬ﻳَـ ْﻘـ َﺒ ُ‬
 ‫‪339‬‬

‫‪(Set‬‬ ‫‪,‬ﺳــﻬ ُْــﻮﻟ َـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْـﺴــﻬُـ ُﻞ َ‪,‬ﺳــﻬُـ َﻞ( ‪6‬‬

‫)‪Set 6‬‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓَـ ِﻌـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ َر‪,‬ر ِﺣـ ْﻴـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻳ َ ْــﺮ َﺣـ ُﻞ َ‪,‬ر َﺣـ َﻞ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ُﻌ ْــﻮﻟَـ ٌﺔ ُﺳ‬

‫‪Broken Plural Patterns‬‬

‫‪َٔ ). These patterns are present in‬ا ْو َز ُان( ‪Below are broken plural patterns‬‬
‫)‪(Singular noun, Plural noun, Broken plural pattern‬‬ ‫‪pattern format.‬‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 1‬‬ ‫‪َٔ ),‬اﻓْـ ِﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺳـ ِﻠــ َﺤـ ٌﺔ ِ‪,‬ﺳ َـﻼ ٌح( ‪َٔ ),‬اﻓْـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﻗـ َﻔـﺎ ٌل ‪ُ ,‬ﻗـ َﻔـ ٌﻞ( ‪َٔ ),‬اﻓْـ ُﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْﺷــﻬ ٌُــﺮ َ‪,‬ﺷــﻬ ٌْــﺮ( ‪1‬‬
‫ــﻲ ‪َٔ ,‬اﻋْـ َﻤــﻰ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪ِ ,‬ﻓـ ْﺘـ َﻴـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻓَـﺘًــﻰ(‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓُـ ْﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻋـ ْﻤ ٌ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 2‬‬ ‫ـﺎب( ‪2‬‬ ‫ـﺐ ‪ِ ,‬ﻛـﺘَ ٌ‬ ‫ـﺎض(‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ااﺑ َ ٌــﺮ ‪,‬اﺑْ َــﺮ ٌة( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪,‬ﻏُ َــﺮ ٌف ‪ُ ,‬ﻏ َــﺮﻓَـ ٌﺔ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ُﻌـ ٌﻞ ‪ُ ,‬ﻛـ ُﺘ ٌ‬ ‫ﻗُــﻀَ ـﺎ ٌة ‪,‬ﻗَ ٍ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ِٕ ِٕ‬
‫ـﺐ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪,‬ﻗُــﻀَ ـﻴَـ ٌﺔ ‪/*actually*/‬‬ ‫ٌ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ﻟ‬ ‫ـﺎ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪,‬ﻃ‬ ‫ٌ‬
‫ﺔ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ﺒ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪,‬ﻃ‬
‫ﻃ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ٌ‬ ‫ـ‬‫َ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫ﻌ‬
‫َ‬ ‫ـ‬‫َ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫‪).‬‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 3‬‬ ‫ِـﺖ( ‪3‬‬ ‫ـﺎﺟـ ٌﺪ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ َﻌـﻠَـ ٌﺔ ‪ِ ,‬ﻗ َــﺮ َد ٌة ‪ِ ,‬ﻗ ْــﺮ ٌد( ‪),‬ﻓَـ ْﻌـﻠَــﻰ ‪َ ,‬ﻣ ْــﻮﺗَــﻰ ‪َ ,‬ﻣـﻴّ ٌ‬ ‫ـﺎر ٌئ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َّﻌـ ٌﻞ ُ‪,‬ﺳﺳــ َّﺠـ ٌﺪ َ‪,‬ﺳ ِ‬
‫‪,‬ﻗ َ ِ‬
‫ـﺎب ‪,‬ﺛَ ْــﻮ ٌب( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َّﻌـﺎ ٌل ‪,‬ﻗُ َّــﺮا ٌء‬ ‫‪ِ ).‬ﻓـ َﻌـﺎ ٌل ‪ِ ,‬ﺛـ َﻴ ٌ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 4‬‬ ‫ـﺖ( ‪4‬‬ ‫ْــﻮ ٌان ‪َٔ ,‬ا ٌخ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ُﻌ ْــﻮ ٌل ‪,‬ﺑُـ ُﻴ ْــﻮ ٌت ‪,‬ﺑَـ ْﻴ ٌ‬ ‫‪,‬ﻓَـ ِﻘـ ْﻴ ٌــﺮ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ ْﻌ َـﻼ ٌن ُ‪,‬ذذ ْﻛ َﺮا ٌن ُ‪,‬ذ َﻛ ٌــﺮ( ‪ِ ),‬ﻓـ ْﻌ َـﻼ ٌن ِٕا‪,‬اﺧ َ‬
‫ــﻲ( ‪),‬ﻓُـ َﻌ َـﻼ ُء ‪,‬ﻓُـﻘَ َــﺮا ُء‬ ‫‪َٔ ).‬اﻓْـ ِﻌ َـﻼ ُء ‪َٔ ,‬ا ْو ِﻟـ َﻴـﺎ ُء َ‪,‬و ِﻟ ٌّ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 5‬‬ ‫‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎلٍ ‪,‬ﻓَـﺘَـﺎ ٍو ‪,‬ﻓَـ ْﺘ َــﻮى( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎﺋِـ ُﻞ َر‪,‬ر َﺳـﺎﺋِـ ُﻞ ِ‪,‬ر َﺳـﺎﻟَـ ٌﺔ( ‪),‬ﻓَ َــﻮا ِﻋـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻛ َــﻮا ِذ ُب ‪َ ,‬ﻛـﺎ ِذﺑَـ ٌﺔ( ‪5‬‬
‫ــﻲ( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎﻟَــﻰ ‪,‬ﻳَـﺘَـﺎ َﻣــﻰ ‪,‬ﻳ َـ ِﺘـ ْﻴـ ٌﻢ(‬ ‫ــﻲ ‪ُ ,‬ﻛ ْــﺮ ِﺳ ٌّ‬ ‫ــﻲ ‪َ ,‬ﻛ َــﺮ ِاﺳ ُّ‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ِﻟ ُّ‬
‫‪(Set‬‬
‫)‪Set 6‬‬ ‫ــﺠـﺪُ ( ‪6‬‬ ‫ـﺎﺟـﺪُ ‪َ ,‬ﻣ ْـﺴ ِ‬ ‫ـﺎح( ‪),‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ِﻟـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻣ َـﺴ ِ‬ ‫‪).‬ﻓَـ َﻌـﺎ ِﻟـ ْﻴـ ُﻞ ‪َ ,‬ﻣـ َﻔـﺎﺗِـ ْﻴ ُــﺢ ‪ِ ,‬ﻣـ ْﻔـﺘَ ٌ‬